Category: The Intensive: Freelancing

Small Group Coaching (replays)

Small Group Coaching (Jan 9)

Small Group Coaching (Dec. 19)

Small Group Coaching (Dec. 12)

Small Group Coaching (Dec. 5)

Week 7: The Focused Followers Formula

Week 7: The Focused Followers Formula

Transcript

Okay. Week. What week are we on y’all?

Seven.

This is the this is the gang symbol for seven. That’s how they do it in Japan.

They do that in front. Yeah. They’ll do, like, like, that like, yeah.

Just so you know. Just so you know. A little trivia for you.

Cool. Alright. Alright. Week seven. Okay. This is the week where we talk about, the stuff that needs to be talked about before you start doing too much in the way of social media and list building.

And that is having focused followers and being someone your followers can focus on. So it’s called, drum roll, blah blah blah blah blah. Called Marshall Lampoon, so he does it all wrong.

Ah, the focus followers formula.

Tada. No. Just me? Again? Okay. I’m just gonna, like, be alone.

Happy, though.

There were some symbols in the background. I went at the end. Thank you.

Okay. So the objective here is, in week seven, to get a strong sense for quality followers and to get rid of the quantity game. I can’t tell you how many times through the years, no matter what stage your list is at, how many times people have, like, reacted to, oh, you have that many people on your list, and they never ever say how many of them are buying ever. So even people who know better still get really distracted by numbers.

Do you have so numbers of followers on social media, and although those can be useful signals for others, it’s really not the point. So I want to start by just prefacing everything here with we are not going to talk about masses of numbers of followers going forward, not in the intensive. We’ll talk about growing your followers and your list in Copy School Professional, but but I really wanna break it down to, hey. You’ve got this sales driven funnel, which we talked about in week four.

We gotta get more leads into that sales driven funnel, and we want them to be good quality leads. Otherwise, it’s all pretty pointless.

You’re gonna get we’re all gonna get distracted by all the cool opportunities that come up along the way. What we need to bring it back to is focus.

If I have seen anybody succeed in business, they have always always focused. So let’s focus. Okay? So I’m going to share my screen, and we’ll dig into what I mean by this and the work that we’re going to do this week.

Okay? So let’s get more of the right leads into our sales driven funnel and then use this to build your pipeline across social and email. We’re gonna talk a lot about social particularly because I know for most freelancers, it’s, kind of a source of stress. Like, oh, no.

Do I have to do Instagram, Joe? And I get that. I’ve said this before. I was not intentional about social until a business friend was like, start.

So I did.

And she was right.

We need to, though, go into it knowing that we have this. There’s a tension there. You might not wanna do it. You don’t know what you’re going to post about.

And so what can we do to solve that so that we can actually build our platform and social media and email list? So this week’s section of the sunshine growth model, we’re getting more done. We’re just moving some of the clouds away, working in, of course, advanced skills that you use for list growth and then marketing and biz dev, stuff.

Building on the work of week one where you really thought about who your ICP was, ICA, whatever you might call them, you might have started thinking about personas inside of those. Like, what Tim versus what are some of the names? We just did a whole exercise. What’s one of our what’s the woman’s name?

Do you remember? Sarah or Tina?

Larissa.

Larissa. Okay. Good. We just named a different set of personas. So I wanted to say Marina, but Marina is one of our students.

So, anyway, so we’re gonna be building on the work of week one. We’re always building on the work of week one, by the way. Also, on week four where you establish an Instagram account. So if you didn’t do these things, don’t look at me with, Joe, it’s not working.

Do the stuff, and then if it doesn’t work, then we can talk about it. But you need to establish an Instagram account whether you like it or not. I don’t like Instagram. I do now because now I use it, but I didn’t when I started out.

It’s okay to have resistance there. It’s not okay to let it dictate what you do with your business when so many businesses swear by it. Unless you absolutely know better and the world’s greatest leads are knocking down your door right now, you gotta do what some of the fine folks of the world who are growing their businesses massively say to do. Instagram.

Lead magnet. You’ve done that already. You’ve done ManyChat. You’ve done all of this stuff that’s showing here.

And if you haven’t, again, go and do that stuff. List the ConvertKit or ActiveCampaign or whatever CRM you might have decided to use, and Instagram, those are the biggies. We will also be talking about LinkedIn today. In week four, we didn’t talk much about LinkedIn.

I just said, hey. This works on LinkedIn too. Now we’re gonna talk a little bit more about it because there are some good opportunities there.

Last week, you learned to call yourself a CEO.

Going forward, you’re a CEO. I don’t wanna hear other terms. I know you’re doing all the you’re doing everything. You also learned that last week.

Every single thing on your org chart is you, but we’re gonna refer to you as the CEO. You should do the same. Get uncomfortable with it so you can get comfortable with it. So these are what you’ll do by end of week.

We’re not gonna get into them now, but as usual, we start the worksheet off with where you’re going.

You will have tasks. If you’ve hired a VA or you have an assistant or associate of some kind, even a partner, that person will go through the second half of this checklist. You will see that you’ll need to brief them.

Always take time to brief people if you can. Five, ten minutes just hopping on a call really quickly at end of day even when your brain is like, I don’t want to. You have to no matter what.

So this is what you’re going to do to make sure that you are successful in your business. Okay? If you didn’t hire a VA or an associate of any kind, then everything on this part of the list is up to you to do. And you will see that this is low value task work, and you’ll be like, I should probably get into hiring somebody, in which case, pop back to last week and get going on it.

Okay. This week, I already hinted at this mindset shift. We’re switching from quantity, how big is your list, how many followers do you have, to the quality of those people on there. You are using social media not as a vanity space, not as just a place like, oh, Joe said too, so I do, but rather to attract and nurture real leads.

It’s not about a popularity contest. Sometimes it will feel like it. Sometimes it will be. But, overall, the vision for social media is not a popularity contest.

Okay?

Follower goals, not just to get followers. I’ve made this mistake. I sat for Mike and Nicole on my team. I was like, twenty twenty four. Here are your follower goals. Here’s how many I want each of you to have for YouTube or Instagram.

And I was wrong. That’s not what you’re looking for at all, and they corrected me on that. They’re like, no. No.

No. That won’t matter. Here’s what matters. Here’s what Instagram really likes. Instagram really likes when someone shares a link to your content or otherwise shares that they really like when your post gets bookmarked.

That’s a really good indication. So what are we doing to get connection requests on LinkedIn, produce content that gets bookmarked by the right people get a DM from those people and get shared by those people, by which I mean shared within Teams.

Alright. If you are focused on a single demographic, social media will be harder and easier for you at the same time depending on how you use it. What social media is, of course, great for is people all over the world find you. So if you are focused on only working with businesses in one area, you’ll have to have different strategies for social.

Most of us are not. Most of us are just like, I wanna work with the right people no matter where they are. Cool. Alright.

I mentioned personas.

I mentioned your ICP.

So has anybody actually gone through and developed the people inside their ICP? So your ICP is the business that you are trying to work for. The personas that you’re targeting at those ICPs, the people inside the ICP are the persona. Right?

So they’re the people that are going to follow you on social media. One of them will reach out to you, DM you, say, hey. That was cool. I’d like more of this.

Have you done this work yet?

As the teacher looks at you out of nowhere and you’re like, oh, no. She’s looking in.

That is a nod in detail. Okay. So we want to do that. So that’s our objective. We may do it in this session, but just know that that’s where we have to get. And I’m gonna show you why that’s where we have to get. Okay?

This is why. It’s really it’s a drawing.

What we wanna do is come up with a message map that will help us for each persona figure out what to say to them based on, like, what they care about most. So here’s what that really looks like. For each of the personas that you put together, that’s these, you want to create a message map based on their problems and your solutions. This is copywriting one zero one. This is like, if you took this in university, if they offered it, it’d be like the second semester, like, a message map.

So problems that they have and then the solutions that you offer for those problems. Now sometimes a solution might exist without a problem, and if that’s the case, you can see, like, oh, I have to wake them up to that problem or, actually it’s just a solution without a problem. There’s nothing I can do about that.

So here’s where we’re heading for all three personas so that we know who we’re targeting, what they look like, basically. Right? What they look like. We can have a picture in our heads of them. We know what their problems are. We know how we solve their problems.

So instead of having some content calendar that’s, like, on Monday, post about this. On Tuesday, post about that, which, to be fair, is also part of the job, and we cover it in CopySchool Pro. But you need to know what goes into each one of those. This is stepping back to a more strategic view that you can use across your marketing.

We’re going to apply it in your social media. So that’s what our objective is today. We’re going to focus our content on what our personas care more about than anything else when it comes to, like, the space that we’re in. That way you can attract good fit followers.

So if you only have three people follow you on LinkedIn or social media, but all three of them just fell in love with you and are thinking, how can I hire this person? You win. You win better than anybody who just got a thousand followers last week, and none of them give a shit about working with them whatsoever. So we wanna focus on our personas, not on anything else anyone else tells us.

And then we’ll know, of course, that there are ways to actually apply this. Right? So if I were to learn in this case that Harrison is a media buyer. Harrison has these problems as a media buyer.

This is where it’s an ad funnel authoritative offer. Okay? So I know that I’m in the business of ad funnels. What does Harrison, a media buyer at a large organization, what does he think about?

Okay. Maybe he thinks our return on advertising spend is slipping. That’s a problem he’s got right now. What are the things he’s talking to his boss about?

He needs more ad copy options. He’s annoyed that return on advertising spend is slipping. He needs more options, he thinks, because things are turning bad.

And with that, he doesn’t trust his in house creative’s expertise, and he wants to explore outside meta. So he’s got this, like, core problem, and he might have different problems as well. This is just an example. And then we get to figure out what our solutions are to those problems.

You already know these things. Right? This is already in your head. What I would put money on is it is not documented anywhere.

It’s the You can share with your VA to say, no. No. No. We don’t talk about that to this persona.

We talk about this to this persona. We don’t talk about this on LinkedIn. We talk about that on LinkedIn. This is what we wanna do.

CEO wants to make sure that we understand who we’re talking to, what they need to hear, and that they understand that our solution is the solution to their problem. So we can say, okay. Some of the solutions that I offer regarding return on advertising spend is I might say to them, hey. It’s time for you to implement value ladder emails.

So your ROAS is crappy, but or ROAS is crappy, but here’s what we could do on the other side for those leads that do come in. Hey. You wanna test out of the box copy? That’s probably what’s, like, hurting you a bit.

You might be thinking it’s time to start advertising off meta. And then, of course, down here, we see that they do wanna advertise off meta. Right? Right?

So they’re moving. So all we’re doing is connecting our solution with their problem. One solution might work from multiple problems. So you can add different these little lines in here, this is like me drawing lines to connect the dots between things.

Sometimes you don’t have enough of a solution here. If their salute if their problem is I need more ad copy options and you’re gonna say, okay. Well, I can give you that, but I actually don’t think it’s an ad copy problem, then you might dig into what the real problem is, in those solutions. But this an empty space can tell you there’s more that I could do here.

Doesn’t mean that you have to do more there, though you might be like, no. I don’t got anything for you. If that’s your problem, I got nothing for you. Or I got one thing for you, but I’m gonna focus on these problems instead when I’m trying to talk to you.

Does this make sense?

Okay. So we need to do that for our personas. So you can take your ICP from week one, which might have been refined in week two, but you should already have this documented pretty well and start creating those personas. Identify, are they on LinkedIn or Instagram?

If you do not have reason to believe they’re on Instagram, but if persona a isn’t on Instagram but persona b is, and persona a needs to hear x, where persona b needs to hear y, then you’ll only put y on Instagram. Does that make sense? Like, you’ll match the message for the person to the space or spaces where they are. Sometimes you won’t know.

Our team right now is going through lots and lots of our past customers to get a sense for who they are and where they’re actually active online. So we can say this persona is likely to be largely on LinkedIn, whereas this one is never on LinkedIn or they don’t make any decisions on LinkedIn, so we won’t put any messages for her on LinkedIn. We’ll only put messages for him on LinkedIn.

That can help us at least get more traction out of posting once a day on each of those spaces because you’re talking to one person all the time and importantly about the same things. You might be like, woah, Joe. There’s only, like, three groups of messages that I can share here.

That’s good.

Viewer. So you can keep repeating the same stuff again and again, which is part of thought leadership. You don’t need five hundred different things to say. You need to say one thing five hundred times, and then somebody will start to go, oh.

Oh, that’s what Ben does after hearing it five hundred times. I’m doing a, a podcast with Tommy Walker tomorrow where we’re just gonna rant about exactly this, how you have to. Just say the same thing again and again, and it is hard for you to do because you’re like, this is boring. This is killing me.

And this is the kind of thing that you will then want to get a VA or an assistant to do if it does feel like it’s killing you. Or you can just be Gary v about it and just, like, really go to town on repeating the same message aggressively, with whatever your tone is. But don’t try to add more messages on the page. If you find that this is cluttered in some way or you want to have persona a, b, and c all in one map so you can see overlapping messages for them, cool.

Go over to whimsical or somewhere like that and do a bigger map. Someone just chatted to me. I wanna see if there’s a question.

Yes. Yeah. Exactly.

Exactly. About the meal kits for anybody watching the replay. Andrew just made a comment about, when you hear the same meal kit advertised on a podcast a hundred times, and on the hundred first times, you’re like, that might be good. Yeah. Exactly. Say it again and again and again and again and again and again, and again.

Okay. So this is what you’re going to fill in, and then this is the part that starts to connect us with what we’re talking about in week four, which is your sales driven funnel. And that is starting those Instagram and LinkedIn and email opens. But this is, like, a really specific call to action for you to drive them to say yes to talking with you or seeing a loom.

Okay. So here’s the idea. Once you know who your personas are, once you’ve got basic message maps for them, then it’s on you to and you’ll see this on the end of on the checklist up at the top. It’s on you to block out time and apply resources to actually posting about this stuff.

The more you can systematize this, the better it will be so that you actually get the work done and, and and don’t really, like, just give up on it and go like, well, I took the week off, then I came back and I forgot about it. Now it’s four months later, and I haven’t posted to LinkedIn in four months. So we don’t wanna do that.

Here is how we start fitting. We start connecting, getting followers with those automations and other things that go into your sales driven funnel.

Really simple template where you say, on Instagram, new follower every day. Every new follower you have, every new follower, go into Instagram in the DMs.

And once they followed you, now there’s a connection opportunity there, and and you can you’re gonna have some bad followers in there, but we’re not gonna worry about those people right now. Just go in and say, hey, Joanna Weave exclamation point or Joanna Weave exclamation point. Thanks for following. Hit enter.

Funny you did. I have a cool idea that could work to reduce churn for coffee hackers. I can fire it your way, or we can hop on a call. Hit enter.

You around. Hit enter.

Don’t be freaked out when they don’t reply immediately. Don’t be freaked out if this takes weeks and weeks and weeks to actually turn into something. It’s okay. The objective is just to do this follow-up every day with every new follower you have or on LinkedIn every new connection you have, which can also look like followers depending on how your page is set up.

So same template here. Thanks for the connect. Love what you do. I find love what you do.

Works really well on LinkedIn.

Funny to hear from you the exact same thing that we said earlier. Basically, play around with the wording there for whatever feels right for the person you’re talking to and your brand. But the idea here is you wanna make it sound chill and, like, you know the person. Not so chill that it’s not like, hey.

I don’t wanna get on a call and sell. Like, that’s not the point. No. You’re gonna get on the call and sell.

But it’s chill like, hey. I’ve got this great idea for you. If they’re in business, they want more ideas. If they’re in business and they’re profitable, they can find money for a great idea.

So don’t hold back here. You have a cool idea that could work to reduce churn for intercom. If you’re connected with the CEO or CMO or whoever, why not say, hey. Let’s hop on the call.

What does it hurt? They don’t answer you? Oh, well.

Move on with your life. Do the same on LinkedIn.

And then for your email list, which, again, you set up a couple weeks ago, for your email list for any new subscriber, this is the automation that replaces this letter to the or from the CEO, the one if you’ve taken ten x emails. There’s, like, the welcome email, then a couple hours later, you get, like, the letter from the c, CEO.

In this case, you’re just gonna be letter from you that feels one to one to the person. So you’ll need to ask for their first name as a required field when they sign up. This is on the checklist on the start of this worksheet. You’ll need to ask for their business name as a required field. And as a reminder, the reason that we do this, even though it will reduce the number of people who sign up, is that quantity is not the point.

Quality is the point. If so and so from x business has a problem entering their business name in your form, they’re probably not a very good fit for you anyway. So you ask for their first name. If you want to, ask for their last name.

Make it a required field. Ask for their business name, and that way you can then populate that information into the email you send them so it does feel more personal, which is good because that will pay off down the road. We should have been doing that from the beginning, but when I started out at CopyHackers, all that mattered was list size. Everybody all the time was saying, just grow your list.

Grow your list. You can sell your list. Grow your list. I’ve never planned to sell my list, but nobody said, hey.

Hang on on that grow your list thing. And now we have a great big list, but I don’t have business names. So take it from me. Make it a required field so that you can do something with those followers and connections.

Okay. That’s your objective for the week. We’re thirty minutes into the call. Do you have any questions, concerns, thoughts?

Do we understand the idea here is not to post about whatever whatever random thing comes up, but rather what your persona needs to hear on the platform they need to hear it. And then when they do follow you, then you get an open connection to them because you have reason to believe they’re a good fit.

K. Andrew just raised his hand, so I’m going to stop share.

Oh, half a second. One moment, please. Talk amongst yourselves. I have to go get my dog to the dog walker. Half a sec. She’s just standing upstairs.

Sarah, you can you entertain us with, like, a joke or something?

Yeah. I can’t. Oh, shoot. She’s fast.

That was really fast.

Oh, close. That was fast. That’s wrong. What were you trying to do without me, you little brat?

I was gonna make Sarah try to tell us a joke or something.

Oh, what was it? Back into the room. I can’t. Now it’s no. I’ll save it for another time. Next time.

Andrew, you were gonna go. You had something to share?

Well, I had a question about Okay. Instagram in general. So, I am I’ve created a page, but I’m starting for, for my agency, but I’m starting from absolute zero followers. Mhmm. Do I just start posting, or is it wise to, like, strategically start following some people first? I’m just wondering if, like, posting into the you know, posting into ghost on is, if that’s worth it, or is that how it works? Yep.

Yeah. There are a few ways to go, right, if you’re at zero followers.

So when I was trying to build my Twitter following, it was very different. And the strategy was, so now I have Nicole, and she’s not on the call. Nicole’s in charge of growing us our stuff over on Instagram. But what I can say is, in the olden days, for Twitter, you would follow twenty people in a day, give them three days, and then those who followed you back, you accepted as a connection, and those who didn’t, you unfollowed, and then you’d repeat again and again and again and again.

And I started to get more and more followers, and it was a really simple trick. I don’t know if it still applies today. I don’t know how that works anymore. But what I can say is there are those kind of, like, manual ways to start getting followers and to identify who’s a good person to connect with. I know others just flat out recommend that you buy followers early on, because no one’s looking anyway, and no one really cares.

So that’s, like, a consideration. I don’t have any thoughts on that. Like, obviously, buying followers is buying bots.

But if you’re worried that it looks like you’re shouting into the void and you don’t want that, you can buy them, and then you can delete them later once you get real legit followers because a lot of people won’t follow back an account that has no followers. Right? So you have to do things to manually to grow that. You can also throw some ad budget at it.

So get a lot of post some cool shit, spend five bucks a day just to boost it to the right people, and start getting more engagement that way too. So buying followers and advertising kinda nets out to about the same amount of money spent. One will get you ten followers that are legit. One will get you a thousand that are not.

You just have to decide that. But I know it’s it’s a hard slog out of the gate.

We can talk more about that. I know, actually, we have Copy School Pro list in social is the theme for July.

So you’ll see a lot more about that in July. The whole month we’ll be talking about that, and you’ll be out of the intensive by then. So you’ll get to benefit from that too.

Great. Okay. Yeah. That helps.

Thanks, Andrew. Naomi, question or thought about this topic?

I have to say I’m a bit skeptical because when I was working in house, I would get dozens of me these messages.

Mhmm.

And I would ignore all of them Mhmm. As and my my boss would get hundreds of them. He wouldn’t even look at them. He would just delete every single one of them.

Yeah. But we’re not talking about Naomi, we’re not talking about cold outreach or any of that kind of stuff. We’re talking about when somebody has followed you or requested to make a connection with you, then you say, hey. Thanks for connecting. You don’t I’m not just, like, review what I just shared with you. It’s not about cold outreach or even, like, any form of outreach like that. It’s responding when they connect with you.

Yeah. If it just feels like a lot of work when Well, you’re in the business of running a whole business, so it’s gonna feel like work. You don’t have to do all of these things. Right?

Like, you don’t have to. You can choose not to. But if you are trying to build your following in a space, you don’t just want to build it and then, like, walk away. If you get a single person on LinkedIn saying, hey, Naomi.

I wanna connect with you because they saw you did a cool post that, like, mattered for them because they’re one of your personas.

So they see that. They go, okay. That was cool. I’d probably like to hear more from this person.

They connect with you. In most cases, nobody does anything at that point. Like, nobody does anything. Like, who is the last person that when they connected with you, you were like, hey.

Cool to connect. Let’s hook on a call and talk. Like, never. So because of that, we need to scoop that opportunity up because we’re scrappy business owners, and we do things that other people don’t do.

We’re not reaching out to shitty cold leads and going, like, I think I could help you. Like, they don’t know who you are. We’re saying, hi. So cool that we’re finally connected.

I love this. Let’s talk about your business.

And then those who actually want to will. Yeah.

We’re not trying to do ignorable things.

But even if I did like somebody’s post and they reached out to me, I I feel like I would be quite skeptical because I’d be like, look. I have, like, six meetings a day. I have lots to do on my plate. You don’t really know our priorities.

You don’t know our values. You don’t know what we’re working on. This is kind of a waste of my time. I’m thinking, like, this is how I would respond even if I did like their post.

And so much Naomi, right now, how much money do you have budgeted for freelancers to help you grow in your business’ budget, Naomi?

I have for VA, seven hundred dollars a month. And I’m just starting to work with a ghostwriter, and I am doing about three hundred dollars a month for her writing.

Yeah. So two hundred target market is the point. You’re not the person that I’m saying people should be reaching out to. That’s that’s not it.

If you don’t have ten thousand dollars to spend, what you would think doesn’t matter. And so that’s an important thing for you to get out of your own head when we talk to the decision committee today. You are too present on your own decision committee. You need to put the right people on your decision committee so that Naomi, who worked in house, doesn’t get a board seat.

She’s off. She’s she’s out. She doesn’t get one. She doesn’t have the money to spend.

Naomi her Naomi the freelancer, also not allowed to make a decision here. The only people who get to make decisions about what you do and where you do it to grow your business are those who have done the thing or who are a good fit for the thing, not the skeptics in the room. Do you know how many skeptics are in the room? Every middle manager on the planet.

Every person who’s like, my life sucks. All of these people don’t get a say. They’re all skeptical about everything. Let them be.

More for us. So I’m not saying do crappy work. I’m saying wrap a connection by the reins when it happens. Don’t let it pass you by.

If someone if Tara from Bitly decides to connect with you on LinkedIn, she doesn’t have to connect with anybody on LinkedIn. If she does, that’s a good moment to say, Tara, I love what you’re doing at Bitly. Your emails are dope. I do emails as well.

In the event there’s ever any way I can help you, I would love to hop on a call with you. I know you’re swamped, but I love you. I’m here when you need me. That’s at least something real, and it’s based on the connection that really happened.

And Tara would be out of her mind to not file that away as, oh, that was cool. She will file it away as that was cool. She might not reply to you. That’s not the point.

Point is you’ve now started a relationship there.

Wait. But Naomi working in house, our marketing team spent a minimum of fifty thousand dollars a month, if not more. So I did have budget when I was working.

But were you the decision maker, Naomi? Were you running the budget? Yeah.

I mean, I was able to spend on a lot of different things. Right.

I would say. I would encourage you not to find the problem here. The problem is the wrong people are making the decision as you’re going through what to do next.

That’s not gonna get you where you wanna go. You’re letting too much of the skeptic in your decision committee, way too much. That’s just pure coaching. This isn’t up for debate.

You are. I have worked with you long enough to know you are letting the wrong people make the decision. And if that’s Naomi who handled fifty thousand dollar in largely ad spend budget back when you were in house, that person has to retire or they have to make themselves more useful to you than they’re doing. They’re not making themselves useful to you right now.

They’re just getting in your way.

Says Joe the coach with full love for you, not whoever else I might sometimes appear as. This is me telling you, left the right people on your decision committee. You have people to fire from it.

Awesome. Right. I know it’s a lot to take in, but do your best with it. Cool?

Cool. Yeah.

What’s that? You can keep going. You get more.

No. I mean, I I I I feel like in terms of, like, the eighty twenty, like, it it feels like it belongs in the eighty rather but, like, it feels like it’s a low return on investment, Like, to be doing all the time, and then you get trapped in LinkedIn, and then you get distracted, and it feels like it’s, like, a lot of work with a lot less return is my concern.

Yeah. Cool. Totally heard it.

There’s a lot of things that we’re doing that until you do them, you just don’t know. I would look at a plan like what I’ve heard other people have as plans or, like, I’m gonna guest podcast, that is an eighty on the eighty twenty.

If you are direct selling, if you are getting people on a call with you, that is extraordinarily high value. The question is, are you doing it right? So does it have to be LinkedIn? Mm-mm. That’s why I have email and Instagram as well. So there’s more things that you can do.

Don’t choose the wrong ones. I love that the person on your decision committee is there trying to look out for your time. That’s great. They need to stay there and stay on your decision committee, but there’s other people who are just getting in the way and don’t.

So if if LinkedIn is wrong, then who’s your ideal client sitting on your decision committee, and what do they think about you getting on LinkedIn? Do they agree that you should? If they’re in your three personas and they don’t, then listen to them. Right?

Maybe they have a voice, but just make sure you’re filtering things the right way, and actually trying something first instead of just saying, like, it’s not gonna work. It’s there are people closing million dollar projects over chat over chat without ever hopping on a call. So it’s a doable thing.

It’s very doable. It’s never gonna work if you’re a skeptic about it and you go into thinking it’s not gonna work. It’s not for you.

Cool. Ben, you are up.

Ready?

Alright.

Alright. So I I have, like, two questions. So I guess, like, the first one’s kinda simple.

So I’ve been posting reels a lot, and they’re horrendous. And I’ve got, like, more followers, like, the last couple weeks, which is, like actually, I just messaged them. Thanks for following, like like, ten minutes ago because I realized I should be doing that.

But I will say so, like, I know the message is the same. And, like, my my and I’m sure you agree with this, but I feel like a lot of messages on social media, like, especially on LinkedIn and Instagram are very boring. So, like, there’s nothing wrong with, like, like, we’re copywriters, and so we’re, like obviously, we’re persuasions, like, masters. So, like, I always feel like like, we we should be making, like, that message pop.

Like, there’s different ways to, like, you could say it like a really, like, boring person. Like, hey. You should improve this. Blah blah blah.

Or you could, like, figure out, like I mean, you shouldn’t spend hours, you know, doing that. Like but I I’m just saying there’s no problem, like, differentiating that message. So, like, when people are like that, they’re like, wow. That was a really great way of presenting it.

Like, presenting the message should like, we should be like, I just think we should present it in, like, a way better way than most people.

Yeah. Like, I hope that you are doing all of your reels while sitting where you are wearing your hat.

I just wanna I actually do. Yeah.

Yes.

Yes. Yes. Everyone loves it. Andrew just said it too. Like, who wouldn’t stop scrolling? I’d be like, what the hell, Ben? That’s awesome.

I know.

Love it.

So yeah. No. Agreed. You can say it. So what does your persona need to hear?

And then comes the question of how do you say it. So that one, they connect with it, and two, they connect with you. Obviously, as we you know, the undercurrent in so much of what we do is how likable are you? If you’re likable, you’re employable for life, and your money keeps going up.

It’s a really basic human thing. So the more likable you are, Ben, when you’re on these reels that you say are boring, just be your likable self and then boost them. If you’re not getting a lot of engagement, can you throw twenty bucks at it and just boost it and see what happens?

Okay. Okay. I know what like, and then I also know we’re talking about Instagram and LinkedIn. Yeah.

We could, like, easily repurpose Yes.

Instagram reels and put it on YouTube, for instance.

Yes. Put them everywhere.

Put your LinkedIn post, take a screenshot, put it on, Instagram as a screenshot. Like, it doesn’t have to just try different ways of repurposing with different formats. It’s our social media manager gives us a report every Friday of new things that she’s tried and what’s been working. And it’s always like, woah.

We tried this really dumb obvious thing, and it was super great over here. Like, we screenshotted one thing, and we reposted it somewhere else. And, like, that’s enough. It’s just yes.

You’re on the right track. Yes. Do all the things that you’ve said. Yeah.

And then another thing is, like, I’m sure you’ve gotten this question before, but, like like so whenever I think about creating content and, like, obviously, I’m getting inspiration from wherever books, past content, other profiles, I always feel like and, like, this is kinda like or ask your opinion. It’s like, I always feel like I should be, like, attributing, like, oh, I learned this from so and so. I learned something so and so. So I almost feel like everything I learned came from some place.

And so, like, I guess I’m always kinda, like, skeptical of, like, if I said this, I should, you know, call out who I learned it from. And I and I because I’m sure, like, people get upset in some sense. Like like, oh, you learned that from so and so. So I guess, like, what is your opinion on that?

Yep. Throw it in the caption on Instagram.

Put it in there. Like, you can talk about whatever in your video or however you present it, and then just make sure you say, like, I learned this from whoever. And then on LinkedIn, common way to do that is just your first comment. And then you can link to that if you’re like, by the way, I learned this in atomic habits.

Here’s a link to go buy the book if it resonated with you, and that works well in comments rather than in the actual LinkedIn post. But, yes, I wouldn’t overthink it. If you’re doing it off to the side, that’s enough. Just yeah.

It’s definitely important if that person especially if you can tag them too. Right? If you’re like, learn this from you, James Clear, and tag him in that, that could be a cool moment for you too if he’s like, wicked. Thanks.

Well, now now everyone’s like a habit expert.

So That’s true.

Poor poor mister clear. Yeah.

Cool. Okay. I’m loving that you’re doing this, Ben. What’s your schedule for posting? Do you have one?

Like, it’s just every morning at, like I’m trying to, like, every morning at nine AM. And so just try to get it, like, at nine AM, nine AM, and then, like, really the hard part is, like, I’m not trying to overthink it. So, like like, everyone’s like like, people are telling me to write scripts. But But instead of writing a script, what helps me instead is, like like, basically doing a video twenty times. So then it’s kind of like, I’ve already developed the script internally.

Rather than like, I’m gonna read the script. I’d rather just like because I already have the knowledge. So I’m just like, okay. Just say it twenty times and then practice.

Okay. Oh, say that differently. Say that differently. Say that differently. And then, like, I’m I’m like, Instagram’s unique, so I’m, like, practicing, like, screenshots, examples, do this, do this, do this.

Yeah. Yeah. There’s a lot there, but I do the same thing. I have, like, notes that my social media person gives me.

Like, I have to hit these points, but then I go through it and I do it, like, thirty just as many times that you’re like, I forgot that point. But, yeah, that’s cool. Good for you. Do it every day.

Have it.

Love it. I my my goal is to do it so much where family and friends or whoever sees it, it’s not a big deal anymore. Like, this is not a big deal. I wanna like, that’s my whole thing. It’s like, this is not a big deal.

Cool. I love that. Yeah. Good insight. Wicked. Okay. Thanks, Ben.

Naomi, Andrew, I think we lost. Jessica was here, and then she’s gone. Anything else? How are we feeling as we get going on week seven? Focused followers.

Oh, Andrew says a free web based teleprompter. Yeah. That’s good.

Cool.

Love it.

Can I actually share a quick tip?

Yeah. So I’ve been using, yeah, like a free web based teleprompter, but then, if you all know Zscript, which is, like, the video editing tool Yeah. They now have an eye contact feature where it they use AI to make it look like you’re looking right at the camera. And so you can go ahead and, like, re you know, if you’ve ever filmed yourself reading a script before, it’s terrible. Like, even if you’re just occasionally glancing, it almost completely fixes that. And then all you have to do is just, like, get practice. Like, you still have to do it a few times because you don’t sound natural or normal reading it, but you don’t have to worry about, oh, it looks like I was reading there because it’s it’s and I would say it’s about ninety five percent plus effective.

So That’s so smart.

Yeah. Pretty cool.

Yep. That’s amazing. Thanks for the tip. And I also thought it was descript, not descript.

So It probably is.

I don’t know.

I said I was like I don’t know.

I don’t know.

So I said Zapier for, like, ten years Oh, I see.

Find Zapier. Zapier.

Zapier. The thing. Yeah.

I have to pause. Happier. Zapier. Okay.

Cool. Alright. Well, then, yeah, I’ll get thirteen minutes back to go get started on this, on the sheet on the work if you’ve hired a VA to get them hopefully scheduled to get briefed on the work of the week. Alright?

There are a few other tips in there as well around if you want to have your Instagram look a certain way. Creative market’s a great place to go if you don’t want to, if you’re not a designer or whatever it might be.

Cool. Alright. Thanks, everybody. We’ll see you in our Thursday call. Have a good one. Bye.

Resources

Resources

Transcript

Okay. Week. What week are we on y’all?

Seven.

This is the this is the gang symbol for seven. That’s how they do it in Japan.

They do that in front. Yeah. They’ll do, like, like, that like, yeah.

Just so you know. Just so you know. A little trivia for you.

Cool. Alright. Alright. Week seven. Okay. This is the week where we talk about, the stuff that needs to be talked about before you start doing too much in the way of social media and list building.

And that is having focused followers and being someone your followers can focus on. So it’s called, drum roll, blah blah blah blah blah. Called Marshall Lampoon, so he does it all wrong.

Ah, the focus followers formula.

Tada. No. Just me? Again? Okay. I’m just gonna, like, be alone.

Happy, though.

There were some symbols in the background. I went at the end. Thank you.

Okay. So the objective here is, in week seven, to get a strong sense for quality followers and to get rid of the quantity game. I can’t tell you how many times through the years, no matter what stage your list is at, how many times people have, like, reacted to, oh, you have that many people on your list, and they never ever say how many of them are buying ever. So even people who know better still get really distracted by numbers.

Do you have so numbers of followers on social media, and although those can be useful signals for others, it’s really not the point. So I want to start by just prefacing everything here with we are not going to talk about masses of numbers of followers going forward, not in the intensive. We’ll talk about growing your followers and your list in Copy School Professional, but but I really wanna break it down to, hey. You’ve got this sales driven funnel, which we talked about in week four.

We gotta get more leads into that sales driven funnel, and we want them to be good quality leads. Otherwise, it’s all pretty pointless.

You’re gonna get we’re all gonna get distracted by all the cool opportunities that come up along the way. What we need to bring it back to is focus.

If I have seen anybody succeed in business, they have always always focused. So let’s focus. Okay? So I’m going to share my screen, and we’ll dig into what I mean by this and the work that we’re going to do this week.

Okay? So let’s get more of the right leads into our sales driven funnel and then use this to build your pipeline across social and email. We’re gonna talk a lot about social particularly because I know for most freelancers, it’s, kind of a source of stress. Like, oh, no.

Do I have to do Instagram, Joe? And I get that. I’ve said this before. I was not intentional about social until a business friend was like, start.

So I did.

And she was right.

We need to, though, go into it knowing that we have this. There’s a tension there. You might not wanna do it. You don’t know what you’re going to post about.

And so what can we do to solve that so that we can actually build our platform and social media and email list? So this week’s section of the sunshine growth model, we’re getting more done. We’re just moving some of the clouds away, working in, of course, advanced skills that you use for list growth and then marketing and biz dev, stuff.

Building on the work of week one where you really thought about who your ICP was, ICA, whatever you might call them, you might have started thinking about personas inside of those. Like, what Tim versus what are some of the names? We just did a whole exercise. What’s one of our what’s the woman’s name?

Do you remember? Sarah or Tina?

Larissa.

Larissa. Okay. Good. We just named a different set of personas. So I wanted to say Marina, but Marina is one of our students.

So, anyway, so we’re gonna be building on the work of week one. We’re always building on the work of week one, by the way. Also, on week four where you establish an Instagram account. So if you didn’t do these things, don’t look at me with, Joe, it’s not working.

Do the stuff, and then if it doesn’t work, then we can talk about it. But you need to establish an Instagram account whether you like it or not. I don’t like Instagram. I do now because now I use it, but I didn’t when I started out.

It’s okay to have resistance there. It’s not okay to let it dictate what you do with your business when so many businesses swear by it. Unless you absolutely know better and the world’s greatest leads are knocking down your door right now, you gotta do what some of the fine folks of the world who are growing their businesses massively say to do. Instagram.

Lead magnet. You’ve done that already. You’ve done ManyChat. You’ve done all of this stuff that’s showing here.

And if you haven’t, again, go and do that stuff. List the ConvertKit or ActiveCampaign or whatever CRM you might have decided to use, and Instagram, those are the biggies. We will also be talking about LinkedIn today. In week four, we didn’t talk much about LinkedIn.

I just said, hey. This works on LinkedIn too. Now we’re gonna talk a little bit more about it because there are some good opportunities there.

Last week, you learned to call yourself a CEO.

Going forward, you’re a CEO. I don’t wanna hear other terms. I know you’re doing all the you’re doing everything. You also learned that last week.

Every single thing on your org chart is you, but we’re gonna refer to you as the CEO. You should do the same. Get uncomfortable with it so you can get comfortable with it. So these are what you’ll do by end of week.

We’re not gonna get into them now, but as usual, we start the worksheet off with where you’re going.

You will have tasks. If you’ve hired a VA or you have an assistant or associate of some kind, even a partner, that person will go through the second half of this checklist. You will see that you’ll need to brief them.

Always take time to brief people if you can. Five, ten minutes just hopping on a call really quickly at end of day even when your brain is like, I don’t want to. You have to no matter what.

So this is what you’re going to do to make sure that you are successful in your business. Okay? If you didn’t hire a VA or an associate of any kind, then everything on this part of the list is up to you to do. And you will see that this is low value task work, and you’ll be like, I should probably get into hiring somebody, in which case, pop back to last week and get going on it.

Okay. This week, I already hinted at this mindset shift. We’re switching from quantity, how big is your list, how many followers do you have, to the quality of those people on there. You are using social media not as a vanity space, not as just a place like, oh, Joe said too, so I do, but rather to attract and nurture real leads.

It’s not about a popularity contest. Sometimes it will feel like it. Sometimes it will be. But, overall, the vision for social media is not a popularity contest.

Okay?

Follower goals, not just to get followers. I’ve made this mistake. I sat for Mike and Nicole on my team. I was like, twenty twenty four. Here are your follower goals. Here’s how many I want each of you to have for YouTube or Instagram.

And I was wrong. That’s not what you’re looking for at all, and they corrected me on that. They’re like, no. No.

No. That won’t matter. Here’s what matters. Here’s what Instagram really likes. Instagram really likes when someone shares a link to your content or otherwise shares that they really like when your post gets bookmarked.

That’s a really good indication. So what are we doing to get connection requests on LinkedIn, produce content that gets bookmarked by the right people get a DM from those people and get shared by those people, by which I mean shared within Teams.

Alright. If you are focused on a single demographic, social media will be harder and easier for you at the same time depending on how you use it. What social media is, of course, great for is people all over the world find you. So if you are focused on only working with businesses in one area, you’ll have to have different strategies for social.

Most of us are not. Most of us are just like, I wanna work with the right people no matter where they are. Cool. Alright.

I mentioned personas.

I mentioned your ICP.

So has anybody actually gone through and developed the people inside their ICP? So your ICP is the business that you are trying to work for. The personas that you’re targeting at those ICPs, the people inside the ICP are the persona. Right?

So they’re the people that are going to follow you on social media. One of them will reach out to you, DM you, say, hey. That was cool. I’d like more of this.

Have you done this work yet?

As the teacher looks at you out of nowhere and you’re like, oh, no. She’s looking in.

That is a nod in detail. Okay. So we want to do that. So that’s our objective. We may do it in this session, but just know that that’s where we have to get. And I’m gonna show you why that’s where we have to get. Okay?

This is why. It’s really it’s a drawing.

What we wanna do is come up with a message map that will help us for each persona figure out what to say to them based on, like, what they care about most. So here’s what that really looks like. For each of the personas that you put together, that’s these, you want to create a message map based on their problems and your solutions. This is copywriting one zero one. This is like, if you took this in university, if they offered it, it’d be like the second semester, like, a message map.

So problems that they have and then the solutions that you offer for those problems. Now sometimes a solution might exist without a problem, and if that’s the case, you can see, like, oh, I have to wake them up to that problem or, actually it’s just a solution without a problem. There’s nothing I can do about that.

So here’s where we’re heading for all three personas so that we know who we’re targeting, what they look like, basically. Right? What they look like. We can have a picture in our heads of them. We know what their problems are. We know how we solve their problems.

So instead of having some content calendar that’s, like, on Monday, post about this. On Tuesday, post about that, which, to be fair, is also part of the job, and we cover it in CopySchool Pro. But you need to know what goes into each one of those. This is stepping back to a more strategic view that you can use across your marketing.

We’re going to apply it in your social media. So that’s what our objective is today. We’re going to focus our content on what our personas care more about than anything else when it comes to, like, the space that we’re in. That way you can attract good fit followers.

So if you only have three people follow you on LinkedIn or social media, but all three of them just fell in love with you and are thinking, how can I hire this person? You win. You win better than anybody who just got a thousand followers last week, and none of them give a shit about working with them whatsoever. So we wanna focus on our personas, not on anything else anyone else tells us.

And then we’ll know, of course, that there are ways to actually apply this. Right? So if I were to learn in this case that Harrison is a media buyer. Harrison has these problems as a media buyer.

This is where it’s an ad funnel authoritative offer. Okay? So I know that I’m in the business of ad funnels. What does Harrison, a media buyer at a large organization, what does he think about?

Okay. Maybe he thinks our return on advertising spend is slipping. That’s a problem he’s got right now. What are the things he’s talking to his boss about?

He needs more ad copy options. He’s annoyed that return on advertising spend is slipping. He needs more options, he thinks, because things are turning bad.

And with that, he doesn’t trust his in house creative’s expertise, and he wants to explore outside meta. So he’s got this, like, core problem, and he might have different problems as well. This is just an example. And then we get to figure out what our solutions are to those problems.

You already know these things. Right? This is already in your head. What I would put money on is it is not documented anywhere.

It’s the You can share with your VA to say, no. No. No. We don’t talk about that to this persona.

We talk about this to this persona. We don’t talk about this on LinkedIn. We talk about that on LinkedIn. This is what we wanna do.

CEO wants to make sure that we understand who we’re talking to, what they need to hear, and that they understand that our solution is the solution to their problem. So we can say, okay. Some of the solutions that I offer regarding return on advertising spend is I might say to them, hey. It’s time for you to implement value ladder emails.

So your ROAS is crappy, but or ROAS is crappy, but here’s what we could do on the other side for those leads that do come in. Hey. You wanna test out of the box copy? That’s probably what’s, like, hurting you a bit.

You might be thinking it’s time to start advertising off meta. And then, of course, down here, we see that they do wanna advertise off meta. Right? Right?

So they’re moving. So all we’re doing is connecting our solution with their problem. One solution might work from multiple problems. So you can add different these little lines in here, this is like me drawing lines to connect the dots between things.

Sometimes you don’t have enough of a solution here. If their salute if their problem is I need more ad copy options and you’re gonna say, okay. Well, I can give you that, but I actually don’t think it’s an ad copy problem, then you might dig into what the real problem is, in those solutions. But this an empty space can tell you there’s more that I could do here.

Doesn’t mean that you have to do more there, though you might be like, no. I don’t got anything for you. If that’s your problem, I got nothing for you. Or I got one thing for you, but I’m gonna focus on these problems instead when I’m trying to talk to you.

Does this make sense?

Okay. So we need to do that for our personas. So you can take your ICP from week one, which might have been refined in week two, but you should already have this documented pretty well and start creating those personas. Identify, are they on LinkedIn or Instagram?

If you do not have reason to believe they’re on Instagram, but if persona a isn’t on Instagram but persona b is, and persona a needs to hear x, where persona b needs to hear y, then you’ll only put y on Instagram. Does that make sense? Like, you’ll match the message for the person to the space or spaces where they are. Sometimes you won’t know.

Our team right now is going through lots and lots of our past customers to get a sense for who they are and where they’re actually active online. So we can say this persona is likely to be largely on LinkedIn, whereas this one is never on LinkedIn or they don’t make any decisions on LinkedIn, so we won’t put any messages for her on LinkedIn. We’ll only put messages for him on LinkedIn.

That can help us at least get more traction out of posting once a day on each of those spaces because you’re talking to one person all the time and importantly about the same things. You might be like, woah, Joe. There’s only, like, three groups of messages that I can share here.

That’s good.

Viewer. So you can keep repeating the same stuff again and again, which is part of thought leadership. You don’t need five hundred different things to say. You need to say one thing five hundred times, and then somebody will start to go, oh.

Oh, that’s what Ben does after hearing it five hundred times. I’m doing a, a podcast with Tommy Walker tomorrow where we’re just gonna rant about exactly this, how you have to. Just say the same thing again and again, and it is hard for you to do because you’re like, this is boring. This is killing me.

And this is the kind of thing that you will then want to get a VA or an assistant to do if it does feel like it’s killing you. Or you can just be Gary v about it and just, like, really go to town on repeating the same message aggressively, with whatever your tone is. But don’t try to add more messages on the page. If you find that this is cluttered in some way or you want to have persona a, b, and c all in one map so you can see overlapping messages for them, cool.

Go over to whimsical or somewhere like that and do a bigger map. Someone just chatted to me. I wanna see if there’s a question.

Yes. Yeah. Exactly.

Exactly. About the meal kits for anybody watching the replay. Andrew just made a comment about, when you hear the same meal kit advertised on a podcast a hundred times, and on the hundred first times, you’re like, that might be good. Yeah. Exactly. Say it again and again and again and again and again and again, and again.

Okay. So this is what you’re going to fill in, and then this is the part that starts to connect us with what we’re talking about in week four, which is your sales driven funnel. And that is starting those Instagram and LinkedIn and email opens. But this is, like, a really specific call to action for you to drive them to say yes to talking with you or seeing a loom.

Okay. So here’s the idea. Once you know who your personas are, once you’ve got basic message maps for them, then it’s on you to and you’ll see this on the end of on the checklist up at the top. It’s on you to block out time and apply resources to actually posting about this stuff.

The more you can systematize this, the better it will be so that you actually get the work done and, and and don’t really, like, just give up on it and go like, well, I took the week off, then I came back and I forgot about it. Now it’s four months later, and I haven’t posted to LinkedIn in four months. So we don’t wanna do that.

Here is how we start fitting. We start connecting, getting followers with those automations and other things that go into your sales driven funnel.

Really simple template where you say, on Instagram, new follower every day. Every new follower you have, every new follower, go into Instagram in the DMs.

And once they followed you, now there’s a connection opportunity there, and and you can you’re gonna have some bad followers in there, but we’re not gonna worry about those people right now. Just go in and say, hey, Joanna Weave exclamation point or Joanna Weave exclamation point. Thanks for following. Hit enter.

Funny you did. I have a cool idea that could work to reduce churn for coffee hackers. I can fire it your way, or we can hop on a call. Hit enter.

You around. Hit enter.

Don’t be freaked out when they don’t reply immediately. Don’t be freaked out if this takes weeks and weeks and weeks to actually turn into something. It’s okay. The objective is just to do this follow-up every day with every new follower you have or on LinkedIn every new connection you have, which can also look like followers depending on how your page is set up.

So same template here. Thanks for the connect. Love what you do. I find love what you do.

Works really well on LinkedIn.

Funny to hear from you the exact same thing that we said earlier. Basically, play around with the wording there for whatever feels right for the person you’re talking to and your brand. But the idea here is you wanna make it sound chill and, like, you know the person. Not so chill that it’s not like, hey.

I don’t wanna get on a call and sell. Like, that’s not the point. No. You’re gonna get on the call and sell.

But it’s chill like, hey. I’ve got this great idea for you. If they’re in business, they want more ideas. If they’re in business and they’re profitable, they can find money for a great idea.

So don’t hold back here. You have a cool idea that could work to reduce churn for intercom. If you’re connected with the CEO or CMO or whoever, why not say, hey. Let’s hop on the call.

What does it hurt? They don’t answer you? Oh, well.

Move on with your life. Do the same on LinkedIn.

And then for your email list, which, again, you set up a couple weeks ago, for your email list for any new subscriber, this is the automation that replaces this letter to the or from the CEO, the one if you’ve taken ten x emails. There’s, like, the welcome email, then a couple hours later, you get, like, the letter from the c, CEO.

In this case, you’re just gonna be letter from you that feels one to one to the person. So you’ll need to ask for their first name as a required field when they sign up. This is on the checklist on the start of this worksheet. You’ll need to ask for their business name as a required field. And as a reminder, the reason that we do this, even though it will reduce the number of people who sign up, is that quantity is not the point.

Quality is the point. If so and so from x business has a problem entering their business name in your form, they’re probably not a very good fit for you anyway. So you ask for their first name. If you want to, ask for their last name.

Make it a required field. Ask for their business name, and that way you can then populate that information into the email you send them so it does feel more personal, which is good because that will pay off down the road. We should have been doing that from the beginning, but when I started out at CopyHackers, all that mattered was list size. Everybody all the time was saying, just grow your list.

Grow your list. You can sell your list. Grow your list. I’ve never planned to sell my list, but nobody said, hey.

Hang on on that grow your list thing. And now we have a great big list, but I don’t have business names. So take it from me. Make it a required field so that you can do something with those followers and connections.

Okay. That’s your objective for the week. We’re thirty minutes into the call. Do you have any questions, concerns, thoughts?

Do we understand the idea here is not to post about whatever whatever random thing comes up, but rather what your persona needs to hear on the platform they need to hear it. And then when they do follow you, then you get an open connection to them because you have reason to believe they’re a good fit.

K. Andrew just raised his hand, so I’m going to stop share.

Oh, half a second. One moment, please. Talk amongst yourselves. I have to go get my dog to the dog walker. Half a sec. She’s just standing upstairs.

Sarah, you can you entertain us with, like, a joke or something?

Yeah. I can’t. Oh, shoot. She’s fast.

That was really fast.

Oh, close. That was fast. That’s wrong. What were you trying to do without me, you little brat?

I was gonna make Sarah try to tell us a joke or something.

Oh, what was it? Back into the room. I can’t. Now it’s no. I’ll save it for another time. Next time.

Andrew, you were gonna go. You had something to share?

Well, I had a question about Okay. Instagram in general. So, I am I’ve created a page, but I’m starting for, for my agency, but I’m starting from absolute zero followers. Mhmm. Do I just start posting, or is it wise to, like, strategically start following some people first? I’m just wondering if, like, posting into the you know, posting into ghost on is, if that’s worth it, or is that how it works? Yep.

Yeah. There are a few ways to go, right, if you’re at zero followers.

So when I was trying to build my Twitter following, it was very different. And the strategy was, so now I have Nicole, and she’s not on the call. Nicole’s in charge of growing us our stuff over on Instagram. But what I can say is, in the olden days, for Twitter, you would follow twenty people in a day, give them three days, and then those who followed you back, you accepted as a connection, and those who didn’t, you unfollowed, and then you’d repeat again and again and again and again.

And I started to get more and more followers, and it was a really simple trick. I don’t know if it still applies today. I don’t know how that works anymore. But what I can say is there are those kind of, like, manual ways to start getting followers and to identify who’s a good person to connect with. I know others just flat out recommend that you buy followers early on, because no one’s looking anyway, and no one really cares.

So that’s, like, a consideration. I don’t have any thoughts on that. Like, obviously, buying followers is buying bots.

But if you’re worried that it looks like you’re shouting into the void and you don’t want that, you can buy them, and then you can delete them later once you get real legit followers because a lot of people won’t follow back an account that has no followers. Right? So you have to do things to manually to grow that. You can also throw some ad budget at it.

So get a lot of post some cool shit, spend five bucks a day just to boost it to the right people, and start getting more engagement that way too. So buying followers and advertising kinda nets out to about the same amount of money spent. One will get you ten followers that are legit. One will get you a thousand that are not.

You just have to decide that. But I know it’s it’s a hard slog out of the gate.

We can talk more about that. I know, actually, we have Copy School Pro list in social is the theme for July.

So you’ll see a lot more about that in July. The whole month we’ll be talking about that, and you’ll be out of the intensive by then. So you’ll get to benefit from that too.

Great. Okay. Yeah. That helps.

Thanks, Andrew. Naomi, question or thought about this topic?

I have to say I’m a bit skeptical because when I was working in house, I would get dozens of me these messages.

Mhmm.

And I would ignore all of them Mhmm. As and my my boss would get hundreds of them. He wouldn’t even look at them. He would just delete every single one of them.

Yeah. But we’re not talking about Naomi, we’re not talking about cold outreach or any of that kind of stuff. We’re talking about when somebody has followed you or requested to make a connection with you, then you say, hey. Thanks for connecting. You don’t I’m not just, like, review what I just shared with you. It’s not about cold outreach or even, like, any form of outreach like that. It’s responding when they connect with you.

Yeah. If it just feels like a lot of work when Well, you’re in the business of running a whole business, so it’s gonna feel like work. You don’t have to do all of these things. Right?

Like, you don’t have to. You can choose not to. But if you are trying to build your following in a space, you don’t just want to build it and then, like, walk away. If you get a single person on LinkedIn saying, hey, Naomi.

I wanna connect with you because they saw you did a cool post that, like, mattered for them because they’re one of your personas.

So they see that. They go, okay. That was cool. I’d probably like to hear more from this person.

They connect with you. In most cases, nobody does anything at that point. Like, nobody does anything. Like, who is the last person that when they connected with you, you were like, hey.

Cool to connect. Let’s hook on a call and talk. Like, never. So because of that, we need to scoop that opportunity up because we’re scrappy business owners, and we do things that other people don’t do.

We’re not reaching out to shitty cold leads and going, like, I think I could help you. Like, they don’t know who you are. We’re saying, hi. So cool that we’re finally connected.

I love this. Let’s talk about your business.

And then those who actually want to will. Yeah.

We’re not trying to do ignorable things.

But even if I did like somebody’s post and they reached out to me, I I feel like I would be quite skeptical because I’d be like, look. I have, like, six meetings a day. I have lots to do on my plate. You don’t really know our priorities.

You don’t know our values. You don’t know what we’re working on. This is kind of a waste of my time. I’m thinking, like, this is how I would respond even if I did like their post.

And so much Naomi, right now, how much money do you have budgeted for freelancers to help you grow in your business’ budget, Naomi?

I have for VA, seven hundred dollars a month. And I’m just starting to work with a ghostwriter, and I am doing about three hundred dollars a month for her writing.

Yeah. So two hundred target market is the point. You’re not the person that I’m saying people should be reaching out to. That’s that’s not it.

If you don’t have ten thousand dollars to spend, what you would think doesn’t matter. And so that’s an important thing for you to get out of your own head when we talk to the decision committee today. You are too present on your own decision committee. You need to put the right people on your decision committee so that Naomi, who worked in house, doesn’t get a board seat.

She’s off. She’s she’s out. She doesn’t get one. She doesn’t have the money to spend.

Naomi her Naomi the freelancer, also not allowed to make a decision here. The only people who get to make decisions about what you do and where you do it to grow your business are those who have done the thing or who are a good fit for the thing, not the skeptics in the room. Do you know how many skeptics are in the room? Every middle manager on the planet.

Every person who’s like, my life sucks. All of these people don’t get a say. They’re all skeptical about everything. Let them be.

More for us. So I’m not saying do crappy work. I’m saying wrap a connection by the reins when it happens. Don’t let it pass you by.

If someone if Tara from Bitly decides to connect with you on LinkedIn, she doesn’t have to connect with anybody on LinkedIn. If she does, that’s a good moment to say, Tara, I love what you’re doing at Bitly. Your emails are dope. I do emails as well.

In the event there’s ever any way I can help you, I would love to hop on a call with you. I know you’re swamped, but I love you. I’m here when you need me. That’s at least something real, and it’s based on the connection that really happened.

And Tara would be out of her mind to not file that away as, oh, that was cool. She will file it away as that was cool. She might not reply to you. That’s not the point.

Point is you’ve now started a relationship there.

Wait. But Naomi working in house, our marketing team spent a minimum of fifty thousand dollars a month, if not more. So I did have budget when I was working.

But were you the decision maker, Naomi? Were you running the budget? Yeah.

I mean, I was able to spend on a lot of different things. Right.

I would say. I would encourage you not to find the problem here. The problem is the wrong people are making the decision as you’re going through what to do next.

That’s not gonna get you where you wanna go. You’re letting too much of the skeptic in your decision committee, way too much. That’s just pure coaching. This isn’t up for debate.

You are. I have worked with you long enough to know you are letting the wrong people make the decision. And if that’s Naomi who handled fifty thousand dollar in largely ad spend budget back when you were in house, that person has to retire or they have to make themselves more useful to you than they’re doing. They’re not making themselves useful to you right now.

They’re just getting in your way.

Says Joe the coach with full love for you, not whoever else I might sometimes appear as. This is me telling you, left the right people on your decision committee. You have people to fire from it.

Awesome. Right. I know it’s a lot to take in, but do your best with it. Cool?

Cool. Yeah.

What’s that? You can keep going. You get more.

No. I mean, I I I I feel like in terms of, like, the eighty twenty, like, it it feels like it belongs in the eighty rather but, like, it feels like it’s a low return on investment, Like, to be doing all the time, and then you get trapped in LinkedIn, and then you get distracted, and it feels like it’s, like, a lot of work with a lot less return is my concern.

Yeah. Cool. Totally heard it.

There’s a lot of things that we’re doing that until you do them, you just don’t know. I would look at a plan like what I’ve heard other people have as plans or, like, I’m gonna guest podcast, that is an eighty on the eighty twenty.

If you are direct selling, if you are getting people on a call with you, that is extraordinarily high value. The question is, are you doing it right? So does it have to be LinkedIn? Mm-mm. That’s why I have email and Instagram as well. So there’s more things that you can do.

Don’t choose the wrong ones. I love that the person on your decision committee is there trying to look out for your time. That’s great. They need to stay there and stay on your decision committee, but there’s other people who are just getting in the way and don’t.

So if if LinkedIn is wrong, then who’s your ideal client sitting on your decision committee, and what do they think about you getting on LinkedIn? Do they agree that you should? If they’re in your three personas and they don’t, then listen to them. Right?

Maybe they have a voice, but just make sure you’re filtering things the right way, and actually trying something first instead of just saying, like, it’s not gonna work. It’s there are people closing million dollar projects over chat over chat without ever hopping on a call. So it’s a doable thing.

It’s very doable. It’s never gonna work if you’re a skeptic about it and you go into thinking it’s not gonna work. It’s not for you.

Cool. Ben, you are up.

Ready?

Alright.

Alright. So I I have, like, two questions. So I guess, like, the first one’s kinda simple.

So I’ve been posting reels a lot, and they’re horrendous. And I’ve got, like, more followers, like, the last couple weeks, which is, like actually, I just messaged them. Thanks for following, like like, ten minutes ago because I realized I should be doing that.

But I will say so, like, I know the message is the same. And, like, my my and I’m sure you agree with this, but I feel like a lot of messages on social media, like, especially on LinkedIn and Instagram are very boring. So, like, there’s nothing wrong with, like, like, we’re copywriters, and so we’re, like obviously, we’re persuasions, like, masters. So, like, I always feel like like, we we should be making, like, that message pop.

Like, there’s different ways to, like, you could say it like a really, like, boring person. Like, hey. You should improve this. Blah blah blah.

Or you could, like, figure out, like I mean, you shouldn’t spend hours, you know, doing that. Like but I I’m just saying there’s no problem, like, differentiating that message. So, like, when people are like that, they’re like, wow. That was a really great way of presenting it.

Like, presenting the message should like, we should be like, I just think we should present it in, like, a way better way than most people.

Yeah. Like, I hope that you are doing all of your reels while sitting where you are wearing your hat.

I just wanna I actually do. Yeah.

Yes.

Yes. Yes. Everyone loves it. Andrew just said it too. Like, who wouldn’t stop scrolling? I’d be like, what the hell, Ben? That’s awesome.

I know.

Love it.

So yeah. No. Agreed. You can say it. So what does your persona need to hear?

And then comes the question of how do you say it. So that one, they connect with it, and two, they connect with you. Obviously, as we you know, the undercurrent in so much of what we do is how likable are you? If you’re likable, you’re employable for life, and your money keeps going up.

It’s a really basic human thing. So the more likable you are, Ben, when you’re on these reels that you say are boring, just be your likable self and then boost them. If you’re not getting a lot of engagement, can you throw twenty bucks at it and just boost it and see what happens?

Okay. Okay. I know what like, and then I also know we’re talking about Instagram and LinkedIn. Yeah.

We could, like, easily repurpose Yes.

Instagram reels and put it on YouTube, for instance.

Yes. Put them everywhere.

Put your LinkedIn post, take a screenshot, put it on, Instagram as a screenshot. Like, it doesn’t have to just try different ways of repurposing with different formats. It’s our social media manager gives us a report every Friday of new things that she’s tried and what’s been working. And it’s always like, woah.

We tried this really dumb obvious thing, and it was super great over here. Like, we screenshotted one thing, and we reposted it somewhere else. And, like, that’s enough. It’s just yes.

You’re on the right track. Yes. Do all the things that you’ve said. Yeah.

And then another thing is, like, I’m sure you’ve gotten this question before, but, like like so whenever I think about creating content and, like, obviously, I’m getting inspiration from wherever books, past content, other profiles, I always feel like and, like, this is kinda like or ask your opinion. It’s like, I always feel like I should be, like, attributing, like, oh, I learned this from so and so. I learned something so and so. So I almost feel like everything I learned came from some place.

And so, like, I guess I’m always kinda, like, skeptical of, like, if I said this, I should, you know, call out who I learned it from. And I and I because I’m sure, like, people get upset in some sense. Like like, oh, you learned that from so and so. So I guess, like, what is your opinion on that?

Yep. Throw it in the caption on Instagram.

Put it in there. Like, you can talk about whatever in your video or however you present it, and then just make sure you say, like, I learned this from whoever. And then on LinkedIn, common way to do that is just your first comment. And then you can link to that if you’re like, by the way, I learned this in atomic habits.

Here’s a link to go buy the book if it resonated with you, and that works well in comments rather than in the actual LinkedIn post. But, yes, I wouldn’t overthink it. If you’re doing it off to the side, that’s enough. Just yeah.

It’s definitely important if that person especially if you can tag them too. Right? If you’re like, learn this from you, James Clear, and tag him in that, that could be a cool moment for you too if he’s like, wicked. Thanks.

Well, now now everyone’s like a habit expert.

So That’s true.

Poor poor mister clear. Yeah.

Cool. Okay. I’m loving that you’re doing this, Ben. What’s your schedule for posting? Do you have one?

Like, it’s just every morning at, like I’m trying to, like, every morning at nine AM. And so just try to get it, like, at nine AM, nine AM, and then, like, really the hard part is, like, I’m not trying to overthink it. So, like like, everyone’s like like, people are telling me to write scripts. But But instead of writing a script, what helps me instead is, like like, basically doing a video twenty times. So then it’s kind of like, I’ve already developed the script internally.

Rather than like, I’m gonna read the script. I’d rather just like because I already have the knowledge. So I’m just like, okay. Just say it twenty times and then practice.

Okay. Oh, say that differently. Say that differently. Say that differently. And then, like, I’m I’m like, Instagram’s unique, so I’m, like, practicing, like, screenshots, examples, do this, do this, do this.

Yeah. Yeah. There’s a lot there, but I do the same thing. I have, like, notes that my social media person gives me.

Like, I have to hit these points, but then I go through it and I do it, like, thirty just as many times that you’re like, I forgot that point. But, yeah, that’s cool. Good for you. Do it every day.

Have it.

Love it. I my my goal is to do it so much where family and friends or whoever sees it, it’s not a big deal anymore. Like, this is not a big deal. I wanna like, that’s my whole thing. It’s like, this is not a big deal.

Cool. I love that. Yeah. Good insight. Wicked. Okay. Thanks, Ben.

Naomi, Andrew, I think we lost. Jessica was here, and then she’s gone. Anything else? How are we feeling as we get going on week seven? Focused followers.

Oh, Andrew says a free web based teleprompter. Yeah. That’s good.

Cool.

Love it.

Can I actually share a quick tip?

Yeah. So I’ve been using, yeah, like a free web based teleprompter, but then, if you all know Zscript, which is, like, the video editing tool Yeah. They now have an eye contact feature where it they use AI to make it look like you’re looking right at the camera. And so you can go ahead and, like, re you know, if you’ve ever filmed yourself reading a script before, it’s terrible. Like, even if you’re just occasionally glancing, it almost completely fixes that. And then all you have to do is just, like, get practice. Like, you still have to do it a few times because you don’t sound natural or normal reading it, but you don’t have to worry about, oh, it looks like I was reading there because it’s it’s and I would say it’s about ninety five percent plus effective.

So That’s so smart.

Yeah. Pretty cool.

Yep. That’s amazing. Thanks for the tip. And I also thought it was descript, not descript.

So It probably is.

I don’t know.

I said I was like I don’t know.

I don’t know.

So I said Zapier for, like, ten years Oh, I see.

Find Zapier. Zapier.

Zapier. The thing. Yeah.

I have to pause. Happier. Zapier. Okay.

Cool. Alright. Well, then, yeah, I’ll get thirteen minutes back to go get started on this, on the sheet on the work if you’ve hired a VA to get them hopefully scheduled to get briefed on the work of the week. Alright?

There are a few other tips in there as well around if you want to have your Instagram look a certain way. Creative market’s a great place to go if you don’t want to, if you’re not a designer or whatever it might be.

Cool. Alright. Thanks, everybody. We’ll see you in our Thursday call. Have a good one. Bye.

Week 8: The Radiating Thought Leader

Week 8: The Radiating Thought Leader

Transcript

Alright, y’all. We are here on week eight of eight for the intensive.

So awesome that you’ve made it this far. So what we’re going to talk about here is basically the core of what I think every freelance copywriter and person who’s looking to make money today based on their expertise.

What they should be thinking about, and that is thought leadership, also known as authority, building your authority, becoming a thought leader.

But I like to think of it as this like radiating thought leader because the concept of a thought leader can feel kind of, hard to pin down. Like, what do you mean? Whereas, what I want you to think of is this sort of and this is tying back to the sunshine growth model, but I can’t help but attach the concept of light and brightness to thought leaders who people gravitate toward. People just like love.

And I don’t mean the whole world, but their tribe loves them. So I want you to think about yourself as a radiating thought leader where you radiate for one group that needs to see you. So they need they’re drawn to you, not not the whole world, but, like, a moth to a flame sort of idea. Who is who is your moth?

But you’re that’s just a silly idea. But you really are trying to, help the right people see you by sharing the right message. So a lot of times thought leadership, people go like, oh, you mean like Gary v. And maybe, but not really because Gary v is you know him just like you know Britney Brown.

Right? Those are big thought leaders, have built big brands around themselves for masses of people, and that could be where you wanna go. So that’s why I say maybe. But that can also be really intimidating.

It’s a big scary thing to, like, to look at, like, how do I become the next Brene Brown? Some people will hear that and go, got it. I know exactly how to become the next Brene Brown. I’m so glad you even mentioned this, Joe.

Let’s go with it, which is amazing. Cool.

But then there’s the other vast majority of the world, which would be like, oh my gosh. I don’t even wanna, like, present in a webinar, and you want me to start publishing books and getting on stages?

So let’s back up from there. And side note, apologies. I am recording this and sharing this while being, quite under the weather, which you may be hearing in my voice.

I really can’t hear myself talking right now. So I don’t know. But here’s what we’re gonna do. This is, of course, the final week of the intensive freelancing.

We can see here that we haven’t we haven’t got rid of all the clouds on the sunshine growth model, and that was never going to be the objective here. The objective is to remove a lot of them, to start seeing how your business could shine through and really grow if you just keep addressing the points that are on the sunshine growth model.

And of course, if you’re continuing on in copy school professional, that is exactly what we work on. So that’s something to consider as you’re moving through the intense freelancing to these final moments of it, and deciding is is next up for you gonna be copy school pro? Do you qualify for it? We had to talk with your coach about that.

That is where the rest of the clouds lift. Okay. So what are we working on this week when we become a radiating thought leader? This, of course, builds on previous weeks.

In fact, although this is kind of, like, critical and foundational, you can’t really do this without having done all the work we already did before. And so, normally, you have this end of week, like, checklist of things you’ve done. This is end of program now. End of program, how it all comes together.

So it’s a bit of a Mad Lib situation here where what you’ll do at the end of this training, and after talking with me and other people in our Thursday session is you’ll go back in and you will complete this, which is basically a plan on a page for how you’re going to run your business. You can hand this off to anybody, and they can then understand what your business is about and how you’re getting there and why this is the way you’re doing it. So this is what you will fill in later. What I want you to do for now is start working through the next pages of this worksheet, which again are all around thought leadership.

Now I’m just gonna I’m gonna do something a bit different. I’m gonna give you a quick walk through of the worksheets that we’re getting into today, and then I’ll go back through and teach them one by one. And I’m gonna try to discipline myself because I know I love getting into it and really talking about something, as soon as I see it, but I’m gonna try to be disciplined and first walk you through. Okay.

So let’s start with this.

So there’s this concept of the message and the messenger. Are you the right messenger for the message? And that’s the same thing that’s really going on here is the thought you have and the leader to deliver it. Are you the right person to deliver this message?

Are you the leader and what is the thought? So the thought is whatever that thing is that’s going to we’re gonna call this in copy school pro. We read, one of the books that that’s on the agenda that you have to read at some point. It’s called, I think it’s Find or Finding Your Red Thread.

It’s really just red thread is what we talk about. And that’s a good book for you to read as you’re starting to think about this stuff, but I also don’t want this I don’t want your desire I don’t want you held up by, like, oh, I have to go read that book first. You don’t. It’s just it’s it’s a good way, reading that book is a good way to start, like, thinking about this stuff more strategically.

But the intensive is not about slowing down and, like, really, you know, chewing over something for an excessively long period of time. That’s not it at all. It is, hey. Go do this thing right now.

Go do it. Go do it. Go do it because Joe said go do it. So just go do it.

So that’s what you’re doing here.

But understanding that, of course, at every stage, we’re being very thoughtful. You have, you know, like, a one hour training session a week and then lots of time to put in thought, which might not sound like a lot, but we are talking about standing up a small business and making it profitable really quickly. So you don’t actually, in my experience, need to spend day and night, night and day working on all of the little minutia. So what not that thought leadership is little minutia either, so don’t take that the wrong way.

Ah, I already started doing the thing I said I wasn’t gonna do. I’m already walking you through this. I don’t mean to. We’re gonna go back and talk about the thought leader.

Just know that my point here was, that we’re gonna move through this fast. You’re going to determine this, what you’re gonna be a thought leader in pretty quickly. And that’s okay. Take comfort in the fact that that’s what most people do when they’re actually successful at something.

Then you think about things differently a little later on, and you’re always in thinking mode because you’re a CEO. Okay. So we’re gonna talk about that, and then we’re gonna have this thought about what a thought leader really does. Then we will get into your personas.

Now in week one, you’d worked on your ICP. That’s like the business level, your ICP, your ICA, whatever it is that you might call it. It’s the business you are trying to attract. Inside that business are personas you’re trying to attract. We worked on those last week. If you fell behind, now is the time to work through them and all you’re really gonna do is take some of the thinking that you started to do on them last week and flesh it out here. So we’re gonna have that we have, like, three personas, but you might have more personas.

Then we’re gonna get into your thought leadership plan itself. So this will mean, what are my personas interested in? Where are they consuming their media? And thus, where should I hang out and make media? Then we’re gonna talk about the how behind becoming this radiating thought leader. How what are you actually gonna put out into the world? What are you going to say?

And this will be all about what you will do versus what you won’t do. Then we’re gonna just finish off with some final thoughts as you end the intensive freelancing. So I’m not gonna get into that right now. I’m gonna go back to let’s scroll along right to the beginning here. To the one that I was already trying to talk about when I shouldn’t have been trying to talk about it. Okay. The thought and the leader.

What is the message that you are going to be radiating everywhere you show up?

So that’s the thinking that we’re going to do today. So just know that we’re gonna come back to this page. And then this is the part we’re not really going to dig into, but that I want to leave you with. It’s a thing that has I would I I don’t wanna say consume me, but in my own business for the last five, six months, I’ve been shifting, and getting so excited about the shift. But shifting a bit to, honestly, something that feels a bit more organic and, like, natural for where I am in my life, in my professional life, my career right now.

And with that, I’ve been thinking about, so what am I saying and why am I the one to say that thing? And, of course, we’re always thinking that as copywriters. Right? Like, why are you the brand to say x? And I want you to think about that for yourself.

What do people need to believe is true about you in order for them to believe the message that you’re sharing? So whatever that thing is that you’re going to be a thought leader on. Let’s say you’re going to be the person where your specialization is SaaS emails. Okay.

You’re gonna be a thought leader on win back, I don’t know, win back emails for SaaS, for enterprise level SaaS. Let’s say okay. So this is this is where you’re specializing. Your thought leadership is in is is hidden in there, is buried in there.

Right? Like, what’s your unique point of view on this thing? You identify that your unique point of view is that every shit everything should include, the color colors in it. You’re you’re the color person for SaaS emails.

Why aren’t you tapping into color more? This is obviously all just made up. So why aren’t you tapping into color more?

And then from that point on, you might be like, okay. Well, why am I the person to deliver this message on enterprise SaaS emails that must include color?

So if color were important now this seems really obvious and hard to apply in other places, but just roll with it.

If color were important to my message, then chances are good I would wear certain colors, on, like, my clothing or my hair accessories or whatever else it might be. I don’t know. But, like, you’re you have to express why you are the brand. You are the person to share that message.

So just know we’re gonna go back to that. That’s what you want to, like, finish with as you’re about to get into this page. Okay? So now let’s dig into the core of the training.

It may be difficult if you haven’t ever considered yourself a thought leader before or if you’re really early in your thought leadership or if you are a thought leader but you haven’t really recognized that you are. You didn’t know that people looked at you this way. And now you’re starting to see that and go like, oh, I might be a thought leader, or I might be well on the path toward becoming a thought leader. What does that even mean? Which is a very good, humble question to ask.

A great way to look at thought leaders is that they are educators.

So you’re a teacher first. That doesn’t mean you have to teach how. It doesn’t mean you’re even teaching, but it does mean you are there to educate your market on something that you care deeply about, where you and that’s really I think it’s super important that people miss.

I know I’m telling you, hey. Just choose a specialization.

But I’m saying that because I’m a pragmatist, and I truly believe that if you say I’m gonna become the expert on writing copy for for snakes, for companies that that sell products to care for your pet snake. That’s gonna be my thing. If you were to choose that out of the clear blue sky, you could then become the person who cares deeply about that because you are curious. I’m always assuming that you lead with your curiosity because you’re a copywriter. And before you were a copywriter, you were either a writer of some kind or a storyteller of some kind that is most typically what drives people here. And salespeople are also storytellers, by the way. Psychologists are also storytellers.

People who understand worlds and how people make decisions in those worlds and how those people are really characters. So understanding all that, you’re already a curious person, which means you’re looking for things.

You’re digging into things because you care and in order to care. So you are an educator who steps up, says I’m gonna own this thing, and then owns it. And I mean, owns it. And if you have a hard time understanding what I mean by caring or by owning, if these feel like they’re too vague or, like, you want, like, examples. If it’s not really clear to you, then let’s talk. There are so many examples out there, but what I really wanna make sure we do is not just bog you down with, here’s how you can be like Blair Enns, or here’s how you can be like David c Baker or Bob Mesta or anybody.

I don’t that’s not I don’t want you to say I’m the April Dunford of my space. I want you to be the you of your space because you care deeply about the thing. Whether you just decided to do that thing or not, you can train yourself to care deeply about it. Okay? I know it feels like I’m spending a lot of time on this, but we are talking about you kicking off the part of your career that could last five, ten, twenty years where you are the person who owns x thing, who becomes a multimillionaire because they own that thing. And the way that you do it is by finding how you will care about what you have chosen, how you will care about it so deeply. And if I’m saying this and you’re going, like, I don’t think I can care about it that deeply, then now is the time to modify your specialization and in turn your standardized offer and your retainer offer and maybe even your audience to the point where it is something you can care about.

I truly believe that writers can care about basically anything.

Journalists learn to care about whatever the freaking subject is that they’re writing about. So we need you to care so much that you make every other leader out there care too. And I mean real leaders, and that’s gonna be more of when we’re talking about in copy school professional about going up market, staying up market, attracting people who are up market. We are gonna be talking about leaders.

That doesn’t mean that you will only ever talk to the CEO, but I mean people who identify as leaders. Those are the people who will get promoted. Those are the people who will advocate to bring you in no matter what the budget is because they are leaders. We will talk more about that, but just know that leaders attract leaders.

Leaders hang around with leaders. That’s the way naturally things tend to go, so that’s what we wanna work on. Okay? Okay.

So say it. Thought leaders are educators who step up and own something they care deeply about. They care so much, they make every other leader care too. Alright? Now what we’re gonna do is we’re gonna take all of this, like, wonderful feeling stuff and bring it back to the hands on pen on paper stuff, where you’ll go through all three of your personas and think about their media diets and really document their media diets. That is what they consume and where they consume it.

So each of the personas that you worked on last week, that’s in week seven. Again, if you didn’t work on those in week seven, now is the time to do that catch up work. You can do that. It won’t actually take that long.

These personas won’t be perfect, but they should be close to good. No business is working with a perfect persona. That is the goal of all of this big data out there, but it is impossible to get down to the perfect persona. If only because people are always changing, and every time you add in a new message or you say something different, the same thing you’ve been saying but saying it differently or you say it in a different space, suddenly the people around you, the people listening change a little bit.

So just know that they’re not going to be perfect.

Don’t let perfect get in the way. What you wanna do is have your persona in here. You already decided last week who the persona is. You describe them.

You identify if they’re on LinkedIn or Instagram or both. And what you wanna do here is really dig in to, everything that they’re, looking for online when it comes to their business. And it doesn’t have to be the business they own, it’s the business they work at or it’s the business they own. So what are the books they read on that subject?

What are the events they attend? What are the pod cast they listen to? What are the online spaces, that they frequent in order to consume media on things that will help them be better at their job? So I want you just to write down those books, those events, etcetera.

You can also use this, like, blank space. You don’t have to stop there, but I don’t think you need to say exactly what they’re searching for. That’s, like, keyword stuff. That’s voice of customer research stuff.

That’s not anything that you have to come up with right here and now. You already have from week seven, you have a message map for each persona. So don’t worry too much about that. You already did good foundational work there.

And as you go and research and learn more from your customers slash clients, as you do that, you’ll then flesh out more of that message map. So we’re really saying with the message map from week seven, Now you need to say, okay. If these are the messages that they need to hear and I know that this persona is on Instagram, and they like the one page marketing plan, I think that’s a book. Or they like whatever books they might like, you’re writing them down, you’re writing down the events they attend, then you can start making sense of what matters to them and where you need to communicate this message that that you have and where you’ll be that thought leader.

So that’s true for all three of the personas. And again, you might have two personas, you might have one, you might have four. This is work that you did last week. Okay?

So you’ll wanna fill that in for each of those and then that will help you get your own thought leadership plan together. So this is gonna be a really cool plan on a page as well, where you’ll have the events that you plan to speak at, and then how you’ll get their attention, the podcast you’ll speak on, and how you’ll get the podcast creator or organizer, scheduler, producer, whatever, their attention, books you’ll write, and how you’ll get your books in front of those people.

Okay. Now keep in mind that this is a plan.

Some things that seem easy will be hard. Some things that seem hard will be easy. You might find that, wow, ChatGPT really helps you outline that book you were planning on writing three years from now. You can outline the thing this summer and have a really good draft of it ready to go by December, which means you could self publish it in early twenty twenty five, and then you would need a promotion plan for it.

Okay. That’s kinda cool. So that would open up doors for getting on stages, getting on podcasts, having more to share on Instagram, having more of these, like, examples that can come out. Or you might be like, hey.

I think getting on podcasts will be super easy, and then you find that the only podcast you wanna get on is Lenny’s podcast, and it’s beyond difficult to get on there. So just know that, like, don’t choose things. Don’t put things on here based on how hard or easy you’ll think you think that they may be. Put the right things on here, and then it’s up to you and with us, of course, in training and as you move forward in Copy School Pro, it’s then then it’s the job to figure out how.

Okay. How am I gonna get that done? You are gonna CEO this by coming up with the vision. You are coming up with how you’re going to get your business out in front of people who will pay you ten thousand dollars upfront and then five thousand dollars a month thereafter, who will help you become the millionaire that you are putting in the work to be.

You’ll figure that part out. You honestly really will figure that part out. And when you think, oh, no. I have to do this by myself, You don’t remember you are in this program. And when you stick with copy school professional, you get to keep having other people help you through these things. Okay?

So keep that in mind. And then down below, I want you to choose one, not two, not three, not four. I know. I know. I know for a fact. Some of you are going to ask me in the Thursday call.

Joe, I know you said just to choose one, but I really think I should do two do two. Nope. One.

One. Do one and do it well. We are here to focus. The best advice I can give you is to focus. So do that.

Focus. Choose one. Now the one you choose, there’s many ways to go about choosing it.

A newsletter is great if you love writing, if you like writing regularly, if you have a unique point of view that you haven’t determined or are working on determining as part of your radiating thought leadership plan.

Do you have something to say every week? Do you have new research that you’re doing every week? That can be really fantastic for a newsletter. Same is true for Medium. It’s a question of whether you wanna build a list or just have, like, this audience on Medium.

Both will help you in lots of different ways, but choose one if you’re great at the writing side of content, of sharing your thoughts.

And let’s say you’re not. Let’s say you’re tired of that. Let’s say you write so much already for your job that you can’t imagine continuing to write after you’re not getting paid, quote, unquote, paid to write anymore. Now, naturally, you are getting paid to do all of this work. It’s just the pay isn’t directly tied to the work. It’s an outcome of doing the work, and you will see that paying off immediately and down the road now and forever. So just keep that in mind.

So that’s the writing part. Then there’s the other ones that you can choose from again. These are four options. You’re choosing one of the four, not one of each of the two sides. Then you you have to you you get to sorry. Choose to establish an event.

Honestly, this could be a really cool IRL event where if you’re like, I love being around people. I am a good networker.

I never knew this was true about me, but I really do. I love traveling. If I could say my job, my content creation job is that I go around, and I promote this on LinkedIn and Instagram, but I go around and I host meetups or copywriting sessions or business brainstorms in different locations every two months, and I get to travel the world and do this thing, or, hey, I was already gonna travel the world. I might as well make this my branded event, then that could be a cool thing for you to do where you could build a lot of thought leadership. It would be more work than anything else you could possibly do, but it could be really good work. And then I also have established a podcast. So if you’re great on video, on audio as well, then a podcast is good.

It will lead you down the path of saying, well, do I also need post my videos to YouTube? When I do the podcast, do I have to have, videos, or can I just do audio? You’ll have all sorts of questions about how you format the podcast.

There are many. I personally have avoided a podcast all my life. Don’t want it. But I get that other people do, and it’s what they like to do. I have seen far too many podcasts die.

Just die sad deaths where no one’s even at the funeral. I have seen that far too often. A lot of great content just poof, gone.

So you can. I’m not trying to talk you out of it, but I would say have passion for the podcast before you jump into it. Okay. So that’s gonna be your thought leadership plan.

This isn’t a content plan. This isn’t like, here’s my calendar for how I go forward in CopySchool Pro. We do talk about that. You can put that together or start to do that on your own as well, but just know that that’s on the other side of finishing the intensive.

So now now when it comes down to okay. I’ve got this message map. I’m starting to put together my thought leadership plan. I know what my persona is, where they’re hanging out, what they read, what they gravitate toward. I know that they read.

That’s like, this is all really good stuff to know.

What am I gonna tell them? What do I do next?

Here are some advice along with your message map. What I want you to keep in mind is that you are very likely as a copywriter to teach people how because you are often in an execution level role. And as such, we know how to do this hard thing. People love hearing the how. They adore it, but they will not hire you. They will buy your course to learn more from you, but they won’t hire you to do the work.

Now I have a big asterisk next to that because I have been hired repeatedly and sought out repeatedly after having taught the how. But what I can say is, I have many friends who do similar things. We all met on stages, backstage at speaker events, and there’s like a really great network that you’ll form as you do more of the speaking stuff, which hopefully will come up for you. What I can say is these wonderful people have got more work offers, bigger companies well, it depends depends, but more of the bigger companies, giant projects, giant workshops, easier money out of the same audience I was presenting in front of when they did not get into the how.

What you want to do is wake your audience up to the problem when you’re out there creating content. You wanna teach what you do, not how you do it. You wanna teach what you think, not not the how behind actually executing on that thought. Why you think that way?

Where you help? Hey, UX team, you should invite me into your project when you have these problems in this part of the customer journey.

That’s a when to hire you. That’s where you help. This is what you want to do. You don’t wanna say, hey, UX team.

Here is how to solve this problem at this part in the UX journey. Instead, you help them identify their problems, and then you give them insights into the fact that you do solve those problems, but you don’t get into how. This takes discipline. This is very hard.

I have a course business. I have a coaching business. I can get into the how when it comes to copywriting because it’s it’s actually very good for selling courses to people who want those skills. It’s, again, not great for selling to people who want to pay forty, fifty thousand dollars for a project or who have twenty thousand dollars ready to go a month to get somebody in to make a certain funnel perform better or whatever that might be.

Now, again, I might even sell more courses if I did not teach the how so much. So just keep that in mind. Okay?

Easy on the how. As in, if you’re like, well, give me a formula, Joe. For every nine what, who, when, where, why is you teach, then you can teach one how. And I want it to be so choice.

I want it to be the best how you’ve ever figured out, and it needs to be yours. What I don’t wanna see is anybody teaching things that I taught and, like, hey, Here’s how you optimize a pricing page. If you just take what you learn from someone else and put it out there, you’re not really doing the thought leaders. You’re not really you’re not at all doing the thought leadership work that you need to do.

Okay? So if you’re gonna teach the how, make sure it’s a unique how that you have discovered. Alright.

Now what I want you to do here on this page is write out what you will educate your ICP, which includes, of course, those personas on. And that again, use your message map here. This is all gonna be, like, what part of one giant binder, right, where you can look at it and go, like, here’s what I’m teaching.

Here’s why I’m doing it because these are the things that my persona cares about. Here’s where I’m teaching it because that’s where my persona ear is. Here’s the format in which I’ll teach it because that’s how my my audience consumes content.

That’s what you’re working on here. So if it feels repetitive, welcome to freaking business. Like, things need to be repeated repeatedly. It’s bananas.

So what you wanna do here is say, this is what I’m gonna educate my ICP on. This is where you should know what your specialization is, and you’ll be saying, like, okay. You know your specialization. You know your your message map for your personas.

You know where you’re gonna talk, etcetera, etcetera, based on all the work that you’ve done up until this page, up until this page. What you’ll do and what you will not teach them on. I will avoid teaching them on my favorite headline formulas. Instead, I will teach them on why why a headline is the most important thing, on what happens when a headline goes wrong, on when in my process I would think about writing a headline on how to build a swipe file.

That’s a how, but it’s for building a swipe file So that might be the one how out of, like, the nine things that are what, when, who, where, etcetera. This is your one how and that’s how to build a swipe file. Not how to write a headline.

Just keep I know that’s hard. I know that can be very tricky, or maybe it’s easy for you and it’s just hard for me. But this is where you wanna write that down. Okay?

That will then bring you to a place where you are ready to go back and say, okay. I understand where I’m gonna pitch myself, what I’m going to write, how’s what’s going to be about, why that’s important to my persona, why that’s the right thing for my persona, is it something I care about, what is the thought that I am sharing as a specialist with a unique point of view, which is again all work that we’ve been working on throughout the entirety of the intensive.

What is this message that you are going to radiate as you show up all over the place where your persona’s hanging out consuming information that helps them with their job, and sometimes just consuming information then as a side bonus, they get help with their job. And then why are you the person for that?

Why you? What do you maybe need to modify in your brand, in you and how you appear on camera, in you and how you talk?

Do you need to start developing parts or, like, an entirely new alter ego that’s you dialed up to be the right person to express this thought, believably.

Okay. That’s where you’ll finish, then you’ll finish the whole week out by going back to the first page and filling in the Mad Libs. Now what I want you to do here is figure out your priorities for the next sixty days. My hope is that you’ve come through this, and you’re finishing this week off.

You’re finishing the whole program off, and you’re ready to move on. You’re like, okay. I have got this part nailed. Or if not nailed, I’m at eighty five percent and the remaining fifteen percent I trust in myself and in Joe and the coaching team that we can figure this out together.

I’m good. But now I wanna start making some freaking sales on this stuff. I am ready to get out there, talk my butt off, attract the right audience to me, and start making money. With that in mind, let’s assume you’re moving on to Copy School Professional.

Let’s assume you qualify for it and that you yourself are ready to move forward for into it, which if you qualify, I would say you should. Just like as your coach, you should take the leap and do the thing that’s going to get you the results that you’re looking for rather than backing off, rather than stepping back and going, let me give it some thought by myself over here in this corner where nothing productive has ever really consistently happened.

Let’s stay here where you can be productive in the company of people who will make you feel uncomfortable with all of the challenges that they are putting upon you, but that you can get through with their help. By them, I mean us. That’s me. So here are the priorities for the next sixty days on your own or with your coach. If you haven’t had your call with your coach yet, or if you wanna have one more call and just say, like, hey.

Joe said I could have one more call with you before I go into CoffeeSchool Pro. This is what you will do. You will circle the areas on the sunshine growth model that need the most immediate attention.

Don’t include what you’ve already worked on. So I don’t wanna see any of this specialization stuff. You’ve worked your butt off on specialization. You’ve worked your butt off on the standardized offer.

What you might need to work your butt off now on is around pricing and sales, which is what this is. This is actually an old version of the, sunshine growth model. This is pricing and sales now. You might need to work a lot of marketing, biz dev, and pipeline.

You’ve only just started on thought leadership. You might need to do some work there. Mindset, people, advanced skills you use like list building, like posting to social media, knowing more about what to do there. Sell by chat.

I don’t want to see audience or niche. You’ve worked on that standardized offer. You’ve worked on that specialization. You’ve worked on that.

The other ones, though, yes to continuing to work your butt off on. Make notes here for what those things might be, and then I hope to see you, one, in our Thursday session to discuss this, and two, in copy school pro, assuming you are absolutely ready to move on with us. It’s been a delight.

I’m sorry I had to deliver this while sick, but I also could not not deliver this. I needed to deliver this. It is week eight. So here you are. Thank you so much. I can’t wait to hear from you about how this is going. I know that there are some things that are big changes.

That’s part of the job. You are CEO ing right now, and changes happen when you CEO.

So congratulations on promoting yourself to this cool new level. Now let’s go make you the money so that you can pay yourself like a CEO.

Resources

Resources

Transcript

Alright, y’all. We are here on week eight of eight for the intensive.

So awesome that you’ve made it this far. So what we’re going to talk about here is basically the core of what I think every freelance copywriter and person who’s looking to make money today based on their expertise.

What they should be thinking about, and that is thought leadership, also known as authority, building your authority, becoming a thought leader.

But I like to think of it as this like radiating thought leader because the concept of a thought leader can feel kind of, hard to pin down. Like, what do you mean? Whereas, what I want you to think of is this sort of and this is tying back to the sunshine growth model, but I can’t help but attach the concept of light and brightness to thought leaders who people gravitate toward. People just like love.

And I don’t mean the whole world, but their tribe loves them. So I want you to think about yourself as a radiating thought leader where you radiate for one group that needs to see you. So they need they’re drawn to you, not not the whole world, but, like, a moth to a flame sort of idea. Who is who is your moth?

But you’re that’s just a silly idea. But you really are trying to, help the right people see you by sharing the right message. So a lot of times thought leadership, people go like, oh, you mean like Gary v. And maybe, but not really because Gary v is you know him just like you know Britney Brown.

Right? Those are big thought leaders, have built big brands around themselves for masses of people, and that could be where you wanna go. So that’s why I say maybe. But that can also be really intimidating.

It’s a big scary thing to, like, to look at, like, how do I become the next Brene Brown? Some people will hear that and go, got it. I know exactly how to become the next Brene Brown. I’m so glad you even mentioned this, Joe.

Let’s go with it, which is amazing. Cool.

But then there’s the other vast majority of the world, which would be like, oh my gosh. I don’t even wanna, like, present in a webinar, and you want me to start publishing books and getting on stages?

So let’s back up from there. And side note, apologies. I am recording this and sharing this while being, quite under the weather, which you may be hearing in my voice.

I really can’t hear myself talking right now. So I don’t know. But here’s what we’re gonna do. This is, of course, the final week of the intensive freelancing.

We can see here that we haven’t we haven’t got rid of all the clouds on the sunshine growth model, and that was never going to be the objective here. The objective is to remove a lot of them, to start seeing how your business could shine through and really grow if you just keep addressing the points that are on the sunshine growth model.

And of course, if you’re continuing on in copy school professional, that is exactly what we work on. So that’s something to consider as you’re moving through the intense freelancing to these final moments of it, and deciding is is next up for you gonna be copy school pro? Do you qualify for it? We had to talk with your coach about that.

That is where the rest of the clouds lift. Okay. So what are we working on this week when we become a radiating thought leader? This, of course, builds on previous weeks.

In fact, although this is kind of, like, critical and foundational, you can’t really do this without having done all the work we already did before. And so, normally, you have this end of week, like, checklist of things you’ve done. This is end of program now. End of program, how it all comes together.

So it’s a bit of a Mad Lib situation here where what you’ll do at the end of this training, and after talking with me and other people in our Thursday session is you’ll go back in and you will complete this, which is basically a plan on a page for how you’re going to run your business. You can hand this off to anybody, and they can then understand what your business is about and how you’re getting there and why this is the way you’re doing it. So this is what you will fill in later. What I want you to do for now is start working through the next pages of this worksheet, which again are all around thought leadership.

Now I’m just gonna I’m gonna do something a bit different. I’m gonna give you a quick walk through of the worksheets that we’re getting into today, and then I’ll go back through and teach them one by one. And I’m gonna try to discipline myself because I know I love getting into it and really talking about something, as soon as I see it, but I’m gonna try to be disciplined and first walk you through. Okay.

So let’s start with this.

So there’s this concept of the message and the messenger. Are you the right messenger for the message? And that’s the same thing that’s really going on here is the thought you have and the leader to deliver it. Are you the right person to deliver this message?

Are you the leader and what is the thought? So the thought is whatever that thing is that’s going to we’re gonna call this in copy school pro. We read, one of the books that that’s on the agenda that you have to read at some point. It’s called, I think it’s Find or Finding Your Red Thread.

It’s really just red thread is what we talk about. And that’s a good book for you to read as you’re starting to think about this stuff, but I also don’t want this I don’t want your desire I don’t want you held up by, like, oh, I have to go read that book first. You don’t. It’s just it’s it’s a good way, reading that book is a good way to start, like, thinking about this stuff more strategically.

But the intensive is not about slowing down and, like, really, you know, chewing over something for an excessively long period of time. That’s not it at all. It is, hey. Go do this thing right now.

Go do it. Go do it. Go do it because Joe said go do it. So just go do it.

So that’s what you’re doing here.

But understanding that, of course, at every stage, we’re being very thoughtful. You have, you know, like, a one hour training session a week and then lots of time to put in thought, which might not sound like a lot, but we are talking about standing up a small business and making it profitable really quickly. So you don’t actually, in my experience, need to spend day and night, night and day working on all of the little minutia. So what not that thought leadership is little minutia either, so don’t take that the wrong way.

Ah, I already started doing the thing I said I wasn’t gonna do. I’m already walking you through this. I don’t mean to. We’re gonna go back and talk about the thought leader.

Just know that my point here was, that we’re gonna move through this fast. You’re going to determine this, what you’re gonna be a thought leader in pretty quickly. And that’s okay. Take comfort in the fact that that’s what most people do when they’re actually successful at something.

Then you think about things differently a little later on, and you’re always in thinking mode because you’re a CEO. Okay. So we’re gonna talk about that, and then we’re gonna have this thought about what a thought leader really does. Then we will get into your personas.

Now in week one, you’d worked on your ICP. That’s like the business level, your ICP, your ICA, whatever it is that you might call it. It’s the business you are trying to attract. Inside that business are personas you’re trying to attract. We worked on those last week. If you fell behind, now is the time to work through them and all you’re really gonna do is take some of the thinking that you started to do on them last week and flesh it out here. So we’re gonna have that we have, like, three personas, but you might have more personas.

Then we’re gonna get into your thought leadership plan itself. So this will mean, what are my personas interested in? Where are they consuming their media? And thus, where should I hang out and make media? Then we’re gonna talk about the how behind becoming this radiating thought leader. How what are you actually gonna put out into the world? What are you going to say?

And this will be all about what you will do versus what you won’t do. Then we’re gonna just finish off with some final thoughts as you end the intensive freelancing. So I’m not gonna get into that right now. I’m gonna go back to let’s scroll along right to the beginning here. To the one that I was already trying to talk about when I shouldn’t have been trying to talk about it. Okay. The thought and the leader.

What is the message that you are going to be radiating everywhere you show up?

So that’s the thinking that we’re going to do today. So just know that we’re gonna come back to this page. And then this is the part we’re not really going to dig into, but that I want to leave you with. It’s a thing that has I would I I don’t wanna say consume me, but in my own business for the last five, six months, I’ve been shifting, and getting so excited about the shift. But shifting a bit to, honestly, something that feels a bit more organic and, like, natural for where I am in my life, in my professional life, my career right now.

And with that, I’ve been thinking about, so what am I saying and why am I the one to say that thing? And, of course, we’re always thinking that as copywriters. Right? Like, why are you the brand to say x? And I want you to think about that for yourself.

What do people need to believe is true about you in order for them to believe the message that you’re sharing? So whatever that thing is that you’re going to be a thought leader on. Let’s say you’re going to be the person where your specialization is SaaS emails. Okay.

You’re gonna be a thought leader on win back, I don’t know, win back emails for SaaS, for enterprise level SaaS. Let’s say okay. So this is this is where you’re specializing. Your thought leadership is in is is hidden in there, is buried in there.

Right? Like, what’s your unique point of view on this thing? You identify that your unique point of view is that every shit everything should include, the color colors in it. You’re you’re the color person for SaaS emails.

Why aren’t you tapping into color more? This is obviously all just made up. So why aren’t you tapping into color more?

And then from that point on, you might be like, okay. Well, why am I the person to deliver this message on enterprise SaaS emails that must include color?

So if color were important now this seems really obvious and hard to apply in other places, but just roll with it.

If color were important to my message, then chances are good I would wear certain colors, on, like, my clothing or my hair accessories or whatever else it might be. I don’t know. But, like, you’re you have to express why you are the brand. You are the person to share that message.

So just know we’re gonna go back to that. That’s what you want to, like, finish with as you’re about to get into this page. Okay? So now let’s dig into the core of the training.

It may be difficult if you haven’t ever considered yourself a thought leader before or if you’re really early in your thought leadership or if you are a thought leader but you haven’t really recognized that you are. You didn’t know that people looked at you this way. And now you’re starting to see that and go like, oh, I might be a thought leader, or I might be well on the path toward becoming a thought leader. What does that even mean? Which is a very good, humble question to ask.

A great way to look at thought leaders is that they are educators.

So you’re a teacher first. That doesn’t mean you have to teach how. It doesn’t mean you’re even teaching, but it does mean you are there to educate your market on something that you care deeply about, where you and that’s really I think it’s super important that people miss.

I know I’m telling you, hey. Just choose a specialization.

But I’m saying that because I’m a pragmatist, and I truly believe that if you say I’m gonna become the expert on writing copy for for snakes, for companies that that sell products to care for your pet snake. That’s gonna be my thing. If you were to choose that out of the clear blue sky, you could then become the person who cares deeply about that because you are curious. I’m always assuming that you lead with your curiosity because you’re a copywriter. And before you were a copywriter, you were either a writer of some kind or a storyteller of some kind that is most typically what drives people here. And salespeople are also storytellers, by the way. Psychologists are also storytellers.

People who understand worlds and how people make decisions in those worlds and how those people are really characters. So understanding all that, you’re already a curious person, which means you’re looking for things.

You’re digging into things because you care and in order to care. So you are an educator who steps up, says I’m gonna own this thing, and then owns it. And I mean, owns it. And if you have a hard time understanding what I mean by caring or by owning, if these feel like they’re too vague or, like, you want, like, examples. If it’s not really clear to you, then let’s talk. There are so many examples out there, but what I really wanna make sure we do is not just bog you down with, here’s how you can be like Blair Enns, or here’s how you can be like David c Baker or Bob Mesta or anybody.

I don’t that’s not I don’t want you to say I’m the April Dunford of my space. I want you to be the you of your space because you care deeply about the thing. Whether you just decided to do that thing or not, you can train yourself to care deeply about it. Okay? I know it feels like I’m spending a lot of time on this, but we are talking about you kicking off the part of your career that could last five, ten, twenty years where you are the person who owns x thing, who becomes a multimillionaire because they own that thing. And the way that you do it is by finding how you will care about what you have chosen, how you will care about it so deeply. And if I’m saying this and you’re going, like, I don’t think I can care about it that deeply, then now is the time to modify your specialization and in turn your standardized offer and your retainer offer and maybe even your audience to the point where it is something you can care about.

I truly believe that writers can care about basically anything.

Journalists learn to care about whatever the freaking subject is that they’re writing about. So we need you to care so much that you make every other leader out there care too. And I mean real leaders, and that’s gonna be more of when we’re talking about in copy school professional about going up market, staying up market, attracting people who are up market. We are gonna be talking about leaders.

That doesn’t mean that you will only ever talk to the CEO, but I mean people who identify as leaders. Those are the people who will get promoted. Those are the people who will advocate to bring you in no matter what the budget is because they are leaders. We will talk more about that, but just know that leaders attract leaders.

Leaders hang around with leaders. That’s the way naturally things tend to go, so that’s what we wanna work on. Okay? Okay.

So say it. Thought leaders are educators who step up and own something they care deeply about. They care so much, they make every other leader care too. Alright? Now what we’re gonna do is we’re gonna take all of this, like, wonderful feeling stuff and bring it back to the hands on pen on paper stuff, where you’ll go through all three of your personas and think about their media diets and really document their media diets. That is what they consume and where they consume it.

So each of the personas that you worked on last week, that’s in week seven. Again, if you didn’t work on those in week seven, now is the time to do that catch up work. You can do that. It won’t actually take that long.

These personas won’t be perfect, but they should be close to good. No business is working with a perfect persona. That is the goal of all of this big data out there, but it is impossible to get down to the perfect persona. If only because people are always changing, and every time you add in a new message or you say something different, the same thing you’ve been saying but saying it differently or you say it in a different space, suddenly the people around you, the people listening change a little bit.

So just know that they’re not going to be perfect.

Don’t let perfect get in the way. What you wanna do is have your persona in here. You already decided last week who the persona is. You describe them.

You identify if they’re on LinkedIn or Instagram or both. And what you wanna do here is really dig in to, everything that they’re, looking for online when it comes to their business. And it doesn’t have to be the business they own, it’s the business they work at or it’s the business they own. So what are the books they read on that subject?

What are the events they attend? What are the pod cast they listen to? What are the online spaces, that they frequent in order to consume media on things that will help them be better at their job? So I want you just to write down those books, those events, etcetera.

You can also use this, like, blank space. You don’t have to stop there, but I don’t think you need to say exactly what they’re searching for. That’s, like, keyword stuff. That’s voice of customer research stuff.

That’s not anything that you have to come up with right here and now. You already have from week seven, you have a message map for each persona. So don’t worry too much about that. You already did good foundational work there.

And as you go and research and learn more from your customers slash clients, as you do that, you’ll then flesh out more of that message map. So we’re really saying with the message map from week seven, Now you need to say, okay. If these are the messages that they need to hear and I know that this persona is on Instagram, and they like the one page marketing plan, I think that’s a book. Or they like whatever books they might like, you’re writing them down, you’re writing down the events they attend, then you can start making sense of what matters to them and where you need to communicate this message that that you have and where you’ll be that thought leader.

So that’s true for all three of the personas. And again, you might have two personas, you might have one, you might have four. This is work that you did last week. Okay?

So you’ll wanna fill that in for each of those and then that will help you get your own thought leadership plan together. So this is gonna be a really cool plan on a page as well, where you’ll have the events that you plan to speak at, and then how you’ll get their attention, the podcast you’ll speak on, and how you’ll get the podcast creator or organizer, scheduler, producer, whatever, their attention, books you’ll write, and how you’ll get your books in front of those people.

Okay. Now keep in mind that this is a plan.

Some things that seem easy will be hard. Some things that seem hard will be easy. You might find that, wow, ChatGPT really helps you outline that book you were planning on writing three years from now. You can outline the thing this summer and have a really good draft of it ready to go by December, which means you could self publish it in early twenty twenty five, and then you would need a promotion plan for it.

Okay. That’s kinda cool. So that would open up doors for getting on stages, getting on podcasts, having more to share on Instagram, having more of these, like, examples that can come out. Or you might be like, hey.

I think getting on podcasts will be super easy, and then you find that the only podcast you wanna get on is Lenny’s podcast, and it’s beyond difficult to get on there. So just know that, like, don’t choose things. Don’t put things on here based on how hard or easy you’ll think you think that they may be. Put the right things on here, and then it’s up to you and with us, of course, in training and as you move forward in Copy School Pro, it’s then then it’s the job to figure out how.

Okay. How am I gonna get that done? You are gonna CEO this by coming up with the vision. You are coming up with how you’re going to get your business out in front of people who will pay you ten thousand dollars upfront and then five thousand dollars a month thereafter, who will help you become the millionaire that you are putting in the work to be.

You’ll figure that part out. You honestly really will figure that part out. And when you think, oh, no. I have to do this by myself, You don’t remember you are in this program. And when you stick with copy school professional, you get to keep having other people help you through these things. Okay?

So keep that in mind. And then down below, I want you to choose one, not two, not three, not four. I know. I know. I know for a fact. Some of you are going to ask me in the Thursday call.

Joe, I know you said just to choose one, but I really think I should do two do two. Nope. One.

One. Do one and do it well. We are here to focus. The best advice I can give you is to focus. So do that.

Focus. Choose one. Now the one you choose, there’s many ways to go about choosing it.

A newsletter is great if you love writing, if you like writing regularly, if you have a unique point of view that you haven’t determined or are working on determining as part of your radiating thought leadership plan.

Do you have something to say every week? Do you have new research that you’re doing every week? That can be really fantastic for a newsletter. Same is true for Medium. It’s a question of whether you wanna build a list or just have, like, this audience on Medium.

Both will help you in lots of different ways, but choose one if you’re great at the writing side of content, of sharing your thoughts.

And let’s say you’re not. Let’s say you’re tired of that. Let’s say you write so much already for your job that you can’t imagine continuing to write after you’re not getting paid, quote, unquote, paid to write anymore. Now, naturally, you are getting paid to do all of this work. It’s just the pay isn’t directly tied to the work. It’s an outcome of doing the work, and you will see that paying off immediately and down the road now and forever. So just keep that in mind.

So that’s the writing part. Then there’s the other ones that you can choose from again. These are four options. You’re choosing one of the four, not one of each of the two sides. Then you you have to you you get to sorry. Choose to establish an event.

Honestly, this could be a really cool IRL event where if you’re like, I love being around people. I am a good networker.

I never knew this was true about me, but I really do. I love traveling. If I could say my job, my content creation job is that I go around, and I promote this on LinkedIn and Instagram, but I go around and I host meetups or copywriting sessions or business brainstorms in different locations every two months, and I get to travel the world and do this thing, or, hey, I was already gonna travel the world. I might as well make this my branded event, then that could be a cool thing for you to do where you could build a lot of thought leadership. It would be more work than anything else you could possibly do, but it could be really good work. And then I also have established a podcast. So if you’re great on video, on audio as well, then a podcast is good.

It will lead you down the path of saying, well, do I also need post my videos to YouTube? When I do the podcast, do I have to have, videos, or can I just do audio? You’ll have all sorts of questions about how you format the podcast.

There are many. I personally have avoided a podcast all my life. Don’t want it. But I get that other people do, and it’s what they like to do. I have seen far too many podcasts die.

Just die sad deaths where no one’s even at the funeral. I have seen that far too often. A lot of great content just poof, gone.

So you can. I’m not trying to talk you out of it, but I would say have passion for the podcast before you jump into it. Okay. So that’s gonna be your thought leadership plan.

This isn’t a content plan. This isn’t like, here’s my calendar for how I go forward in CopySchool Pro. We do talk about that. You can put that together or start to do that on your own as well, but just know that that’s on the other side of finishing the intensive.

So now now when it comes down to okay. I’ve got this message map. I’m starting to put together my thought leadership plan. I know what my persona is, where they’re hanging out, what they read, what they gravitate toward. I know that they read.

That’s like, this is all really good stuff to know.

What am I gonna tell them? What do I do next?

Here are some advice along with your message map. What I want you to keep in mind is that you are very likely as a copywriter to teach people how because you are often in an execution level role. And as such, we know how to do this hard thing. People love hearing the how. They adore it, but they will not hire you. They will buy your course to learn more from you, but they won’t hire you to do the work.

Now I have a big asterisk next to that because I have been hired repeatedly and sought out repeatedly after having taught the how. But what I can say is, I have many friends who do similar things. We all met on stages, backstage at speaker events, and there’s like a really great network that you’ll form as you do more of the speaking stuff, which hopefully will come up for you. What I can say is these wonderful people have got more work offers, bigger companies well, it depends depends, but more of the bigger companies, giant projects, giant workshops, easier money out of the same audience I was presenting in front of when they did not get into the how.

What you want to do is wake your audience up to the problem when you’re out there creating content. You wanna teach what you do, not how you do it. You wanna teach what you think, not not the how behind actually executing on that thought. Why you think that way?

Where you help? Hey, UX team, you should invite me into your project when you have these problems in this part of the customer journey.

That’s a when to hire you. That’s where you help. This is what you want to do. You don’t wanna say, hey, UX team.

Here is how to solve this problem at this part in the UX journey. Instead, you help them identify their problems, and then you give them insights into the fact that you do solve those problems, but you don’t get into how. This takes discipline. This is very hard.

I have a course business. I have a coaching business. I can get into the how when it comes to copywriting because it’s it’s actually very good for selling courses to people who want those skills. It’s, again, not great for selling to people who want to pay forty, fifty thousand dollars for a project or who have twenty thousand dollars ready to go a month to get somebody in to make a certain funnel perform better or whatever that might be.

Now, again, I might even sell more courses if I did not teach the how so much. So just keep that in mind. Okay?

Easy on the how. As in, if you’re like, well, give me a formula, Joe. For every nine what, who, when, where, why is you teach, then you can teach one how. And I want it to be so choice.

I want it to be the best how you’ve ever figured out, and it needs to be yours. What I don’t wanna see is anybody teaching things that I taught and, like, hey, Here’s how you optimize a pricing page. If you just take what you learn from someone else and put it out there, you’re not really doing the thought leaders. You’re not really you’re not at all doing the thought leadership work that you need to do.

Okay? So if you’re gonna teach the how, make sure it’s a unique how that you have discovered. Alright.

Now what I want you to do here on this page is write out what you will educate your ICP, which includes, of course, those personas on. And that again, use your message map here. This is all gonna be, like, what part of one giant binder, right, where you can look at it and go, like, here’s what I’m teaching.

Here’s why I’m doing it because these are the things that my persona cares about. Here’s where I’m teaching it because that’s where my persona ear is. Here’s the format in which I’ll teach it because that’s how my my audience consumes content.

That’s what you’re working on here. So if it feels repetitive, welcome to freaking business. Like, things need to be repeated repeatedly. It’s bananas.

So what you wanna do here is say, this is what I’m gonna educate my ICP on. This is where you should know what your specialization is, and you’ll be saying, like, okay. You know your specialization. You know your your message map for your personas.

You know where you’re gonna talk, etcetera, etcetera, based on all the work that you’ve done up until this page, up until this page. What you’ll do and what you will not teach them on. I will avoid teaching them on my favorite headline formulas. Instead, I will teach them on why why a headline is the most important thing, on what happens when a headline goes wrong, on when in my process I would think about writing a headline on how to build a swipe file.

That’s a how, but it’s for building a swipe file So that might be the one how out of, like, the nine things that are what, when, who, where, etcetera. This is your one how and that’s how to build a swipe file. Not how to write a headline.

Just keep I know that’s hard. I know that can be very tricky, or maybe it’s easy for you and it’s just hard for me. But this is where you wanna write that down. Okay?

That will then bring you to a place where you are ready to go back and say, okay. I understand where I’m gonna pitch myself, what I’m going to write, how’s what’s going to be about, why that’s important to my persona, why that’s the right thing for my persona, is it something I care about, what is the thought that I am sharing as a specialist with a unique point of view, which is again all work that we’ve been working on throughout the entirety of the intensive.

What is this message that you are going to radiate as you show up all over the place where your persona’s hanging out consuming information that helps them with their job, and sometimes just consuming information then as a side bonus, they get help with their job. And then why are you the person for that?

Why you? What do you maybe need to modify in your brand, in you and how you appear on camera, in you and how you talk?

Do you need to start developing parts or, like, an entirely new alter ego that’s you dialed up to be the right person to express this thought, believably.

Okay. That’s where you’ll finish, then you’ll finish the whole week out by going back to the first page and filling in the Mad Libs. Now what I want you to do here is figure out your priorities for the next sixty days. My hope is that you’ve come through this, and you’re finishing this week off.

You’re finishing the whole program off, and you’re ready to move on. You’re like, okay. I have got this part nailed. Or if not nailed, I’m at eighty five percent and the remaining fifteen percent I trust in myself and in Joe and the coaching team that we can figure this out together.

I’m good. But now I wanna start making some freaking sales on this stuff. I am ready to get out there, talk my butt off, attract the right audience to me, and start making money. With that in mind, let’s assume you’re moving on to Copy School Professional.

Let’s assume you qualify for it and that you yourself are ready to move forward for into it, which if you qualify, I would say you should. Just like as your coach, you should take the leap and do the thing that’s going to get you the results that you’re looking for rather than backing off, rather than stepping back and going, let me give it some thought by myself over here in this corner where nothing productive has ever really consistently happened.

Let’s stay here where you can be productive in the company of people who will make you feel uncomfortable with all of the challenges that they are putting upon you, but that you can get through with their help. By them, I mean us. That’s me. So here are the priorities for the next sixty days on your own or with your coach. If you haven’t had your call with your coach yet, or if you wanna have one more call and just say, like, hey.

Joe said I could have one more call with you before I go into CoffeeSchool Pro. This is what you will do. You will circle the areas on the sunshine growth model that need the most immediate attention.

Don’t include what you’ve already worked on. So I don’t wanna see any of this specialization stuff. You’ve worked your butt off on specialization. You’ve worked your butt off on the standardized offer.

What you might need to work your butt off now on is around pricing and sales, which is what this is. This is actually an old version of the, sunshine growth model. This is pricing and sales now. You might need to work a lot of marketing, biz dev, and pipeline.

You’ve only just started on thought leadership. You might need to do some work there. Mindset, people, advanced skills you use like list building, like posting to social media, knowing more about what to do there. Sell by chat.

I don’t want to see audience or niche. You’ve worked on that standardized offer. You’ve worked on that specialization. You’ve worked on that.

The other ones, though, yes to continuing to work your butt off on. Make notes here for what those things might be, and then I hope to see you, one, in our Thursday session to discuss this, and two, in copy school pro, assuming you are absolutely ready to move on with us. It’s been a delight.

I’m sorry I had to deliver this while sick, but I also could not not deliver this. I needed to deliver this. It is week eight. So here you are. Thank you so much. I can’t wait to hear from you about how this is going. I know that there are some things that are big changes.

That’s part of the job. You are CEO ing right now, and changes happen when you CEO.

So congratulations on promoting yourself to this cool new level. Now let’s go make you the money so that you can pay yourself like a CEO.

Week 6: Hiring & Onboarding Your VA (or first hire)

Week 6: Hiring & Onboarding Your VA

Transcript

Hey. Hello, y’all. Welcome to week six. This is the week where we can start to move closer to having even more leverage by hiring and onboarding your VA.

Now the title of this is hiring and onboarding your VA, but there are many cases where it won’t be a VA that you’re hiring. So what I really want you to think about is your first hire. That’s what we’re gonna talk about. That’s what we’re gonna get into today.

So we want you to be able to add the right people at the right time so that you can scale for improved profitability.

If you don’t love the idea of a team, we’re gonna talk through, how important it is to have a team member, but I’m not gonna entirely be able to move some people to this idea. So if you feel a lot of hesitation around this, I would, encourage you just to suspend disbelief, just to let go of some of your worries about what it’s like to have a team. Maybe you’ve heard things. Maybe you’ve had a team before.

Maybe you had a bad manager and you don’t wanna be that person ever. Everybody has their own, like, people story, and you definitely do. So that is fair. All I’m asking is that you stick with me and don’t say no out of the gate.

What we’re going to cover may feel like a lot as well, but it’s an entire week of work in something called an intensive, so it shouldn’t be terribly surprising when it feels a little intense sometimes.

We do wanna use this approach to gain leverage so that you can work on the business. There, again, are people who don’t see the value in having people around to help them, but that’s often because those people are poorly trained or they don’t understand your vision or or or. So we can overcome a lot of that, but not if you’ve got a wall up. So do your best to break that wall down or at least just to sit here, close down distractions, listen, look through your workbook, and fill in things as I walk you through them. Okay? Here’s the part of the sunshine growth model that we are working on this week.

This is, of course, where we’re clearing out more of the darker parts of the cloud. So you can start to see that there’s more happening down here around leverage in order to get to that place where you’re ready to build, this thousand dollar a day business. Not just ready to build. You are actively building that business by doing this work. Okay?

If people were not important to this part, to this to this process at all, I wouldn’t include them. I have heard enough enough friction. I’ve heard enough, over the years about how it’s it’s too hard to hire people, etcetera, etcetera, etcetera.

If if it wasn’t important, I wouldn’t teach it to you. It wouldn’t be in here because it’s actually it makes my life harder to have to convince you of this. So trust that I don’t like making my life harder. I like making it easier.

And if I could, I would pull this out, but I absolutely can’t. And every time I meet with an entrepreneur who is stuck at one point five million dollars a year, every time it’s because they don’t wanna hire people. So I want you to think. And even if one point five million sounds really good and, like, wow, that’d be so cool, it’s, you can do so much more.

And as I love to say to all the freelancers I work with, like, business loves to grow.

If you aren’t ready to help it grow, you will end up feeling like you are slamming into a wall again and again. And the sad part is you built that wall, and you will be slamming into it, and you will go fudge.

What should I do?

Do I just, like, have a lifestyle business, or do I go ahead and hire people? So you’ll eventually get there. Trust me. I have a seriously clear crystal ball on this thing after so much time working with so many business owners and working alongside them as well.

Okay. So so so so so. I’m really trying to make a case for you sticking with me through this. This is what you’re going to fill in at the end of the week.

Note that this is called CEO notes. We are going to start referring to you as the CEO of your business. Put aside the fact that you’re also the chief garbage taker outer, and you are all of the other things as well. We’re actually gonna talk about all of that this week, but put that aside and allow yourself to just roll with the idea of being the CEO.

Okay. Excellent.

So let’s get started. You will go back. You’ll complete that worksheet afterward. So have a look through it.

Because this is recorded, you can pause. You can take a look at everything right now, but we’ll go through this at the very end. Okay? Cool.

Alright. Let’s move on then to the next page, which is no employee should be an expense. Okay? So every person you hire should help you make more money.

This means you need to hire the right people in order for that to be true. Otherwise, if you’re hiring people who cost you money instead of making you money, it becomes really frustrating to hire people at all. So there are different ways that they can help you make more money. Sometimes they do this by attracting and closing more clients for you, and that’s when you hire someone who is in direct marketing or who is a ghostwriter if a book is a big part of what you’re going to do to grow your business or in sales.

There’s lots of other roles that could be true there, but that’s where they are actively attracting and sometimes even closing more clients for you. Sometimes they’re gonna be freeing you up so you can do the work that clients are paying you for, and that’s where a lot of people start with a virtual assistant because they’re making it so that you’re not managing your calendar, you’re not doing inbox triage, etcetera, etcetera. And then there’s the other ones, who might just come along and be the people that replace you with the work that clients are paying for, which is a really valuable thing.

If you are a freelance copywriter, this is the kind of stuff that you’ll end up training people on, putting them through copy school or whatever it is that you do, and then, of course, actively training them and giving them feedback. These are people who are going to be copywriters.

Maybe if you’re in ads or sell by chat or email, they’re implementation specialists.

They could be researchers, analysts, designers, conversion optimization experts, all of those sorts of things. Okay? So this is what we’re starting to think through.

Your first hire, as I mentioned, does not have to be a VA. So if that has not felt right, if you’ve been like, I don’t think I need an assistant, then don’t worry about it. I have not had an assistant in years, and it’s fine because the business that I’ve built does not require that I have an assistant. I instead hire other people that can free me up.

My inbox isn’t so bananas that I need somebody to come in and take care of it. So, if yours is, if your calendar is, if you find that you’re getting a lot of leads and they’re slipping through the cracks because you were like, oh, did I ever get back to so and so? Then it’s a good idea to add a VA in. But as you’ll see here, what we really wanna think about is your org chart.

That’s the first place to go when you are thinking who should I hire. A lot of people will tell you that you should start with, well, what are the jobs you don’t wanna do? Others will say, well, what are the jobs you love doing that you can train someone else on so well so that you can go learn other jobs? There is a lot of conflicting information out there.

This is what I have found to be most valuable, creating my own org chart, not for the business that I have today, but for the business that I’m building. So you look at it for three to five years from now. And as I note here, this is something that was clarified brilliantly for me when I read The E Myth Revisited. I always loved an org chart, but I didn’t know how far down the road to make it for, what to really do once I had done that.

So we’re going to have you start this week off by creating your own org chart. Okay? So as you go through and watch this lesson, you should be pausing it and doing the work as you go. Cool?

Then after that or, well, basically, alongside that, you’ll be thinking through how you will deliver world class services to clients. So that will affect your org chart. If you decide, hey. I’m gonna do dedicated pods, actually. I think that what I wanna do is have every client gets these three key people, then there’s an account manager on top of that for the client. That’s how I’m going to deliver world class services. I’ll be adding a pod at a time, which means I’ll have these blips in hires, but it also means that I can control how I grow with the number of clients that I have or have in the pipeline.

And that is what we did at Boxcar, and that is the way that it felt perfect, actually. So to think through pods is a really, really nice thing. But we also explored other ways, and that’s the org chart you can see here. So head on over to this short link.

Go to the, if you’re watching this in some other way, you can go to the QR code as well, and check out that org chart. That’s a really basic breakdown of the standard org chart that you’re likely going to have if you’re building an agency that has a product or, like, a service you stand up upfront, and then you follow with the retainer. So exactly the authoritative offers that we’re talking about here. It’s a really good model to start with when you’re looking at your, at at putting together this org chart for you.

You can full on just copy it. You can just say, cool. That’s my org chart and go with it, and then, like, put your name in the right places. But I really want you to understand as you go through and put this org chart together is that you are actually doing every single role that is on that org chart.

It’s not by putting it on paper that doesn’t make you do that role. You’re already doing all of those roles. So if you have a clear a clear, like, view of the org chart for three to five years from now, that can really help you see, what why you often feel burned out, why you feel like, well, I’m such a good copywriter.

Why isn’t my business growing? And you can start to get a better sense for, oh, it’s because I’m spread thin across all these things. I’m doing the job over here off to the side, which is and you’ll see that on the org chart. This little part, one person is a senior copywriter in there.

I’ve got a couple of those roles. I’m I’m focusing on that part, but look at all these other parts that I actually am doing as well. So that’s a really, useful exercise. So that is where you wanna start right now.

Go ahead and pause this video and look at the org chart, make a copy of it. Or if you like starting from scratch from a blank page, you can look at it and then go and make your own. That is your objective out of the gate. If it helps, I find org charts to be very, I find them, like, inspiring.

When I wanna get regrounded and where I wanna take my business, when things feel slightly chaotic or something goes in an unexpected way, I like to go back to my org chart, have a look at where I’m at, and also change the colors of various boxes so that they are a different color if there’s somebody I’m going to hire next. So I start changing the color of the boxes if I’m like, okay. This is me. I’m the only person on this org chart, but here are three other ones that, three other places that I could hire, in the next four months, let’s say.

So you can change the color to a different color. Just like that, go in and, change the color. I know this is a very small view that you’re seeing of the org chart, but look at it in your own view and then go, okay. Well, I think if I’m the senior copywriter I’m everything.

But if I’m the senior copywriter and I’m also kind of doing CRO a lot, like, I’m over here in my skill set, what do I what what will help me have the best leverage to go forward and make more money? So if you really like the copywriting part, then you can stick with that and maybe hire someone over it, like maybe head of sales or your sales lead comes next or your account lead comes next or your CRO comes next.

If on the other hand, you’re like, okay. I I mean, I did copywriting, but I think I like business and entrepreneurship more, then maybe you’ll wanna look over at you taking over more of the VP of accounts, and thus, you’ll be hiring more underneath this VP of services. So the services area might be where you’d go like, okay. If the next person I wanna hire is actually a senior copywriter, then you can look across and say, okay.

I’ll probably need to spend about a hundred and twenty thousand a year on them, which can sound like a like a lot of money. Like, I don’t have a hundred and twenty thousand dollars a year, to spend on other people in particular. But remember, look at the headline here. No employee should be in expense.

So you don’t have to hire this person tomorrow. You just need to have a sense for who you should hire next based on your org chart for the business you wanna build. K? Thinking about how you can make sure you are freeing yourself up to grow the business, not, oh, I think I need a team.

Who do you need to help you grow the business into what you want it to be? And then if you’re struggling at all with, I don’t know what I want my business to be. It could be any number of things. I’ve been thinking a bit about it. Like, we’ve set your, like, financial goal, and you have that, like, money idea in place.

But this is where you start to think through that ideal business that you want. So that’s everything going on here on this page. Okay? Pause this video, do the org chart work, and then come back.

Welcome back.

Hello.

Alright. We are ready to move on. You’ve got your org chart in place. That’s awesome. You should likely have highlighted on your org chart the next person that you want to hire. Okay?

Excellent. We are doing wonderful work, and we’re moving forward with the sometimes boring boring but necessary work, and that is job descriptions.

Every job that you just put on your org chart needs a description.

That sounds horrible. And before ChatGPT, it was horrible. But you can write this very, very quickly. Now if you’re in CopySchool Pro, that means you have been in CopySchool or are still in CopySchool.

So I would say if you’re not sure how to go about using ChatGPT to write good job descriptions for you, go back to master of AI copy. And in there, you’ll see how to prompt ChatGPT for work like this, just following race. You’ll see it. It’s really straightforward.

It’s very hard to miss. It’s right out the gate when you start master of AI copy. So use that to help you.

Now if you’re cool with it, you’re like, I, Joe, I already use ChatGPT. Awesome. Great. We’re going to use it to write job descriptions.

You’re going to tell it what its job is, which is, hey. You’re a, business owner building an agency, and your next hire is so and so. Then go through and just, like, finish that prompt off following r a c e. Okay?

That was just the rule, for you for the Chat GPT. Okay. What we wanna do here is fill this in as we’re going through and doing these job descriptions. So it’s really straightforward.

You will find very quickly that you need to have a place to put all these job descriptions, and there will be other things you’ll need to know as well. Where does my org chart go? Because this is all documentation that you don’t wanna lose. You should print it off, put it in the in the binder that you have going for CopySchool Pro.

But, also, we’re gonna talk about how to start putting together your documentation, like, where you save all your documentation that that could be, on Google Drive or Dropbox or wherever it is, you’re going to need a well organized place. If it’s not well organized, it’s very, very hard for you to have that leverage that comes with being documented like mad. So keep all that in mind as you start looking through through all of these parts and going like, wow. I’m really doing a lot of creation of documents here.

Where do I save them? We’re about to get into all of that. Okay? But we’re gonna start by identifying the next three roles that you should hire in what order.

So you will fill the worksheet in with those with at least three that you’ve identified. You don’t have to say the deadline, but if you want to go for it, add the deadline, add the ideal date to start, recruiting and when you would like to have them hired and working for you. It’s good. It helps you get closer to that goal you have to grow your business, by which I mean to grow your revenue and your freedom.

Okay. So you’ll write those three in, take them from your org chart, and then we’re gonna go through and do this work with which is each of those jobs needs a job description. Now as I said, every single job on your org chart needs a job description.

But if you don’t have five hours blocked off to get ChattGPT to write those job descriptions for you, you should at least start with the first three. What I do want you to do is commit to going back, and that means put a block in your calendar, or just do it right now. What I need you to do is make sure you create job descriptions for all of the other roles on your org chart.

Because ChatGPT makes this so easy, there should really not be a lot of friction.

I have gone through this exercise many times, and I’ve done it without ChatGPT to help me. So trust me when I say you’re in a good position to do all of the job descriptions. What we wanna do, though, is just start working down the list. So step one will be write a first first draft job description for each of the roles listed here.

Okay? When you’ve done first draft, you don’t have to make it better. You can say you can just do the regular prompting, leave the first draft there when you’re signed in the chat g p t, into four. Just save it.

By which I mean, just leave it there. You can go back to it later and make it better. Then what you wanna do is also draft a salary for each role, and I would push that further to try to calculate the hourly rate, which can help you when you think back to the week where we were talking about your offers in greater detail, and you had in the retainer week, you had the, the calculate really, it would, like, calculate the hours and what everything’s worth and what everything costs, etcetera, etcetera.

This will help you update that better so you can have a sense for the hourly rate and more. You’ll estimate the monthly revenue that you need to generate a bunch of profit on those hires. Thirty percent is okay for an agency.

You might get hired at fifty percent. You might find sometimes that some, team members are not as valuable, quote, unquote valuable, as other team members are. They generate less profit, but they’re critical for overall profit, and that’s okay. What we just wanna do is make sure that you’ve got a sense of how you can afford to do the work of hiring people.

Okay? Estimate what month based on that you will be able to post your first job opening. And this, again, I want I know that some people will be panicked to hear this. Like, it will come off as, oh my gosh.

I didn’t wanna hire anybody. And now I’m, like, thinking I might have to hire someone. I’m gonna have to hire three people all in twenty twenty four or twenty twenty five or whatever year you’re watching this in.

And that’s that can feel scary.

Don’t let it be scary. I know that’s easy for me to say, but we’re just documenting here. We’re just setting business goals.

You get to choose so much of how your business succeeds, and you making the conscious choice to say, here’s the first hire I need and here is when I need them, that is how you turn into a CEO. And who grows a business better than a CEO? You’re not the freelancer right now. You are the CEO.

And the CEO is thinking, who’s coming up next to help me reach these goals? And the CEO is definitely thinking, and with these goals, how are they making me money, which you are allowed to think. It is allowed to be money that goes into your pocket eventually. So keep that in mind.

And if money doesn’t motivate you, translate it to whatever thing you buy with money, whether that’s freedom, whether that’s time with your kids, whatever that is. Okay? So I want you to then add a block to your calendar to post the job opening, but, importantly, I would like you to have a consequence for not posting it. Again, this is the first person you hire.

What are they going to cost you?

When will you be at a place in your business? So thinking of, okay. If I can close my first project for ten thousand dollars, if I can close that this month, get one under my belt, then I close two more next month, and one of those turns into a retainer. That means in three months, I need to have somebody to train to do the retainer work, or I’ll be doing that retainer work myself. So I need to have somebody to train to do these standardized projects. Okay? If that’s true, then I’ll probably wanna hire them the month before so they can, like, watch me do this work.

Allow yourself to believe that you will rise to the occasion and sell these standardized offers. So belief in self goes a long way. We will talk in Copy School Pro about self efficacy and how to reflect on your wins, on other people’s wins, etcetera, and talk to yourself in order to get to a place where you can say, this is what I’m doing. I am the CEO.

So do all of these parts, and then prepare yourself to use LinkedIn to recruit or post job openings. Some people watching this will be ready right away to start recruiting. What I want you to do is get LinkedIn ready for that work. So update your LinkedIn profile so that it has your title, which is CEO.

Create a company page on LinkedIn if you don’t already have one. This doesn’t have to be a lot, and you can get AI to write the first draft for you to make it sound better, and then you do the final version and drop that into LinkedIn as your new company page. Go in Canva, get it designed, etcetera. Make yourself an employee of that page on LinkedIn, and then ensure all of your employees are listed as employees.

So anybody that you may have hired, this is if your mom, your partner, your niece, anybody is working for you, niece, nephew, anybody is working for you or, works for you casually, whatever that might look like, you make sure that they have you listed as somebody that is employing them listed on LinkedIn so that your company page starts to look more like an actual company page, which will help with recruiting.

Do this work?

Okay.

Now we are moving on. So if you haven’t done the work, pause and go do that work, and then I’ll probably see you tomorrow or maybe depending on your when you’re doing this a little bit later today. Okay. So we are back with before and during the hiring process.

Now this is something that I learned from the e myth revisited. I have modified it. There’s a few other people, my coaches, etcetera, who have helped me kind of, like, refine this. We are working on our own video.

I just wanna be really clear about this. If you’re like, Joe, I haven’t seen this video on your job postings.

It’s true. We’re working on it. But by the the time you watch this, we probably will have. It’s just if you’re watching this immediately after I have produced it.

Okay. What we wanna do is this overarching goal that you will have as you start hiring is not just, am I bringing in the right people? Do they know what to do? But are they aligned behind my vision for the business?

Are they aligned behind how I want to be seen as a business, how I want to deliver work as a business, all of the things that come with greater vision, the emotional side of things, and also your brand.

So we’re going to dig deeply now into as deeply as we can in the intensive.

Know that you’ll reflect on this later. It’s a video that you’re going to make. You can you can change that video later. Video is the easiest thing to make right now. There are very few expectations, and everything looks better than it should given how little time it takes to make the thing. So just trust. Okay?

You can go back and change things later. So what we want to do is make sure that we have set out a clear vision for our business. It doesn’t have to mean, like, my vision is this, but it doesn’t hurt to have a vision or a mission for your business to share with people.

This will help you weed out people who are not a good fit and inspire those who might be a great fit. So here’s what I want you to do before we get into this whole video thing I just mentioned. We want a single we want to be able to start scripting how we’re going to talk to candidates, not new hires. This is for candidates about our business and their role in bringing this business to a place where the world reacts wonderfully to it. So this is what you’re going to fill in right now. At this the top here, you’re going to list three words. These are probably going to be adjectives that you would most like your clients to say about working with your team.

What are those three adjectives? They can be, on time. They can be a delight. They can be results driven.

What I would encourage you to do is try to get really honest with it. Don’t say easy to work with because that’s obvious. Like, no one’s gonna say, I hope they want me to be hard to work with. Right?

Unless, for some reason, that’s yours. If yours isn’t obvious, that’s why it belongs here. And if you were if you think about this in the various businesses that you interact with, this is like, if you’re Steve Jobs, you want to come up with three words you want people to say when they have when they use a MacBook.

What are the three words that you want them to say universally?

Those you get to choose. It doesn’t mean everyone will, but those are the ones you get to choose that help you make the best product. And in this case, your product is your business, which is run by people. They are the machine that you’re actually building here.

Okay? So think about your favorite businesses. Think about experiences when you go into your favorite coffee shop. Or if you get your laundry done by a service and it there’s an experience, there’s a feeling there.

Or when there’s not a feeling and you’re like, well, I don’t want that, it feels like there should be more of a feeling there. Like, if your laundry service is not good, what is that feeling? So and it doesn’t have to be it doesn’t have to be a feeling. I said feeling because a feeling is, like, a natural thing.

It’s likely what people will say. But I want you to be really honest for your experience.

What would you most like? What would fill your heart? What would be crazy wonderful for you to hear a client has said about you? Write those down now.

Hit pause in order to write them down and give it some thought. You’re probably gonna end up striking through a couple times, but that’s cool. Get to a place where you feel good. Okay?

So hit pause and do that now.

Okay. Now we’re gonna move on to these three questions down here. We want you to complete the following phrases. When you do read The E Myth Revisited, you will learn about your strategic objective. We’re not talking about your strategic objective here. This is the beginning of this is a part of thinking about your strategic objective.

It’s such a big concept. It’s, a whole book that helps you get there. So I’m not gonna try to cover it in the intensive, especially because I I don’t wanna infringe on any of his copyright. So go and read the book so you have that. And this is what I find helpful. When I am doing when I and I am constantly iterating on my business.

The vision doesn’t really change, but I’m I’m tweaking this stuff all the time, and this is what I find helpful.

So complete these phrases. When it comes to my clients, my team, and the entire experience of working with me, I am hopelessly devoted to the idea that now what is that? Is it to the idea that fill that in with something that’s true for your business. It’s not gonna roll off your tongue likely.

It’s gonna be something you have to think about. What are you hopelessly devoted to when it comes to working with your clients, having them work with you the entire experience of working with you? Are you hopelessly devoted to immaculate attention to detail? If that were true, then you would want to bring immaculate attention to detail to life in your business.

So what would that eventually, you’ll get to a place where you understand what that would look like. You’ll have SOPs that have a heavy focus on attention to detail. So making sure everybody you hire understands what the standards are for great attention to detail. Okay?

It might be something to do with design. It might be something to do with outcomes. It might be something to do with how you make them feel. I don’t know.

But have a thought about what you are hopelessly devoted to, and that could be a reflection of something in your life. If you are meticulous by nature, if you have to make your bed with, like, sharp angles, every morning without fail before eight o’clock, there might be something about discipline in there that you’re hopelessly devoted to the to the idea that people plus discipline equals success. Maybe. Okay?

So start thinking through that. If you’re somebody who likes to chill and roll with it and see what happens and trust in instincts, then you could refine that into something if that’s true for you. So what are you in life hopelessly devoted to? Think about your hobbies.

Think about how you bring yourself to life. And some people are struggling with this right now, and that’s okay.

Try to put something down.

And if you can’t put something down, I do want you to to put a rough draft down, then put a big old asterisk next to this and put a note in your calendar or your to do list, however you get things done. Whatever you don’t bump. It happens in your calendar. It happens.

If it happens in your to do list, you make sure it happens. So if that’s what you want to think through, then, yeah, that’s what we’re talking about here. So give it some thought, but then go back and later on make sure that you refine this. It’s actually a really big strategic question.

We’re moving through it quickly. We could do an entire ninety day program on just coming up with the thing that you are hopelessly devoted to. Or you might finish this in twenty seconds and go next. And whatever that is, that’s cool. So pause right now.

Let yourself have a thought with this. Assign your brain the job of figuring this out even if it’s just a very early draft of that idea.

Okay.

Welcome back. Okay. Next part is filling in this. So, basically, when when you think about that idea and, again, you should have even the roughest draft version of that idea.

When you think about that, how have you brought that to life ideally in work? So if we think back to, this attention to detail question, if that’s something you’re hopelessly devoted to, when did attention to detail really manifest as like, woah. You are so attentive when it comes to detail, and look how awesome that is. I want you to write down the time in your work history when that happened. So think about an example.

What happened for you? When did people plus discipline equal success? When did that happen for you? When did something to do with design best present itself and have a success out of it? Some sort of win, something that felt like you were really laying it on thick that time, and it was great.

Write that out.

Okay. Hopefully, you knew that that pause was for you to go off and write that out. Now comes the final part of this sheet, which is the qualities that helped you best fulfill that idea are. So what is it about you that gives you such incredible attention to detail?

What is it? What are those qualities? So you have a respect for people’s time. You don’t wanna waste people’s time on, on things being wrong, little things being wrong. You wanna make sure that everything is efficient as well. So what are some of the like, just kind of back up to what makes it possible for you to deliver on that idea, whatever your first idea was?

This is the work, by the way, that actually helps you build out a business that is more than just a freelancing business that you dreamt up one day and, surprise, it worked. You need to do more than that to really get ahead. This is the strategy stuff. Why are you doing this so that your brain understands that, your team understands that, your clients see it and feel it and love every moment of working with you because you have this clear idea of what your business is going to do to be an absolute delight to work with. And, again, it doesn’t just mean that it has to be about how you work together, but how you bring to life and exemplify the things that or the thing that matters incredibly to you as a business owner. The example in the e myth revisited is around a hotel, a boutique hotel where they are so hopelessly devoted to the idea that every individual customer deserves incredible attention to detail, I think, or something like that.

That it’s that gets realized for every customer. Every customer coming in the hotel is asked about their newspaper preferences. After dinner, they’re they’re they return to their room and the fireplace is lit. And the next morning, the newspaper they like is waiting for them. This these moments that are critical in making somebody feel like they are working with a professional, and then they feel good about it and keep wanting to come back to you. K? If it feels like no big deal, this is actually what could separate you completely from so many other businesses.

So complete this page. If you’ve struggled with it, give it a pause, and go back tomorrow, later today, after you’ve had a glass of wine or kombucha or whatever it is that’s your drink of choice, come back to it, revisit it, and then move on to the next page.

Alright. Now we take everything that we just did, and we script what I’m calling loosely a recruitment video.

This video is not about recruiting. This video is about making sure that any candidate who is considering working for you can self disqualify or can opt in enthusiastically. And if they haven’t watched the video, when they show up for an interview, you will know they are a terrible fit. So they have to be interested in the business that they’re going to work for.

Okay? I want you to also keep in mind, this is noted as advanced on the bottom of the page. It might feel too far down the road for you. It’s not, though.

It’s not. Just trust me on that one. You need to do this now. You will be surprised at how it helps clarify things for you.

Your values will be part of this, your mission, your vision, all of the work that you’re doing as a business owner, as a CEO will really start coming to life for you. So what I want you to do is everything that you did on the previous page, that’s this page, Everything you did, you can see it’s in this order, but then it’s given one, two, three, four. I want you to take the answers in this order, this answer, then this, then this, then the fourth one. So start with number one, then two, then three, then four, and use those to script out a video, which you’re really is gonna go in the order of one, two, three, four from the previous page.

The objective here is to open by sharing what’s uniquely wonderful about working with you, as in what’s so great about your business, the thing that you completed in question one on the previous page, so that candidates can align with it or at least aspire to it. They’re like, wow. That sounds awesome. I love that you think so much about that.

I love that you are relentlessly, hopelessly devoted to attention to detail, meticulous attention to detail, immaculate attention to detail. If you can open with the thing that makes you that different, then people will understand who you are. From there, we wanna move on to paint a picture of how you make these experience working with you wonderful, the kind of business, the kinds of people who will also help that happen for you. Now we’re not getting into the qualities yet.

Those qualities are going to come afterward. This is the part where you say, like, this is how we’ve brought that together for clients before. So if it’s a meticulous attention to detail, here’s how we did that previously, and that’s where you’re taking question number two. Great.

So they’re like, got it. Attention to detail you’re into. Here is what that looked like for a client. Then we get into, how you make that or yes.

Yes. That’s no. No. No. No. Sorry. I was, like, wrong there. We’ve already done that.

Then you wanna list the qualities that make you shine. Okay? So here’s how we delivered that for a client. Let me summarize what those qualities are that made it possible for the client to have that great experience with us and then finish with, if that sounds good to you, here are some qualities in addition to those that you’re likely wanna have when you work with us.

And that can just be those additional qualities, again, that you already said here. What are the things you’d most like people to say about your about working with your team? It might be that you guys have an incredible you have a credible attention to detail. Maybe that came up already, so that’s cool.

Then you might just not include that because you’ve already made it really clear, or you might just double down and include that. Whatever you said here, we wanna finish with. Okay? That’ll give you a really short script that I want you to then film.

You have a phone. I know you do. Or you have Zoom. You can go in and film it.

Doesn’t have to be beautiful. Just film the damn thing and then upload it to whatever hosting platform you use and embed it on a page. This is where you will drive candidates when they’re ready to apply. So ready to apply?

Hit this link and watch the video, then submit your details below. Cool?

Do that, and then come back.

Okay.

The next few bits I’m gonna move through really fast because we’ve done the critical strategic work, and a lot of this, what follows here is just like, okay. How do we start getting to a place where we know we know what our org chart looks like for the next three to five years? We’ve got job descriptions for the next three hires. I’ve got a freaking recruitment video.

I’ve got everything that it takes. Now what? Now we’re gonna get ready for when we actually start onboarding the right person. Now the reason we’re not getting into the hiring process in detail is because there are different things that you’ll do for different roles.

So these are the kinds of things where you’ll wanna bring your questions, or your ideas to our group call. So make sure you have the work done in time for us to have a good conversation in the group call about anything you may still be wondering. Okay? So I’m gonna move kinda fast because you’ve been doing a lot already, and this is really straightforward stuff.

What I want you to do is put together a central space for your onboarding materials. Now keep in mind that you’re going to have some links, some PDFs, some Google Docs, some Word docs maybe, some keynote files, a variety of files. So you’ll wanna choose a space that allows you to put those together, video as well. Are you gonna do an online training space?

Are you going to do Dropbox? Are you going to publish all of this stuff in a way, like, on Medium or Substack or anything like that?

And then a preferred medium for onboarding materials. So if you’re like, you know, video is easy or, hey. I only do list created with Tango, the software, whatever it is. That’s cool.

Go through. Choose those really quickly. Give them very little thoughts. Just try not to box yourself into something.

The best thing to do is an online training space because you can upload other materials and because you can lead with video, which can be really good for people trying to understand how to work with you. K? Do that, and then we’ll move on.

Alright. Now you’re going to create the beginnings of a new employee handbook. I would strongly suggest you use chat GPT to help you through this. All All you’re gonna do is go through this checklist.

Okay? You want to be sure you have a central space for your onboarding materials, which we just talked about. You’re going to create buckets or categories for those materials. Those will be the file folders or the course modules or whatever it is for however you put it together.

Those are, like, the names for the file folders or the names for the modules. So it could be getting started at and then your business name, software we use at and your business name.

Create those buckets, then you’re gonna go fill in the following page, and you’re going to select the right software to get the job done. K? From there, prioritize getting a bunch of SOPs ready to go this week, and then make sure you work block three more SOPs every week until they’re all done. Now you’re probably wondering, what’s this following page thing?

Because there’s a lot of quick quick stuff underneath, but what’s going on on the following page? Let’s look at this. This is the documentation that you need to have to help people onboard. So what happens before before somebody even starts?

So you said, hey. You got your job. Congratulations. So you’ll send out a offer letter, then you will what else happen happens after that?

You’ll need an email template for sending out the offer letter. So we have an offer letter template, an email template, and then you’ll have an exchange with them. You’ll need to set up their, email address. You’ll need to get them, maybe well, you get get them invited to Slack.

You’ll need to make sure that they, have access to Zoom, all of the stuff that you might need to do before they even start. Then what happens on day one? Okay. So it’s their first day.

Put yourself in their shoes. It’s morning time on their very first day.

How do they show up? Okay. So they’re going to have a meeting very first thing in the morning. They should already have in the prework stage been set up with their calendar.

So day one, if they’re working remotely, then you’ll have a meeting set up to kick off their day one. What else happens? Well, you’re going to need to have training in these early days, in this early week. Where do they find their employee handbook, etcetera.

And then you’ll start digging into the following weeks. So we’ll do a lot of training upfront here. This is where you will wanna dig into training. Do they need access to copy school?

Do they need specific lessons in copy school? What are you going to do? How are they going to know exactly what to do? How do they know where to find the SOPs?

What to do with the SOPs? What if they don’t know what an SOP is? Like, what what do they need here? Do they need a Thinkific login or whatever tool you end up using?

How are you going to walk them through all of this? So you will need a kickoff call agenda. So that’s some prework that you’ll have to do. Now you don’t have to do all of this thinking here in this page.

You can, of course, go through and just, like, put all of your notes and thoughts along there, and you can also go over and create a spreadsheet. So this is a really simple approach. It’s just filling in the table, but go create a spreadsheet of all of the to dos that you’ll have, and then you’ll wanna get started. Once you’ve got that ready, then you’ll wanna go back and do all of this work that follows.

Okay. That takes you to the end of the week. Lots of work. Well done.

Go back and fill in this opening page, which are your notes. If you have anxieties about hiring people, this is a good time to fill them in. Your hopes for hiring people, add that here as well. And if you’re struggling to balance those or you’re like, I got a lot of anxieties and not a lot of hopes, then bring those questions to our call.

Okay? Make sure you know what your next hire is going to be. Write that in here. Make sure you’ve completed your org chart.

Make sure you know where you’re saving all of this. So document this here. So everything here is your at a glance view of the work that you’ve done this week. Go through.

Do everything. A lot of it’s easy. The LinkedIn profile stuff is easy. The video should be pretty easy.

The new employee handbook is going to take more time, and that’s why we have you chipping away at that over the next couple of weeks into a couple of months.

Okay? You’ve got this. Alright. Make sure you do this. Go back if you watch this whole thing together.

Now you have to go back and do the work. So go do it and make sure you have as much done as you can to bring really good questions to our call. Alright? Thank you.

Resources

Resources

Transcript

Hey. Hello, y’all. Welcome to week six. This is the week where we can start to move closer to having even more leverage by hiring and onboarding your VA.

Now the title of this is hiring and onboarding your VA, but there are many cases where it won’t be a VA that you’re hiring. So what I really want you to think about is your first hire. That’s what we’re gonna talk about. That’s what we’re gonna get into today.

So we want you to be able to add the right people at the right time so that you can scale for improved profitability.

If you don’t love the idea of a team, we’re gonna talk through, how important it is to have a team member, but I’m not gonna entirely be able to move some people to this idea. So if you feel a lot of hesitation around this, I would, encourage you just to suspend disbelief, just to let go of some of your worries about what it’s like to have a team. Maybe you’ve heard things. Maybe you’ve had a team before.

Maybe you had a bad manager and you don’t wanna be that person ever. Everybody has their own, like, people story, and you definitely do. So that is fair. All I’m asking is that you stick with me and don’t say no out of the gate.

What we’re going to cover may feel like a lot as well, but it’s an entire week of work in something called an intensive, so it shouldn’t be terribly surprising when it feels a little intense sometimes.

We do wanna use this approach to gain leverage so that you can work on the business. There, again, are people who don’t see the value in having people around to help them, but that’s often because those people are poorly trained or they don’t understand your vision or or or. So we can overcome a lot of that, but not if you’ve got a wall up. So do your best to break that wall down or at least just to sit here, close down distractions, listen, look through your workbook, and fill in things as I walk you through them. Okay? Here’s the part of the sunshine growth model that we are working on this week.

This is, of course, where we’re clearing out more of the darker parts of the cloud. So you can start to see that there’s more happening down here around leverage in order to get to that place where you’re ready to build, this thousand dollar a day business. Not just ready to build. You are actively building that business by doing this work. Okay?

If people were not important to this part, to this to this process at all, I wouldn’t include them. I have heard enough enough friction. I’ve heard enough, over the years about how it’s it’s too hard to hire people, etcetera, etcetera, etcetera.

If if it wasn’t important, I wouldn’t teach it to you. It wouldn’t be in here because it’s actually it makes my life harder to have to convince you of this. So trust that I don’t like making my life harder. I like making it easier.

And if I could, I would pull this out, but I absolutely can’t. And every time I meet with an entrepreneur who is stuck at one point five million dollars a year, every time it’s because they don’t wanna hire people. So I want you to think. And even if one point five million sounds really good and, like, wow, that’d be so cool, it’s, you can do so much more.

And as I love to say to all the freelancers I work with, like, business loves to grow.

If you aren’t ready to help it grow, you will end up feeling like you are slamming into a wall again and again. And the sad part is you built that wall, and you will be slamming into it, and you will go fudge.

What should I do?

Do I just, like, have a lifestyle business, or do I go ahead and hire people? So you’ll eventually get there. Trust me. I have a seriously clear crystal ball on this thing after so much time working with so many business owners and working alongside them as well.

Okay. So so so so so. I’m really trying to make a case for you sticking with me through this. This is what you’re going to fill in at the end of the week.

Note that this is called CEO notes. We are going to start referring to you as the CEO of your business. Put aside the fact that you’re also the chief garbage taker outer, and you are all of the other things as well. We’re actually gonna talk about all of that this week, but put that aside and allow yourself to just roll with the idea of being the CEO.

Okay. Excellent.

So let’s get started. You will go back. You’ll complete that worksheet afterward. So have a look through it.

Because this is recorded, you can pause. You can take a look at everything right now, but we’ll go through this at the very end. Okay? Cool.

Alright. Let’s move on then to the next page, which is no employee should be an expense. Okay? So every person you hire should help you make more money.

This means you need to hire the right people in order for that to be true. Otherwise, if you’re hiring people who cost you money instead of making you money, it becomes really frustrating to hire people at all. So there are different ways that they can help you make more money. Sometimes they do this by attracting and closing more clients for you, and that’s when you hire someone who is in direct marketing or who is a ghostwriter if a book is a big part of what you’re going to do to grow your business or in sales.

There’s lots of other roles that could be true there, but that’s where they are actively attracting and sometimes even closing more clients for you. Sometimes they’re gonna be freeing you up so you can do the work that clients are paying you for, and that’s where a lot of people start with a virtual assistant because they’re making it so that you’re not managing your calendar, you’re not doing inbox triage, etcetera, etcetera. And then there’s the other ones, who might just come along and be the people that replace you with the work that clients are paying for, which is a really valuable thing.

If you are a freelance copywriter, this is the kind of stuff that you’ll end up training people on, putting them through copy school or whatever it is that you do, and then, of course, actively training them and giving them feedback. These are people who are going to be copywriters.

Maybe if you’re in ads or sell by chat or email, they’re implementation specialists.

They could be researchers, analysts, designers, conversion optimization experts, all of those sorts of things. Okay? So this is what we’re starting to think through.

Your first hire, as I mentioned, does not have to be a VA. So if that has not felt right, if you’ve been like, I don’t think I need an assistant, then don’t worry about it. I have not had an assistant in years, and it’s fine because the business that I’ve built does not require that I have an assistant. I instead hire other people that can free me up.

My inbox isn’t so bananas that I need somebody to come in and take care of it. So, if yours is, if your calendar is, if you find that you’re getting a lot of leads and they’re slipping through the cracks because you were like, oh, did I ever get back to so and so? Then it’s a good idea to add a VA in. But as you’ll see here, what we really wanna think about is your org chart.

That’s the first place to go when you are thinking who should I hire. A lot of people will tell you that you should start with, well, what are the jobs you don’t wanna do? Others will say, well, what are the jobs you love doing that you can train someone else on so well so that you can go learn other jobs? There is a lot of conflicting information out there.

This is what I have found to be most valuable, creating my own org chart, not for the business that I have today, but for the business that I’m building. So you look at it for three to five years from now. And as I note here, this is something that was clarified brilliantly for me when I read The E Myth Revisited. I always loved an org chart, but I didn’t know how far down the road to make it for, what to really do once I had done that.

So we’re going to have you start this week off by creating your own org chart. Okay? So as you go through and watch this lesson, you should be pausing it and doing the work as you go. Cool?

Then after that or, well, basically, alongside that, you’ll be thinking through how you will deliver world class services to clients. So that will affect your org chart. If you decide, hey. I’m gonna do dedicated pods, actually. I think that what I wanna do is have every client gets these three key people, then there’s an account manager on top of that for the client. That’s how I’m going to deliver world class services. I’ll be adding a pod at a time, which means I’ll have these blips in hires, but it also means that I can control how I grow with the number of clients that I have or have in the pipeline.

And that is what we did at Boxcar, and that is the way that it felt perfect, actually. So to think through pods is a really, really nice thing. But we also explored other ways, and that’s the org chart you can see here. So head on over to this short link.

Go to the, if you’re watching this in some other way, you can go to the QR code as well, and check out that org chart. That’s a really basic breakdown of the standard org chart that you’re likely going to have if you’re building an agency that has a product or, like, a service you stand up upfront, and then you follow with the retainer. So exactly the authoritative offers that we’re talking about here. It’s a really good model to start with when you’re looking at your, at at putting together this org chart for you.

You can full on just copy it. You can just say, cool. That’s my org chart and go with it, and then, like, put your name in the right places. But I really want you to understand as you go through and put this org chart together is that you are actually doing every single role that is on that org chart.

It’s not by putting it on paper that doesn’t make you do that role. You’re already doing all of those roles. So if you have a clear a clear, like, view of the org chart for three to five years from now, that can really help you see, what why you often feel burned out, why you feel like, well, I’m such a good copywriter.

Why isn’t my business growing? And you can start to get a better sense for, oh, it’s because I’m spread thin across all these things. I’m doing the job over here off to the side, which is and you’ll see that on the org chart. This little part, one person is a senior copywriter in there.

I’ve got a couple of those roles. I’m I’m focusing on that part, but look at all these other parts that I actually am doing as well. So that’s a really, useful exercise. So that is where you wanna start right now.

Go ahead and pause this video and look at the org chart, make a copy of it. Or if you like starting from scratch from a blank page, you can look at it and then go and make your own. That is your objective out of the gate. If it helps, I find org charts to be very, I find them, like, inspiring.

When I wanna get regrounded and where I wanna take my business, when things feel slightly chaotic or something goes in an unexpected way, I like to go back to my org chart, have a look at where I’m at, and also change the colors of various boxes so that they are a different color if there’s somebody I’m going to hire next. So I start changing the color of the boxes if I’m like, okay. This is me. I’m the only person on this org chart, but here are three other ones that, three other places that I could hire, in the next four months, let’s say.

So you can change the color to a different color. Just like that, go in and, change the color. I know this is a very small view that you’re seeing of the org chart, but look at it in your own view and then go, okay. Well, I think if I’m the senior copywriter I’m everything.

But if I’m the senior copywriter and I’m also kind of doing CRO a lot, like, I’m over here in my skill set, what do I what what will help me have the best leverage to go forward and make more money? So if you really like the copywriting part, then you can stick with that and maybe hire someone over it, like maybe head of sales or your sales lead comes next or your account lead comes next or your CRO comes next.

If on the other hand, you’re like, okay. I I mean, I did copywriting, but I think I like business and entrepreneurship more, then maybe you’ll wanna look over at you taking over more of the VP of accounts, and thus, you’ll be hiring more underneath this VP of services. So the services area might be where you’d go like, okay. If the next person I wanna hire is actually a senior copywriter, then you can look across and say, okay.

I’ll probably need to spend about a hundred and twenty thousand a year on them, which can sound like a like a lot of money. Like, I don’t have a hundred and twenty thousand dollars a year, to spend on other people in particular. But remember, look at the headline here. No employee should be in expense.

So you don’t have to hire this person tomorrow. You just need to have a sense for who you should hire next based on your org chart for the business you wanna build. K? Thinking about how you can make sure you are freeing yourself up to grow the business, not, oh, I think I need a team.

Who do you need to help you grow the business into what you want it to be? And then if you’re struggling at all with, I don’t know what I want my business to be. It could be any number of things. I’ve been thinking a bit about it. Like, we’ve set your, like, financial goal, and you have that, like, money idea in place.

But this is where you start to think through that ideal business that you want. So that’s everything going on here on this page. Okay? Pause this video, do the org chart work, and then come back.

Welcome back.

Hello.

Alright. We are ready to move on. You’ve got your org chart in place. That’s awesome. You should likely have highlighted on your org chart the next person that you want to hire. Okay?

Excellent. We are doing wonderful work, and we’re moving forward with the sometimes boring boring but necessary work, and that is job descriptions.

Every job that you just put on your org chart needs a description.

That sounds horrible. And before ChatGPT, it was horrible. But you can write this very, very quickly. Now if you’re in CopySchool Pro, that means you have been in CopySchool or are still in CopySchool.

So I would say if you’re not sure how to go about using ChatGPT to write good job descriptions for you, go back to master of AI copy. And in there, you’ll see how to prompt ChatGPT for work like this, just following race. You’ll see it. It’s really straightforward.

It’s very hard to miss. It’s right out the gate when you start master of AI copy. So use that to help you.

Now if you’re cool with it, you’re like, I, Joe, I already use ChatGPT. Awesome. Great. We’re going to use it to write job descriptions.

You’re going to tell it what its job is, which is, hey. You’re a, business owner building an agency, and your next hire is so and so. Then go through and just, like, finish that prompt off following r a c e. Okay?

That was just the rule, for you for the Chat GPT. Okay. What we wanna do here is fill this in as we’re going through and doing these job descriptions. So it’s really straightforward.

You will find very quickly that you need to have a place to put all these job descriptions, and there will be other things you’ll need to know as well. Where does my org chart go? Because this is all documentation that you don’t wanna lose. You should print it off, put it in the in the binder that you have going for CopySchool Pro.

But, also, we’re gonna talk about how to start putting together your documentation, like, where you save all your documentation that that could be, on Google Drive or Dropbox or wherever it is, you’re going to need a well organized place. If it’s not well organized, it’s very, very hard for you to have that leverage that comes with being documented like mad. So keep all that in mind as you start looking through through all of these parts and going like, wow. I’m really doing a lot of creation of documents here.

Where do I save them? We’re about to get into all of that. Okay? But we’re gonna start by identifying the next three roles that you should hire in what order.

So you will fill the worksheet in with those with at least three that you’ve identified. You don’t have to say the deadline, but if you want to go for it, add the deadline, add the ideal date to start, recruiting and when you would like to have them hired and working for you. It’s good. It helps you get closer to that goal you have to grow your business, by which I mean to grow your revenue and your freedom.

Okay. So you’ll write those three in, take them from your org chart, and then we’re gonna go through and do this work with which is each of those jobs needs a job description. Now as I said, every single job on your org chart needs a job description.

But if you don’t have five hours blocked off to get ChattGPT to write those job descriptions for you, you should at least start with the first three. What I do want you to do is commit to going back, and that means put a block in your calendar, or just do it right now. What I need you to do is make sure you create job descriptions for all of the other roles on your org chart.

Because ChatGPT makes this so easy, there should really not be a lot of friction.

I have gone through this exercise many times, and I’ve done it without ChatGPT to help me. So trust me when I say you’re in a good position to do all of the job descriptions. What we wanna do, though, is just start working down the list. So step one will be write a first first draft job description for each of the roles listed here.

Okay? When you’ve done first draft, you don’t have to make it better. You can say you can just do the regular prompting, leave the first draft there when you’re signed in the chat g p t, into four. Just save it.

By which I mean, just leave it there. You can go back to it later and make it better. Then what you wanna do is also draft a salary for each role, and I would push that further to try to calculate the hourly rate, which can help you when you think back to the week where we were talking about your offers in greater detail, and you had in the retainer week, you had the, the calculate really, it would, like, calculate the hours and what everything’s worth and what everything costs, etcetera, etcetera.

This will help you update that better so you can have a sense for the hourly rate and more. You’ll estimate the monthly revenue that you need to generate a bunch of profit on those hires. Thirty percent is okay for an agency.

You might get hired at fifty percent. You might find sometimes that some, team members are not as valuable, quote, unquote valuable, as other team members are. They generate less profit, but they’re critical for overall profit, and that’s okay. What we just wanna do is make sure that you’ve got a sense of how you can afford to do the work of hiring people.

Okay? Estimate what month based on that you will be able to post your first job opening. And this, again, I want I know that some people will be panicked to hear this. Like, it will come off as, oh my gosh.

I didn’t wanna hire anybody. And now I’m, like, thinking I might have to hire someone. I’m gonna have to hire three people all in twenty twenty four or twenty twenty five or whatever year you’re watching this in.

And that’s that can feel scary.

Don’t let it be scary. I know that’s easy for me to say, but we’re just documenting here. We’re just setting business goals.

You get to choose so much of how your business succeeds, and you making the conscious choice to say, here’s the first hire I need and here is when I need them, that is how you turn into a CEO. And who grows a business better than a CEO? You’re not the freelancer right now. You are the CEO.

And the CEO is thinking, who’s coming up next to help me reach these goals? And the CEO is definitely thinking, and with these goals, how are they making me money, which you are allowed to think. It is allowed to be money that goes into your pocket eventually. So keep that in mind.

And if money doesn’t motivate you, translate it to whatever thing you buy with money, whether that’s freedom, whether that’s time with your kids, whatever that is. Okay? So I want you to then add a block to your calendar to post the job opening, but, importantly, I would like you to have a consequence for not posting it. Again, this is the first person you hire.

What are they going to cost you?

When will you be at a place in your business? So thinking of, okay. If I can close my first project for ten thousand dollars, if I can close that this month, get one under my belt, then I close two more next month, and one of those turns into a retainer. That means in three months, I need to have somebody to train to do the retainer work, or I’ll be doing that retainer work myself. So I need to have somebody to train to do these standardized projects. Okay? If that’s true, then I’ll probably wanna hire them the month before so they can, like, watch me do this work.

Allow yourself to believe that you will rise to the occasion and sell these standardized offers. So belief in self goes a long way. We will talk in Copy School Pro about self efficacy and how to reflect on your wins, on other people’s wins, etcetera, and talk to yourself in order to get to a place where you can say, this is what I’m doing. I am the CEO.

So do all of these parts, and then prepare yourself to use LinkedIn to recruit or post job openings. Some people watching this will be ready right away to start recruiting. What I want you to do is get LinkedIn ready for that work. So update your LinkedIn profile so that it has your title, which is CEO.

Create a company page on LinkedIn if you don’t already have one. This doesn’t have to be a lot, and you can get AI to write the first draft for you to make it sound better, and then you do the final version and drop that into LinkedIn as your new company page. Go in Canva, get it designed, etcetera. Make yourself an employee of that page on LinkedIn, and then ensure all of your employees are listed as employees.

So anybody that you may have hired, this is if your mom, your partner, your niece, anybody is working for you, niece, nephew, anybody is working for you or, works for you casually, whatever that might look like, you make sure that they have you listed as somebody that is employing them listed on LinkedIn so that your company page starts to look more like an actual company page, which will help with recruiting.

Do this work?

Okay.

Now we are moving on. So if you haven’t done the work, pause and go do that work, and then I’ll probably see you tomorrow or maybe depending on your when you’re doing this a little bit later today. Okay. So we are back with before and during the hiring process.

Now this is something that I learned from the e myth revisited. I have modified it. There’s a few other people, my coaches, etcetera, who have helped me kind of, like, refine this. We are working on our own video.

I just wanna be really clear about this. If you’re like, Joe, I haven’t seen this video on your job postings.

It’s true. We’re working on it. But by the the time you watch this, we probably will have. It’s just if you’re watching this immediately after I have produced it.

Okay. What we wanna do is this overarching goal that you will have as you start hiring is not just, am I bringing in the right people? Do they know what to do? But are they aligned behind my vision for the business?

Are they aligned behind how I want to be seen as a business, how I want to deliver work as a business, all of the things that come with greater vision, the emotional side of things, and also your brand.

So we’re going to dig deeply now into as deeply as we can in the intensive.

Know that you’ll reflect on this later. It’s a video that you’re going to make. You can you can change that video later. Video is the easiest thing to make right now. There are very few expectations, and everything looks better than it should given how little time it takes to make the thing. So just trust. Okay?

You can go back and change things later. So what we want to do is make sure that we have set out a clear vision for our business. It doesn’t have to mean, like, my vision is this, but it doesn’t hurt to have a vision or a mission for your business to share with people.

This will help you weed out people who are not a good fit and inspire those who might be a great fit. So here’s what I want you to do before we get into this whole video thing I just mentioned. We want a single we want to be able to start scripting how we’re going to talk to candidates, not new hires. This is for candidates about our business and their role in bringing this business to a place where the world reacts wonderfully to it. So this is what you’re going to fill in right now. At this the top here, you’re going to list three words. These are probably going to be adjectives that you would most like your clients to say about working with your team.

What are those three adjectives? They can be, on time. They can be a delight. They can be results driven.

What I would encourage you to do is try to get really honest with it. Don’t say easy to work with because that’s obvious. Like, no one’s gonna say, I hope they want me to be hard to work with. Right?

Unless, for some reason, that’s yours. If yours isn’t obvious, that’s why it belongs here. And if you were if you think about this in the various businesses that you interact with, this is like, if you’re Steve Jobs, you want to come up with three words you want people to say when they have when they use a MacBook.

What are the three words that you want them to say universally?

Those you get to choose. It doesn’t mean everyone will, but those are the ones you get to choose that help you make the best product. And in this case, your product is your business, which is run by people. They are the machine that you’re actually building here.

Okay? So think about your favorite businesses. Think about experiences when you go into your favorite coffee shop. Or if you get your laundry done by a service and it there’s an experience, there’s a feeling there.

Or when there’s not a feeling and you’re like, well, I don’t want that, it feels like there should be more of a feeling there. Like, if your laundry service is not good, what is that feeling? So and it doesn’t have to be it doesn’t have to be a feeling. I said feeling because a feeling is, like, a natural thing.

It’s likely what people will say. But I want you to be really honest for your experience.

What would you most like? What would fill your heart? What would be crazy wonderful for you to hear a client has said about you? Write those down now.

Hit pause in order to write them down and give it some thought. You’re probably gonna end up striking through a couple times, but that’s cool. Get to a place where you feel good. Okay?

So hit pause and do that now.

Okay. Now we’re gonna move on to these three questions down here. We want you to complete the following phrases. When you do read The E Myth Revisited, you will learn about your strategic objective. We’re not talking about your strategic objective here. This is the beginning of this is a part of thinking about your strategic objective.

It’s such a big concept. It’s, a whole book that helps you get there. So I’m not gonna try to cover it in the intensive, especially because I I don’t wanna infringe on any of his copyright. So go and read the book so you have that. And this is what I find helpful. When I am doing when I and I am constantly iterating on my business.

The vision doesn’t really change, but I’m I’m tweaking this stuff all the time, and this is what I find helpful.

So complete these phrases. When it comes to my clients, my team, and the entire experience of working with me, I am hopelessly devoted to the idea that now what is that? Is it to the idea that fill that in with something that’s true for your business. It’s not gonna roll off your tongue likely.

It’s gonna be something you have to think about. What are you hopelessly devoted to when it comes to working with your clients, having them work with you the entire experience of working with you? Are you hopelessly devoted to immaculate attention to detail? If that were true, then you would want to bring immaculate attention to detail to life in your business.

So what would that eventually, you’ll get to a place where you understand what that would look like. You’ll have SOPs that have a heavy focus on attention to detail. So making sure everybody you hire understands what the standards are for great attention to detail. Okay?

It might be something to do with design. It might be something to do with outcomes. It might be something to do with how you make them feel. I don’t know.

But have a thought about what you are hopelessly devoted to, and that could be a reflection of something in your life. If you are meticulous by nature, if you have to make your bed with, like, sharp angles, every morning without fail before eight o’clock, there might be something about discipline in there that you’re hopelessly devoted to the to the idea that people plus discipline equals success. Maybe. Okay?

So start thinking through that. If you’re somebody who likes to chill and roll with it and see what happens and trust in instincts, then you could refine that into something if that’s true for you. So what are you in life hopelessly devoted to? Think about your hobbies.

Think about how you bring yourself to life. And some people are struggling with this right now, and that’s okay.

Try to put something down.

And if you can’t put something down, I do want you to to put a rough draft down, then put a big old asterisk next to this and put a note in your calendar or your to do list, however you get things done. Whatever you don’t bump. It happens in your calendar. It happens.

If it happens in your to do list, you make sure it happens. So if that’s what you want to think through, then, yeah, that’s what we’re talking about here. So give it some thought, but then go back and later on make sure that you refine this. It’s actually a really big strategic question.

We’re moving through it quickly. We could do an entire ninety day program on just coming up with the thing that you are hopelessly devoted to. Or you might finish this in twenty seconds and go next. And whatever that is, that’s cool. So pause right now.

Let yourself have a thought with this. Assign your brain the job of figuring this out even if it’s just a very early draft of that idea.

Okay.

Welcome back. Okay. Next part is filling in this. So, basically, when when you think about that idea and, again, you should have even the roughest draft version of that idea.

When you think about that, how have you brought that to life ideally in work? So if we think back to, this attention to detail question, if that’s something you’re hopelessly devoted to, when did attention to detail really manifest as like, woah. You are so attentive when it comes to detail, and look how awesome that is. I want you to write down the time in your work history when that happened. So think about an example.

What happened for you? When did people plus discipline equal success? When did that happen for you? When did something to do with design best present itself and have a success out of it? Some sort of win, something that felt like you were really laying it on thick that time, and it was great.

Write that out.

Okay. Hopefully, you knew that that pause was for you to go off and write that out. Now comes the final part of this sheet, which is the qualities that helped you best fulfill that idea are. So what is it about you that gives you such incredible attention to detail?

What is it? What are those qualities? So you have a respect for people’s time. You don’t wanna waste people’s time on, on things being wrong, little things being wrong. You wanna make sure that everything is efficient as well. So what are some of the like, just kind of back up to what makes it possible for you to deliver on that idea, whatever your first idea was?

This is the work, by the way, that actually helps you build out a business that is more than just a freelancing business that you dreamt up one day and, surprise, it worked. You need to do more than that to really get ahead. This is the strategy stuff. Why are you doing this so that your brain understands that, your team understands that, your clients see it and feel it and love every moment of working with you because you have this clear idea of what your business is going to do to be an absolute delight to work with. And, again, it doesn’t just mean that it has to be about how you work together, but how you bring to life and exemplify the things that or the thing that matters incredibly to you as a business owner. The example in the e myth revisited is around a hotel, a boutique hotel where they are so hopelessly devoted to the idea that every individual customer deserves incredible attention to detail, I think, or something like that.

That it’s that gets realized for every customer. Every customer coming in the hotel is asked about their newspaper preferences. After dinner, they’re they’re they return to their room and the fireplace is lit. And the next morning, the newspaper they like is waiting for them. This these moments that are critical in making somebody feel like they are working with a professional, and then they feel good about it and keep wanting to come back to you. K? If it feels like no big deal, this is actually what could separate you completely from so many other businesses.

So complete this page. If you’ve struggled with it, give it a pause, and go back tomorrow, later today, after you’ve had a glass of wine or kombucha or whatever it is that’s your drink of choice, come back to it, revisit it, and then move on to the next page.

Alright. Now we take everything that we just did, and we script what I’m calling loosely a recruitment video.

This video is not about recruiting. This video is about making sure that any candidate who is considering working for you can self disqualify or can opt in enthusiastically. And if they haven’t watched the video, when they show up for an interview, you will know they are a terrible fit. So they have to be interested in the business that they’re going to work for.

Okay? I want you to also keep in mind, this is noted as advanced on the bottom of the page. It might feel too far down the road for you. It’s not, though.

It’s not. Just trust me on that one. You need to do this now. You will be surprised at how it helps clarify things for you.

Your values will be part of this, your mission, your vision, all of the work that you’re doing as a business owner, as a CEO will really start coming to life for you. So what I want you to do is everything that you did on the previous page, that’s this page, Everything you did, you can see it’s in this order, but then it’s given one, two, three, four. I want you to take the answers in this order, this answer, then this, then this, then the fourth one. So start with number one, then two, then three, then four, and use those to script out a video, which you’re really is gonna go in the order of one, two, three, four from the previous page.

The objective here is to open by sharing what’s uniquely wonderful about working with you, as in what’s so great about your business, the thing that you completed in question one on the previous page, so that candidates can align with it or at least aspire to it. They’re like, wow. That sounds awesome. I love that you think so much about that.

I love that you are relentlessly, hopelessly devoted to attention to detail, meticulous attention to detail, immaculate attention to detail. If you can open with the thing that makes you that different, then people will understand who you are. From there, we wanna move on to paint a picture of how you make these experience working with you wonderful, the kind of business, the kinds of people who will also help that happen for you. Now we’re not getting into the qualities yet.

Those qualities are going to come afterward. This is the part where you say, like, this is how we’ve brought that together for clients before. So if it’s a meticulous attention to detail, here’s how we did that previously, and that’s where you’re taking question number two. Great.

So they’re like, got it. Attention to detail you’re into. Here is what that looked like for a client. Then we get into, how you make that or yes.

Yes. That’s no. No. No. No. Sorry. I was, like, wrong there. We’ve already done that.

Then you wanna list the qualities that make you shine. Okay? So here’s how we delivered that for a client. Let me summarize what those qualities are that made it possible for the client to have that great experience with us and then finish with, if that sounds good to you, here are some qualities in addition to those that you’re likely wanna have when you work with us.

And that can just be those additional qualities, again, that you already said here. What are the things you’d most like people to say about your about working with your team? It might be that you guys have an incredible you have a credible attention to detail. Maybe that came up already, so that’s cool.

Then you might just not include that because you’ve already made it really clear, or you might just double down and include that. Whatever you said here, we wanna finish with. Okay? That’ll give you a really short script that I want you to then film.

You have a phone. I know you do. Or you have Zoom. You can go in and film it.

Doesn’t have to be beautiful. Just film the damn thing and then upload it to whatever hosting platform you use and embed it on a page. This is where you will drive candidates when they’re ready to apply. So ready to apply?

Hit this link and watch the video, then submit your details below. Cool?

Do that, and then come back.

Okay.

The next few bits I’m gonna move through really fast because we’ve done the critical strategic work, and a lot of this, what follows here is just like, okay. How do we start getting to a place where we know we know what our org chart looks like for the next three to five years? We’ve got job descriptions for the next three hires. I’ve got a freaking recruitment video.

I’ve got everything that it takes. Now what? Now we’re gonna get ready for when we actually start onboarding the right person. Now the reason we’re not getting into the hiring process in detail is because there are different things that you’ll do for different roles.

So these are the kinds of things where you’ll wanna bring your questions, or your ideas to our group call. So make sure you have the work done in time for us to have a good conversation in the group call about anything you may still be wondering. Okay? So I’m gonna move kinda fast because you’ve been doing a lot already, and this is really straightforward stuff.

What I want you to do is put together a central space for your onboarding materials. Now keep in mind that you’re going to have some links, some PDFs, some Google Docs, some Word docs maybe, some keynote files, a variety of files. So you’ll wanna choose a space that allows you to put those together, video as well. Are you gonna do an online training space?

Are you going to do Dropbox? Are you going to publish all of this stuff in a way, like, on Medium or Substack or anything like that?

And then a preferred medium for onboarding materials. So if you’re like, you know, video is easy or, hey. I only do list created with Tango, the software, whatever it is. That’s cool.

Go through. Choose those really quickly. Give them very little thoughts. Just try not to box yourself into something.

The best thing to do is an online training space because you can upload other materials and because you can lead with video, which can be really good for people trying to understand how to work with you. K? Do that, and then we’ll move on.

Alright. Now you’re going to create the beginnings of a new employee handbook. I would strongly suggest you use chat GPT to help you through this. All All you’re gonna do is go through this checklist.

Okay? You want to be sure you have a central space for your onboarding materials, which we just talked about. You’re going to create buckets or categories for those materials. Those will be the file folders or the course modules or whatever it is for however you put it together.

Those are, like, the names for the file folders or the names for the modules. So it could be getting started at and then your business name, software we use at and your business name.

Create those buckets, then you’re gonna go fill in the following page, and you’re going to select the right software to get the job done. K? From there, prioritize getting a bunch of SOPs ready to go this week, and then make sure you work block three more SOPs every week until they’re all done. Now you’re probably wondering, what’s this following page thing?

Because there’s a lot of quick quick stuff underneath, but what’s going on on the following page? Let’s look at this. This is the documentation that you need to have to help people onboard. So what happens before before somebody even starts?

So you said, hey. You got your job. Congratulations. So you’ll send out a offer letter, then you will what else happen happens after that?

You’ll need an email template for sending out the offer letter. So we have an offer letter template, an email template, and then you’ll have an exchange with them. You’ll need to set up their, email address. You’ll need to get them, maybe well, you get get them invited to Slack.

You’ll need to make sure that they, have access to Zoom, all of the stuff that you might need to do before they even start. Then what happens on day one? Okay. So it’s their first day.

Put yourself in their shoes. It’s morning time on their very first day.

How do they show up? Okay. So they’re going to have a meeting very first thing in the morning. They should already have in the prework stage been set up with their calendar.

So day one, if they’re working remotely, then you’ll have a meeting set up to kick off their day one. What else happens? Well, you’re going to need to have training in these early days, in this early week. Where do they find their employee handbook, etcetera.

And then you’ll start digging into the following weeks. So we’ll do a lot of training upfront here. This is where you will wanna dig into training. Do they need access to copy school?

Do they need specific lessons in copy school? What are you going to do? How are they going to know exactly what to do? How do they know where to find the SOPs?

What to do with the SOPs? What if they don’t know what an SOP is? Like, what what do they need here? Do they need a Thinkific login or whatever tool you end up using?

How are you going to walk them through all of this? So you will need a kickoff call agenda. So that’s some prework that you’ll have to do. Now you don’t have to do all of this thinking here in this page.

You can, of course, go through and just, like, put all of your notes and thoughts along there, and you can also go over and create a spreadsheet. So this is a really simple approach. It’s just filling in the table, but go create a spreadsheet of all of the to dos that you’ll have, and then you’ll wanna get started. Once you’ve got that ready, then you’ll wanna go back and do all of this work that follows.

Okay. That takes you to the end of the week. Lots of work. Well done.

Go back and fill in this opening page, which are your notes. If you have anxieties about hiring people, this is a good time to fill them in. Your hopes for hiring people, add that here as well. And if you’re struggling to balance those or you’re like, I got a lot of anxieties and not a lot of hopes, then bring those questions to our call.

Okay? Make sure you know what your next hire is going to be. Write that in here. Make sure you’ve completed your org chart.

Make sure you know where you’re saving all of this. So document this here. So everything here is your at a glance view of the work that you’ve done this week. Go through.

Do everything. A lot of it’s easy. The LinkedIn profile stuff is easy. The video should be pretty easy.

The new employee handbook is going to take more time, and that’s why we have you chipping away at that over the next couple of weeks into a couple of months.

Okay? You’ve got this. Alright. Make sure you do this. Go back if you watch this whole thing together.

Now you have to go back and do the work. So go do it and make sure you have as much done as you can to bring really good questions to our call. Alright? Thank you.

Week 5: Your Templated Proposal

Week 5: Your Templated Proposal

Transcript

This is a working session.

Hands on work. So today, Sarah vanishes, today is all about your proposal. We are standardizing, templating your proposal.

Andrew’s gonna regret that he just showed up for this because the work is real and, might I add, boring.

All the most effective work is ultimately terribly boring, but we get it done, and then we can move on with our lives and never have to do that thing again if we do it right the first time. So today, we just gonna keep clapping after every word, see if that gets annoying.

I haven’t had coffee, so I’m doing my best to, like, energize myself.

I shared this worksheet for today in the intensive freelancing Slack, channel. So if you have not yet retrieved it from there, please go and do so. Let me know if you, for some reason, cannot.

And, actually, let Sarah know because Sarah can help you with that, whereas I can do very little for you right now. But it’s in the Coffee School Pro Slack area in the private channel that you are invited to. If you’re here, you’re in it. So you should be able to find it. No problemo.

In that, we will walk through what we’re going to accomplish today, and you will see a Canva template.

If you don’t use Canva, you should. It’s really, really affordable, and you can get a lot done in there.

And we always have templates that we make in Canva now to share around. So, go in, and I’m going to start sharing. Yes. We are recording as always.

If you have questions for us to tackle today, I hope we can get to them. I I have a hard stop at the end of the hour, and this is a working session. So if not, bring your question to our Thursday session. Alright?

And we will cover it then. Okay. Let me share this. Alright. We are working this week, week five.

Woo hoo. More than halfway done. We are working on, your templated proposal.

Hey, Jo. Are good. Yes. What’s up? I just wanna verify that everybody has that because I can’t access that document. So does everybody have access to the docs Joe is sharing?

This one, you do not. You’re telling me. Okay.

I hold on. Let me stop sharing in case I share something. It’s private.

Probably not, but still. Okay. So it is oh, Why not? I just didn’t attach it.

This is what happens when you’re when you’re fighting a head cold. There you go. Awesome. Thank you.

Yeah. Absolutely no one had it, and y’all were being quiet. No. And I’m like, I’m gonna get a lot of requests here.

Everyone’s quietly pinging Sarah.

Okay. So open that up. Oh, Dawn. Hold on. Did we just see your puppy? We gotta see this action. Dawn has a puppy, y’all.

He is in crazy mode, but also, like, please take please pay attention to me mode. Yes.

So two on your everything.

Yes. I bought him, like, three hundred dollars of toys yesterday.

This one is warrantiable.

So, anyway, yes. This is the path of me. I was like, I need to be on this call, but also, dude needs me. So Yeah. This is Cal.

He’s funny because he’s almost, like, so black and can’t see him. You know?

I know. That’s Robert.

I’ll be here like this.

K. Awesome.

Cool. Alright. Thank you for sharing because we we love dogs. Alright. Let’s share my screen again.

This time, you should have access to the worksheets in question. So, it’s now it’s now over in Slack. You’ll see it there. It looks like this.

Your templated proposal, this is where we save a bunch of time by getting this done for your authoritative offers, which mean standardized offer plus retainer offer all in one package. Now when we’re selling into organizations that can afford us on an ongoing basis, this is the sort of thing that they are typically looking for. What I’m gonna walk you through today, having gone back and forth a lot with a lot of different people, different stakeholders in projects, there’s a lot of, handing your proposal around when you’re not even there and you didn’t know someone else was gonna see it. And

now someone else is seeing it, and they have questions. So what we’re covering here in this proposal template is designed to answer the questions of all the VPs and c levels without getting too detailed because every new detail you add is something else for someone else to ask a question about.

So we’re gonna kick this off with some notes for optimal proposals. Hopefully, you’re still seeing my screen where it has a list of notes.

As soon as we’re gonna get into the proposal template right after this. But as soon as you book a fifteen minute call, that’s that first triage call where you’re determining if you’re even right to work together. You go into it with an oh, hell’s no attitude.

They get to bring you on board. It doesn’t mean you’re you give them attitude, but you’ve got that in your head. Like, probably not. And they get you on board with, oh, wow.

They are cool to work with. Wow. This would be great. I hope that this works out well.

But you wanna make a copy of your proposal templates, make a you turn it into a new document as soon as you book that call because you’re going to start filling things in if that call goes well and you then book the sixty minute call. You’re gonna start making notes directly in the proposal, not just on a piece of paper that you lose later, directly in the proposal.

We wanna do our absolute best to systematize as much as we can and get your VA or AI to help you with all of the easy stuff.

Questions that you ask in calls become answers you write in your template. If you’re in CopySchool Pro, hopefully, you attended Shane’s lesson on using AI to take those calls and write a proposal out of it. This is one more layer to add in there.

Another note is to be sure to give your standardized offer a name and your retainer offer a name. I could do a whole course on the importance of naming things. People love names for things. Give it a name. Give it a name.

Pre write and avoid changing key pages. I will show you what those are today. As I mentioned earlier, keep details to a minimum.

Only include what matters. K? It only matters if it matters, so you don’t have to say a bunch of extra stuff that will only raise questions for people.

The template I’m gonna share with you is stripped down. It’s got no visual anything going on with it other there’s just words on blank pages. Your job is to modify it so it looks right for your brand. Your job is not to rewrite it, shift pages around, do things differently. You can do that over time as you learn more about what’s best for your ICP.

But for now, all you’ll wanna do is fill in the work that we’re gonna do today and then go through and brand it.

But less is more.

So not a bunch of stuff. Less is more. Caroline’s a designer, so she’s like, got this.

But for the rest of us, I’ve seen I’ve seen a lot of well intentioned copywriters overdo it. Less is more.

Add in some images, properly designed models or process diagrams. So if you have a diagnostic and it makes sense to put it in here, do that. Just make sure it’s designed. Looks nice.

You can get this done for three hundred bucks to get beautiful options on any number of different sites out there. So just go hire someone to do that work for you. It’ll look pro. You can raise your prices.

It’s good.

And then add in QR codes and links as needed. And keep in mind that a proposal is a sales document. If you treat it like administrative work, you’re doing it wrong.

It’s a sales doc. Okay?

So out of mind, we are ready to start doing some work today. We have forty eight minutes left to get some work done. Go here.

This is the template for you to go to.

I will chat out, it’s copy hacker dot com slash tip t. Okay. So you should be able to go there and get a copy of the template. I’m trying it now.

You can see this. You will use you won’t be able to edit. You won’t have edit option because you won’t own it. So just go ahead and take it, make a copy of it, and use it.

Oh, everybody should have access.

Hang tight. Dawn’s saying it says I don’t have access, so I’m going to see why you wouldn’t share it.

Yeah. It’s there’s no reason not to.

Hold on. No. You You shouldn’t. Is anybody else able or is anybody else not able to access it? Or if you are able to, please let me know. I’m gonna pause sharing.

Perfect. So it’ll look like this. What you have, this will be what you’re working off of. Okay?

And that’s going to happen today. So this, oh, wait. Go back here. We’re gonna start here. Okay? We’re just gonna work through it. There’s no final state outside of this when it’s done.

It’ll look something like this. So this is I’m gonna work on a fake version with y’all as we go through so that there’s clear you know, you can see exactly what’s supposed to happen here.

This is what we’re working toward, something that looks more like this.

And it’s like the one that I teach in ten x FC, except that this one has a clear pricing page, which I don’t recommend when we’re in ten x FC, and we can get into that. But the the big reason is most of the organizations that you’re working with who can afford a lot more money do have a larger team of people who will be looking at this. And one of the annoying things to hear is, wait. Where’s the price? What does it cost?

They’re like, it’s on page seven. But where? Mhmm. So this is just like it’s right there. It’s impossible to miss, and you know what date it is, don’t you?

So that’s what we’re working on. That’s why it looks this way now. Now, again, this is a template, and although it’s optimized for audiences that have money to spend on services that they value like yours, it may have to change for you as you go.

Not now, though. It doesn’t change now. Right now, you just use it. Just use it unless you have one that’s perfectly designed already in use for your standardized offer and your retainer offer. Okay.

Are we ready to do the work?

You’re gonna. So we’re gonna get started. Title page. Go to the title page, and all we’re trying to do is make a version of this that you can then save and use as your own template. So I’m gonna walk you through the parts that you can modify and parts that you will not you’ll have to write them from scratch every time.

On page one, the title page, replace the word channel with whatever your channel is. Outstanding ad funnel performance, outstanding ad performance, outstanding email performance, whatever. Throw that word in there, and then you’re done. Ta da.

For one note. You’re done one thing, but that’s good. And then on the same page, add your name in down here prepared by your name, whatever your name is. Everything else will stay as it is until you actually start working with putting that proposal together for a client.

So for example, outstanding email performance would be the the word here prepared by Dasha Martin in this hypothetical case. We’re not gonna worry about the title. That changes down the road. So don’t worry about it.

You’re gonna leave this. You’ll brand it later. This is branded.

You’ll brand that later. Okay? Now we’re moving on to the letter. All you can do on the letter is add your signature and complete the contact information.

So you’ll leave this.

You’ll leave the opening the whole letter. You don’t do anything outside of signature, and then update the contact information.

I know this sounds tedious, but this is how you make sure you get stuff done well in advance, especially as you grow and you never have to worry again that someone’s working off the wrong document or that you don’t have enough information. Okay? Add your signature in here and then update the contact information. So we have Dasha Martin, emails with wings, and then I didn’t update this because in my case, it’s a it’s a made up business.

Yours is a real business. Go ahead. Throw that in there. Yes. Your phone number goes in there.

Yeah. Your phone number goes in there.

Alright. We’re moving along because this is the easy part.

We wanna move to the proof page. That is page three. So we have a title page that speaks to the value of working with you, a letter that’s written directly to them. This is the point of contact that you’ve been in touch with.

You share this letter with them. This is basically a short form sales letter. It will help them understand exactly what they’re about to see. It’s like if you were to merge a short form sales letter with an executive summary.

Those would come together here, and that would be this page. This is the letter written like a letter one to one. Then we get into stuff that you can repeat.

This is always going to be the same until you have more testimonials and case studies to work with.

So right now, I want you to the work you’re gonna do here is brands like yours work with us because we are masters of what? What is your KPI? We’re masters of conversion rate optimization. We’re masters of click through rate. We’re masters of brand voice. I know that’s not a KPI, but you’ll know you know what I mean. We’re masters of, engagement, building tribes.

Whatever that is, you put that word in there or those words in here now. If it’s more than two words, you’re probably doing it wrong.

This language here is for the CEO when they’re cruising through this really quickly because they’re like, hold on. You want us to spend how much on a recurring basis? Are we sure it’s worth this? They will look at this, and they will want to see that you are the master of x KPI.

Put it in there. Think of a bored, annoyed, angry little CEO out there who just wants to believe that you’re actually going to make money unlike other make money for them unlike so many of the freelancers and agencies out there that just come up with crap. And they’re like, what are we even doing here? Okay. From there, go out, and we’re gonna take five minutes. I’m gonna go on mute. You’re gonna go add in three testimonials.

That’s it. If you don’t have three testimonials, yes, you do. Go find them. They’re somewhere.

Go find them. Put the name in there, the brand, and then the testimonial times three. K? You will have them somewhere.

You might have many more. And if you do have more bonus points, you can take this five minutes to also put together a really quick QR code that you would then pop over here or somewhere like that on the page that says here’s where you can go to get more of these case studies. If you have video case studies, they obviously don’t work well on in print, but you can pop in a QR code, pop in the URL, whatever feels right for you, for your audience. And that’s where you can go to get more information.

But these are the big ones. These are going to be heavy hitters. If you have a lot to choose from, these are your heavy hitters.

Five minutes.

Your work yes. Reporting in progress. I’m going to move along, but you’re already done the first page. All you have to do to finish this page off is add in for your records a URL where you have an updated list of testimonials. And then if you have a process, which you should have, and if you don’t have it, start thinking through it.

But if you have a process for how you collect testimonials, that means what is the trigger to get a testimonial to go ask for one. What’s the template you use to ask for one, or does it happen in a call? So have an SOP for that with the template if there is one.

Follow-up, legal document to sign off on, where the image for their photo comes from, if you’re allowed to mention their company name, all of that kind of stuff. If you have it all sorted out, it’s the kind of thing your, VA can take over or whoever else. If it’s not a VA, if you hire a junior copywriter or someone else next to help you out, that person can do that work. It’s low value.

You don’t do it. Someone else does because it does have value. Okay. So put those together.

Make sure you have it documented where you have all of your testimonial stuff hidden. In two years, you don’t wanna go, what happened to those testimonials?

You’ll want them. So make sure you do that. Okay?

Now we are moving on. So you are going to skip this page that’s showing here now. Let me just see if I can make that bigger. Which one is that? It’s not working. Oh, wait. It’s this guy.

This one, you’re going to write custom for every single client that you have. This is it, though. There’s not a lot more that’s gonna be super custom. This is where you tell the shortest version of the best story you can for them. Not a lot of pages. This is, again, different from ten x FC where the proposal is more of a long form sales page. This is meant for a lot of expensive people looking at your, proposal.

So you’ll worry about this later. Not now. Later. This will be a thing that you always fill in, though.

You, not your VA. This is an important sales message just like that letter. The second page is also important. So you’ll work on this.

You can fill this in as you go through your, triage call as well as the sixty minute call. That’s where a lot of this stuff will come from. And we’ll talk a bit more about that. I have a bit of a template to share with you later, that has, like, when you ask this, then put that answer here, so you can start really mapping where everything goes.

But we’re not gonna worry about that right now because it’s not part of what we’re templating. We’re just leaving it there.

Now we’re moving on to what is basically the sales page for your standardized offer. So you’ll see in the template. I don’t know how much you can see because I thought you couldn’t see and do everything before. So now I’m like, wait. You can’t see anything.

I have for page titles, I have, like, this is always the same versus this changes. So you’ll be able to see what stays the same and what changes. This, we want to nail down what your standardized offer is, how you talk about it right here so that you never have to say it differently ever again, ideally ever. Here’s what we’re going to do.

Take that page I just showed you. I’m gonna go right back to it. You’re gonna write the first draft of this part. K?

Don’t worry about the headline yet. We’re copywriters. We worry about the headline at the end. Don’t worry about the outcome yet.

As you start working through telling the story of your standardized offer without using all the words in the world, just select words. Once you get through that, these two will better surface. Okay? So we’re gonna start here.

What is the problem that drives your ICP to choose this standardized offer? You should know this by now because you’re a pro at this. Even if you don’t do the standardized offer, often you do know the problems that drive them here.

Cool? Start by writing this out. There’s some explanation there, and you don’t really wanna go longer than this bottom lorem ipsum that I have here, this is about as long as you want this to be. You can add an appendix later that has more information, more detailed case studies, more diagrams, all of the stuff.

This is really just a short version for the CEO to go. Got it. That sounds exactly right. We are having that problem.

If they can actually solve it, then we’re game. Cool? I’m gonna give you four minutes. I know that’s not enough time.

I know it’s not enough time, but you’re gonna do it. Cool? Because you’re good at this stuff. So go forward, spend four minutes writing that in, and then we’ll come back and work some more on this.

Keep going.

Keep going.

And then what I would invite you to do is then fill in the parts of your process, which you’ve worked through already. So this is pulling in work from past weeks. For example, for emails with wings, it’s the starts with the database deep dive, then they create something called the massive map, then the opportunity road map, and then the fourth part is preparing to execute.

So they don’t all have great names, but that’s the idea. So you’ll put in the parts of your process again. So the c level person can look at it and go, okay. It looks like there’s a process.

Okay. And I get some of the words on there. Let me read some more and see what’s going on. So do those next.

Write those in. Finish off this paragraph as well that you were working on, and we’ll be back in three minutes to do these two parts. By these two, I mean, the headline and this little guy off to the side.

Okay.

K.

Good.

Making progress.

Andrew, you’re working on the right stuff. You added your process steps, so you’re good. Alright.

Now you’re gonna work on the, so we’ve gone through let me just document. We’ve gone through all of these parts.

Now we wanna give your standardized offer a name, and it’s also a good time then to think of your retainer offer and how those two might work together.

So you’ll need a standardized offer name, and you will need a name for their ongoing work. So we have here for this sample company, the thirty thousand foot flyover audit. Okay. That’s a name.

It’s a real thing. You call it that all the time in meetings. We’re gonna do the thirty thousand foot audit. We’re gonna do the flyover audit, whatever you would end up shortening it down to when you’re talking about it.

And then the next one is elevation mode. And that’s a mode because it’s not a one on one and done thing. It’s the ongoing thing. What’s an example?

Right? But we can at least say, okay. There’s a name given to it. Sounds real.

Sounds legit.

And that’s really what we’re looking for, what names signify. So we wanna do that at this point, come up with a name, and then you’ll wanna complete the outcome section, which establishes the ROI for clients and write the first draft. So have the name. It’s gonna take a couple minutes. Just throw something down. I mean, this isn’t the thirty thousand foot flyover audit.

It’s not magic. It’s not a great name, but it’s something. We put it down. We move on with our lives because these are not the world’s biggest decisions.

They don’t require that much time. So just just pretend you paid somebody, and they told you this is what you’re calling, and you’d be like, okay. I paid for it. So then you would just take it.

Just take it. Whatever name you come up with. And then you’ll also wanna fill this in. So the outcome of your standardized offer goes here.

This is where you’re going to establish the ROI.

Again, this is a document that’s for the right kind of person. So in this case, we have get a complete lay of the land for your cold database, pinpoint whom to reengage and how in order to generate twenty to thirty percent more SQLs by q two. If I understand now by q two, that’s a changing thing. Right?

So that’s the kind of thing where I might be like, okay. Well, that’s not always the same. That has to change for every client. Okay.

Fine. You identify that. Otherwise, if you’re just, like, twenty to thirty percent more q or SQLs in the first three months of working together or whatever. I don’t it doesn’t matter.

What matters is that there are numbers on the page, clear numerals, and I can look at that and go like, oh, okay. I think I get, like, what the value is, what the outcome is of this audit.

So that’s what you wanna do here. Come up with a name for it, then write this thing, establishing the ROI. You might be like, I think I’m making this up. You probably are, and you’re not the first person to make up things that go on here, and then you just live up to them.

What the hell? Okay. So I said I’m gonna get twenty percent more SQLs for them in the first three months of working together. I better figure out how to get twenty percent more SQLs in that time.

That’s the job. You do it. Twenty percent isn’t that crazy. It’s achievable, but it’s a numeral on the page with a percentage next to it.

The boardroom claps when they see it. So just that’s what you’re doing. Put together your standardized offer value headline. In this case, you can see that there is no value here. This is just the name of the thing, and I’m relying heavily on this section over here to make them really care.

You can do it whatever way you want to, but you’re gonna need a headline, and that’s what you’re doing next. K?

Name the thing, write this part, then write that part. You got five minutes. It’s not enough time. You’re never gonna have enough time.

Alright.

How are we doing?

Making progress?

Progress is good. It’s a work it’s a working session, so progress is very good. Now these are all things showing on the screen right now.

Rewrite, optimize, turn written numbers into numerals, rename, and optimize, those are all going to happen after today because you don’t have time for that right now. So we’re gonna move along and basically do the same thing for the retainer offer page. So first, write this paragraph over to the side, then put in the different I’ve already prewritten these because usually it’s gonna be measurement execution and reporting that they need to know about. But you can change those if they’re different for you. They’d be different for you if you start if your standardized offer is an audit that produces a road map of work we’re going to do for you over time with execution, standing the thing up, maximization and optimization as the parts of that process, that would make this different.

But, otherwise, most people are just gonna do it this way. So write the description, and then I was gonna say descriptor, and then, change these, the process parts, if you need to. That’s what’s next. Then you’ll know, of course, that’s what’s after that. After that comes this section and then the headline. Okay?

Take five minutes. I know.

And then we’re gonna hop back on and talk about what’s next.

Alright, y’all.

We are getting to the end of our time.

Yeah. Andrew, I would say that that should be you’d have to put some sort of parameters in place, but a guarantee can go a long way. And when you have ongoing work with somebody, it makes good sense to have some level of guarantee because you can put boundaries around it. Like, minimum six months required.

On average, you should see ten percent growth month over month. Yeah. You just you would put that in the appendix.

Not here.

Okay. Cool. So we have got to a place where you’ve done some of this. Hopefully, you got ahead of giving your retainer offer a name earlier, so you were already, you know, kinda making headway here.

What you wanna keep doing from this point on is go back, fill it all in, by optimizing it. So go through this checklist that we were working on today. All you wanna do is finish the week with a proposal that is done. This is not exciting work until the time when you go to use it, and then you go, oh, it’s done. I don’t need to do anything.

That’s the best feeling. Okay? So next up is this ROI page where you’ll get into the ROI of what you do.

This is gonna be read a lot by the CFO, particularly, but also the CEO, CMO, any other CRO, any other person who, is trying to put their money in the right place. This is, again, separating you from freelancers. This is how you establish yourself as a body of experts, with an s on it, that bring great results. So there there are instructions throughout this.

You just wanna you can leave the ROI of optimization at the title, and, otherwise, just go ahead and fill in the rest of it. This is where if you have a point of view on what people are doing wrong with their channel, whatever the thing is that you’re working on, this is a good place to really sell them on that and make sure that they’re noticing the stuff that’s most important. If you find that you’re using more words than the template allows, cut the number of words, cut everything down not to summarized version, but to its, most compact and efficient version of what you’re trying to tell them.

This is long copy shortened. So it’s a real thing. You can really do it. You also wanna go through and fill this in.

I’d say you could keep a headline like this. Again, change it later, but for now, you’re just trying to get a proposal standing up so that when you start doing more of the work that’s coming up to get people to reach out to you. And if you’re in Coffee School Pro, some of the work you’ve already done to get people to reach out to you, to start engaging with you on social media, to start doing sell by chat, having scheduled calls, etcetera, Yeah. That’s where you’ll want something to be able to hand them.

I’ll leave behind, a slash proposal that’s really useful.

This page is where you’ll talk about this team that you have.

For example, over here on this example, we have the person who put the proposal together, who’s called the copy chief, and then anybody else that you might be looping in to help you at any point. You give them a name. They don’t need images. If you have them, that’s cool.

That can help. But if you’re like, this is like a freelancer that I’m gonna use for about four hours, and I don’t actually want to use their photo because they’re not really part of my team, then don’t. And just say, like, just put put it here and make sure that you are writing good descriptions, and then go back and help them understand everything that’s going on. Like, again, it’s described what you should put in here is written inside the space where you should be writing it.

So go back and do that. This is the easiest page. This could be the page that you start with anytime.

This is the kind of thing where you’ll put in your standardized offer name. This summary won’t change. The retainer offer name won’t change nor will the summary. This that you have here, this opening paragraph will change just based on the date.

That’s really it. Other than that, everything else stays the same.

Your pricing, this is the pricing you should be starting with for everything.

Ten thousand dollars for your primary, your standardized offer, five thousand dollars a month for the retainer. If it feels big, don’t worry. We’ll get there. But start with just putting that number there.

Timeline, for example, I’m just gonna show this to you since you’ve gotta go and so do I.

The timeline example in this case is we’ve got the thirty thousand foot flyover audit that’s here. It’s gonna happen in June because it starts June first. And then from there, elevation mode. And it’s just one big one big rectangle that says, hey.

We’re gonna do this. So at a glance, I get what the point is. Okay? Then you’ll have a sign by date, and you’ll prefill this in with your own name and company name, etcetera.

You’ll make sure that when you hand this over to somebody, you’ve already signed it. The appendix is where you put other things if you’re optimizing certain ad sets. Maybe the client told you that, the lead told you that in a call. You’ll give the names of those ad sets here.

If you’re adding in copy cheaping services or anything else or you wanna clarify things around coffeecheaping, like, you wanna put the names of the people you’ll be cheeping internally, whatever that is, that can all go in an appendix. You don’t usually need to make a special page for it. Most of this will stay the same. Okay?

That’s your homework. You’ve got this week to nail this. Just get her done. Once that’s done, all you have to do is minor bits of work on it every time, every time you get a new lead in.

And then you’re done. Alright? Alright. I know y’all have to go, so do I. I have a hard stop. I’m already late.

Thank you. Go do the work, and then we will see you on Thursday for our call. I’ll be calling in from Chicago, but, hopefully, this is all very helpful for you. Thanks y’all. Bye.

Transcript

This is a working session.

Hands on work. So today, Sarah vanishes, today is all about your proposal. We are standardizing, templating your proposal.

Andrew’s gonna regret that he just showed up for this because the work is real and, might I add, boring.

All the most effective work is ultimately terribly boring, but we get it done, and then we can move on with our lives and never have to do that thing again if we do it right the first time. So today, we just gonna keep clapping after every word, see if that gets annoying.

I haven’t had coffee, so I’m doing my best to, like, energize myself.

I shared this worksheet for today in the intensive freelancing Slack, channel. So if you have not yet retrieved it from there, please go and do so. Let me know if you, for some reason, cannot.

And, actually, let Sarah know because Sarah can help you with that, whereas I can do very little for you right now. But it’s in the Coffee School Pro Slack area in the private channel that you are invited to. If you’re here, you’re in it. So you should be able to find it. No problemo.

In that, we will walk through what we’re going to accomplish today, and you will see a Canva template.

If you don’t use Canva, you should. It’s really, really affordable, and you can get a lot done in there.

And we always have templates that we make in Canva now to share around. So, go in, and I’m going to start sharing. Yes. We are recording as always.

If you have questions for us to tackle today, I hope we can get to them. I I have a hard stop at the end of the hour, and this is a working session. So if not, bring your question to our Thursday session. Alright?

And we will cover it then. Okay. Let me share this. Alright. We are working this week, week five.

Woo hoo. More than halfway done. We are working on, your templated proposal.

Hey, Jo. Are good. Yes. What’s up? I just wanna verify that everybody has that because I can’t access that document. So does everybody have access to the docs Joe is sharing?

This one, you do not. You’re telling me. Okay.

I hold on. Let me stop sharing in case I share something. It’s private.

Probably not, but still. Okay. So it is oh, Why not? I just didn’t attach it.

This is what happens when you’re when you’re fighting a head cold. There you go. Awesome. Thank you.

Yeah. Absolutely no one had it, and y’all were being quiet. No. And I’m like, I’m gonna get a lot of requests here.

Everyone’s quietly pinging Sarah.

Okay. So open that up. Oh, Dawn. Hold on. Did we just see your puppy? We gotta see this action. Dawn has a puppy, y’all.

He is in crazy mode, but also, like, please take please pay attention to me mode. Yes.

So two on your everything.

Yes. I bought him, like, three hundred dollars of toys yesterday.

This one is warrantiable.

So, anyway, yes. This is the path of me. I was like, I need to be on this call, but also, dude needs me. So Yeah. This is Cal.

He’s funny because he’s almost, like, so black and can’t see him. You know?

I know. That’s Robert.

I’ll be here like this.

K. Awesome.

Cool. Alright. Thank you for sharing because we we love dogs. Alright. Let’s share my screen again.

This time, you should have access to the worksheets in question. So, it’s now it’s now over in Slack. You’ll see it there. It looks like this.

Your templated proposal, this is where we save a bunch of time by getting this done for your authoritative offers, which mean standardized offer plus retainer offer all in one package. Now when we’re selling into organizations that can afford us on an ongoing basis, this is the sort of thing that they are typically looking for. What I’m gonna walk you through today, having gone back and forth a lot with a lot of different people, different stakeholders in projects, there’s a lot of, handing your proposal around when you’re not even there and you didn’t know someone else was gonna see it. And

now someone else is seeing it, and they have questions. So what we’re covering here in this proposal template is designed to answer the questions of all the VPs and c levels without getting too detailed because every new detail you add is something else for someone else to ask a question about.

So we’re gonna kick this off with some notes for optimal proposals. Hopefully, you’re still seeing my screen where it has a list of notes.

As soon as we’re gonna get into the proposal template right after this. But as soon as you book a fifteen minute call, that’s that first triage call where you’re determining if you’re even right to work together. You go into it with an oh, hell’s no attitude.

They get to bring you on board. It doesn’t mean you’re you give them attitude, but you’ve got that in your head. Like, probably not. And they get you on board with, oh, wow.

They are cool to work with. Wow. This would be great. I hope that this works out well.

But you wanna make a copy of your proposal templates, make a you turn it into a new document as soon as you book that call because you’re going to start filling things in if that call goes well and you then book the sixty minute call. You’re gonna start making notes directly in the proposal, not just on a piece of paper that you lose later, directly in the proposal.

We wanna do our absolute best to systematize as much as we can and get your VA or AI to help you with all of the easy stuff.

Questions that you ask in calls become answers you write in your template. If you’re in CopySchool Pro, hopefully, you attended Shane’s lesson on using AI to take those calls and write a proposal out of it. This is one more layer to add in there.

Another note is to be sure to give your standardized offer a name and your retainer offer a name. I could do a whole course on the importance of naming things. People love names for things. Give it a name. Give it a name.

Pre write and avoid changing key pages. I will show you what those are today. As I mentioned earlier, keep details to a minimum.

Only include what matters. K? It only matters if it matters, so you don’t have to say a bunch of extra stuff that will only raise questions for people.

The template I’m gonna share with you is stripped down. It’s got no visual anything going on with it other there’s just words on blank pages. Your job is to modify it so it looks right for your brand. Your job is not to rewrite it, shift pages around, do things differently. You can do that over time as you learn more about what’s best for your ICP.

But for now, all you’ll wanna do is fill in the work that we’re gonna do today and then go through and brand it.

But less is more.

So not a bunch of stuff. Less is more. Caroline’s a designer, so she’s like, got this.

But for the rest of us, I’ve seen I’ve seen a lot of well intentioned copywriters overdo it. Less is more.

Add in some images, properly designed models or process diagrams. So if you have a diagnostic and it makes sense to put it in here, do that. Just make sure it’s designed. Looks nice.

You can get this done for three hundred bucks to get beautiful options on any number of different sites out there. So just go hire someone to do that work for you. It’ll look pro. You can raise your prices.

It’s good.

And then add in QR codes and links as needed. And keep in mind that a proposal is a sales document. If you treat it like administrative work, you’re doing it wrong.

It’s a sales doc. Okay?

So out of mind, we are ready to start doing some work today. We have forty eight minutes left to get some work done. Go here.

This is the template for you to go to.

I will chat out, it’s copy hacker dot com slash tip t. Okay. So you should be able to go there and get a copy of the template. I’m trying it now.

You can see this. You will use you won’t be able to edit. You won’t have edit option because you won’t own it. So just go ahead and take it, make a copy of it, and use it.

Oh, everybody should have access.

Hang tight. Dawn’s saying it says I don’t have access, so I’m going to see why you wouldn’t share it.

Yeah. It’s there’s no reason not to.

Hold on. No. You You shouldn’t. Is anybody else able or is anybody else not able to access it? Or if you are able to, please let me know. I’m gonna pause sharing.

Perfect. So it’ll look like this. What you have, this will be what you’re working off of. Okay?

And that’s going to happen today. So this, oh, wait. Go back here. We’re gonna start here. Okay? We’re just gonna work through it. There’s no final state outside of this when it’s done.

It’ll look something like this. So this is I’m gonna work on a fake version with y’all as we go through so that there’s clear you know, you can see exactly what’s supposed to happen here.

This is what we’re working toward, something that looks more like this.

And it’s like the one that I teach in ten x FC, except that this one has a clear pricing page, which I don’t recommend when we’re in ten x FC, and we can get into that. But the the big reason is most of the organizations that you’re working with who can afford a lot more money do have a larger team of people who will be looking at this. And one of the annoying things to hear is, wait. Where’s the price? What does it cost?

They’re like, it’s on page seven. But where? Mhmm. So this is just like it’s right there. It’s impossible to miss, and you know what date it is, don’t you?

So that’s what we’re working on. That’s why it looks this way now. Now, again, this is a template, and although it’s optimized for audiences that have money to spend on services that they value like yours, it may have to change for you as you go.

Not now, though. It doesn’t change now. Right now, you just use it. Just use it unless you have one that’s perfectly designed already in use for your standardized offer and your retainer offer. Okay.

Are we ready to do the work?

You’re gonna. So we’re gonna get started. Title page. Go to the title page, and all we’re trying to do is make a version of this that you can then save and use as your own template. So I’m gonna walk you through the parts that you can modify and parts that you will not you’ll have to write them from scratch every time.

On page one, the title page, replace the word channel with whatever your channel is. Outstanding ad funnel performance, outstanding ad performance, outstanding email performance, whatever. Throw that word in there, and then you’re done. Ta da.

For one note. You’re done one thing, but that’s good. And then on the same page, add your name in down here prepared by your name, whatever your name is. Everything else will stay as it is until you actually start working with putting that proposal together for a client.

So for example, outstanding email performance would be the the word here prepared by Dasha Martin in this hypothetical case. We’re not gonna worry about the title. That changes down the road. So don’t worry about it.

You’re gonna leave this. You’ll brand it later. This is branded.

You’ll brand that later. Okay? Now we’re moving on to the letter. All you can do on the letter is add your signature and complete the contact information.

So you’ll leave this.

You’ll leave the opening the whole letter. You don’t do anything outside of signature, and then update the contact information.

I know this sounds tedious, but this is how you make sure you get stuff done well in advance, especially as you grow and you never have to worry again that someone’s working off the wrong document or that you don’t have enough information. Okay? Add your signature in here and then update the contact information. So we have Dasha Martin, emails with wings, and then I didn’t update this because in my case, it’s a it’s a made up business.

Yours is a real business. Go ahead. Throw that in there. Yes. Your phone number goes in there.

Yeah. Your phone number goes in there.

Alright. We’re moving along because this is the easy part.

We wanna move to the proof page. That is page three. So we have a title page that speaks to the value of working with you, a letter that’s written directly to them. This is the point of contact that you’ve been in touch with.

You share this letter with them. This is basically a short form sales letter. It will help them understand exactly what they’re about to see. It’s like if you were to merge a short form sales letter with an executive summary.

Those would come together here, and that would be this page. This is the letter written like a letter one to one. Then we get into stuff that you can repeat.

This is always going to be the same until you have more testimonials and case studies to work with.

So right now, I want you to the work you’re gonna do here is brands like yours work with us because we are masters of what? What is your KPI? We’re masters of conversion rate optimization. We’re masters of click through rate. We’re masters of brand voice. I know that’s not a KPI, but you’ll know you know what I mean. We’re masters of, engagement, building tribes.

Whatever that is, you put that word in there or those words in here now. If it’s more than two words, you’re probably doing it wrong.

This language here is for the CEO when they’re cruising through this really quickly because they’re like, hold on. You want us to spend how much on a recurring basis? Are we sure it’s worth this? They will look at this, and they will want to see that you are the master of x KPI.

Put it in there. Think of a bored, annoyed, angry little CEO out there who just wants to believe that you’re actually going to make money unlike other make money for them unlike so many of the freelancers and agencies out there that just come up with crap. And they’re like, what are we even doing here? Okay. From there, go out, and we’re gonna take five minutes. I’m gonna go on mute. You’re gonna go add in three testimonials.

That’s it. If you don’t have three testimonials, yes, you do. Go find them. They’re somewhere.

Go find them. Put the name in there, the brand, and then the testimonial times three. K? You will have them somewhere.

You might have many more. And if you do have more bonus points, you can take this five minutes to also put together a really quick QR code that you would then pop over here or somewhere like that on the page that says here’s where you can go to get more of these case studies. If you have video case studies, they obviously don’t work well on in print, but you can pop in a QR code, pop in the URL, whatever feels right for you, for your audience. And that’s where you can go to get more information.

But these are the big ones. These are going to be heavy hitters. If you have a lot to choose from, these are your heavy hitters.

Five minutes.

Your work yes. Reporting in progress. I’m going to move along, but you’re already done the first page. All you have to do to finish this page off is add in for your records a URL where you have an updated list of testimonials. And then if you have a process, which you should have, and if you don’t have it, start thinking through it.

But if you have a process for how you collect testimonials, that means what is the trigger to get a testimonial to go ask for one. What’s the template you use to ask for one, or does it happen in a call? So have an SOP for that with the template if there is one.

Follow-up, legal document to sign off on, where the image for their photo comes from, if you’re allowed to mention their company name, all of that kind of stuff. If you have it all sorted out, it’s the kind of thing your, VA can take over or whoever else. If it’s not a VA, if you hire a junior copywriter or someone else next to help you out, that person can do that work. It’s low value.

You don’t do it. Someone else does because it does have value. Okay. So put those together.

Make sure you have it documented where you have all of your testimonial stuff hidden. In two years, you don’t wanna go, what happened to those testimonials?

You’ll want them. So make sure you do that. Okay?

Now we are moving on. So you are going to skip this page that’s showing here now. Let me just see if I can make that bigger. Which one is that? It’s not working. Oh, wait. It’s this guy.

This one, you’re going to write custom for every single client that you have. This is it, though. There’s not a lot more that’s gonna be super custom. This is where you tell the shortest version of the best story you can for them. Not a lot of pages. This is, again, different from ten x FC where the proposal is more of a long form sales page. This is meant for a lot of expensive people looking at your, proposal.

So you’ll worry about this later. Not now. Later. This will be a thing that you always fill in, though.

You, not your VA. This is an important sales message just like that letter. The second page is also important. So you’ll work on this.

You can fill this in as you go through your, triage call as well as the sixty minute call. That’s where a lot of this stuff will come from. And we’ll talk a bit more about that. I have a bit of a template to share with you later, that has, like, when you ask this, then put that answer here, so you can start really mapping where everything goes.

But we’re not gonna worry about that right now because it’s not part of what we’re templating. We’re just leaving it there.

Now we’re moving on to what is basically the sales page for your standardized offer. So you’ll see in the template. I don’t know how much you can see because I thought you couldn’t see and do everything before. So now I’m like, wait. You can’t see anything.

I have for page titles, I have, like, this is always the same versus this changes. So you’ll be able to see what stays the same and what changes. This, we want to nail down what your standardized offer is, how you talk about it right here so that you never have to say it differently ever again, ideally ever. Here’s what we’re going to do.

Take that page I just showed you. I’m gonna go right back to it. You’re gonna write the first draft of this part. K?

Don’t worry about the headline yet. We’re copywriters. We worry about the headline at the end. Don’t worry about the outcome yet.

As you start working through telling the story of your standardized offer without using all the words in the world, just select words. Once you get through that, these two will better surface. Okay? So we’re gonna start here.

What is the problem that drives your ICP to choose this standardized offer? You should know this by now because you’re a pro at this. Even if you don’t do the standardized offer, often you do know the problems that drive them here.

Cool? Start by writing this out. There’s some explanation there, and you don’t really wanna go longer than this bottom lorem ipsum that I have here, this is about as long as you want this to be. You can add an appendix later that has more information, more detailed case studies, more diagrams, all of the stuff.

This is really just a short version for the CEO to go. Got it. That sounds exactly right. We are having that problem.

If they can actually solve it, then we’re game. Cool? I’m gonna give you four minutes. I know that’s not enough time.

I know it’s not enough time, but you’re gonna do it. Cool? Because you’re good at this stuff. So go forward, spend four minutes writing that in, and then we’ll come back and work some more on this.

Keep going.

Keep going.

And then what I would invite you to do is then fill in the parts of your process, which you’ve worked through already. So this is pulling in work from past weeks. For example, for emails with wings, it’s the starts with the database deep dive, then they create something called the massive map, then the opportunity road map, and then the fourth part is preparing to execute.

So they don’t all have great names, but that’s the idea. So you’ll put in the parts of your process again. So the c level person can look at it and go, okay. It looks like there’s a process.

Okay. And I get some of the words on there. Let me read some more and see what’s going on. So do those next.

Write those in. Finish off this paragraph as well that you were working on, and we’ll be back in three minutes to do these two parts. By these two, I mean, the headline and this little guy off to the side.

Okay.

K.

Good.

Making progress.

Andrew, you’re working on the right stuff. You added your process steps, so you’re good. Alright.

Now you’re gonna work on the, so we’ve gone through let me just document. We’ve gone through all of these parts.

Now we wanna give your standardized offer a name, and it’s also a good time then to think of your retainer offer and how those two might work together.

So you’ll need a standardized offer name, and you will need a name for their ongoing work. So we have here for this sample company, the thirty thousand foot flyover audit. Okay. That’s a name.

It’s a real thing. You call it that all the time in meetings. We’re gonna do the thirty thousand foot audit. We’re gonna do the flyover audit, whatever you would end up shortening it down to when you’re talking about it.

And then the next one is elevation mode. And that’s a mode because it’s not a one on one and done thing. It’s the ongoing thing. What’s an example?

Right? But we can at least say, okay. There’s a name given to it. Sounds real.

Sounds legit.

And that’s really what we’re looking for, what names signify. So we wanna do that at this point, come up with a name, and then you’ll wanna complete the outcome section, which establishes the ROI for clients and write the first draft. So have the name. It’s gonna take a couple minutes. Just throw something down. I mean, this isn’t the thirty thousand foot flyover audit.

It’s not magic. It’s not a great name, but it’s something. We put it down. We move on with our lives because these are not the world’s biggest decisions.

They don’t require that much time. So just just pretend you paid somebody, and they told you this is what you’re calling, and you’d be like, okay. I paid for it. So then you would just take it.

Just take it. Whatever name you come up with. And then you’ll also wanna fill this in. So the outcome of your standardized offer goes here.

This is where you’re going to establish the ROI.

Again, this is a document that’s for the right kind of person. So in this case, we have get a complete lay of the land for your cold database, pinpoint whom to reengage and how in order to generate twenty to thirty percent more SQLs by q two. If I understand now by q two, that’s a changing thing. Right?

So that’s the kind of thing where I might be like, okay. Well, that’s not always the same. That has to change for every client. Okay.

Fine. You identify that. Otherwise, if you’re just, like, twenty to thirty percent more q or SQLs in the first three months of working together or whatever. I don’t it doesn’t matter.

What matters is that there are numbers on the page, clear numerals, and I can look at that and go like, oh, okay. I think I get, like, what the value is, what the outcome is of this audit.

So that’s what you wanna do here. Come up with a name for it, then write this thing, establishing the ROI. You might be like, I think I’m making this up. You probably are, and you’re not the first person to make up things that go on here, and then you just live up to them.

What the hell? Okay. So I said I’m gonna get twenty percent more SQLs for them in the first three months of working together. I better figure out how to get twenty percent more SQLs in that time.

That’s the job. You do it. Twenty percent isn’t that crazy. It’s achievable, but it’s a numeral on the page with a percentage next to it.

The boardroom claps when they see it. So just that’s what you’re doing. Put together your standardized offer value headline. In this case, you can see that there is no value here. This is just the name of the thing, and I’m relying heavily on this section over here to make them really care.

You can do it whatever way you want to, but you’re gonna need a headline, and that’s what you’re doing next. K?

Name the thing, write this part, then write that part. You got five minutes. It’s not enough time. You’re never gonna have enough time.

Alright.

How are we doing?

Making progress?

Progress is good. It’s a work it’s a working session, so progress is very good. Now these are all things showing on the screen right now.

Rewrite, optimize, turn written numbers into numerals, rename, and optimize, those are all going to happen after today because you don’t have time for that right now. So we’re gonna move along and basically do the same thing for the retainer offer page. So first, write this paragraph over to the side, then put in the different I’ve already prewritten these because usually it’s gonna be measurement execution and reporting that they need to know about. But you can change those if they’re different for you. They’d be different for you if you start if your standardized offer is an audit that produces a road map of work we’re going to do for you over time with execution, standing the thing up, maximization and optimization as the parts of that process, that would make this different.

But, otherwise, most people are just gonna do it this way. So write the description, and then I was gonna say descriptor, and then, change these, the process parts, if you need to. That’s what’s next. Then you’ll know, of course, that’s what’s after that. After that comes this section and then the headline. Okay?

Take five minutes. I know.

And then we’re gonna hop back on and talk about what’s next.

Alright, y’all.

We are getting to the end of our time.

Yeah. Andrew, I would say that that should be you’d have to put some sort of parameters in place, but a guarantee can go a long way. And when you have ongoing work with somebody, it makes good sense to have some level of guarantee because you can put boundaries around it. Like, minimum six months required.

On average, you should see ten percent growth month over month. Yeah. You just you would put that in the appendix.

Not here.

Okay. Cool. So we have got to a place where you’ve done some of this. Hopefully, you got ahead of giving your retainer offer a name earlier, so you were already, you know, kinda making headway here.

What you wanna keep doing from this point on is go back, fill it all in, by optimizing it. So go through this checklist that we were working on today. All you wanna do is finish the week with a proposal that is done. This is not exciting work until the time when you go to use it, and then you go, oh, it’s done. I don’t need to do anything.

That’s the best feeling. Okay? So next up is this ROI page where you’ll get into the ROI of what you do.

This is gonna be read a lot by the CFO, particularly, but also the CEO, CMO, any other CRO, any other person who, is trying to put their money in the right place. This is, again, separating you from freelancers. This is how you establish yourself as a body of experts, with an s on it, that bring great results. So there there are instructions throughout this.

You just wanna you can leave the ROI of optimization at the title, and, otherwise, just go ahead and fill in the rest of it. This is where if you have a point of view on what people are doing wrong with their channel, whatever the thing is that you’re working on, this is a good place to really sell them on that and make sure that they’re noticing the stuff that’s most important. If you find that you’re using more words than the template allows, cut the number of words, cut everything down not to summarized version, but to its, most compact and efficient version of what you’re trying to tell them.

This is long copy shortened. So it’s a real thing. You can really do it. You also wanna go through and fill this in.

I’d say you could keep a headline like this. Again, change it later, but for now, you’re just trying to get a proposal standing up so that when you start doing more of the work that’s coming up to get people to reach out to you. And if you’re in Coffee School Pro, some of the work you’ve already done to get people to reach out to you, to start engaging with you on social media, to start doing sell by chat, having scheduled calls, etcetera, Yeah. That’s where you’ll want something to be able to hand them.

I’ll leave behind, a slash proposal that’s really useful.

This page is where you’ll talk about this team that you have.

For example, over here on this example, we have the person who put the proposal together, who’s called the copy chief, and then anybody else that you might be looping in to help you at any point. You give them a name. They don’t need images. If you have them, that’s cool.

That can help. But if you’re like, this is like a freelancer that I’m gonna use for about four hours, and I don’t actually want to use their photo because they’re not really part of my team, then don’t. And just say, like, just put put it here and make sure that you are writing good descriptions, and then go back and help them understand everything that’s going on. Like, again, it’s described what you should put in here is written inside the space where you should be writing it.

So go back and do that. This is the easiest page. This could be the page that you start with anytime.

This is the kind of thing where you’ll put in your standardized offer name. This summary won’t change. The retainer offer name won’t change nor will the summary. This that you have here, this opening paragraph will change just based on the date.

That’s really it. Other than that, everything else stays the same.

Your pricing, this is the pricing you should be starting with for everything.

Ten thousand dollars for your primary, your standardized offer, five thousand dollars a month for the retainer. If it feels big, don’t worry. We’ll get there. But start with just putting that number there.

Timeline, for example, I’m just gonna show this to you since you’ve gotta go and so do I.

The timeline example in this case is we’ve got the thirty thousand foot flyover audit that’s here. It’s gonna happen in June because it starts June first. And then from there, elevation mode. And it’s just one big one big rectangle that says, hey.

We’re gonna do this. So at a glance, I get what the point is. Okay? Then you’ll have a sign by date, and you’ll prefill this in with your own name and company name, etcetera.

You’ll make sure that when you hand this over to somebody, you’ve already signed it. The appendix is where you put other things if you’re optimizing certain ad sets. Maybe the client told you that, the lead told you that in a call. You’ll give the names of those ad sets here.

If you’re adding in copy cheaping services or anything else or you wanna clarify things around coffeecheaping, like, you wanna put the names of the people you’ll be cheeping internally, whatever that is, that can all go in an appendix. You don’t usually need to make a special page for it. Most of this will stay the same. Okay?

That’s your homework. You’ve got this week to nail this. Just get her done. Once that’s done, all you have to do is minor bits of work on it every time, every time you get a new lead in.

And then you’re done. Alright? Alright. I know y’all have to go, so do I. I have a hard stop. I’m already late.

Thank you. Go do the work, and then we will see you on Thursday for our call. I’ll be calling in from Chicago, but, hopefully, this is all very helpful for you. Thanks y’all. Bye.

Week 4: Your Sales Driven Funnel

Week 4: Your Sales-Driven Funnel

Transcript

Alright. Cool. Welcome, everybody. This is week four of the intensive freelancing training. So at this point, you have standardized your offer based on your specialization with a retainer that you’re ready to put into play.

Now I know that people are at different stages of actually applying this. It’s okay. All I ask is that you bring your honest questions so that we can help you through them if you keep it to yourself. It’s very, very hard to get help.

It’s you can often, you know, catch things that will help, but the best way is just, like, just say it. And someone else is probably going through it as well. And if they’re not, then people watching this replay later are going to be like, thank you for asking that. I’m as stuck as you are on that.

So bring your questions.

As usual I think as usual for the intense of freelancing, bring a win first for everything.

Say your win before you ask your question, win of any kind, and that could even be, I think I’ve decided what I’m gonna do when I grow up. And I know not everybody’s there. But if that is, then that’s okay. That’s a win. If you feel good about it, share it. Let us celebrate it with you. Okay?

Alright. Week four is getting into how to start selling your offers, starting, of course, with your special your standardized offer, in spaces that maybe you’re not using as much as you could. And I say that because I haven’t been using them prior to learning them in the last year.

But they’ve been really effective for our business, and so I’m sharing them with you.

This is where you start turning leads into booked calls.

So the ideal funnel that you will have as a freelancer building out, higher tickets, freelancing business, or an agency of some kind, whatever your business is going to look like.

You’re going to want to book calls with people. That’s where the sales happen. They can happen in other places. It doesn’t actually always have to lead to a call, but the most common scenario is let’s hop on a call, a triage call ten, fifteen minutes out of the gate where you just make sure you wanna work together for anybody who’s been in freelancing school, in ten x f c in particular inside freelancing school.

You’ll know that I say, like, you go into these calls with, like, an oh, hell’s no approach. Like, no. No. This isn’t gonna work instead of going in feeling, oh, I hope this works.

I hope this works. And that tends to help out a lot. But before we even get there, what we’re trying to do is push more qualified leads there so that when you go into this, oh, hell’s no triage call, you actually feel really good about the lead that you’re talking to. And so that, oh, hell’s no, can turn into a, this sounds kind of awesome.

Let’s work together call pretty quickly.

First, we gotta get leads in there. We gotta get good fit one. So in the sunshine growth model, we talk about thought leadership. Now we’re only doing so much on thought leadership here in the intensive freelancing.

CopySchool Pro is where you’ll wanna land after the intensive freelancing to build on all of these things that we’re talking about and just establishing. Establishing. Okay? Which I think is clear to everybody.

Alright. So when it comes to I just wanna kind of back up to where we are, do a bit of a reset to make sure everybody is aligned on the idea of applying the sunshine growth model, and then we’ll dig into it. So half a second here while I share my screen.

Okay. I’m gonna go into, full screen. Good. So this is what we shared on week one, day one.

This concept of the sunshine growth model, which looks like this. There are areas that you know you need to work on most. Right? So when you are a small business owner, you are always, inundated with all the ideas and the things you could be working on, and it’s important to start saying this is not a priority yet because this is clearly a big priority, and that’s what this can help you do by going through and reminder on what we’re working through.

We’re trying to get this to a place where it’s all clean and clear. The sun is shining. We can grow with it, not because this will take us through to ten million dollars a year, but it can get you through to three million dollars a year. After that, a lot of it is just leverage.

Like, it’s just, like, let’s go deeper and deeper on leverage, leverage, and then start applying, like, scalable marketing activities like ads. We get into that later. That’s not what we’re here for at all in the intent. It’s not even the point of Coffee School Pro.

That’s way down the road. Most everybody is at a place right now where they’re looking to get to about two hundred fifty thousand to three hundred fifty thousand dollars a year. That’s the goal in the middle for your own sunshine growth model. Okay?

So we’re working on key parts of this in the intensive because there are certain there’s a certain order in which you wanna do things. Sequencing is something you’ll hear a lot of as you cross the one million dollar a year mark and move toward three million and above. Sequencing sequencing is at the right order of operations.

Don’t just do everything scattershot. Gotta have a plan and order, and we’re working on getting there starting with specialization, then comes the offers, and then comes a whole bunch of other stuff, which is what we’re gonna get into today. I do also want you, if you’re working with a coach, you should be filling this in already. If you’re not, let me know, and I’ll talk to your coach for you. But you need to have a financial intention statement of some kind.

Without an intention statement, it’s very easy to lose track of the the vision, really. But the vision that we have for our business is usually something to do with lifestyle or number of people you want in your organization.

What I want is for you to get really clear on your intention when it comes to money.

What do you want? I know that’s a really big question. We don’t have to tackle it in a single week. We’re not going to.

It’s an always on question. Am I getting closer to what I want? How can I get there? What am I doing to get in my own way?

Because so often, we’re getting in our own way. It all so often. I say that to be nice. It’s every single time you’re getting in your own way.

I know it because I’m I’m the one who gets in my own way as well at time and time again. So understanding that, do your best to set an intention. And if you’re like, what do you mean by intention? We have Don in the room.

Don has a yoga background. If you’re curious about intention, you might wanna just check Don because that’s a really good place to go. I am not I don’t have a yoga background. I do like going on yoga retreats.

Don’t get me wrong. But I can’t be someone who’s like, let me help you with your intention. I could just say, hey. You need one.

You gotta have one. And then we’re gonna work toward getting you there. But if you’re unsure, just, like, reach out to people in the room. Okay?

I want you to fill this in as well and start tracking how you’re progressing up the ladder toward your goals. Now what we have here as two hundred dollars or two hundred thousand dollars a month as your goal, which would be a two point four, two point five million dollar business a year, That’s good. That’s achievable. For everybody who’s like, that’s not achievable, it is one hundred percent achievable, definitely, as an agency.

That doesn’t mean that’s all gonna be profit. Probably half of that should be about profit forty percent somewhere in there. But the point is we wanna get to that place. And if you don’t want to, that’s okay.

You can say, I’m looking for fifty thousand dollars a month. That’s my financial intention statement, what I want for money. I don’t just want money for the sake of it, which maybe two point four million dollars a year feels like. You’re like, maybe that’s a vanity metric.

Maybe I’m not interested in that. Maybe what I want is to make sure I’m paying myself five hundred thousand dollars a year before taxes, after taxes. You decide that thing. And how much money am I going to need to get there?

And knowing that I can’t do it alone because people are a big part of leverage, and leverage is where the money happens. It happens right after money. That’s why it’s on the sunshine growth model so that you can actually start making more money more easily.

If I have to hire people to get there, then I can’t say necessarily, although it’s really up to you. But I would argue that if you want to take home fifty thousand dollars, or five hundred thousand dollars a year, you’re probably going to need to have a one point five million dollar a year business so that you’re paying about two hundred and fifty thousand dollars in salaries.

You’re getting much more than that in salaries because after taxes, and that’s when you’re gonna start to, like, get to a place where you’re good. But we can talk about how to get there as we go. All I want for you is to say, hey. I’ve I’ve already done this. I reached five thousand dollars a month last April. Hey. I got to ten thousand dollars a month in November.

Fifteen thousand dollars a month, I’m tracking toward or wherever you are at. But if you’re tracking it, you’ll feel good about it. If you’re not tracking it, you’ll feel bad about it, and you’ll also make poor decisions because freelancers love to think about both the worst month and the best month as if that’s the most common thing.

So I’ll hear freelancers saying I’m making ten thousand dollars a month when they made ten thousand dollars one month. And another month for two or three thousand dollars, but they’re acting like they’ve figured it all out.

And you haven’t yet if you’re inconsistently making that. We’re talking about making it consistently.

On the other side, there are some who do have a ten thousand dollar a month and focus entirely on the fact that there was that month in there where it was two thousand, and it felt horrible. It was so stressful.

So we don’t want that. We wanna get to a point of consistency in what we’re making and then track it so you can feel good about it. We talked about in ten x freelance copywriter, we talked about the cheat sheet of awesomeness. This as a business owner becomes your cheat sheet of awesomeness.

This is how far you are growing your business to the point that you have set as a goal. So, again, if it’s forty thousand dollars a month and this is where you wanna get to, cool. Wherever you are here, we’re trying to close the gap to get you to that next point. Okay?

So this is not a worksheet we spent a lot of time on before. But if you don’t use it, you will continue to flounder and you will not feel like your business is a business.

This will help you feel like your business is a business, and that’s a good, like, mindset shift from being a source of money or a bit of a money machine machine in some cases. Like, oh, if I just wanna do x, I can pull this lever and really quickly do it. But we don’t just go around pulling levers to make a business work. We have systems. We’ve got machines that are working.

So I want you to just think through this kind of stuff. Okay?

Mindset is something that most of the time we’re talking about in the AMA side of things. So when it’s ask me anything or the q and a or Thursday calls, it’s a lot of, like, but how do I think about that? Is it even possible that someone will pay me ten thousand dollars to write one thing for them and then pay me on an ongoing basis to make that that thing better all the time when, like, that’s how careers are. Like, if you work in house, you set a thing up, and then you’re always optimizing it. So, of course, it’s the same for freelancing too.

But that’s the kind of stuff that we can work through and you should be working through. If you’re finding in any of the lessons that we have here or as you move forward in Copy School Pro, if you find any of those lessons that you’ve applied something like, oh, there was this great money mindset unlock that I have, name the lesson. Say you’ve applied it. You’ve completed applying it. Whatever that thing is that you wanna say to make sure that you are tracking yourself. You are your business’s CEO.

Your business needs you to step up and track this stuff like a CEO does. If you don’t, you’re not really running a business. The business is just like kind of running itself.

Okay. So the remaining sheets in this worksheet, which again is from week one, the remaining sheets in this are all about just tracking and making sense of what you have taken so far. Okay? So you don’t have to, worry about it in any way.

I just want you to make sure that you are tracking things. And if you’re working with a coach directly, I want you to have notes for the coach that you can bring to the coach around questions for any of the lessons that you might be going through, etcetera. Okay? This is already filled in with some of the things that we’re covering.

So in a lot of cases, you’ll feel like, cool. We’re making progress on this, that, and the other thing, and that’s really good. Alright. We’re getting into this week.

Are we ready, or do you have any questions at this point?

Bit of a recap there. No? Okay.

You should now be seeing end of week final decisions for week four, which is your sales driven funnel.

By the end of this week, here are the things you will have done. So we have to get your place where this is all done. That’s this week. You will have established, if you don’t already have one, an Instagram account.

If you have one, check that box off, write your Instagram handle in there, Done. If you don’t, yes. I’m telling you you need one. Yes to Instagram, and I’ve said this in Copy School Pro a lot.

Meta has built in some very cool tools for businesses inside Instagram.

So knowing that and with some of the things I’m gonna show you today, Instagram is actually a really, really, really great place to find clients of all kinds. No matter what your background is, no matter how many objections you have when you hear something like you can find clients on Instagram, yes, you can.

After that or during this time, you’re going to identify a simple lead magnet that people on Instagram will DM you to get. A simple lead magnet is usually something that’s already part of what you do. That’s the best. You don’t have to come up with something new.

A great lead magnet is if you have, a call where make a very quick video about yourself walking yourself through this question that a make a very quick video about yourself walking yourself through this question that a client had in a way that becomes a lead magnet for others. So if their question was around, how do I find people to for you to interview when I don’t even have any good clients yet or my clients are shifting or my customers are shifting, my users are and you answered that question, and it was a good fit lead, then you just leave that call, and you either cut out of the recording for the call.

You can cut something very simple out of that. Like, here’s what I said to my client when they asked this question. Then you post that or you make it your lead magnet directly on Instagram, and we’re gonna get into how that lead magnet gets delivered, but you may not end up posting it as well. Okay.

We’re also going to establish a ManyChat account for Instagram automations. ManyChat is a very cool tool that’s the equivalent of, like, ActiveCampaign. What ActiveCampaign does for email, ManyChat does for direct messages. So you can really start growing your audience on Instagram and then actually use it in ways that traditionally, you couldn’t do much with.

It was a little bit of, like I know as a business owner, I was always like, I’m not going on Instagram. It’s such a waste of time. What am I gonna do with all that? Everything that I do over there, if I were just to makes your Instagram into something that feels more like a list type thing for you to use.

So we will get into ManyChat today, but what you wanna know is you’ll use it with Instagram. You can also use it with Facebook. You can use it with WhatsApp.

So Facebook Messenger and with WhatsApp and with other tools as well. We’re only gonna focus on Instagram.

Don’t let me hold you back from doing other exciting things with it if you have time and if you are excited about those other things.

You’re You’re going to identify a keyword to trigger a sequence in ManyChat that then delivers that lead magnet. You will have your ActiveCampaign or ConvertKit or other email marketing accounts set up. If you don’t already have a list, this is the week you start building a list.

You’re going to have an a boards account set up for DM ing leads. In Coffee School Pro, I taught you boards, I think, last week, very lightly. We’re gonna talk about it pretty lightly here today, and, then we’ll get into it this week. A Calendly or, OnceHub. OnceHub is another good one, but it’s really good for, larger like, for teams.

So Calendly should be enough for you. Zoom or the equivalent for calls that you have with leads. So there’s gonna be a bunch of tools you’re setting up this week. You will have purchased vanity domains and redirected them to Calendly and or Zoom.

We’ll talk about that. And published a new lead video intake page with the video embedded. So there is quite a lot that we’re gonna be going through today, all with the goal of having a sales driven funnel in place that is as simple as humanly possible. You don’t need really elaborate many chat automations or active campaign automations.

You need one. Yeah. One. And the simpler it is, the better. You may need to add to it as you go, but you will just need the one.

Okay. Hold on. What’s going on here?

Dawn.

Oh, cool. So stuff about ManyChat. That’s awesome.

Jack’s utter surprise. That’s awesome.

Okay. Cool. So let’s dig in. This is the basic overview of the sales driven funnel. Now for those who are here or watching this replay and you’re in the intensive freelancing, but you’re not in CopySchool Pro, we’re going to give you access to a lesson from CopySchool Pro called sixteen by twenty three. It’s about setting up email automations that keep people nurtured even after they haven’t taken advantage of something that you offered them in your onboarding flow, which we’re not gonna talk about in the intensive.

So we’ll give you access to that. We’ll get into it. But here, point is, what we’re going to talk about is your sales driven funnel, which begins with something called opening and then moves into setting. Opening is just open a conversation.

It’s the opposite of the close that comes later. So you do open, set, close. We’re just not gonna cover close at this point. We’re gonna talk about sales calls later.

Okay. Opening happens on Instagram in this way. Either someone follows you and comments with the keywords, so you say, like, comment workshop to get the link to my workshop, and then they have to follow and comment with that keyword.

Or you do a manual open with boards where someone is following you. They just started following you, and you go in, make it part of your system. What you do when you’re like, this is the training from Copy School Pro last week. When you’re bored, open boards.

So you go on your phone, and you just go in and see who’s followed you recently, and you open conversations with them. That open happens in an Instagram DM. So that they follow you and comment with the keyword, then you they get an auto reply through ManyChat. And then over in the DM areas where the conversation starts happening automatically in that case.

For Instagram, manual opens. It’s not automatic. That’s where you have somebody in there and you in your, DMs and you use boards, you can just use your phone, like, normally without boards, but it’s free. So start with boards, to have prewritten scripts that you can just fly through to move leads toward the point of conversion.

So that’s opening. Opening is opening a conversation.

That’s all it is, and it’s important to keep in mind that you only want to continue conversations with people who are a good fit. That doesn’t mean you have to ghost people who are not a good fit, but you wanna prioritize spending your time in DMs with people who are actually likely to be a good fit for you. And this is where in the sunshine growth model, if you have your audience identified, your ICP, which we talked about in the very first week, you’ve got that covered. You’ll have an easier time understanding whom you’re making content for.

So that’s the open. Then we get into, again, many chat and boards where there’s an automation that continues with the keyword, and then there’s lead nurturing that you do with boards. And over to the far side, there’s, again, more manual lead nurturing with one to one email. But what we’re trying to do with all the different things that someone can do, we’re always trying to lead them to this key part here, which is a booking page.

That booking page is probably gonna be in Calendly. That’s what you wanna work on.

Have a booking page up. If you’re using Calendly, you’re already there. You might just want to embed it in an existing page that you’re already in a page on your site, a landing page, so you can make sure that you can control as much as possible about that landing page.

Then this is the key part. You don’t then land them on a confirmation that comes, like, in like, the the default in Calendly is once they submit their contact information, then basically you say like, they stay there and you say thanks, check your email or something like that.

We’re gonna upgrade that because we’re pros and there’s no point in taking the intensive if you don’t apply this stuff and do the stuff that will make you look better and smarter and, like, more of a pro because pro equals expensive, and that is a good thing. So we’re gonna land them on a intake page that is an embedded video. That’s you saying, hey. Here’s what’s up. Here’s what you should be doing next. Here’s who I am, etcetera. And that then leads them to a sales call.

So that is the screenshot of what you will be working on this week. If you don’t do that this week, you really have to ask yourself how committed you are to building out a business that is going to run, not just guessing, but a business that’s going to actually run. Okay? So I am assuming at all times that that you’re doing the work. And for the rest of this lesson, I’m going to make that assumption because why wouldn’t you? So let’s get into it open.

Opening this gentleman here is opening on his phone. We’re imagining at least that he is. And open is, again, you hold your phone. You’re sitting there. You’re in Instagram, and you go over to the part where people can where you get an update on what’s happening. I’m going there right now.

And that’s where you can see who just followed you and who is who who you should be reaching out to. So you go in to the home screen here. If you’re unfamiliar, the home screen down at the very bottom, and you pop into you can go over and see what chats you have going on, if any.

Or the place you’ll likely start is in you’ll hit that little heart icon. I’m sure there’s a real name for it somewhere. But hit the heart icon, and you can see anywhere there’s a blue button. Those are people who are new followers, and all I wanna do is hit that, message them, and start a conversation with that person.

Okay? That’s all we’re doing. We’re opening it. I’m going to go in and go into boards.

So I’ll walk you through this in just a second, but this is boards. This is a keyboard that replaces your normal keyboard. And in it, I can say whatever I want to that comes up. So a flow that we taught last week is first name, last name, exclamation point.

So in this case, it’s Christina Grosso, exclamation point, then thanks for commenting on my whatever. Appreciate it. Or thanks for following me. Appreciate it.

That’s it. And then you wait for Christina Grasso to reply. That is the open. That is what you may not be doing.

You can do this on LinkedIn as well, but we’re talking about Instagram. Okay? So we wanna use Instagram to open conversations that can lead toward people becoming our actual leads. Do not worry about the number of followers that you don’t have on Instagram right now.

Just get started. It’s phenomenal what happens when you just get started. So get established, and then you can start attracting the right audience for your offers. Nobody has any followers when they start on Instagram.

Nobody does. If you open an account, no matter who you are, you have to start from zero. So you’ll have to find ways to get people on there. We’re all bright human beings.

We can do that very easily, but you have to start. Okay? So the whole concept of sell by chat is just opening and continuing conversations in DMs in a a chat like manner so it feels one to one. You can do this on Instagram, obviously, as we’re talking about.

You can also do it in email where you send out an email that looks very personal. And then when they reply, it can either kick off another more personal looking automation, or it can come to you and you can start actually selling them in DM. So you’re replacing a lot of the sales calls, stuff, triage, etcetera, with conversations in Instagram. Okay?

Read more about this in the worksheet provided here.

What you’ll wanna do this week is go into ManyChat, and I can show you our ManyChat, but our ManyChat is very, very big.

We’ve, put a few team members through ManyChat training. One of them led to, a massive automation that’s quite intimidating to look at. So we’re not gonna look at that one, but we can look at the other ones. But if you’ve set up an automation for email ever, then you’re already familiar with how these work. So what we wanna do is set up one automation that opens conversations, and that’s, again, the part where someone follows you and then comments something like workshop or any keyword you may have, clients, copywriting, leads, whatever that thing might be. It probably shouldn’t be leads.

Whatever that thing is that you wanna do. So we’ll identify a simple lead magnet.

Simple, valuable, but simple. That your audience wants, make sure it’s in keeping with your specialization and with your authoritative offers. You’re gonna draft a series of posts you can use to drive people to comment with a keyword. So those are posts that you will publish on Instagram as content.

Identify the keyword, they’ll comment that triggers your ManyChat automation.

And then using the templates that come standard in ManyChat, you will set up a single automation.

So as soon as you start using ManyChat, they have prewritten templates for you to use. They also have other ones you can unlock from influencers, but I have found them to be garbage.

So but do what you want to with it. I hope you’re excited about ManyChat.

I first heard about it from Todd Herman five or six years ago when he was like, Joe, you have got to use it to sell, copy school via Messenger. And I was like, really good idea, Todd. Awesome. Great.

No. Didn’t do it. And now I wish I had. And then six years later it was five years later by the time I finally started listening, and we should have and you should too.

And also then, of course, after that, you’ll wanna start using the prepopulated scripts in boards. So both many chat and boards are what you will use in Instagram. You don’t have to worry about other things. It’s ManyChat and boards together.

Boards installs on your phone. ManyChat doesn’t. ManyChat is the automation tool. Both come with both ManyChat and boards come with prewritten scripts.

Like, basically, like, workflows for you to follow. Okay? So you wanna start there. In copy school pro, we’ll talk more and more about this for the intensive freelancing.

This is the only week we’re going to dig into this stuff. Okay. So what I want you to do, what your homework is, and if you’re watching this, you should pause right now and do this work.

Brainstorm video or written lead magnets your audio audience will want after your post. Now for best results, video is the way to go because you’re posting on Instagram. It is a visual platform.

Most people also just like engaging with video versus a written lead magnet. If you’re like, well, an SOP for how to work with a great copywriter or how to work with a freelance copywriter and get the most out of working with them, if you’re like, that’s what my ideal audience needs to hear because they’re used to hiring freelancers and they don’t get the best work out of needs to hear because they’re used to hiring freelancers and they don’t get the best work out of them, I can make a lot of content around that. If that was a lead magnet you were going to use and you’re like, well, there’s a checklist, though, then I would say also make a video and just package them up together. So you’ve got a video and the SOP together.

The video is good if you are on camera and you’re com like, you’re comfortable on camera.

Do your best to be as engaging as you can because people work with people that they like. Right? So this is where you will, after today’s session, go forward and come up with these, lead magnet ideas.

Just brainstorm them. Okay? And, again, if you’re watching this right now, go ahead and pause and do this work right now. If you’re here live with me right now and you’ve got an idea, now’s the time to write it down. Okay? So don’t lose anything that might be going through your head that could be really valuable. K?

Then you’ll need post ideas to get people there. So I know this is starting to sound like, woah, Joe. I have to, like, get serious about Instagram. Yeah.

Yep. You do. So you will have to get serious about Instagram, and that’s okay. It’s not a scary platform at all once you just get used to doing the work.

So how are you going to make people interested in your lead magnet? And it’s a good thing to think about this right now instead of later. It’s just like when you are writing a sales page for a product that doesn’t exist yet. You write the product into existence, overcoming objections, coming up with great ideas.

You can start with this. You can say, k. I wanna post my ICP is looking for x y z. They have these problems, these desires.

You can fill in what their problems are, what their pains are, what desires they have. If you just start with this and fill this part in, then you can work back toward an idea for what your lead magnet could be. So point is what you wanna do is be ready to have a lot of content you can put out that will have one keyword, always one, because you’re just going to drive into this one many chat automation, not five many chat automations.

One, we can work on it once you’re making a million bucks a year with sell by chat, then go ahead and add more. But we’re going to start with one. The crazy one, the the bananas one that we have is the one that we drive everybody into. Now we started with a bunch. We don’t need a bunch. We just need the one, and that’s what we use, and I recommend the same for you as well.

So coming up with not just the lead magnet, but also things you’ll post to get people to care about this lead magnet. And again, those people are your ideal audience.

The following slides or sheets in your worksheet are for how to learn to use boards, and then you’ll also see how to learn to use ManyChat.

ManyChat has a really great, course that it puts out that you should take.

Boards, I believe this is the one I put together, with how we use boards. I find it quite useful.

If you don’t, then just go and try using boards. It’s just like I showed you. Like, you’ll go to the website. You’ll sign up for the trial.

You’re you’ll install it on your phone. There’s also a desktop version, and there’s a browser extension so that when you’re on LinkedIn, you you can use the browser extension there if you’re, like, on LinkedIn on your desktop or wherever you are on your desktop and you’re connecting with people. You can then start using boards all the time. The point of boards is to have prewritten, scripted stuff you can say to move people along in conversations with you.

Because what you will find very quickly when you’re having these conversations in DM is you don’t know how to get conversations on track toward how do I get them to want my offer? How do I get them to say yes to booking a call with me? And you might end up just chatting and being like, how’s business? And they’re like, cool.

How’s your business? And you’re like, cool. It’s all good. How long you been in business?

A little while. How about you? Oh, sometime.

Where do you live, Florida? Where do you live? Oh, Florida sounds nice. I’m and suddenly you’re just like, what’s happening here?

Boards keeps you on track. Boards is reminder to you that you are not there to make friends. You are there to create clients out of these conversations that you have and the content that drives them there. So the next screen, the next slide, the next page, whatever is for ManyChat.

And this is training again that ManyChat themselves came up with, so go ahead and use that. I believe this one is at least. I put together my own stuff for y’all as well, but go to those, and you’ve already got the worksheet available.

Sixteen by twenty three is a lesson that we will post in, the intensive freelancing Slack group. As soon as we have it set up in such a way that we can share it around, It might even just come down to sharing the original Wistia recording, but we will have this ready for you in, the intensive freelancing channel even though it’s only for copy schoolers, like, for copy school pro. We wanna share it because everything you’re doing on Instagram, you can also do to start sell by chat with your email list.

But, Yeah. I’m not gonna I’m not actually but I’m just gonna let you go with that. Okay?

So any questions on opening at this point? Because there’s a lot that I’m covering here.

What are you thinking?

I have a question.

Yeah.

So I just looked at my followers because I posted over the weekend and got reposted by you and, like, also Chris Wazekowski. And I just get, like, a bunch of, like, copywriting people, and I know a lot of people have that on LinkedIn too.

So do you open up a conversation? I mean, you would open a conversation with, like, copywriters, but they are certainly not my ideal person. Do you open conversations with everyone?

And then also, do you follow people back?

I don’t follow back. I open conversations with everyone though. And I say I, but we have a person who does that. But it was me in the beginning.

I was doing it, and, yeah, with everybody. We tried. There was someone else on my team who was temporarily doing opens but was really selective because sometimes bots follow you, etcetera. And so I just I took that person off of opens because I don’t give a crap if you’re real or not on the other side.

Instagram actually likes when you have conversations with your followers, so you tend not to get in trouble. They followed you first. You are just engaging with them. So all I do is, we have two prewritten notes in boards.

One is, for female entrepreneurs. One is for male entrepreneurs, and that’s just because of some I know that might sound like, well, that’s weird gender thing to do. There’s a lot of dudes so far that we’ve seen who, send unsolicited photos to our great surprise.

So we open with, conversations around, for I know this is, like, a weird insight, but just trust me on this one.

If you are a woman putting photos of yourself out there, you get photos back.

So we do, hey. Thanks for the follow. How did you stumble on our stuff, with a little, like, x sign at the end of it for women who follow us? This is like a friendly thing.

We’re also friendly with men. We don’t assume the worst. Don’t get me wrong. But we’re a little more cautious.

So we’ll say, hey. Thanks for the follow. Are you here for the vids or and then there’s something else. So those those are the two.

And we go back and forth on different ones. Right? So I said, like, it’s not like there’s a direct line or, like, there’s an SOP that says, if man said this, if woman said that, that’s not it. But it’s just, like, our, the person who does it is very social savvy.

So she’s making a good case for let’s just treat some some cases a little bit differently than others. So all that to say, yes, we do open with everybody.

We get a lot of people in as well who are not, a fit in any way, and that’s like, other people will say, hey. You should follow the copy hackers, Instagram.

They’ll tell, like, like, we had recently, fast weight loss or something. F a s t is some sort of thing. There’s, like, a coach for weight loss, and they told their followers in a webinar to follow us. And we got so many followers that are, like, weight loss coaches.

We can’t do anything with that. They’re never gonna, like there’s nothing we can do with that. But we still say, hi. Thanks for the follow.

How is business? And it’s just a good thing. Right? So, yeah. Yes. But but there is that level of caution that I mentioned at the beginning around who you’re reaching out to. Be slightly careful, where social media can be a little bit weird.

Yeah.

Cool? Yeah. That’s helpful. Thank you.

Cool. Anything else?

I always assume, like and especially since I’m in health tech, like, larger companies always just have, like, a social media specialist person. So, like, if they were to message me or I would message them, whatever, it’s like they’re not even the decision maker. And I Yeah. But I’m always, like, under that assumption. Because I I mean, I use Instagram, but simply for just, like, scrolling and sports and stuff. But, so I always feel like if I were to work with someone, it’s more like a smaller type business.

Yeah. I just wanna make a note there. So I’m not talking about you following anybody. So it’s not like I’m not gonna follow, Etsy on on Instagram and expect to have a conversation with the CMO of Etsy at all. What I’m thinking what what we wanna do is if you are going and putting content on Instagram, there are people who have their private their regular accounts that are, like, the CMO of whatever place, the VP of whatever, even just like a senior marketing manager who’s going through Instagram. And if they see stuff that interest them, that’s work related, and they follow you, like, we just had the head of copy for Walmart, follow us.

She’s just on her regular Instagram account. We don’t I don’t know what right if she was just there and found us, and we only knew she was the head of Walmart copy because we, did our open. Said, like, how’s business? Are you a freelancer or a copywriter? And that’s how we got to that place of knowing that. Now if I wanted to sell services into Walmart, that would be a really obvious thing for me to do. Like, I’m talking to the right person to influence decision makers, the person who’s going to have pains.

So just know that people are using regular old accounts to look through stuff. And if they are ambitious people, they’re not just looking at style or whatever else it might be on Instagram. They’re also, like, following a bunch of people who have good advice on business, and they’re finding contractors there.

Yeah. Okay.

Does that make sense?

I never thought I never thought it like that. I I forget that people who run-in the grocery are actually using social media, like, personally. So As regular humans, but they’re, like, thinking of work all the time too.

Yeah. Yeah. It’s a good question. It’s a good, clarification. Yeah. Cool.

Anybody else?

No? Alright. Let’s talk about setting then because this is you’re gonna find it’s pretty easy to open conversations, and then you’ll find it’s pretty hard to set appointments. So how do we do that?

One, go into this knowing. It’s pretty hard to set appointments.

So work at it. Try different things. Experiment. Always be a copywriter. Right? You’re always trying different things and seeing what works and what doesn’t.

We don’t give up on a headline just because the first one didn’t work. We try again and again and again, and the same is true here. There is every reason to believe that this is likely to help you attract clients. And I’m saying that, and you’re supposed to just believe it.

But I’ve mentioned in CSP that I’m in other coaching programs.

And not only are we seeing cool stuff with sell by chat ourselves, but the things that the people I’m being coached alongside of are seeing is, like I mean, is cause to give this thing a a heavy shot. Like, try hard with it. Don’t give up. Try different things. Okay? So here is what you’re going to do to basically get set up to create a higher converting sales funnel where the sale happens sometimes in sell by chat, but mostly on a call.

This is something that I noticed when it like, my favorite coach does, and then I noticed other coaches did it too. And it is just having vanity domains. That’s why the intensive meeting dot com exists. I think it’s just a baller kind of thing to show, like, okay.

So instead of putting your Zoom link in there, you have, like, a thing that shows you’re a pro. Right? So if it’s, like, meet with ben dot com and that’s always in your, meeting invitation, etcetera, then that’s just kind of a cool sign. And it’s a really easy win.

You go buy a three dollar domain on GoDaddy, and then you use the built in redirect inside the GoDaddy platform to redirect to your book a call page or whatever it is. We have, like, some we probably have so many domains already. Just use one of them, and have it be one that redirects to your Zoom, to your Calendly, to whatever it might be. So vanity domains, really straightforward, very quick win.

You can do it right after this call. And then when you start using it, it starts looking like this isn’t the first time you’ve done this. Like, not only do you have Zoom ready to go and Calendly embedded on a page on your site that has, like, a video of you in it, but you’re also using, like, a cool domain that feels like, oh, okay. This person this isn’t their first time doing this.

They’re probably a pro in a lot of ways. These little signals actually do quite a lot to help you close people.

So consider that.

I mentioned earlier that you’re going to have an intake page. I wanted to have enough time in today’s call for you to go and actually give a shot at this, but I always over over prepare like bananas. This is today’s session alone could be all sixty days of the intensive freelancing, but, it’s not. So you just have to go block workout afterward, block some time in your calendar.

So what you want to do at this point, this is the part where okay. Let’s say you’ve opened conversations on in Instagram DMs. It’s feeling good. You’re talking with the head of coffee at Walmart, and they’re like, we really just need somebody to come in and take over our landing pages.

But everybody we try is, like, impossible. I might be able to help you with that. What are you doing right now? Oh, I’m busy right now.

Well, are you free tomorrow? Sure. I’m free tomorrow. Great. Here’s my Calendly, or can I have yours or whatever it is?

Right? So you’re at that place now where you are booking the call. So we’re getting to we got out of chat, and we’re moving them over to a page where you are going to, get them going down the path of, working with you, but taking that first call. Right?

So this is if you are a new lead, not a new converted client or anything, you have a new page on your website. And I have in this case, I’m recommending that for this new lead video intake, you are going to put it on your website and break the landing page rule of of having your website nav on there. Now most of the time when we’re make making a landing page, we take the global nav off because it’s a distraction.

But we’re trying to show that we’re a legit business. We have past clients we’ve worked with. We have maybe a blog or a space on your site that’s, like, where you put your thought leadership pieces. So we wanna keep your nav in place there. So you just take an exist or just put a page up on your site. Use whatever boring template you have. It doesn’t have to be anything other than professional looking.

Build that page. Throw your URL in here because you’re going to hand this off to somebody later as well. Right? Once you’ve set this up, it’s not a one and done.

Later, you’re gonna want it to be updated. So you’ll need whoever you hire down the road to also have access to these files. So always make sure you’re documenting everything along the way. Now I’m worried I wasn’t clear about that through the first three weeks.

I wanna be really clear.

Everything you’re doing here, you need to document because later, you’ll wanna change something and you won’t be the one doing it anymore. Okay?

We’re gonna have to pull us now, like, just take that out. And just put put it on every video everywhere. Document.

Okay. You’re gonna wanna lightly script this video. We’ve got a a talking points on the following page. So let’s just pop to that so you can see what I’m talking about.

This is where your new lead comes to this page, and they’ve likely already booked. Now they’re landing on a page. So they book time with you and you say, hey. I’m so glad we get to work together.

I’m really looking forward to talking with you. I’m Joe from Copy Hackers.

If you’re here, you’re watching this. It’s probably because we were talking on Instagram, probably about email, and just really get into that. Right? So then establish the triggers that brought them there.

So, again, that could be we were talking about email or we were talking about something to do with conversion copywriting, then confirm why you are the right person to talk to about this. So we were talking about conversion copywriting because all we do at CopyHackers is conversion copywriting. I’ve done this, that, and the other thing, so we can have a really good conversation about this. Then set expectations for the call.

So in this call, you’re probably wondering and, again, you’re trying to do this in a minute. Don’t make this a long video.

In the call, we have probably wondering what we’ll cover. I’m gonna ask you a bunch of questions. And if you have those questions, post them down below or throw them up near. Anything that will help them prepare for the call. I’ll also share my prices. I’ll share my availability.

I’ll talk to you about some packages that may be available for what you’re working on. And if you want client examples, we can talk through that too. But it is a ten minute call, so we’re gonna move quickly through it. Okay?

And then establish what you expect from them on the call that they will transparently share their objectives, your timeline, your budget, and any key information that could affect the work. Okay? So please arrive ready to go with all of that. And then, of course, this is the point where if you do have a diagnostic, you can share it now.

That will make this longer than a minute, so keep that in mind. It may be that you wanna separate that onto a second landing page that follows, or not. Right? So this is where you have to decide how important is your diagnostic, which we talk about in Copy School Pro. How important is it to getting people to convert, and is now the right time to start sharing it so they can get a sense for working with you and get excited about the fact that you have this diagnostic.

Alternatively, if you don’t wanna do that, then you could just ask them to consider x question before the call. So in advance of the call, if you could just give some thought to maybe make, like, a few bullet point notes about what you think is preventing your copy from performing well right now, or a question like, if you had a magic wand, this might sound silly, but if you had a magic wand, how would you change your copy overnight? What would you do differently if you could? Ask them that sort of thing so they’re thinking about it even if they don’t make notes, which they should.

Anybody who’s actually ready to work with you should be ready to, like, start taking direction from you and thinking the way you think. But even if they don’t, they’ve at least engaged with you a little bit here. So don’t over don’t worry too much if they don’t do their homework. You can just ask them that question again in the call.

And then if they have done their homework, then you can feel really good about working with them.

Remind them at the end of this video, they can invite their team, and give examples of that. So, hey. When I talk to VPs of marketing or CMOs, typically, in that first call, they don’t think to bring their designer, but your designer probably has a lot of opinions that they’ll wanna share on how x is converting. So maybe consider bringing your head of design or your creative director if you have one.

And if you have a copywriter who will be involved in working with me as well, I’d love to start getting to know them here. So feel free to invite them. You can see how to do that right in the Google Calendar invite that you already got. I’m so excited to work with you or at least start talking about working with you.

So make sure you check your inbox for that confirmation of our meeting and I will see you very soon. And that’s it. You’re done a minute later out the door and you can embed that. Okay?

So that’s what you wanna do. I know we’re at the end of our time.

From that point, you wanna make sure that you are not from that point, but throughout the second half, the setting part of open and set, we wanna make sure that we have Calendly or schedule ones, which is now called OnceHub, have it set up so that it looks legit as well. So ten, fifteen, twenty minute event type. Make sure that you set up an event type that’s purely for people who are entering via ManyChat or Instagram.

And that’s just as easy as duplicating your existing triage that you’ve got so that you can track them better. I know there’s other ways to track, but the easiest, most no brainer way is just to have a second event type. It’s all exactly the same, but you can say, oh, this person signed up through the ManyChat thing. Then you can have their Instagram open when the time comes to talk with them instead of someone who came in as a lead through email, and you’re searching your inbox madly. Like, who the hell is Dolores?

And she’s in Instagram. That’s why you don’t know. You don’t remember anything about her. Okay? So follow this to set up your Calendly as well.

And I think that’s it. Okay. Good. Thank god. So we’re at the end because we’ve only got three minutes left in our time, and I definitely love respecting how much time we have and you have. Do you have any questions about getting established with what we’re talking about here today for open and set?

It’s a lot.

Are you going to go forward and do it? I’m assuming the answer is yes. So what are you gonna do first?

Who’s that first? Andrew?

I have a question because I always have a question. Can you hear me okay?

Yeah.

Yeah. My question is just around I’m sort of as I go through this, I’m sorting out how much, because I have kind of, like, the existing web copy copy thing going where I’m kind of comfortable and can get leads and kinda know what I’m doing. And then I have the thing that I’m kind of trying to stand up right now, and I’m trying to figure out how much I need to kind of, like, leap away from what I’m doing, or can I kind of keep what I’m doing in the background and sort of stand this up and kind of let this sort of feed my existing business and what I’m trying to stand up versus how much do I burn the boats?

So, like, the coach in me is, like, burn the boats. Commit. The realist in me is, like, gotcha. Okay.

You’ve built this brand over time. You’re getting good work from it. You want to keep making money with it. It’ll make sense.

You’ve got expertise in the area and authority. So I say do what feels right to you knowing you’ve got only so much time in the day, and there’s easier money in retainers.

Yeah. Cool. Cool. Works. Thank you. Great.

Awesome. Cool. Anybody else? Ben.

So I I I, like, was using ConvertKit quite a bit. Yeah. Like, I had, like it actually was great for a landing page as well.

Yeah. That’s where it started.

Yeah.

But, I kinda switched to I got Pawzix, so I I was like, I’m gonna be using Substack because it’s great for, like I didn’t like grabbing all my newsletters from ConvertKit and then putting it on my website in case people want to read a past issue, and it just says, like, oh, Substack is perfect. But so I’m like but step sec doesn’t really have lead magnets.

So I I thought about just doing both, or do you think, like, I’m trying to the substack lead magnet can just be, like, your archive or some like, it it depends.

Are you set up to accept paid subscribers?

Not yet.

I was waiting to get a little bit.

Yeah.

So just do that, and then you can say that the first month is free, and you can, like, give that away as your lead magnet if you want to.

It probably won’t be your lasting e lead magnet. It depends. It depends how it performs. But, yeah, if we’re looking at, like, low barrier to entry, low friction on getting this thing standing up, then I would just turn on paid subscriptions for your newsletter. Just, like, make it six months down the road or something, and then make the first six months your lead magnet or whatever you wanna say there. If that makes sense, I would I would do that. Okay.

I I think I was just waiting because, like, I’ve always, like, followed, like, Lenny’s approach, and he’s, like, eight thousand subscribers, then he went paid, and it was, like, fifty million dollars a month.

And now he’s obviously super successful now, but I’m always, like, I’m just gonna wait until I have fifteen hundred subscribers. I’m a wait till I get more.

So That’s fair.

I mean, out of the gate, we’ve started charging right away and actually making money right away for hours even though I haven’t done anything with them. I feel really bad.

But whatever you wanna do. But my question is if you’re going to use Substack as your lead magnet, then there has to be something, desirable and, like, semi exclusive about it.

Otherwise, how are you going to make people want it? So it’s really up to you to just I mean, I would say just put a trial version together or some interesting take on your archives. Like, can you do a best of video that they get access? Something like that.

Yeah. Because otherwise, I don’t you if you’re trying to do the lowest possible barrier to entry and you just wanna use something existing that you have, you can start with just saying, I mean, comment newsletter to get my newsletter, and that’s fine. That’ll get them started. So Yeah. Yeah. Okay. Okay.

That’s a good idea.

Okay. Cool.

Alright. I know we’re at the end of our time. Thank you everybody for sticking around.

The replay will be available at some point, and you can watch it then. That’s helpful.

Okay. So have a good one, and we’ll see you in Thursday on Thursday in our session. Cool? Thanks, everyone. Bye.

Transcript

Alright. Cool. Welcome, everybody. This is week four of the intensive freelancing training. So at this point, you have standardized your offer based on your specialization with a retainer that you’re ready to put into play.

Now I know that people are at different stages of actually applying this. It’s okay. All I ask is that you bring your honest questions so that we can help you through them if you keep it to yourself. It’s very, very hard to get help.

It’s you can often, you know, catch things that will help, but the best way is just, like, just say it. And someone else is probably going through it as well. And if they’re not, then people watching this replay later are going to be like, thank you for asking that. I’m as stuck as you are on that.

So bring your questions.

As usual I think as usual for the intense of freelancing, bring a win first for everything.

Say your win before you ask your question, win of any kind, and that could even be, I think I’ve decided what I’m gonna do when I grow up. And I know not everybody’s there. But if that is, then that’s okay. That’s a win. If you feel good about it, share it. Let us celebrate it with you. Okay?

Alright. Week four is getting into how to start selling your offers, starting, of course, with your special your standardized offer, in spaces that maybe you’re not using as much as you could. And I say that because I haven’t been using them prior to learning them in the last year.

But they’ve been really effective for our business, and so I’m sharing them with you.

This is where you start turning leads into booked calls.

So the ideal funnel that you will have as a freelancer building out, higher tickets, freelancing business, or an agency of some kind, whatever your business is going to look like.

You’re going to want to book calls with people. That’s where the sales happen. They can happen in other places. It doesn’t actually always have to lead to a call, but the most common scenario is let’s hop on a call, a triage call ten, fifteen minutes out of the gate where you just make sure you wanna work together for anybody who’s been in freelancing school, in ten x f c in particular inside freelancing school.

You’ll know that I say, like, you go into these calls with, like, an oh, hell’s no approach. Like, no. No. This isn’t gonna work instead of going in feeling, oh, I hope this works.

I hope this works. And that tends to help out a lot. But before we even get there, what we’re trying to do is push more qualified leads there so that when you go into this, oh, hell’s no triage call, you actually feel really good about the lead that you’re talking to. And so that, oh, hell’s no, can turn into a, this sounds kind of awesome.

Let’s work together call pretty quickly.

First, we gotta get leads in there. We gotta get good fit one. So in the sunshine growth model, we talk about thought leadership. Now we’re only doing so much on thought leadership here in the intensive freelancing.

CopySchool Pro is where you’ll wanna land after the intensive freelancing to build on all of these things that we’re talking about and just establishing. Establishing. Okay? Which I think is clear to everybody.

Alright. So when it comes to I just wanna kind of back up to where we are, do a bit of a reset to make sure everybody is aligned on the idea of applying the sunshine growth model, and then we’ll dig into it. So half a second here while I share my screen.

Okay. I’m gonna go into, full screen. Good. So this is what we shared on week one, day one.

This concept of the sunshine growth model, which looks like this. There are areas that you know you need to work on most. Right? So when you are a small business owner, you are always, inundated with all the ideas and the things you could be working on, and it’s important to start saying this is not a priority yet because this is clearly a big priority, and that’s what this can help you do by going through and reminder on what we’re working through.

We’re trying to get this to a place where it’s all clean and clear. The sun is shining. We can grow with it, not because this will take us through to ten million dollars a year, but it can get you through to three million dollars a year. After that, a lot of it is just leverage.

Like, it’s just, like, let’s go deeper and deeper on leverage, leverage, and then start applying, like, scalable marketing activities like ads. We get into that later. That’s not what we’re here for at all in the intent. It’s not even the point of Coffee School Pro.

That’s way down the road. Most everybody is at a place right now where they’re looking to get to about two hundred fifty thousand to three hundred fifty thousand dollars a year. That’s the goal in the middle for your own sunshine growth model. Okay?

So we’re working on key parts of this in the intensive because there are certain there’s a certain order in which you wanna do things. Sequencing is something you’ll hear a lot of as you cross the one million dollar a year mark and move toward three million and above. Sequencing sequencing is at the right order of operations.

Don’t just do everything scattershot. Gotta have a plan and order, and we’re working on getting there starting with specialization, then comes the offers, and then comes a whole bunch of other stuff, which is what we’re gonna get into today. I do also want you, if you’re working with a coach, you should be filling this in already. If you’re not, let me know, and I’ll talk to your coach for you. But you need to have a financial intention statement of some kind.

Without an intention statement, it’s very easy to lose track of the the vision, really. But the vision that we have for our business is usually something to do with lifestyle or number of people you want in your organization.

What I want is for you to get really clear on your intention when it comes to money.

What do you want? I know that’s a really big question. We don’t have to tackle it in a single week. We’re not going to.

It’s an always on question. Am I getting closer to what I want? How can I get there? What am I doing to get in my own way?

Because so often, we’re getting in our own way. It all so often. I say that to be nice. It’s every single time you’re getting in your own way.

I know it because I’m I’m the one who gets in my own way as well at time and time again. So understanding that, do your best to set an intention. And if you’re like, what do you mean by intention? We have Don in the room.

Don has a yoga background. If you’re curious about intention, you might wanna just check Don because that’s a really good place to go. I am not I don’t have a yoga background. I do like going on yoga retreats.

Don’t get me wrong. But I can’t be someone who’s like, let me help you with your intention. I could just say, hey. You need one.

You gotta have one. And then we’re gonna work toward getting you there. But if you’re unsure, just, like, reach out to people in the room. Okay?

I want you to fill this in as well and start tracking how you’re progressing up the ladder toward your goals. Now what we have here as two hundred dollars or two hundred thousand dollars a month as your goal, which would be a two point four, two point five million dollar business a year, That’s good. That’s achievable. For everybody who’s like, that’s not achievable, it is one hundred percent achievable, definitely, as an agency.

That doesn’t mean that’s all gonna be profit. Probably half of that should be about profit forty percent somewhere in there. But the point is we wanna get to that place. And if you don’t want to, that’s okay.

You can say, I’m looking for fifty thousand dollars a month. That’s my financial intention statement, what I want for money. I don’t just want money for the sake of it, which maybe two point four million dollars a year feels like. You’re like, maybe that’s a vanity metric.

Maybe I’m not interested in that. Maybe what I want is to make sure I’m paying myself five hundred thousand dollars a year before taxes, after taxes. You decide that thing. And how much money am I going to need to get there?

And knowing that I can’t do it alone because people are a big part of leverage, and leverage is where the money happens. It happens right after money. That’s why it’s on the sunshine growth model so that you can actually start making more money more easily.

If I have to hire people to get there, then I can’t say necessarily, although it’s really up to you. But I would argue that if you want to take home fifty thousand dollars, or five hundred thousand dollars a year, you’re probably going to need to have a one point five million dollar a year business so that you’re paying about two hundred and fifty thousand dollars in salaries.

You’re getting much more than that in salaries because after taxes, and that’s when you’re gonna start to, like, get to a place where you’re good. But we can talk about how to get there as we go. All I want for you is to say, hey. I’ve I’ve already done this. I reached five thousand dollars a month last April. Hey. I got to ten thousand dollars a month in November.

Fifteen thousand dollars a month, I’m tracking toward or wherever you are at. But if you’re tracking it, you’ll feel good about it. If you’re not tracking it, you’ll feel bad about it, and you’ll also make poor decisions because freelancers love to think about both the worst month and the best month as if that’s the most common thing.

So I’ll hear freelancers saying I’m making ten thousand dollars a month when they made ten thousand dollars one month. And another month for two or three thousand dollars, but they’re acting like they’ve figured it all out.

And you haven’t yet if you’re inconsistently making that. We’re talking about making it consistently.

On the other side, there are some who do have a ten thousand dollar a month and focus entirely on the fact that there was that month in there where it was two thousand, and it felt horrible. It was so stressful.

So we don’t want that. We wanna get to a point of consistency in what we’re making and then track it so you can feel good about it. We talked about in ten x freelance copywriter, we talked about the cheat sheet of awesomeness. This as a business owner becomes your cheat sheet of awesomeness.

This is how far you are growing your business to the point that you have set as a goal. So, again, if it’s forty thousand dollars a month and this is where you wanna get to, cool. Wherever you are here, we’re trying to close the gap to get you to that next point. Okay?

So this is not a worksheet we spent a lot of time on before. But if you don’t use it, you will continue to flounder and you will not feel like your business is a business.

This will help you feel like your business is a business, and that’s a good, like, mindset shift from being a source of money or a bit of a money machine machine in some cases. Like, oh, if I just wanna do x, I can pull this lever and really quickly do it. But we don’t just go around pulling levers to make a business work. We have systems. We’ve got machines that are working.

So I want you to just think through this kind of stuff. Okay?

Mindset is something that most of the time we’re talking about in the AMA side of things. So when it’s ask me anything or the q and a or Thursday calls, it’s a lot of, like, but how do I think about that? Is it even possible that someone will pay me ten thousand dollars to write one thing for them and then pay me on an ongoing basis to make that that thing better all the time when, like, that’s how careers are. Like, if you work in house, you set a thing up, and then you’re always optimizing it. So, of course, it’s the same for freelancing too.

But that’s the kind of stuff that we can work through and you should be working through. If you’re finding in any of the lessons that we have here or as you move forward in Copy School Pro, if you find any of those lessons that you’ve applied something like, oh, there was this great money mindset unlock that I have, name the lesson. Say you’ve applied it. You’ve completed applying it. Whatever that thing is that you wanna say to make sure that you are tracking yourself. You are your business’s CEO.

Your business needs you to step up and track this stuff like a CEO does. If you don’t, you’re not really running a business. The business is just like kind of running itself.

Okay. So the remaining sheets in this worksheet, which again is from week one, the remaining sheets in this are all about just tracking and making sense of what you have taken so far. Okay? So you don’t have to, worry about it in any way.

I just want you to make sure that you are tracking things. And if you’re working with a coach directly, I want you to have notes for the coach that you can bring to the coach around questions for any of the lessons that you might be going through, etcetera. Okay? This is already filled in with some of the things that we’re covering.

So in a lot of cases, you’ll feel like, cool. We’re making progress on this, that, and the other thing, and that’s really good. Alright. We’re getting into this week.

Are we ready, or do you have any questions at this point?

Bit of a recap there. No? Okay.

You should now be seeing end of week final decisions for week four, which is your sales driven funnel.

By the end of this week, here are the things you will have done. So we have to get your place where this is all done. That’s this week. You will have established, if you don’t already have one, an Instagram account.

If you have one, check that box off, write your Instagram handle in there, Done. If you don’t, yes. I’m telling you you need one. Yes to Instagram, and I’ve said this in Copy School Pro a lot.

Meta has built in some very cool tools for businesses inside Instagram.

So knowing that and with some of the things I’m gonna show you today, Instagram is actually a really, really, really great place to find clients of all kinds. No matter what your background is, no matter how many objections you have when you hear something like you can find clients on Instagram, yes, you can.

After that or during this time, you’re going to identify a simple lead magnet that people on Instagram will DM you to get. A simple lead magnet is usually something that’s already part of what you do. That’s the best. You don’t have to come up with something new.

A great lead magnet is if you have, a call where make a very quick video about yourself walking yourself through this question that a make a very quick video about yourself walking yourself through this question that a client had in a way that becomes a lead magnet for others. So if their question was around, how do I find people to for you to interview when I don’t even have any good clients yet or my clients are shifting or my customers are shifting, my users are and you answered that question, and it was a good fit lead, then you just leave that call, and you either cut out of the recording for the call.

You can cut something very simple out of that. Like, here’s what I said to my client when they asked this question. Then you post that or you make it your lead magnet directly on Instagram, and we’re gonna get into how that lead magnet gets delivered, but you may not end up posting it as well. Okay.

We’re also going to establish a ManyChat account for Instagram automations. ManyChat is a very cool tool that’s the equivalent of, like, ActiveCampaign. What ActiveCampaign does for email, ManyChat does for direct messages. So you can really start growing your audience on Instagram and then actually use it in ways that traditionally, you couldn’t do much with.

It was a little bit of, like I know as a business owner, I was always like, I’m not going on Instagram. It’s such a waste of time. What am I gonna do with all that? Everything that I do over there, if I were just to makes your Instagram into something that feels more like a list type thing for you to use.

So we will get into ManyChat today, but what you wanna know is you’ll use it with Instagram. You can also use it with Facebook. You can use it with WhatsApp.

So Facebook Messenger and with WhatsApp and with other tools as well. We’re only gonna focus on Instagram.

Don’t let me hold you back from doing other exciting things with it if you have time and if you are excited about those other things.

You’re You’re going to identify a keyword to trigger a sequence in ManyChat that then delivers that lead magnet. You will have your ActiveCampaign or ConvertKit or other email marketing accounts set up. If you don’t already have a list, this is the week you start building a list.

You’re going to have an a boards account set up for DM ing leads. In Coffee School Pro, I taught you boards, I think, last week, very lightly. We’re gonna talk about it pretty lightly here today, and, then we’ll get into it this week. A Calendly or, OnceHub. OnceHub is another good one, but it’s really good for, larger like, for teams.

So Calendly should be enough for you. Zoom or the equivalent for calls that you have with leads. So there’s gonna be a bunch of tools you’re setting up this week. You will have purchased vanity domains and redirected them to Calendly and or Zoom.

We’ll talk about that. And published a new lead video intake page with the video embedded. So there is quite a lot that we’re gonna be going through today, all with the goal of having a sales driven funnel in place that is as simple as humanly possible. You don’t need really elaborate many chat automations or active campaign automations.

You need one. Yeah. One. And the simpler it is, the better. You may need to add to it as you go, but you will just need the one.

Okay. Hold on. What’s going on here?

Dawn.

Oh, cool. So stuff about ManyChat. That’s awesome.

Jack’s utter surprise. That’s awesome.

Okay. Cool. So let’s dig in. This is the basic overview of the sales driven funnel. Now for those who are here or watching this replay and you’re in the intensive freelancing, but you’re not in CopySchool Pro, we’re going to give you access to a lesson from CopySchool Pro called sixteen by twenty three. It’s about setting up email automations that keep people nurtured even after they haven’t taken advantage of something that you offered them in your onboarding flow, which we’re not gonna talk about in the intensive.

So we’ll give you access to that. We’ll get into it. But here, point is, what we’re going to talk about is your sales driven funnel, which begins with something called opening and then moves into setting. Opening is just open a conversation.

It’s the opposite of the close that comes later. So you do open, set, close. We’re just not gonna cover close at this point. We’re gonna talk about sales calls later.

Okay. Opening happens on Instagram in this way. Either someone follows you and comments with the keywords, so you say, like, comment workshop to get the link to my workshop, and then they have to follow and comment with that keyword.

Or you do a manual open with boards where someone is following you. They just started following you, and you go in, make it part of your system. What you do when you’re like, this is the training from Copy School Pro last week. When you’re bored, open boards.

So you go on your phone, and you just go in and see who’s followed you recently, and you open conversations with them. That open happens in an Instagram DM. So that they follow you and comment with the keyword, then you they get an auto reply through ManyChat. And then over in the DM areas where the conversation starts happening automatically in that case.

For Instagram, manual opens. It’s not automatic. That’s where you have somebody in there and you in your, DMs and you use boards, you can just use your phone, like, normally without boards, but it’s free. So start with boards, to have prewritten scripts that you can just fly through to move leads toward the point of conversion.

So that’s opening. Opening is opening a conversation.

That’s all it is, and it’s important to keep in mind that you only want to continue conversations with people who are a good fit. That doesn’t mean you have to ghost people who are not a good fit, but you wanna prioritize spending your time in DMs with people who are actually likely to be a good fit for you. And this is where in the sunshine growth model, if you have your audience identified, your ICP, which we talked about in the very first week, you’ve got that covered. You’ll have an easier time understanding whom you’re making content for.

So that’s the open. Then we get into, again, many chat and boards where there’s an automation that continues with the keyword, and then there’s lead nurturing that you do with boards. And over to the far side, there’s, again, more manual lead nurturing with one to one email. But what we’re trying to do with all the different things that someone can do, we’re always trying to lead them to this key part here, which is a booking page.

That booking page is probably gonna be in Calendly. That’s what you wanna work on.

Have a booking page up. If you’re using Calendly, you’re already there. You might just want to embed it in an existing page that you’re already in a page on your site, a landing page, so you can make sure that you can control as much as possible about that landing page.

Then this is the key part. You don’t then land them on a confirmation that comes, like, in like, the the default in Calendly is once they submit their contact information, then basically you say like, they stay there and you say thanks, check your email or something like that.

We’re gonna upgrade that because we’re pros and there’s no point in taking the intensive if you don’t apply this stuff and do the stuff that will make you look better and smarter and, like, more of a pro because pro equals expensive, and that is a good thing. So we’re gonna land them on a intake page that is an embedded video. That’s you saying, hey. Here’s what’s up. Here’s what you should be doing next. Here’s who I am, etcetera. And that then leads them to a sales call.

So that is the screenshot of what you will be working on this week. If you don’t do that this week, you really have to ask yourself how committed you are to building out a business that is going to run, not just guessing, but a business that’s going to actually run. Okay? So I am assuming at all times that that you’re doing the work. And for the rest of this lesson, I’m going to make that assumption because why wouldn’t you? So let’s get into it open.

Opening this gentleman here is opening on his phone. We’re imagining at least that he is. And open is, again, you hold your phone. You’re sitting there. You’re in Instagram, and you go over to the part where people can where you get an update on what’s happening. I’m going there right now.

And that’s where you can see who just followed you and who is who who you should be reaching out to. So you go in to the home screen here. If you’re unfamiliar, the home screen down at the very bottom, and you pop into you can go over and see what chats you have going on, if any.

Or the place you’ll likely start is in you’ll hit that little heart icon. I’m sure there’s a real name for it somewhere. But hit the heart icon, and you can see anywhere there’s a blue button. Those are people who are new followers, and all I wanna do is hit that, message them, and start a conversation with that person.

Okay? That’s all we’re doing. We’re opening it. I’m going to go in and go into boards.

So I’ll walk you through this in just a second, but this is boards. This is a keyboard that replaces your normal keyboard. And in it, I can say whatever I want to that comes up. So a flow that we taught last week is first name, last name, exclamation point.

So in this case, it’s Christina Grosso, exclamation point, then thanks for commenting on my whatever. Appreciate it. Or thanks for following me. Appreciate it.

That’s it. And then you wait for Christina Grasso to reply. That is the open. That is what you may not be doing.

You can do this on LinkedIn as well, but we’re talking about Instagram. Okay? So we wanna use Instagram to open conversations that can lead toward people becoming our actual leads. Do not worry about the number of followers that you don’t have on Instagram right now.

Just get started. It’s phenomenal what happens when you just get started. So get established, and then you can start attracting the right audience for your offers. Nobody has any followers when they start on Instagram.

Nobody does. If you open an account, no matter who you are, you have to start from zero. So you’ll have to find ways to get people on there. We’re all bright human beings.

We can do that very easily, but you have to start. Okay? So the whole concept of sell by chat is just opening and continuing conversations in DMs in a a chat like manner so it feels one to one. You can do this on Instagram, obviously, as we’re talking about.

You can also do it in email where you send out an email that looks very personal. And then when they reply, it can either kick off another more personal looking automation, or it can come to you and you can start actually selling them in DM. So you’re replacing a lot of the sales calls, stuff, triage, etcetera, with conversations in Instagram. Okay?

Read more about this in the worksheet provided here.

What you’ll wanna do this week is go into ManyChat, and I can show you our ManyChat, but our ManyChat is very, very big.

We’ve, put a few team members through ManyChat training. One of them led to, a massive automation that’s quite intimidating to look at. So we’re not gonna look at that one, but we can look at the other ones. But if you’ve set up an automation for email ever, then you’re already familiar with how these work. So what we wanna do is set up one automation that opens conversations, and that’s, again, the part where someone follows you and then comments something like workshop or any keyword you may have, clients, copywriting, leads, whatever that thing might be. It probably shouldn’t be leads.

Whatever that thing is that you wanna do. So we’ll identify a simple lead magnet.

Simple, valuable, but simple. That your audience wants, make sure it’s in keeping with your specialization and with your authoritative offers. You’re gonna draft a series of posts you can use to drive people to comment with a keyword. So those are posts that you will publish on Instagram as content.

Identify the keyword, they’ll comment that triggers your ManyChat automation.

And then using the templates that come standard in ManyChat, you will set up a single automation.

So as soon as you start using ManyChat, they have prewritten templates for you to use. They also have other ones you can unlock from influencers, but I have found them to be garbage.

So but do what you want to with it. I hope you’re excited about ManyChat.

I first heard about it from Todd Herman five or six years ago when he was like, Joe, you have got to use it to sell, copy school via Messenger. And I was like, really good idea, Todd. Awesome. Great.

No. Didn’t do it. And now I wish I had. And then six years later it was five years later by the time I finally started listening, and we should have and you should too.

And also then, of course, after that, you’ll wanna start using the prepopulated scripts in boards. So both many chat and boards are what you will use in Instagram. You don’t have to worry about other things. It’s ManyChat and boards together.

Boards installs on your phone. ManyChat doesn’t. ManyChat is the automation tool. Both come with both ManyChat and boards come with prewritten scripts.

Like, basically, like, workflows for you to follow. Okay? So you wanna start there. In copy school pro, we’ll talk more and more about this for the intensive freelancing.

This is the only week we’re going to dig into this stuff. Okay. So what I want you to do, what your homework is, and if you’re watching this, you should pause right now and do this work.

Brainstorm video or written lead magnets your audio audience will want after your post. Now for best results, video is the way to go because you’re posting on Instagram. It is a visual platform.

Most people also just like engaging with video versus a written lead magnet. If you’re like, well, an SOP for how to work with a great copywriter or how to work with a freelance copywriter and get the most out of working with them, if you’re like, that’s what my ideal audience needs to hear because they’re used to hiring freelancers and they don’t get the best work out of needs to hear because they’re used to hiring freelancers and they don’t get the best work out of them, I can make a lot of content around that. If that was a lead magnet you were going to use and you’re like, well, there’s a checklist, though, then I would say also make a video and just package them up together. So you’ve got a video and the SOP together.

The video is good if you are on camera and you’re com like, you’re comfortable on camera.

Do your best to be as engaging as you can because people work with people that they like. Right? So this is where you will, after today’s session, go forward and come up with these, lead magnet ideas.

Just brainstorm them. Okay? And, again, if you’re watching this right now, go ahead and pause and do this work right now. If you’re here live with me right now and you’ve got an idea, now’s the time to write it down. Okay? So don’t lose anything that might be going through your head that could be really valuable. K?

Then you’ll need post ideas to get people there. So I know this is starting to sound like, woah, Joe. I have to, like, get serious about Instagram. Yeah.

Yep. You do. So you will have to get serious about Instagram, and that’s okay. It’s not a scary platform at all once you just get used to doing the work.

So how are you going to make people interested in your lead magnet? And it’s a good thing to think about this right now instead of later. It’s just like when you are writing a sales page for a product that doesn’t exist yet. You write the product into existence, overcoming objections, coming up with great ideas.

You can start with this. You can say, k. I wanna post my ICP is looking for x y z. They have these problems, these desires.

You can fill in what their problems are, what their pains are, what desires they have. If you just start with this and fill this part in, then you can work back toward an idea for what your lead magnet could be. So point is what you wanna do is be ready to have a lot of content you can put out that will have one keyword, always one, because you’re just going to drive into this one many chat automation, not five many chat automations.

One, we can work on it once you’re making a million bucks a year with sell by chat, then go ahead and add more. But we’re going to start with one. The crazy one, the the bananas one that we have is the one that we drive everybody into. Now we started with a bunch. We don’t need a bunch. We just need the one, and that’s what we use, and I recommend the same for you as well.

So coming up with not just the lead magnet, but also things you’ll post to get people to care about this lead magnet. And again, those people are your ideal audience.

The following slides or sheets in your worksheet are for how to learn to use boards, and then you’ll also see how to learn to use ManyChat.

ManyChat has a really great, course that it puts out that you should take.

Boards, I believe this is the one I put together, with how we use boards. I find it quite useful.

If you don’t, then just go and try using boards. It’s just like I showed you. Like, you’ll go to the website. You’ll sign up for the trial.

You’re you’ll install it on your phone. There’s also a desktop version, and there’s a browser extension so that when you’re on LinkedIn, you you can use the browser extension there if you’re, like, on LinkedIn on your desktop or wherever you are on your desktop and you’re connecting with people. You can then start using boards all the time. The point of boards is to have prewritten, scripted stuff you can say to move people along in conversations with you.

Because what you will find very quickly when you’re having these conversations in DM is you don’t know how to get conversations on track toward how do I get them to want my offer? How do I get them to say yes to booking a call with me? And you might end up just chatting and being like, how’s business? And they’re like, cool.

How’s your business? And you’re like, cool. It’s all good. How long you been in business?

A little while. How about you? Oh, sometime.

Where do you live, Florida? Where do you live? Oh, Florida sounds nice. I’m and suddenly you’re just like, what’s happening here?

Boards keeps you on track. Boards is reminder to you that you are not there to make friends. You are there to create clients out of these conversations that you have and the content that drives them there. So the next screen, the next slide, the next page, whatever is for ManyChat.

And this is training again that ManyChat themselves came up with, so go ahead and use that. I believe this one is at least. I put together my own stuff for y’all as well, but go to those, and you’ve already got the worksheet available.

Sixteen by twenty three is a lesson that we will post in, the intensive freelancing Slack group. As soon as we have it set up in such a way that we can share it around, It might even just come down to sharing the original Wistia recording, but we will have this ready for you in, the intensive freelancing channel even though it’s only for copy schoolers, like, for copy school pro. We wanna share it because everything you’re doing on Instagram, you can also do to start sell by chat with your email list.

But, Yeah. I’m not gonna I’m not actually but I’m just gonna let you go with that. Okay?

So any questions on opening at this point? Because there’s a lot that I’m covering here.

What are you thinking?

I have a question.

Yeah.

So I just looked at my followers because I posted over the weekend and got reposted by you and, like, also Chris Wazekowski. And I just get, like, a bunch of, like, copywriting people, and I know a lot of people have that on LinkedIn too.

So do you open up a conversation? I mean, you would open a conversation with, like, copywriters, but they are certainly not my ideal person. Do you open conversations with everyone?

And then also, do you follow people back?

I don’t follow back. I open conversations with everyone though. And I say I, but we have a person who does that. But it was me in the beginning.

I was doing it, and, yeah, with everybody. We tried. There was someone else on my team who was temporarily doing opens but was really selective because sometimes bots follow you, etcetera. And so I just I took that person off of opens because I don’t give a crap if you’re real or not on the other side.

Instagram actually likes when you have conversations with your followers, so you tend not to get in trouble. They followed you first. You are just engaging with them. So all I do is, we have two prewritten notes in boards.

One is, for female entrepreneurs. One is for male entrepreneurs, and that’s just because of some I know that might sound like, well, that’s weird gender thing to do. There’s a lot of dudes so far that we’ve seen who, send unsolicited photos to our great surprise.

So we open with, conversations around, for I know this is, like, a weird insight, but just trust me on this one.

If you are a woman putting photos of yourself out there, you get photos back.

So we do, hey. Thanks for the follow. How did you stumble on our stuff, with a little, like, x sign at the end of it for women who follow us? This is like a friendly thing.

We’re also friendly with men. We don’t assume the worst. Don’t get me wrong. But we’re a little more cautious.

So we’ll say, hey. Thanks for the follow. Are you here for the vids or and then there’s something else. So those those are the two.

And we go back and forth on different ones. Right? So I said, like, it’s not like there’s a direct line or, like, there’s an SOP that says, if man said this, if woman said that, that’s not it. But it’s just, like, our, the person who does it is very social savvy.

So she’s making a good case for let’s just treat some some cases a little bit differently than others. So all that to say, yes, we do open with everybody.

We get a lot of people in as well who are not, a fit in any way, and that’s like, other people will say, hey. You should follow the copy hackers, Instagram.

They’ll tell, like, like, we had recently, fast weight loss or something. F a s t is some sort of thing. There’s, like, a coach for weight loss, and they told their followers in a webinar to follow us. And we got so many followers that are, like, weight loss coaches.

We can’t do anything with that. They’re never gonna, like there’s nothing we can do with that. But we still say, hi. Thanks for the follow.

How is business? And it’s just a good thing. Right? So, yeah. Yes. But but there is that level of caution that I mentioned at the beginning around who you’re reaching out to. Be slightly careful, where social media can be a little bit weird.

Yeah.

Cool? Yeah. That’s helpful. Thank you.

Cool. Anything else?

I always assume, like and especially since I’m in health tech, like, larger companies always just have, like, a social media specialist person. So, like, if they were to message me or I would message them, whatever, it’s like they’re not even the decision maker. And I Yeah. But I’m always, like, under that assumption. Because I I mean, I use Instagram, but simply for just, like, scrolling and sports and stuff. But, so I always feel like if I were to work with someone, it’s more like a smaller type business.

Yeah. I just wanna make a note there. So I’m not talking about you following anybody. So it’s not like I’m not gonna follow, Etsy on on Instagram and expect to have a conversation with the CMO of Etsy at all. What I’m thinking what what we wanna do is if you are going and putting content on Instagram, there are people who have their private their regular accounts that are, like, the CMO of whatever place, the VP of whatever, even just like a senior marketing manager who’s going through Instagram. And if they see stuff that interest them, that’s work related, and they follow you, like, we just had the head of copy for Walmart, follow us.

She’s just on her regular Instagram account. We don’t I don’t know what right if she was just there and found us, and we only knew she was the head of Walmart copy because we, did our open. Said, like, how’s business? Are you a freelancer or a copywriter? And that’s how we got to that place of knowing that. Now if I wanted to sell services into Walmart, that would be a really obvious thing for me to do. Like, I’m talking to the right person to influence decision makers, the person who’s going to have pains.

So just know that people are using regular old accounts to look through stuff. And if they are ambitious people, they’re not just looking at style or whatever else it might be on Instagram. They’re also, like, following a bunch of people who have good advice on business, and they’re finding contractors there.

Yeah. Okay.

Does that make sense?

I never thought I never thought it like that. I I forget that people who run-in the grocery are actually using social media, like, personally. So As regular humans, but they’re, like, thinking of work all the time too.

Yeah. Yeah. It’s a good question. It’s a good, clarification. Yeah. Cool.

Anybody else?

No? Alright. Let’s talk about setting then because this is you’re gonna find it’s pretty easy to open conversations, and then you’ll find it’s pretty hard to set appointments. So how do we do that?

One, go into this knowing. It’s pretty hard to set appointments.

So work at it. Try different things. Experiment. Always be a copywriter. Right? You’re always trying different things and seeing what works and what doesn’t.

We don’t give up on a headline just because the first one didn’t work. We try again and again and again, and the same is true here. There is every reason to believe that this is likely to help you attract clients. And I’m saying that, and you’re supposed to just believe it.

But I’ve mentioned in CSP that I’m in other coaching programs.

And not only are we seeing cool stuff with sell by chat ourselves, but the things that the people I’m being coached alongside of are seeing is, like I mean, is cause to give this thing a a heavy shot. Like, try hard with it. Don’t give up. Try different things. Okay? So here is what you’re going to do to basically get set up to create a higher converting sales funnel where the sale happens sometimes in sell by chat, but mostly on a call.

This is something that I noticed when it like, my favorite coach does, and then I noticed other coaches did it too. And it is just having vanity domains. That’s why the intensive meeting dot com exists. I think it’s just a baller kind of thing to show, like, okay.

So instead of putting your Zoom link in there, you have, like, a thing that shows you’re a pro. Right? So if it’s, like, meet with ben dot com and that’s always in your, meeting invitation, etcetera, then that’s just kind of a cool sign. And it’s a really easy win.

You go buy a three dollar domain on GoDaddy, and then you use the built in redirect inside the GoDaddy platform to redirect to your book a call page or whatever it is. We have, like, some we probably have so many domains already. Just use one of them, and have it be one that redirects to your Zoom, to your Calendly, to whatever it might be. So vanity domains, really straightforward, very quick win.

You can do it right after this call. And then when you start using it, it starts looking like this isn’t the first time you’ve done this. Like, not only do you have Zoom ready to go and Calendly embedded on a page on your site that has, like, a video of you in it, but you’re also using, like, a cool domain that feels like, oh, okay. This person this isn’t their first time doing this.

They’re probably a pro in a lot of ways. These little signals actually do quite a lot to help you close people.

So consider that.

I mentioned earlier that you’re going to have an intake page. I wanted to have enough time in today’s call for you to go and actually give a shot at this, but I always over over prepare like bananas. This is today’s session alone could be all sixty days of the intensive freelancing, but, it’s not. So you just have to go block workout afterward, block some time in your calendar.

So what you want to do at this point, this is the part where okay. Let’s say you’ve opened conversations on in Instagram DMs. It’s feeling good. You’re talking with the head of coffee at Walmart, and they’re like, we really just need somebody to come in and take over our landing pages.

But everybody we try is, like, impossible. I might be able to help you with that. What are you doing right now? Oh, I’m busy right now.

Well, are you free tomorrow? Sure. I’m free tomorrow. Great. Here’s my Calendly, or can I have yours or whatever it is?

Right? So you’re at that place now where you are booking the call. So we’re getting to we got out of chat, and we’re moving them over to a page where you are going to, get them going down the path of, working with you, but taking that first call. Right?

So this is if you are a new lead, not a new converted client or anything, you have a new page on your website. And I have in this case, I’m recommending that for this new lead video intake, you are going to put it on your website and break the landing page rule of of having your website nav on there. Now most of the time when we’re make making a landing page, we take the global nav off because it’s a distraction.

But we’re trying to show that we’re a legit business. We have past clients we’ve worked with. We have maybe a blog or a space on your site that’s, like, where you put your thought leadership pieces. So we wanna keep your nav in place there. So you just take an exist or just put a page up on your site. Use whatever boring template you have. It doesn’t have to be anything other than professional looking.

Build that page. Throw your URL in here because you’re going to hand this off to somebody later as well. Right? Once you’ve set this up, it’s not a one and done.

Later, you’re gonna want it to be updated. So you’ll need whoever you hire down the road to also have access to these files. So always make sure you’re documenting everything along the way. Now I’m worried I wasn’t clear about that through the first three weeks.

I wanna be really clear.

Everything you’re doing here, you need to document because later, you’ll wanna change something and you won’t be the one doing it anymore. Okay?

We’re gonna have to pull us now, like, just take that out. And just put put it on every video everywhere. Document.

Okay. You’re gonna wanna lightly script this video. We’ve got a a talking points on the following page. So let’s just pop to that so you can see what I’m talking about.

This is where your new lead comes to this page, and they’ve likely already booked. Now they’re landing on a page. So they book time with you and you say, hey. I’m so glad we get to work together.

I’m really looking forward to talking with you. I’m Joe from Copy Hackers.

If you’re here, you’re watching this. It’s probably because we were talking on Instagram, probably about email, and just really get into that. Right? So then establish the triggers that brought them there.

So, again, that could be we were talking about email or we were talking about something to do with conversion copywriting, then confirm why you are the right person to talk to about this. So we were talking about conversion copywriting because all we do at CopyHackers is conversion copywriting. I’ve done this, that, and the other thing, so we can have a really good conversation about this. Then set expectations for the call.

So in this call, you’re probably wondering and, again, you’re trying to do this in a minute. Don’t make this a long video.

In the call, we have probably wondering what we’ll cover. I’m gonna ask you a bunch of questions. And if you have those questions, post them down below or throw them up near. Anything that will help them prepare for the call. I’ll also share my prices. I’ll share my availability.

I’ll talk to you about some packages that may be available for what you’re working on. And if you want client examples, we can talk through that too. But it is a ten minute call, so we’re gonna move quickly through it. Okay?

And then establish what you expect from them on the call that they will transparently share their objectives, your timeline, your budget, and any key information that could affect the work. Okay? So please arrive ready to go with all of that. And then, of course, this is the point where if you do have a diagnostic, you can share it now.

That will make this longer than a minute, so keep that in mind. It may be that you wanna separate that onto a second landing page that follows, or not. Right? So this is where you have to decide how important is your diagnostic, which we talk about in Copy School Pro. How important is it to getting people to convert, and is now the right time to start sharing it so they can get a sense for working with you and get excited about the fact that you have this diagnostic.

Alternatively, if you don’t wanna do that, then you could just ask them to consider x question before the call. So in advance of the call, if you could just give some thought to maybe make, like, a few bullet point notes about what you think is preventing your copy from performing well right now, or a question like, if you had a magic wand, this might sound silly, but if you had a magic wand, how would you change your copy overnight? What would you do differently if you could? Ask them that sort of thing so they’re thinking about it even if they don’t make notes, which they should.

Anybody who’s actually ready to work with you should be ready to, like, start taking direction from you and thinking the way you think. But even if they don’t, they’ve at least engaged with you a little bit here. So don’t over don’t worry too much if they don’t do their homework. You can just ask them that question again in the call.

And then if they have done their homework, then you can feel really good about working with them.

Remind them at the end of this video, they can invite their team, and give examples of that. So, hey. When I talk to VPs of marketing or CMOs, typically, in that first call, they don’t think to bring their designer, but your designer probably has a lot of opinions that they’ll wanna share on how x is converting. So maybe consider bringing your head of design or your creative director if you have one.

And if you have a copywriter who will be involved in working with me as well, I’d love to start getting to know them here. So feel free to invite them. You can see how to do that right in the Google Calendar invite that you already got. I’m so excited to work with you or at least start talking about working with you.

So make sure you check your inbox for that confirmation of our meeting and I will see you very soon. And that’s it. You’re done a minute later out the door and you can embed that. Okay?

So that’s what you wanna do. I know we’re at the end of our time.

From that point, you wanna make sure that you are not from that point, but throughout the second half, the setting part of open and set, we wanna make sure that we have Calendly or schedule ones, which is now called OnceHub, have it set up so that it looks legit as well. So ten, fifteen, twenty minute event type. Make sure that you set up an event type that’s purely for people who are entering via ManyChat or Instagram.

And that’s just as easy as duplicating your existing triage that you’ve got so that you can track them better. I know there’s other ways to track, but the easiest, most no brainer way is just to have a second event type. It’s all exactly the same, but you can say, oh, this person signed up through the ManyChat thing. Then you can have their Instagram open when the time comes to talk with them instead of someone who came in as a lead through email, and you’re searching your inbox madly. Like, who the hell is Dolores?

And she’s in Instagram. That’s why you don’t know. You don’t remember anything about her. Okay? So follow this to set up your Calendly as well.

And I think that’s it. Okay. Good. Thank god. So we’re at the end because we’ve only got three minutes left in our time, and I definitely love respecting how much time we have and you have. Do you have any questions about getting established with what we’re talking about here today for open and set?

It’s a lot.

Are you going to go forward and do it? I’m assuming the answer is yes. So what are you gonna do first?

Who’s that first? Andrew?

I have a question because I always have a question. Can you hear me okay?

Yeah.

Yeah. My question is just around I’m sort of as I go through this, I’m sorting out how much, because I have kind of, like, the existing web copy copy thing going where I’m kind of comfortable and can get leads and kinda know what I’m doing. And then I have the thing that I’m kind of trying to stand up right now, and I’m trying to figure out how much I need to kind of, like, leap away from what I’m doing, or can I kind of keep what I’m doing in the background and sort of stand this up and kind of let this sort of feed my existing business and what I’m trying to stand up versus how much do I burn the boats?

So, like, the coach in me is, like, burn the boats. Commit. The realist in me is, like, gotcha. Okay.

You’ve built this brand over time. You’re getting good work from it. You want to keep making money with it. It’ll make sense.

You’ve got expertise in the area and authority. So I say do what feels right to you knowing you’ve got only so much time in the day, and there’s easier money in retainers.

Yeah. Cool. Cool. Works. Thank you. Great.

Awesome. Cool. Anybody else? Ben.

So I I I, like, was using ConvertKit quite a bit. Yeah. Like, I had, like it actually was great for a landing page as well.

Yeah. That’s where it started.

Yeah.

But, I kinda switched to I got Pawzix, so I I was like, I’m gonna be using Substack because it’s great for, like I didn’t like grabbing all my newsletters from ConvertKit and then putting it on my website in case people want to read a past issue, and it just says, like, oh, Substack is perfect. But so I’m like but step sec doesn’t really have lead magnets.

So I I thought about just doing both, or do you think, like, I’m trying to the substack lead magnet can just be, like, your archive or some like, it it depends.

Are you set up to accept paid subscribers?

Not yet.

I was waiting to get a little bit.

Yeah.

So just do that, and then you can say that the first month is free, and you can, like, give that away as your lead magnet if you want to.

It probably won’t be your lasting e lead magnet. It depends. It depends how it performs. But, yeah, if we’re looking at, like, low barrier to entry, low friction on getting this thing standing up, then I would just turn on paid subscriptions for your newsletter. Just, like, make it six months down the road or something, and then make the first six months your lead magnet or whatever you wanna say there. If that makes sense, I would I would do that. Okay.

I I think I was just waiting because, like, I’ve always, like, followed, like, Lenny’s approach, and he’s, like, eight thousand subscribers, then he went paid, and it was, like, fifty million dollars a month.

And now he’s obviously super successful now, but I’m always, like, I’m just gonna wait until I have fifteen hundred subscribers. I’m a wait till I get more.

So That’s fair.

I mean, out of the gate, we’ve started charging right away and actually making money right away for hours even though I haven’t done anything with them. I feel really bad.

But whatever you wanna do. But my question is if you’re going to use Substack as your lead magnet, then there has to be something, desirable and, like, semi exclusive about it.

Otherwise, how are you going to make people want it? So it’s really up to you to just I mean, I would say just put a trial version together or some interesting take on your archives. Like, can you do a best of video that they get access? Something like that.

Yeah. Because otherwise, I don’t you if you’re trying to do the lowest possible barrier to entry and you just wanna use something existing that you have, you can start with just saying, I mean, comment newsletter to get my newsletter, and that’s fine. That’ll get them started. So Yeah. Yeah. Okay. Okay.

That’s a good idea.

Okay. Cool.

Alright. I know we’re at the end of our time. Thank you everybody for sticking around.

The replay will be available at some point, and you can watch it then. That’s helpful.

Okay. So have a good one, and we’ll see you in Thursday on Thursday in our session. Cool? Thanks, everyone. Bye.

Week 3: Your Retainer Offer (MRR)

Week 3: Your Retainer Offer (MRR)

Transcript

You had a big assignment to finish off your standardized offer, getting that all sorted out. And I believe everybody here is a total pro, so so I one hundred percent believe that you did it and you got through it. And now you’re ready to turn that into a retainer offer where we get the beautiful thing that makes businesses grow more easily, which is monthly recurring revenue.

We like it. It is good. So today, we’re gonna work on the monthly recurring revenue stuff, the retainer.

Our objective is to be as systematized as possible with the stuff that we can put on a sort of autopilot.

There’s still work you’re gonna be doing during this time, but it’s really, really important that when you’re working on your retainer offer, you have a fixed amount of time that you will spend on it and that you do not go over time. We’re gonna talk about time more than you may expect going forward because even at Boxcar, I had to really discipline the team to stop spending as much time as they felt like on things, like doing really detailed solution designs for optimization work.

There’s just, not a lot of profitability in spending all of your time on things that you don’t need to spend that much time on, which is really hard for freelancers.

Most freelancers are so used to being valued for execution, that they struggle to believe they could be valuable without executing, that you can actually have real value. You’re still executing, but you’re doing it in a in a constrained way.

And that’s good. That’s important. That’s that’s where the money is, and that’s also what your client is paying for. So it’s important to keep in mind when we talk about this retainer model, we’re talking about going from a ten thousand dollar project to five thousand dollars a month, which for most businesses is so easy to sign off on. And I mean businesses that are making a million dollars a year, have an easy time signing off on, hey. You’re gonna grow my x over y period of time, and that’s gonna cost me five thousand dollars a month, and you’re gonna report your results to me every month. This is, like, unless you somehow messed up the relationship, this is a really, really easy sell.

It doesn’t require that you do a ton of work. So I wanna make that really clear if you’re thinking, like, oh, but how am I gonna get all the work done? You should be spending, like, six hours on the actual work work. Like, the skill application, the part where you sit down and you write the copy or you do the planning or whatever it is. Six hours with an extra, like, thirty minutes for implementing their feedback.

That’s it for the whole month. So we’re gonna walk through that, but I’m probably going to have to say it to you a lot, and your coach is going to have to help you with that a lot because it’s really, really, really like, if if you don’t have friction there, I’m relieved for you because most people, most freelance copywriters in particular, can’t imagine being valued for just doing at five thousand dollars a month for just doing six hours of work.

But you should and you can because that’s a lot actually. You’re giving people a lot when you give them six hours of your brain power. Alright. So I want you to think about a time budget going forward the same way you think about a money budget.

If you if your partner, let’s say, goes to the store and you have agreed on your budget for the groceries for the week, and you say groceries for the week are a thousand dollars because groceries are ridiculously expensive right now. So you go to the store with a they go with a thousand dollars, and they come back home three hours later, and they say, cool. I spent three thousand dollars. And you go, wait.

Hold on. Hold on. What’s the point in having a budget if you’re just going to spend whatever you feel like? That is exactly the same as saying I’m going to put six hours into this project and then putting twelve in there.

You have just cost yourself and your business and everyone involved a lot of money. Time is money for us. Your profits will go up when the time you spend on things goes down. That’s not the only way to increase profitability, but you will be losing money by not controlling the time you spend.

And as we’ll talk about today, the time your assistant or the person you hire to help you with retainer stuff once you’re ready for that. If you’re not controlling what they’re doing with their time too, money just flies out of the business. Like, it just pours out and you’re like, Joe, I was supposed to make all this money and I’m losing money. Time.

Time. It’s time. It’s always time. If you budget thirty minutes, you don’t even have thirty one minutes to spend.

You have thirty minutes to spend. You should be ready to wind down at twenty nine minutes.

Spend less. Spend less than you budgeted. That’s also a good thing to do too when you’re trying to figure out how to control these costs. There shouldn’t be costs when you hire someone to help you do this work.

It’s fully they’re generating profit for you. But if they don’t have to control the time they’re spending, they will cost you money, and that’s gonna be the big, big difference. So we wanna make sure that there’s some form of consequence if they go over budget with their time. And that can be a really real consequence, like the three strikes you’re out kind of thing.

So you went over budget today with your time. You’ve got two more times than I have to let you go. So let’s not go there. Okay?

Let’s not do that. Let’s just, like, focus on dedicating yourselves to the amount of time that we actually have allocated for it, and then bring up challenges in advance. So if so if your VA or the assistant or coordinator, whoever you hire, comes to you and says, you know, you gave me thirty minutes for this, but I think it’s gonna take, like, seventy five, maybe even ninety minutes, then you have to have a real talk with them. They don’t necessarily know that that’s how long it’s going to take.

Sometimes it is just, again, further poor time management. They’re context switching. They’re doing all sorts of stuff.

You need to go in with a good estimate, which is what we’re talking about here in the stuff that I’ve prepared for you already today. Those are realistic estimates.

If they go over and they say, well, you did the wrong estimate. It’s you didn’t give me enough time. For me, in my experience hiring people, that’s usually their red flag that, no, they’re actually just not a good fit. They don’t manage their time well.

They move slowly. They don’t rely on the templates you put in place for them. They they make up their own SOP. They make things up as they go, and thus it takes too much time.

If they’re using everything you provide them and you train them, they should only be spending as much time as you’ve allocated.

The consequence needs to be there. They can’t just keep going over time that actually costs you money, and that’s not cool.

Put mechanisms in place to stay ahead of minutes spent down to the minute. One of my good friends is a CMO of a tech company, and she lives to the minute. It’s the weirdest thing to hang out with her. She finds time where I’d never even thought there was time.

So we’re we’re doing things. I’m like, we don’t have time for that. Yes. We do.

We really don’t. We really do. She makes us find time for it, and then it turns out we do. It’s really cool to watch people use their minutes, not just their time, but their minutes.

So do your best to stay ahead of minutes spent.

A time tracker, VAs that you hire are likely to come with a time tracker, especially if they’re through a good service like Time, etcetera or a solution like that. We use Time, etcetera. That’s why I mentioned them. There are other ones out there.

But they’ll track their time, and you can see exactly how much time they spent on things.

So make sure that you keep track of that too. That’s part of the administrative work that you do as a person who has a growing business with people who are helping you grow that business. Alright. All this talk about people, you know, Joe, I don’t even have any people.

Hang on. Because we’re about to get into why you’re going to need people. Alright? So you saw this shared drive that has all this stuff in it.

You can also get here, by just clicking on these. If you’re on your phone or, Andrew, you’re in a cab right now, you can use the QR code, that’s right there or the link for it, whatever. But what we have here is a bunch of completed templates for you to use going into the retainer that you’ll be running. So you have the standardized project and the retainer offer that’s an extension of the standardized project.

It’s not creating new work. It’s It’s creating new deliverables, but not necessarily new work, not a bunch of new research, etcetera, etcetera.

Narrowing everything down to its, like, four works that you can repeat it.

So we’ve got the SOP to run a retainer every month, which I’m gonna walk you through, a template to track retainer results, which I’ll walk you through as well, and the template for monthly reporting.

Within those, you’ve also got more templates, and more other things that you’ll be filling in. So I’m gonna start with this beast as soon as it opens.

I never go through a Google Drive. I always go just having, like, fifteen tabs open. So I’m just gonna open that up separately.

Soapy retainer.

Work.

Cool. Alright. So you’ll have something like this. Maybe it’s open on your computer or maybe you’re looking at mine, whatever.

But it is the one that says SOP retainer work duplicate for each client. So you’ll want to duplicate the entire sheet for each client because once you’ve done that, then every client gets its its own name. The client name goes in the title, and you’ll wanna duplicate these tabs each month for that client. Okay?

So every client gets their own spreadsheet that is this. This is the starting point. This is already filled in with most of what you need. If it’s highlighted in yellow, that means it’s specific enough to your business that you need to come up with it yourself.

If it’s not, then it’s not. And in this case, there’s a monthly report template as well as the heuristic analysis SOP.

The monthly report templates made for you. The heuristic analysis SOP is not. Okay? So just as we go through and you look at things that you still need to fill in, it’s the yellow stuff.

Everything else is good to go for repeatable work that you do with the client, where this part up here is only done in the beginning, and some of it is optional. K? So I’m not gonna spend too much time on the things that are optional. If you have questions, go ahead and ask.

That is cool. What you wanna do is have this column, this column b, that’s what your VA in most cases, unless you’re the person who did the work, that’s what gets ticked or complete shown complete. I was gonna say ticked off. Hopefully not.

But that’s what gets selected when the work is done so that everything is under control and you can really easily see things. Now I didn’t do advanced stuff like changing colors of anything, because I anticipate that you will go through. And after doing this a few times using this SOP, you’ll start to make it your own. You’ll start to say, like, okay.

Well, I didn’t actually assign this to my VA. I decided to do this work, or my partner is really good at this work, and I hire that person on contract to come in and do this sort of work for me. So I’m making a few changes. That’s cool.

This is the starting point. I don’t wanna overcomplicate it. I just wanna make sure you have what you need to get started with the retainer. Okay?

So out of the gate, we wanna make sure when a retainer starts, that first you make a copy of this, you’re gonna put together a Google Drive or whatever you use. I recommend Google Drive. It’s basically free. And if you’re on Google Suite anyway, I don’t even know what it costs, but it’s, like, a negligible.

You have to have some of these expenses, and this is a low one, and it’s everywhere. So you’re fine. You’re safe. Use it.

So open start a Google Drive. You’ll have folders in there that you’ll put together. We can talk more about those folders as we get into it, but it’s not really critical right now that you overthink the folder. Some people really, like, owe two folders upfront and then end up using one only.

So just know, like, you know, go as far as you like to go to feel organized. I’m not trying to push you to be the most organized person or the least organized person, just an organized person.

So you’ll start with a folder for your client. In that folder, you will put a copy of this. You will use this month after month to track everything that’s going on. You will use it religiously.

Nobody gets to opt out. Your VA doesn’t get to go, oh, yeah. I forgot to check that off. Nope.

The process is that we check these things off, and you need to make sure you’re checking things off in here too. So your client your VA needs to be trained on this. You need to train yourself and let me train you on this and actually apply it. So when you get started, you will see in here that this column b, as I mentioned, is where you go to say the job’s done, boss.

Then there’s a selection here. It’s So obviously not then because this happens at the very end. You’ll start by choosing which one the thing is. Now I’ve preselected what it is.

So if it’s a do the work or set an appointment or whatever it is, this will help the person who does the work to know what it is. Right? So whoever’s running it, it’s your VA, they need to check and do work. Sometimes there’s two things.

Most of the time, there’s just gonna be one thing.

What it is, then paint it done. Now Sarah actually introduced the concept of paint it done into the copy hacker’s way of working.

I it comes from Britney Brown, Sarah? It does. Dare to Lead. Yep.

Okay. Cool. So I haven’t still haven’t read Dare to Lead. I will.

Painted done is you and your VA really clearly identify how to tell that the job is done and done well. Right? So this is what the job is.

That’s in column k. And then paint it done is here’s how I’ll know that the job has been done well. So it always begins with this will be done well when, and then it gets into the details of painting it done. Okay?

So out of the gate, you’re gonna need to ensure that all the required tech is in place for every new client. It shouldn’t take longer than an hour if you do this right. So you need, for your own business, a tech and software checklist for each new client. That’s something you have to come up with.

You should come up with it this week using what you know of what clients need for the work that you do. So if you’re like, we’re always gonna need Zoom. Cool. What else do you need with Zoom?

Well, we use Fathom notetaker. Cool. Install Fathom notetaker as well. So those two go on the checklist together.

Anything I need to know about Zoom? Google Drive is mentioned here as well. Gmail. Do we need a calendar that’s just for retainers?

If so, how do we make sure we add the right people to that calendar?

Whatever it is, this is the part where you sit down and think through what do I need out of the gate for every new client who comes on board. And you may have already done this stuff upfront. You may have already gone through this checklist when they were just doing the project rather than in the retainer, and that’s cool. That’s fine.

Because then you can very quickly go, okay. Done. I already did this. This is done.

We don’t have to worry about it. And then you just save sixty minutes, which is worth a good amount of money. That’s forty five bucks if you pay your VA forty five dollars. So you get to keep forty five dollars in your pocket for that.

Otherwise, you do the work. Have this checklist there and any notes you might need to add. I was very light on notes. I have one on notes, here.

No. I’ve got two. Just know that. Okay? Then we move on to set recurring end of month thirty minute results review meeting.

The earlier you set recurring meetings with your clients, the better they typically feel. So you can get ahead of this annoying thing that happens that I’ve seen happen where you’re like, hey. I think we’re supposed to meet in a week. How is Thursday looking?

And, like, they’re booked. Most people assume anybody who can afford you and needs your services is busy and booked. Their calendar is everything. Get your VA to book all of the meetings all upfront, then your calendar is blocked for that and so is theirs.

You can always add more people to it. They can always decline next month and you can adjust accordingly, but you were in their calendar first and then they go, oh, actually, I have to move that. I’ve got a board meeting that day. It just got booked.

Cool. That’s fine. Tell me what works better for you. But it’s not like, oh, hey.

Can we book this for next Thursday? No. I’ve got a board meeting. Oh, okay. What works for you?

Like, that’s a bad position to be in. You wanna be in the good position where they’re like, sorry. I hate to inconvenience you. I know you booked this in advance, but I got a board meeting.

Can we move this? That’s what we wanna do. It’s as simple as select in recurring when you set the meeting up. So just make sure that the VA sets the meeting up.

There is a meeting invitation with agenda template right here. You go over there. I’m not gonna do it because it hits I have to hit copy, and I’ve already got a million copies of it. But go in there, make a copy, and make sure that your VA uses that to set up meetings.

That’s it. Recurring meeting. It happens. It’s fifteen minutes, and it’s done.

Then create a reminder, the VA has to keep going in and checking on these invitations. So maybe something happened. Maybe they accidentally one of the meetings falls on Thanksgiving in the US. Well, that’s not probably gonna work for anybody.

So let’s get ahead of that. And also just making sure that everything’s cool. So they just keep adding and moving things around. It’s five minutes diarized for them, but it’s in your process for them to go check on meetings.

It’s tiny. It’s annoying to think about.

I had to put it in this freaking SOP, so you better do it because these are the small things that are like, why do we have to think about this? This isn’t this isn’t what I signed up for. This is the kind of stuff that’s actually gonna make your life a lot easier now that it’s just, like, ready to go in front front of you. Then you wanna add deadlines and milestone dates for the retainer to the retainer calendar.

So you should have a calendar that’s separate that you and your VA share and anybody else in your team shares. It’s a Google Calendar, probably called retainers or clients on retainer, whatever you wanna call it, but it’s very clear that it’s for internal use only. Clients don’t get invited to it. Clients don’t ever need to know about it.

It’s so you and your VA can work together to track what’s due, when’s it due, and that’s all based on everything that’s following down here. So your VA can go in and put in a work block that says, okay. On the this Monday, every Monday of the first every first Monday of the month, we’re going to have you block out six hours to work on this person’s copy. Now, obviously, if you just block six hours for one retainer client and you get another retainer client, Monday doesn’t have six more hours to give.

So that would have to be Tuesday, and you would have to modify this and so on and so forth. And once you get to a place where you’re like, oh, I already have five clients in here. I’ve taken up month like, my first week of every month has somehow turned into me doing a lot of work. I’m making twenty five thousand a month because of it, though.

Maybe I should hire someone. That’s a good indicator that it’s time to hire someone, and your Google Calendar for retainers will become a single source of truth for all the things that you’re working on for clients and will help you see who you should be hiring next. And if your VA does not update it appropriately, you will know that you need to hire a new VA next and train them. So you wanna get that shared calendar set up.

Hopefully, you already have one. Then all that needs to happen is if you don’t use this retainer calendar alongside your calendar as well. So if they’re not both open at the same time, you just have to make sure that your these two calendars not necessarily speak to each other, but, like, know each other. So you may make you may duplicate.

You may just always say, hey. First week of the month in my personal calendar is always blocked for client work. That’s the week that I just, like, turn and burn. Like, it just get through the work, and that’s blocked off in your calendar so that you never take sales calls in the first week, which can be annoying, though.

You’re like, but I wanna take a sales call in the first week. It’s up to you to figure that out. What you need to know is you do need these work blocks in there.

Finally, in getting this stuff set up is, again, creating another reminder in the calendar for three weeks from now to add new deadlines for the following month. If those deadlines have not already been added, they probably haven’t because this is only for one month. What we’re looking at here, that at the end of the month, the VA needs a reminder to go in and set and do the exact same work that they just did for next month. And that just keeps happening because the VA keeps putting that in there. Does that make sense?

Diarizing just really means from my good old days and Sarah’s days of working in a law office as well.

You’re just putting something in the calendar for future reference is what it really comes down to.

But this is the establishing your, retainer kind of work, getting it started. Not gonna dig too deeply into the next four weeks. You can go through and see them, but you’ll see that there’s a lot of repetitive stuff here. And a lot of it’s quite small. So week one has a lot happening because that’s when you’re most likely going to do the work that then gets reviewed the following week, tested and implemented the week after, and starts generating some results the final week of the month so that you can go into that meeting and not only have results from the previous month, but also able to say, oh, and we just put this thing live, and here’s what we’re starting to see already, if there’s anything you’re starting to see already. So we want to get the work written in week one of the retainer.

Okay?

Sometimes, when it comes to retainer work, you don’t always have to present copy live.

You can. It takes almost as long to present it live as it does to put a loom walk through together and get that sent off, so keep that in mind. But you can, depending on how the relationship works, you can just send along a Loom walk through to the right people. If it’s a small, fast moving team, they’re like, I don’t wanna sit there.

I love you. I trust you. I don’t think I have to look at your full presentation every week if it’s a or every month. And if it’s a larger team, they might depend on you walking them through this copy in a call.

You’ll know that, and that’s why off to the side says if you prefer to present, update the SOP accordingly. So you would need to modify this accordingly.

We have chats here. Hold on. I wanna make sure I’m not missing anything.

Okay.

Cool.

Alright. Awesome. Week two is far more chill. You’re going to just have your VA check-in that the, that the notes have come in, basically. That’s it. You’re doing a little bit of work, but you just wanna make sure that the client has given feedback by the deadline. If they haven’t, you’re going to have to make sure you follow-up to set a new deadline, etcetera, but that’s what’s happening there.

Week three, a lot more of the same. This is implementation week. Are we queuing it? Is everything okay? Are we happy with how it looks? Are we ready to go? This is the week because these the actual actual implementation is going to be really specific to the work that you do.

Oh, shoot. One sec. Hold on. Hold on. Our dog walker’s here. Put it there. You gotta go upstairs.

Go get sick. Good girl.

Sorry about that. Okay. So implementation and, the VA checklist for implementation as well as QA ing the work. If you’re QA if you’re like, I’m focused on ManyChat, all I’m gonna do is ManyChat automations going forward. It’s my jam. I love it.

The QA process for many chat implementation is gonna be really different from that of ActiveCampaign, for example. Similar in some ways, very different in other ways. So you come up with your own SOPs for that. Okay? Everything else, we’ve got templates here, and we’ll get into the other stuff as well.

And then month four is getting or week four is getting ready for the presentation. If week four and week five are the same, if it’s a four week month exactly, then, yeah, then you’ll want to merge the two right here, but you’ll see that there’s not that much work in either of them. It’s really just this presentation, and that’s it. If you do this alright, everything is broken down into fifteen, thirty, sixty minute increments. If you do it, you’ll see in the end that you put in about seventeen hours in the month, twenty five hours got assigned to the client, and that comes out to a little under two hundred dollars, Slide Buddy, two hundred bucks, an hour, which is a good rate. But if you can bring in a copywriter at seventy five dollars an hour, that means you made a hundred and twenty five dollars an hour not doing any of it, which is nice.

That’s how the money starts happening.

And all you really have to do is present to stakeholders and then add in a line for copy cheating, and and also making sure that they’re briefed on what to do. And that’s it.

K. So that’s the SOP for the retainer work overall. There’s also in here retainer tracking. Oh, thank god this one finally opened.

Okay. So in retainer tracking, this is where you’ll go in. It’s in the SOP when to do this. You’ll go in and you’ll fill in the numbers depending on what you’re measuring for.

So you know what your KPIs are. You know what the, metrics are underneath each of those KPIs. That’s on you. You know it.

So if you’re like, I don’t do anything with leads, delete the row. You don’t need it then. You also don’t need lead conversion rate because you don’t worry about that. If you think about customers added or anything else, you update this accordingly.

Okay? So for example because examples help, you’ll be filling this in week after week. And the reason to fill it in is not just to do the job of filling this in, but the numbers will tell you how how things are. Right? This is this is the real work. This is where you go and you go, oh, okay.

Well, we added fourteen customers on week one, and then what the hell happened here in week four? It dropped down to six. What’s going on? And you can start to, like, put together what the story is.

And how the hell do we get an eighty three percent increase, and then we were way down so far below? So you can start to figure that story out. Make notes throughout the month about, like, what you’re seeing, what’s going on. Make notes about what you’ve delivered, what’s finalized, what’s implemented, and what’s decided, any, like, decisions that the client makes.

So that’s over here in its own little section. If the client comes to you, which they will do, and says, we’ve decided to run a campaign, and it’s going to go to all the people that your flow is currently targeting. That’s a decision that you’re gonna wanna document here because it will affect your results. And then when you when you, present your results at the end of the month, you’ll say, hey.

The numbers are down a little bit in week three and four. That’s the month that was those are the two weeks, if you’ll recall, when, you sent a campaign to everybody, so we paused. This campaign? Yeah.

That’s why it’s down. Okay? Perfect. So that’s it. Then they know and you know, and no one’s like, what the hell happened?

Oh my gosh. Oh, no. Everything fell apart. You don’t want that. That’s a horrible thing.

Track it. Just keep track of it. Keep your notes. Put it in a single source of truth.

Make sure you’re tracking this. And as you start hiring people, they’re tracking in here with your training. So really being careful because some people who are newer to numbers will just get things wrong. Okay?

But this is what you’re going to track, and you’ll use it as you move toward the end of the month when you’ll take this template for sharing your monthly results and your recommendations.

You’ll make it look good. This is a wireframe at best. You’ll make it look on brand. You’ll download it, put it in Keynote, or whatever the hell you wanna do with it.

I don’t care if you’re using Google Slides at this point. It’s easier because you can share it easily. I don’t care. What you wanna do is brand it, but then fill it in as shown.

So I have done a lot a lot of presentations. I just been I just left a presentation forty minutes early that started at quarter two, to come here and do this training. We were going through exactly this stuff. So I’ve seen it.

I’ve done it. Take the template. Use it. You want a really meaningfully clear title that makes the value of your work a no brainer.

What I want you to remember as you’re going through and filling this in every single month is if it feels tedious to you, it’s gonna feel tedious to them too. Okay? So don’t be tedious. Be as excited as you should be about this role that you have with them, the results you’re making.

Right? What’s the value of them working with you? Don’t forget that. Make titles that reflect that.

Those are the things they’re paying attention to. You’re always a copywriter. You don’t have to always be selling, but you gotta be a copywriter the whole time.

Fill in the period, what you’re reporting on. Make sure it’s clear. Like, this is all going to be pretty straightforward once you filling it in. Then it’s up to you to go through and, like, present to someone around you.

Present to the others if you’re in Coffee School Pro, like, hey. Can we work together? And, like, walk through this? Just, like, point out where it’s confusing or what I’ve missed.

Because maybe maybe you’ve missed something. Maybe there’s something unique to your work that you do or to your clients or a niche, whatever it could be. Maybe there’s something going on there that’s just not covered here. This is based on what we use and have used for a very long time.

So you want this to be about twenty five minutes. It can be booked for as long as sixty minutes. You’ll know better. But the shorter it is, the more likely you are to get people to attend and pay attention.

So you want those things.

This is the agenda. Always start with an agenda, then have a way of always talking about your data. You’ll see throughout all the templates that I’m sharing with you. This the framework goes what’s important, how are we doing, and then a variation on priorities to improve. In this case, it’s recommendations for continued optimization.

This is an old consulting thing. We use that Intuit. Most big tech companies use this or something like it. What’s important?

This is a reminder of why you’re there. It’s the KPI. How are we doing against that KPI, And what will we be doing differently now that we’ve learned a little bit more? Okay?

So we have an executive summary. You’ll probably spend most of your time on this. They’ll probably ask you a lot of questions here. You may not even get to the other parts of the slide deck.

That’s okay if you’re having a good here. So don’t try to rush through it. The executive summary is there for a reason. It’s usually just they just wanna talk about this, and that’s it.

You can guide the conversation if they’re like, well, I don’t know why that’s like that. You can bring them down. You can hop down and say, oh, here’s a screenshot of why, etcetera. Like, that’s up to you to know the content, drive the meeting, but the executive summary, just be cool with, like, spending a lot of time here.

If you don’t ever spend time here, you might wanna rethink whether it’s got interesting stuff on it. Executives don’t want the boring summary. They want, like, tell me what’s going on. Tell me what’s happened.

Tell me why I should care because I have a different thing I could be doing this twenty five minutes. So, like, make sure it’s clear that there’s a measurable win. Make sure they’re as excited as you are, and don’t panic if on the executive summary slide, numbers were down this month. That’s okay.

There’s hypotheses, and you’ll talk about what’s gonna happen next month. And you can invite them in to help you understand why they think numbers might be down outside of the hypothesis you have, such as, well, we know that the sales team has just done x differently or, our Facebook ads got shut off, so we had far fewer leads. That might be what’s happened here. Yeah.

It might be. Probably.

So just keep that in mind that it’s okay to talk with your client when you’re in a retainer.

Yes. You’re there to get them results, but they’ve said yes to having you do as part of their team. They believe in you. This is pretty clear they believe in you at this point.

If they don’t, don’t worry about those people. Don’t let those people in. They are likely to believe about to believe in you. So just, like, roll with it.

Just be part of their team. Ask them questions.

Say yes when they’re like, something went wrong there. Yes. It did. Let’s talk about what went wrong there.

Here’s what we think happened. What do you think might have happened? And we can then, like, get into that. That’s okay.

That’s allowed. They’re allowed to take an active interest in your work and the results that you’re getting or not getting. Because if they didn’t take an active interest, they probably wouldn’t have hired you in the first place or you’re too cheap and you need to raise your rates, and then they’ll take an active interest.

Okay. So then the what’s important is really, like, your KPI. Right? So what’s important is the reason that everybody’s here right now. And then a single sentence about what the goal was this month. So the general KPI and then how that translated into the work that you just did this month.

Anything that you wanna ask them at this point, k, that’s the KPI. That’s been what’s most important, and that’s what we’re working on this month. But now we need to know, has anything changed in your business? Are there shifting priorities, new team members, anything else we need to know about?

Are you all gonna be off-site for a week next week? Help us know what’s going on. Great. They do a quick check-in.

That’s awesome. Thank you. Let’s get into how we’re doing. We know what the KPI is.

Here’s how we’re doing, and you show them how you’re doing that. It doesn’t have to be just the slides that we have here. It can be a variety of slides, but the point is it has to tell a story that’s related to the what’s important. So it has to be tied to the KPI.

If it’s here’s the email that we ran and here’s how it performed this month, or here’s the ManyChat automation.

Here’s the part that we that we, I mean, updated this month or changed this month. Cool. Show those things, Point to it. Tell a quick story and make sure it’s not tangential.

Also, make sure it’s, like, telling an honest, true, real story in an exciting way. That’s it. Just put in as many screenshots as you need to with notes on the screen. Or if you’re worried that people won’t attend, take the notes off the screen and always speak to them.

So the less you have on the slide, the more they need to show up to get the full story. So you’ll know best what to do in that case, but just know that you can modify for different clients if you wanna make sure some attend or if you’re like, they’re never gonna attend. And then they get all the ideas that I have wrong. So I’m just gonna put all of the information on the screen.

Okay. Fine. Like, overload people with that. You’ll know. I don’t know. I wouldn’t do it.

You know.

Okay. This part, under how we’re doing, how are we doing, is, where you showcase your thought leadership. So they’ll have access to the exact same data you have. They’ll have access to the same creative that you have.

They can see what you’ve done. What they don’t have access to is your brain. So you bring out and impress them with something interesting. So if you’re writing abandoned cart emails, let’s say.

Let’s say your whole thing is abandoned cart emails. You do an audit upfront and your retainer is always be optimizing abandoned cart emails. Okay. Fine.

That’s what you’re doing. What new thing can you learn about abandoned cart emails? Ideally, a really hard to access source of knowledge or information at least, if not knowledge.

Deep dive I talk about a lot. Wherever there’s all sorts of places to get academic articles. There’s all sorts of studies on abandoned cart emails.

So much out there. If you can pull one interesting note in here and share it with them and have it be related to what you’re talking about, of course. You elevate what you’re doing to a whole new level. You remind them why they hired you, why it seems like, you know, our results are good. We’re happy, but don’t we have somebody in house who can do this? Like, when that conversation starts with some person who joins the team who, like, thinks this is how they’re gonna save the team money by getting rid of the contractors, and then someone else comes along and says the exact opposite, but whatever.

This is the irreplaceable part. AI doesn’t do this. You do this. This is you. AI doesn’t do a lot of what you do in this case, of course, but this is you thinking on the page, impressing them.

That’s really it. Finish off how you’re doing with actual data on how you’re doing. You may need to move this slide up. If your audience is, like, really big on the executive summary slide, then they’re probably gonna love this slide too.

So this is where you’re gonna say, this row goes away, of course. This is just me giving you examples. This is where you’ll have the numbers. You’ll put the KPI.

If it’s two KPIs, then get rid of the third row. You only have as many KPIs as you have for the work that you do. If you’re in Coffee School Pro, we talked about this last week.

Week over week, month over month, year over year if it’s available. Alright?

That goes here. That comes from that sheet that I showed you just before I showed you this. How are we doing? Finishing off the how are we doing part.

Any key insights you’ve got, always hook them with most interesting stuff. Always lead with the interesting stuff. Don’t bury any money or percentage growth stuff. Open with that. I don’t care if it’s a dollar. If it’s the only good story you’ve got, you open with it.

What the quantitative data is showing you, what the qualitative data is showing you, if anything’s changed there. And you will always always get questions about industry benchmarks, and versus x. So how are we doing versus the competition as industry benchmarks? How are we doing versus the world in general?

Like, our ads, our click through rate is three percent. Is that good? You’ll have to have some way of talking them through that, and then any business goals or expectations. Right?

Don’t overwhelm them. Keep it short. Keep it to just, like, three or four notes here, but make sure you’re hitting on the things that you are likely to hear about. And how are we doing comparison to x will come up all the time.

Then we get into the recommendations.

In other places, this is just called priorities to improve. In this slide deck, we wanna call it recommendations because priorities to improve, although good for using internally, can be a little tricky when you’re a consultant coming in because the word is improve as if we’re in a bad place right now. So we call it recommendations in the slide deck because there’s always someone in the room who’s looking to point at something weird. We don’t wanna write for that person, but they’re there. So recommendations, what’s your top recommendation?

How will you know what to do? So this is the part where you come in and say, okay, We sold this stuff this month. We’re doing great on x, y, and z, but a and b are killer opportunities. So internal name a, that’s a.

This is b. There is no c in this case, so we just do a and b. Here’s what I’m recommending that we do next month. This is where I would love your insights on whether this is good.

Here’s the recommendation. Here’s how we’ll know if this is working and or whether we should kill it. So if it’s a really big experiment, for example, if it’s, like, a really big swing, they might need, like, what’s the kill switch? How do we know when it’s time to end this if it’s super risky?

Otherwise, good, better, best.

If it’s not good, it might be something worth killing is the other takeaway here. So we’re seeking good, better, best all the time. And again, same thing for whichever other recommendations you make. Point is recommendation goes to the left, and then you help them understand how you will know what to do with the recommendation once it’s out in the wild.

And then you finish with next steps. Make sure there are deadlines. And then if you have anything to add outside of what’s already shown, such as if you end up with, like, seventeen how are we doing slides because you’ve been doing this for them for so long, you’ll actually wanna throw a lot of those in the appendix. So keep that in mind.

You’ll circulate the slide deck. They can do whatever they need to do with it. You don’t have to walk them through anything in the appendix. Okay.

That’s a lot of stuff. There are a whole bunch of templates in here that you would use and then share with your VA.

What’s this? I think someone added that.

Weird. Okay. That’s all. I’m gonna stop sharing. That was fifty minutes of training on getting started with a retainer. How are we feeling? Overwhelmed?

Underwhelmed?

Welt?

I am just hiring someone full time, my first copywriter full time, so I’m feeling grateful. That’s how I feel right now. Yeah. I’m like, woo hoo. This is gonna be so helpful, so thank you. Yeah.

Cool. That’s wicked. It’s very exciting. Some awesome. And it’s full time.

Yeah. I mean, we’re gonna do, like, up to thirty hours a week. You actually met her. She’s the one who you were like, oh, you look just like Dawn or whatever. So yeah.

Oh, her. Okay. Cool. That’s awesome. Nice.

Yeah.

Excellent.

Congratulations. It’s hard to have people who are all, like, on retainers and then, like, not available. So I think it’s gonna be really nice to have someone available during working hours all the time.

Yeah. Nice. Cool.

How’s everyone else doing? You feeling good about moving into starting to offer this sort of thing, specialized, standardized offer with retainer?

I know there were some big shifts happening for a couple businesses last week.

Good?

Not good.

Quietness.

Alright.

Well then. Yes, Andrew.

Hi.

Can you hear me?

Yep.

Okay. I’m not moving anymore. I’m now home and in my apartment as you can tell. Okay. Good.

Yeah. That was that was really helpful. I guess one thing that I’m wondering about so, I’m looking at doing basically landing page and Google Ads optimization, together as a as a package.

One of the things I’m wondering about is when I saw your timeline about, like, implementation, that’s something that can greatly vary. Like, I have some clients who are able to get stuff, designed and developed within a week or two, and then I have clients where you’re like, yeah. It’s a lot longer than that. So I’m wondering about that as an example of, like, something that could disrupt the the neat little timeline that we have mapped out.

Yeah. There’s a note in there for implementation what to do.

It really does come down to the smaller you keep the changes each month, the better. And that doesn’t mean micro. It just means, like, contained.

So don’t work on optimizing Google Ads and the page at the exact same time if that’s going to make things really weird. There are obvious cases when you’ll want to optimize both of them together, But that’s you gotta this is that’s the work part of it, right, is getting it down to a place where it’s contained.

And that means getting buy in from the client that they’ll get this if if if you determine that the client is tricky about meeting deadlines for implementation, they’ve got a weird dev team or it’s their, like, ads person who’s really super busy and has who knows? Right? Things happen.

What else can you move around in the calendar? And I would say then you’d wanna prioritize getting their work written right out of the gate week one. So you get as much done as you can for the more difficult client at the start of week one, and you insist on quicker turnarounds from them on the review. So where you would have given them a week, instead, you’re gonna give three days. So the copy goes out to them Tuesday. It It comes back to you with notes by end of day Friday, which cuts you a little more time so you can start you can turn the copy around, start implementing, and really give yourself more of, like, a seven or eight day window for implementation.

But if they don’t do the work, they’re not gonna think that’s on you, Andrew. They’re gonna think all sorts of things that will actually lead to a bad life for you. So it’s important for you to, have really honest conversations with them and say this really only works if y’all are on board. So if you’re not on board with making the changes, if you don’t think it’s important enough to your business to dedicate people to getting this stuff done on time, we probably this this isn’t a good fit for you. And that’s really it. And then, again, if they like that you told them no, which most of them do, then now they’re on board in two ways. They’re extra sold into it, and they’ve just said they promise they will give you what you need.

Yeah. I know it’s not ideal, but the more you can contain the work and be ready to say no to people who refuse to be managed, the better. Yeah.

Cool. Awesome. Thanks, Andrew.

Jessica.

I apologize if this is obvious to everybody else.

So I think I have, like, a murky middle in my head. So when I’m thinking about an audit specifically, so it could be for my seasonal sales thing, but it could be also just emails would be the same thing or, I guess, ads. But when you’re so you’ve done an audit for your standardized project, and then then you’re getting into, okay. Let’s create an automation to address, those folks that didn’t convert, you know, into full paying customers, whatever.

But let’s say in that audit, because of the holistic approach I kind of feel like I need to take and wanna take, I’m gonna notice other things like abandon cart, win back, you know, things like that. And that’s where I guess for me is the murky middle of well, I am a broadly retention is a focus. Right? So is that I guess I’m trying to figure out where the audit for sure ends and the retainer as compared to a new project could get there should could be some overlap, and I’m trying to figure out the clarity on that, I guess, which is which.

Depends on what you’re doing in the retainer. So what do you do in the retainer?

What do you have about Well, see, that was where so when you and I spoke last, we are really gonna focus in on creating an automation specifically for turning a new customer that came in as a discount per off with a discount offer into a full full paying customer. Right? So that would be so then I was sitting there going, okay. So if I do the audit, would I do the automation with the audit? So it’s audit automation together in the standardized project, or is it not together?

But then that feels like another project.

Yeah. That’s another project. That’s the thing. Unless the audit is, like so the audit has to exist for wait.

Okay. Wait. The audit is of their holiday stuff? It’s not of an existing automation. Or, sorry, it is.

Well, I would imagine if I’m were if I’m focused on my ideal customer, they would have something in place already. So it would be the tail end of their seasonal sale and then whatever they already have in place.

Okay. So they’ve got something in place. So you’re doing an audit of a thing that’s already in place, and then you’ll do optimization of the thing that was already in place. Okay. That sounds good. So that Okay.

Can I can I just but but aren’t there times where it almost feels like when you audit something, you’re like, yeah? I might as well just this whole thing isn’t for whatever reason. There’s a difference between, yes, we can optimize versus let’s start from scratch again.

If your audit ends with you saying something like let’s start from scratch, then you’ll need to build in another standardized project.

Okay. That’ll be the tricky thing, and that would be standing up the automation and then optimizing it as the retainer, which is fine. It’s just one more thing in. Right? So Yeah.

So what yeah.

Okay. Alright. That makes more sense to me then. It was the one where I just felt like creating from scratch because it was getting such okay. That makes more sense. Appreciate it.

Thank you. Just be careful where you started saying things about abandoned card emails and stuff. Like, don’t start taking on all of that work even if there’s an opportunity there. Right? So you have the standardized project one, which is the audit, and sometimes leads to standardized project too, which is setting up a better automation based on the audit that you can then go and optimize.

That’s different from saying, plus I’m gonna do abandoned cart emails, plus I’m gonna do win back stuff, plus, plus, plus.

Right. Okay. Yep. Yep. Absolutely.

Yep.

Yes.

That makes sense. Okay. Good. Because I don’t know why an abandoned cart flow would be in an automation. Not related to that.

I I think just the idea that I notice it in my audit, I’d inevitably come because what happens for me right now is, oh, here. Here. We’ll add you into Klaviyo. And I start looking, and I can’t help myself.

I’m gonna go look. So then I just start taking notes of, oh, okay. That that could be something. But you’re right.

It would not technically fall under the true audit of what I Yeah. From what I’m looking for. So, yeah, that’s true.

Keep in mind with the stuff that does surface during these audits and the stuff that you’re working on, you’ll get to know their team better. And chances are good. Along the way, they’ll either hire someone who gets excited about what you’re doing, or there’ll be someone internally who gets excited about what you’re doing. And goes like, Jessica, can I do some of that with you?

And it’ll be great for you to say, actually, you know what you should work on is the abandoned cart email flow. And then give them those things so they leave your stuff alone, but they still get busy with stuff that’s interesting to them. Smart. Cool?

Yeah. Mhmm. Okay. Awesome. Dig it. Cool. Good question. Anybody else in the remaining two minutes?

We good?

Because next week, we get into some pretty cool stuff.

We’re gonna do we’re gonna be establishing your sales driven funnel.

So if you don’t yet have all of this stuff sorted out so, again, the standardized offer and the retainer offer are really conceptual at this point. We’re gonna start digging into them a little bit more. The retainer should be less conceptual because you have all of the stuff that we just shared today.

But it’s gonna start really coming together where if you are still wondering, have I landed on the right thing?

You’re going to be unhappy going forward. I wanna keep you up to date with where we’re going. So nail that down. If you haven’t nailed it down, don’t be embarrassed or afraid or anything of bringing that up in our Thursday. I believe it’s Thursday this week call.

And, otherwise, if you have a coach that you wanna just, like, knock ideas around with, also do that too. Right? So I know if you’re in the intensive freelancing, not Coffee School Pro, then you have a coach. Reach out to that coach.

Alright. And other than that, yeah, next week is gonna be super duper fun.

And I’m so I think it’s all been fun, but it’s been really thinky. And now we’re gonna get into more, like, hands on dewy stuff too. So, cool. Thanks, everybody, and we’ll see you on Thursday.

Alright? Peace. Bye y’all. Bye.

Transcript

You had a big assignment to finish off your standardized offer, getting that all sorted out. And I believe everybody here is a total pro, so so I one hundred percent believe that you did it and you got through it. And now you’re ready to turn that into a retainer offer where we get the beautiful thing that makes businesses grow more easily, which is monthly recurring revenue.

We like it. It is good. So today, we’re gonna work on the monthly recurring revenue stuff, the retainer.

Our objective is to be as systematized as possible with the stuff that we can put on a sort of autopilot.

There’s still work you’re gonna be doing during this time, but it’s really, really important that when you’re working on your retainer offer, you have a fixed amount of time that you will spend on it and that you do not go over time. We’re gonna talk about time more than you may expect going forward because even at Boxcar, I had to really discipline the team to stop spending as much time as they felt like on things, like doing really detailed solution designs for optimization work.

There’s just, not a lot of profitability in spending all of your time on things that you don’t need to spend that much time on, which is really hard for freelancers.

Most freelancers are so used to being valued for execution, that they struggle to believe they could be valuable without executing, that you can actually have real value. You’re still executing, but you’re doing it in a in a constrained way.

And that’s good. That’s important. That’s that’s where the money is, and that’s also what your client is paying for. So it’s important to keep in mind when we talk about this retainer model, we’re talking about going from a ten thousand dollar project to five thousand dollars a month, which for most businesses is so easy to sign off on. And I mean businesses that are making a million dollars a year, have an easy time signing off on, hey. You’re gonna grow my x over y period of time, and that’s gonna cost me five thousand dollars a month, and you’re gonna report your results to me every month. This is, like, unless you somehow messed up the relationship, this is a really, really easy sell.

It doesn’t require that you do a ton of work. So I wanna make that really clear if you’re thinking, like, oh, but how am I gonna get all the work done? You should be spending, like, six hours on the actual work work. Like, the skill application, the part where you sit down and you write the copy or you do the planning or whatever it is. Six hours with an extra, like, thirty minutes for implementing their feedback.

That’s it for the whole month. So we’re gonna walk through that, but I’m probably going to have to say it to you a lot, and your coach is going to have to help you with that a lot because it’s really, really, really like, if if you don’t have friction there, I’m relieved for you because most people, most freelance copywriters in particular, can’t imagine being valued for just doing at five thousand dollars a month for just doing six hours of work.

But you should and you can because that’s a lot actually. You’re giving people a lot when you give them six hours of your brain power. Alright. So I want you to think about a time budget going forward the same way you think about a money budget.

If you if your partner, let’s say, goes to the store and you have agreed on your budget for the groceries for the week, and you say groceries for the week are a thousand dollars because groceries are ridiculously expensive right now. So you go to the store with a they go with a thousand dollars, and they come back home three hours later, and they say, cool. I spent three thousand dollars. And you go, wait.

Hold on. Hold on. What’s the point in having a budget if you’re just going to spend whatever you feel like? That is exactly the same as saying I’m going to put six hours into this project and then putting twelve in there.

You have just cost yourself and your business and everyone involved a lot of money. Time is money for us. Your profits will go up when the time you spend on things goes down. That’s not the only way to increase profitability, but you will be losing money by not controlling the time you spend.

And as we’ll talk about today, the time your assistant or the person you hire to help you with retainer stuff once you’re ready for that. If you’re not controlling what they’re doing with their time too, money just flies out of the business. Like, it just pours out and you’re like, Joe, I was supposed to make all this money and I’m losing money. Time.

Time. It’s time. It’s always time. If you budget thirty minutes, you don’t even have thirty one minutes to spend.

You have thirty minutes to spend. You should be ready to wind down at twenty nine minutes.

Spend less. Spend less than you budgeted. That’s also a good thing to do too when you’re trying to figure out how to control these costs. There shouldn’t be costs when you hire someone to help you do this work.

It’s fully they’re generating profit for you. But if they don’t have to control the time they’re spending, they will cost you money, and that’s gonna be the big, big difference. So we wanna make sure that there’s some form of consequence if they go over budget with their time. And that can be a really real consequence, like the three strikes you’re out kind of thing.

So you went over budget today with your time. You’ve got two more times than I have to let you go. So let’s not go there. Okay?

Let’s not do that. Let’s just, like, focus on dedicating yourselves to the amount of time that we actually have allocated for it, and then bring up challenges in advance. So if so if your VA or the assistant or coordinator, whoever you hire, comes to you and says, you know, you gave me thirty minutes for this, but I think it’s gonna take, like, seventy five, maybe even ninety minutes, then you have to have a real talk with them. They don’t necessarily know that that’s how long it’s going to take.

Sometimes it is just, again, further poor time management. They’re context switching. They’re doing all sorts of stuff.

You need to go in with a good estimate, which is what we’re talking about here in the stuff that I’ve prepared for you already today. Those are realistic estimates.

If they go over and they say, well, you did the wrong estimate. It’s you didn’t give me enough time. For me, in my experience hiring people, that’s usually their red flag that, no, they’re actually just not a good fit. They don’t manage their time well.

They move slowly. They don’t rely on the templates you put in place for them. They they make up their own SOP. They make things up as they go, and thus it takes too much time.

If they’re using everything you provide them and you train them, they should only be spending as much time as you’ve allocated.

The consequence needs to be there. They can’t just keep going over time that actually costs you money, and that’s not cool.

Put mechanisms in place to stay ahead of minutes spent down to the minute. One of my good friends is a CMO of a tech company, and she lives to the minute. It’s the weirdest thing to hang out with her. She finds time where I’d never even thought there was time.

So we’re we’re doing things. I’m like, we don’t have time for that. Yes. We do.

We really don’t. We really do. She makes us find time for it, and then it turns out we do. It’s really cool to watch people use their minutes, not just their time, but their minutes.

So do your best to stay ahead of minutes spent.

A time tracker, VAs that you hire are likely to come with a time tracker, especially if they’re through a good service like Time, etcetera or a solution like that. We use Time, etcetera. That’s why I mentioned them. There are other ones out there.

But they’ll track their time, and you can see exactly how much time they spent on things.

So make sure that you keep track of that too. That’s part of the administrative work that you do as a person who has a growing business with people who are helping you grow that business. Alright. All this talk about people, you know, Joe, I don’t even have any people.

Hang on. Because we’re about to get into why you’re going to need people. Alright? So you saw this shared drive that has all this stuff in it.

You can also get here, by just clicking on these. If you’re on your phone or, Andrew, you’re in a cab right now, you can use the QR code, that’s right there or the link for it, whatever. But what we have here is a bunch of completed templates for you to use going into the retainer that you’ll be running. So you have the standardized project and the retainer offer that’s an extension of the standardized project.

It’s not creating new work. It’s It’s creating new deliverables, but not necessarily new work, not a bunch of new research, etcetera, etcetera.

Narrowing everything down to its, like, four works that you can repeat it.

So we’ve got the SOP to run a retainer every month, which I’m gonna walk you through, a template to track retainer results, which I’ll walk you through as well, and the template for monthly reporting.

Within those, you’ve also got more templates, and more other things that you’ll be filling in. So I’m gonna start with this beast as soon as it opens.

I never go through a Google Drive. I always go just having, like, fifteen tabs open. So I’m just gonna open that up separately.

Soapy retainer.

Work.

Cool. Alright. So you’ll have something like this. Maybe it’s open on your computer or maybe you’re looking at mine, whatever.

But it is the one that says SOP retainer work duplicate for each client. So you’ll want to duplicate the entire sheet for each client because once you’ve done that, then every client gets its its own name. The client name goes in the title, and you’ll wanna duplicate these tabs each month for that client. Okay?

So every client gets their own spreadsheet that is this. This is the starting point. This is already filled in with most of what you need. If it’s highlighted in yellow, that means it’s specific enough to your business that you need to come up with it yourself.

If it’s not, then it’s not. And in this case, there’s a monthly report template as well as the heuristic analysis SOP.

The monthly report templates made for you. The heuristic analysis SOP is not. Okay? So just as we go through and you look at things that you still need to fill in, it’s the yellow stuff.

Everything else is good to go for repeatable work that you do with the client, where this part up here is only done in the beginning, and some of it is optional. K? So I’m not gonna spend too much time on the things that are optional. If you have questions, go ahead and ask.

That is cool. What you wanna do is have this column, this column b, that’s what your VA in most cases, unless you’re the person who did the work, that’s what gets ticked or complete shown complete. I was gonna say ticked off. Hopefully not.

But that’s what gets selected when the work is done so that everything is under control and you can really easily see things. Now I didn’t do advanced stuff like changing colors of anything, because I anticipate that you will go through. And after doing this a few times using this SOP, you’ll start to make it your own. You’ll start to say, like, okay.

Well, I didn’t actually assign this to my VA. I decided to do this work, or my partner is really good at this work, and I hire that person on contract to come in and do this sort of work for me. So I’m making a few changes. That’s cool.

This is the starting point. I don’t wanna overcomplicate it. I just wanna make sure you have what you need to get started with the retainer. Okay?

So out of the gate, we wanna make sure when a retainer starts, that first you make a copy of this, you’re gonna put together a Google Drive or whatever you use. I recommend Google Drive. It’s basically free. And if you’re on Google Suite anyway, I don’t even know what it costs, but it’s, like, a negligible.

You have to have some of these expenses, and this is a low one, and it’s everywhere. So you’re fine. You’re safe. Use it.

So open start a Google Drive. You’ll have folders in there that you’ll put together. We can talk more about those folders as we get into it, but it’s not really critical right now that you overthink the folder. Some people really, like, owe two folders upfront and then end up using one only.

So just know, like, you know, go as far as you like to go to feel organized. I’m not trying to push you to be the most organized person or the least organized person, just an organized person.

So you’ll start with a folder for your client. In that folder, you will put a copy of this. You will use this month after month to track everything that’s going on. You will use it religiously.

Nobody gets to opt out. Your VA doesn’t get to go, oh, yeah. I forgot to check that off. Nope.

The process is that we check these things off, and you need to make sure you’re checking things off in here too. So your client your VA needs to be trained on this. You need to train yourself and let me train you on this and actually apply it. So when you get started, you will see in here that this column b, as I mentioned, is where you go to say the job’s done, boss.

Then there’s a selection here. It’s So obviously not then because this happens at the very end. You’ll start by choosing which one the thing is. Now I’ve preselected what it is.

So if it’s a do the work or set an appointment or whatever it is, this will help the person who does the work to know what it is. Right? So whoever’s running it, it’s your VA, they need to check and do work. Sometimes there’s two things.

Most of the time, there’s just gonna be one thing.

What it is, then paint it done. Now Sarah actually introduced the concept of paint it done into the copy hacker’s way of working.

I it comes from Britney Brown, Sarah? It does. Dare to Lead. Yep.

Okay. Cool. So I haven’t still haven’t read Dare to Lead. I will.

Painted done is you and your VA really clearly identify how to tell that the job is done and done well. Right? So this is what the job is.

That’s in column k. And then paint it done is here’s how I’ll know that the job has been done well. So it always begins with this will be done well when, and then it gets into the details of painting it done. Okay?

So out of the gate, you’re gonna need to ensure that all the required tech is in place for every new client. It shouldn’t take longer than an hour if you do this right. So you need, for your own business, a tech and software checklist for each new client. That’s something you have to come up with.

You should come up with it this week using what you know of what clients need for the work that you do. So if you’re like, we’re always gonna need Zoom. Cool. What else do you need with Zoom?

Well, we use Fathom notetaker. Cool. Install Fathom notetaker as well. So those two go on the checklist together.

Anything I need to know about Zoom? Google Drive is mentioned here as well. Gmail. Do we need a calendar that’s just for retainers?

If so, how do we make sure we add the right people to that calendar?

Whatever it is, this is the part where you sit down and think through what do I need out of the gate for every new client who comes on board. And you may have already done this stuff upfront. You may have already gone through this checklist when they were just doing the project rather than in the retainer, and that’s cool. That’s fine.

Because then you can very quickly go, okay. Done. I already did this. This is done.

We don’t have to worry about it. And then you just save sixty minutes, which is worth a good amount of money. That’s forty five bucks if you pay your VA forty five dollars. So you get to keep forty five dollars in your pocket for that.

Otherwise, you do the work. Have this checklist there and any notes you might need to add. I was very light on notes. I have one on notes, here.

No. I’ve got two. Just know that. Okay? Then we move on to set recurring end of month thirty minute results review meeting.

The earlier you set recurring meetings with your clients, the better they typically feel. So you can get ahead of this annoying thing that happens that I’ve seen happen where you’re like, hey. I think we’re supposed to meet in a week. How is Thursday looking?

And, like, they’re booked. Most people assume anybody who can afford you and needs your services is busy and booked. Their calendar is everything. Get your VA to book all of the meetings all upfront, then your calendar is blocked for that and so is theirs.

You can always add more people to it. They can always decline next month and you can adjust accordingly, but you were in their calendar first and then they go, oh, actually, I have to move that. I’ve got a board meeting that day. It just got booked.

Cool. That’s fine. Tell me what works better for you. But it’s not like, oh, hey.

Can we book this for next Thursday? No. I’ve got a board meeting. Oh, okay. What works for you?

Like, that’s a bad position to be in. You wanna be in the good position where they’re like, sorry. I hate to inconvenience you. I know you booked this in advance, but I got a board meeting.

Can we move this? That’s what we wanna do. It’s as simple as select in recurring when you set the meeting up. So just make sure that the VA sets the meeting up.

There is a meeting invitation with agenda template right here. You go over there. I’m not gonna do it because it hits I have to hit copy, and I’ve already got a million copies of it. But go in there, make a copy, and make sure that your VA uses that to set up meetings.

That’s it. Recurring meeting. It happens. It’s fifteen minutes, and it’s done.

Then create a reminder, the VA has to keep going in and checking on these invitations. So maybe something happened. Maybe they accidentally one of the meetings falls on Thanksgiving in the US. Well, that’s not probably gonna work for anybody.

So let’s get ahead of that. And also just making sure that everything’s cool. So they just keep adding and moving things around. It’s five minutes diarized for them, but it’s in your process for them to go check on meetings.

It’s tiny. It’s annoying to think about.

I had to put it in this freaking SOP, so you better do it because these are the small things that are like, why do we have to think about this? This isn’t this isn’t what I signed up for. This is the kind of stuff that’s actually gonna make your life a lot easier now that it’s just, like, ready to go in front front of you. Then you wanna add deadlines and milestone dates for the retainer to the retainer calendar.

So you should have a calendar that’s separate that you and your VA share and anybody else in your team shares. It’s a Google Calendar, probably called retainers or clients on retainer, whatever you wanna call it, but it’s very clear that it’s for internal use only. Clients don’t get invited to it. Clients don’t ever need to know about it.

It’s so you and your VA can work together to track what’s due, when’s it due, and that’s all based on everything that’s following down here. So your VA can go in and put in a work block that says, okay. On the this Monday, every Monday of the first every first Monday of the month, we’re going to have you block out six hours to work on this person’s copy. Now, obviously, if you just block six hours for one retainer client and you get another retainer client, Monday doesn’t have six more hours to give.

So that would have to be Tuesday, and you would have to modify this and so on and so forth. And once you get to a place where you’re like, oh, I already have five clients in here. I’ve taken up month like, my first week of every month has somehow turned into me doing a lot of work. I’m making twenty five thousand a month because of it, though.

Maybe I should hire someone. That’s a good indicator that it’s time to hire someone, and your Google Calendar for retainers will become a single source of truth for all the things that you’re working on for clients and will help you see who you should be hiring next. And if your VA does not update it appropriately, you will know that you need to hire a new VA next and train them. So you wanna get that shared calendar set up.

Hopefully, you already have one. Then all that needs to happen is if you don’t use this retainer calendar alongside your calendar as well. So if they’re not both open at the same time, you just have to make sure that your these two calendars not necessarily speak to each other, but, like, know each other. So you may make you may duplicate.

You may just always say, hey. First week of the month in my personal calendar is always blocked for client work. That’s the week that I just, like, turn and burn. Like, it just get through the work, and that’s blocked off in your calendar so that you never take sales calls in the first week, which can be annoying, though.

You’re like, but I wanna take a sales call in the first week. It’s up to you to figure that out. What you need to know is you do need these work blocks in there.

Finally, in getting this stuff set up is, again, creating another reminder in the calendar for three weeks from now to add new deadlines for the following month. If those deadlines have not already been added, they probably haven’t because this is only for one month. What we’re looking at here, that at the end of the month, the VA needs a reminder to go in and set and do the exact same work that they just did for next month. And that just keeps happening because the VA keeps putting that in there. Does that make sense?

Diarizing just really means from my good old days and Sarah’s days of working in a law office as well.

You’re just putting something in the calendar for future reference is what it really comes down to.

But this is the establishing your, retainer kind of work, getting it started. Not gonna dig too deeply into the next four weeks. You can go through and see them, but you’ll see that there’s a lot of repetitive stuff here. And a lot of it’s quite small. So week one has a lot happening because that’s when you’re most likely going to do the work that then gets reviewed the following week, tested and implemented the week after, and starts generating some results the final week of the month so that you can go into that meeting and not only have results from the previous month, but also able to say, oh, and we just put this thing live, and here’s what we’re starting to see already, if there’s anything you’re starting to see already. So we want to get the work written in week one of the retainer.

Okay?

Sometimes, when it comes to retainer work, you don’t always have to present copy live.

You can. It takes almost as long to present it live as it does to put a loom walk through together and get that sent off, so keep that in mind. But you can, depending on how the relationship works, you can just send along a Loom walk through to the right people. If it’s a small, fast moving team, they’re like, I don’t wanna sit there.

I love you. I trust you. I don’t think I have to look at your full presentation every week if it’s a or every month. And if it’s a larger team, they might depend on you walking them through this copy in a call.

You’ll know that, and that’s why off to the side says if you prefer to present, update the SOP accordingly. So you would need to modify this accordingly.

We have chats here. Hold on. I wanna make sure I’m not missing anything.

Okay.

Cool.

Alright. Awesome. Week two is far more chill. You’re going to just have your VA check-in that the, that the notes have come in, basically. That’s it. You’re doing a little bit of work, but you just wanna make sure that the client has given feedback by the deadline. If they haven’t, you’re going to have to make sure you follow-up to set a new deadline, etcetera, but that’s what’s happening there.

Week three, a lot more of the same. This is implementation week. Are we queuing it? Is everything okay? Are we happy with how it looks? Are we ready to go? This is the week because these the actual actual implementation is going to be really specific to the work that you do.

Oh, shoot. One sec. Hold on. Hold on. Our dog walker’s here. Put it there. You gotta go upstairs.

Go get sick. Good girl.

Sorry about that. Okay. So implementation and, the VA checklist for implementation as well as QA ing the work. If you’re QA if you’re like, I’m focused on ManyChat, all I’m gonna do is ManyChat automations going forward. It’s my jam. I love it.

The QA process for many chat implementation is gonna be really different from that of ActiveCampaign, for example. Similar in some ways, very different in other ways. So you come up with your own SOPs for that. Okay? Everything else, we’ve got templates here, and we’ll get into the other stuff as well.

And then month four is getting or week four is getting ready for the presentation. If week four and week five are the same, if it’s a four week month exactly, then, yeah, then you’ll want to merge the two right here, but you’ll see that there’s not that much work in either of them. It’s really just this presentation, and that’s it. If you do this alright, everything is broken down into fifteen, thirty, sixty minute increments. If you do it, you’ll see in the end that you put in about seventeen hours in the month, twenty five hours got assigned to the client, and that comes out to a little under two hundred dollars, Slide Buddy, two hundred bucks, an hour, which is a good rate. But if you can bring in a copywriter at seventy five dollars an hour, that means you made a hundred and twenty five dollars an hour not doing any of it, which is nice.

That’s how the money starts happening.

And all you really have to do is present to stakeholders and then add in a line for copy cheating, and and also making sure that they’re briefed on what to do. And that’s it.

K. So that’s the SOP for the retainer work overall. There’s also in here retainer tracking. Oh, thank god this one finally opened.

Okay. So in retainer tracking, this is where you’ll go in. It’s in the SOP when to do this. You’ll go in and you’ll fill in the numbers depending on what you’re measuring for.

So you know what your KPIs are. You know what the, metrics are underneath each of those KPIs. That’s on you. You know it.

So if you’re like, I don’t do anything with leads, delete the row. You don’t need it then. You also don’t need lead conversion rate because you don’t worry about that. If you think about customers added or anything else, you update this accordingly.

Okay? So for example because examples help, you’ll be filling this in week after week. And the reason to fill it in is not just to do the job of filling this in, but the numbers will tell you how how things are. Right? This is this is the real work. This is where you go and you go, oh, okay.

Well, we added fourteen customers on week one, and then what the hell happened here in week four? It dropped down to six. What’s going on? And you can start to, like, put together what the story is.

And how the hell do we get an eighty three percent increase, and then we were way down so far below? So you can start to figure that story out. Make notes throughout the month about, like, what you’re seeing, what’s going on. Make notes about what you’ve delivered, what’s finalized, what’s implemented, and what’s decided, any, like, decisions that the client makes.

So that’s over here in its own little section. If the client comes to you, which they will do, and says, we’ve decided to run a campaign, and it’s going to go to all the people that your flow is currently targeting. That’s a decision that you’re gonna wanna document here because it will affect your results. And then when you when you, present your results at the end of the month, you’ll say, hey.

The numbers are down a little bit in week three and four. That’s the month that was those are the two weeks, if you’ll recall, when, you sent a campaign to everybody, so we paused. This campaign? Yeah.

That’s why it’s down. Okay? Perfect. So that’s it. Then they know and you know, and no one’s like, what the hell happened?

Oh my gosh. Oh, no. Everything fell apart. You don’t want that. That’s a horrible thing.

Track it. Just keep track of it. Keep your notes. Put it in a single source of truth.

Make sure you’re tracking this. And as you start hiring people, they’re tracking in here with your training. So really being careful because some people who are newer to numbers will just get things wrong. Okay?

But this is what you’re going to track, and you’ll use it as you move toward the end of the month when you’ll take this template for sharing your monthly results and your recommendations.

You’ll make it look good. This is a wireframe at best. You’ll make it look on brand. You’ll download it, put it in Keynote, or whatever the hell you wanna do with it.

I don’t care if you’re using Google Slides at this point. It’s easier because you can share it easily. I don’t care. What you wanna do is brand it, but then fill it in as shown.

So I have done a lot a lot of presentations. I just been I just left a presentation forty minutes early that started at quarter two, to come here and do this training. We were going through exactly this stuff. So I’ve seen it.

I’ve done it. Take the template. Use it. You want a really meaningfully clear title that makes the value of your work a no brainer.

What I want you to remember as you’re going through and filling this in every single month is if it feels tedious to you, it’s gonna feel tedious to them too. Okay? So don’t be tedious. Be as excited as you should be about this role that you have with them, the results you’re making.

Right? What’s the value of them working with you? Don’t forget that. Make titles that reflect that.

Those are the things they’re paying attention to. You’re always a copywriter. You don’t have to always be selling, but you gotta be a copywriter the whole time.

Fill in the period, what you’re reporting on. Make sure it’s clear. Like, this is all going to be pretty straightforward once you filling it in. Then it’s up to you to go through and, like, present to someone around you.

Present to the others if you’re in Coffee School Pro, like, hey. Can we work together? And, like, walk through this? Just, like, point out where it’s confusing or what I’ve missed.

Because maybe maybe you’ve missed something. Maybe there’s something unique to your work that you do or to your clients or a niche, whatever it could be. Maybe there’s something going on there that’s just not covered here. This is based on what we use and have used for a very long time.

So you want this to be about twenty five minutes. It can be booked for as long as sixty minutes. You’ll know better. But the shorter it is, the more likely you are to get people to attend and pay attention.

So you want those things.

This is the agenda. Always start with an agenda, then have a way of always talking about your data. You’ll see throughout all the templates that I’m sharing with you. This the framework goes what’s important, how are we doing, and then a variation on priorities to improve. In this case, it’s recommendations for continued optimization.

This is an old consulting thing. We use that Intuit. Most big tech companies use this or something like it. What’s important?

This is a reminder of why you’re there. It’s the KPI. How are we doing against that KPI, And what will we be doing differently now that we’ve learned a little bit more? Okay?

So we have an executive summary. You’ll probably spend most of your time on this. They’ll probably ask you a lot of questions here. You may not even get to the other parts of the slide deck.

That’s okay if you’re having a good here. So don’t try to rush through it. The executive summary is there for a reason. It’s usually just they just wanna talk about this, and that’s it.

You can guide the conversation if they’re like, well, I don’t know why that’s like that. You can bring them down. You can hop down and say, oh, here’s a screenshot of why, etcetera. Like, that’s up to you to know the content, drive the meeting, but the executive summary, just be cool with, like, spending a lot of time here.

If you don’t ever spend time here, you might wanna rethink whether it’s got interesting stuff on it. Executives don’t want the boring summary. They want, like, tell me what’s going on. Tell me what’s happened.

Tell me why I should care because I have a different thing I could be doing this twenty five minutes. So, like, make sure it’s clear that there’s a measurable win. Make sure they’re as excited as you are, and don’t panic if on the executive summary slide, numbers were down this month. That’s okay.

There’s hypotheses, and you’ll talk about what’s gonna happen next month. And you can invite them in to help you understand why they think numbers might be down outside of the hypothesis you have, such as, well, we know that the sales team has just done x differently or, our Facebook ads got shut off, so we had far fewer leads. That might be what’s happened here. Yeah.

It might be. Probably.

So just keep that in mind that it’s okay to talk with your client when you’re in a retainer.

Yes. You’re there to get them results, but they’ve said yes to having you do as part of their team. They believe in you. This is pretty clear they believe in you at this point.

If they don’t, don’t worry about those people. Don’t let those people in. They are likely to believe about to believe in you. So just, like, roll with it.

Just be part of their team. Ask them questions.

Say yes when they’re like, something went wrong there. Yes. It did. Let’s talk about what went wrong there.

Here’s what we think happened. What do you think might have happened? And we can then, like, get into that. That’s okay.

That’s allowed. They’re allowed to take an active interest in your work and the results that you’re getting or not getting. Because if they didn’t take an active interest, they probably wouldn’t have hired you in the first place or you’re too cheap and you need to raise your rates, and then they’ll take an active interest.

Okay. So then the what’s important is really, like, your KPI. Right? So what’s important is the reason that everybody’s here right now. And then a single sentence about what the goal was this month. So the general KPI and then how that translated into the work that you just did this month.

Anything that you wanna ask them at this point, k, that’s the KPI. That’s been what’s most important, and that’s what we’re working on this month. But now we need to know, has anything changed in your business? Are there shifting priorities, new team members, anything else we need to know about?

Are you all gonna be off-site for a week next week? Help us know what’s going on. Great. They do a quick check-in.

That’s awesome. Thank you. Let’s get into how we’re doing. We know what the KPI is.

Here’s how we’re doing, and you show them how you’re doing that. It doesn’t have to be just the slides that we have here. It can be a variety of slides, but the point is it has to tell a story that’s related to the what’s important. So it has to be tied to the KPI.

If it’s here’s the email that we ran and here’s how it performed this month, or here’s the ManyChat automation.

Here’s the part that we that we, I mean, updated this month or changed this month. Cool. Show those things, Point to it. Tell a quick story and make sure it’s not tangential.

Also, make sure it’s, like, telling an honest, true, real story in an exciting way. That’s it. Just put in as many screenshots as you need to with notes on the screen. Or if you’re worried that people won’t attend, take the notes off the screen and always speak to them.

So the less you have on the slide, the more they need to show up to get the full story. So you’ll know best what to do in that case, but just know that you can modify for different clients if you wanna make sure some attend or if you’re like, they’re never gonna attend. And then they get all the ideas that I have wrong. So I’m just gonna put all of the information on the screen.

Okay. Fine. Like, overload people with that. You’ll know. I don’t know. I wouldn’t do it.

You know.

Okay. This part, under how we’re doing, how are we doing, is, where you showcase your thought leadership. So they’ll have access to the exact same data you have. They’ll have access to the same creative that you have.

They can see what you’ve done. What they don’t have access to is your brain. So you bring out and impress them with something interesting. So if you’re writing abandoned cart emails, let’s say.

Let’s say your whole thing is abandoned cart emails. You do an audit upfront and your retainer is always be optimizing abandoned cart emails. Okay. Fine.

That’s what you’re doing. What new thing can you learn about abandoned cart emails? Ideally, a really hard to access source of knowledge or information at least, if not knowledge.

Deep dive I talk about a lot. Wherever there’s all sorts of places to get academic articles. There’s all sorts of studies on abandoned cart emails.

So much out there. If you can pull one interesting note in here and share it with them and have it be related to what you’re talking about, of course. You elevate what you’re doing to a whole new level. You remind them why they hired you, why it seems like, you know, our results are good. We’re happy, but don’t we have somebody in house who can do this? Like, when that conversation starts with some person who joins the team who, like, thinks this is how they’re gonna save the team money by getting rid of the contractors, and then someone else comes along and says the exact opposite, but whatever.

This is the irreplaceable part. AI doesn’t do this. You do this. This is you. AI doesn’t do a lot of what you do in this case, of course, but this is you thinking on the page, impressing them.

That’s really it. Finish off how you’re doing with actual data on how you’re doing. You may need to move this slide up. If your audience is, like, really big on the executive summary slide, then they’re probably gonna love this slide too.

So this is where you’re gonna say, this row goes away, of course. This is just me giving you examples. This is where you’ll have the numbers. You’ll put the KPI.

If it’s two KPIs, then get rid of the third row. You only have as many KPIs as you have for the work that you do. If you’re in Coffee School Pro, we talked about this last week.

Week over week, month over month, year over year if it’s available. Alright?

That goes here. That comes from that sheet that I showed you just before I showed you this. How are we doing? Finishing off the how are we doing part.

Any key insights you’ve got, always hook them with most interesting stuff. Always lead with the interesting stuff. Don’t bury any money or percentage growth stuff. Open with that. I don’t care if it’s a dollar. If it’s the only good story you’ve got, you open with it.

What the quantitative data is showing you, what the qualitative data is showing you, if anything’s changed there. And you will always always get questions about industry benchmarks, and versus x. So how are we doing versus the competition as industry benchmarks? How are we doing versus the world in general?

Like, our ads, our click through rate is three percent. Is that good? You’ll have to have some way of talking them through that, and then any business goals or expectations. Right?

Don’t overwhelm them. Keep it short. Keep it to just, like, three or four notes here, but make sure you’re hitting on the things that you are likely to hear about. And how are we doing comparison to x will come up all the time.

Then we get into the recommendations.

In other places, this is just called priorities to improve. In this slide deck, we wanna call it recommendations because priorities to improve, although good for using internally, can be a little tricky when you’re a consultant coming in because the word is improve as if we’re in a bad place right now. So we call it recommendations in the slide deck because there’s always someone in the room who’s looking to point at something weird. We don’t wanna write for that person, but they’re there. So recommendations, what’s your top recommendation?

How will you know what to do? So this is the part where you come in and say, okay, We sold this stuff this month. We’re doing great on x, y, and z, but a and b are killer opportunities. So internal name a, that’s a.

This is b. There is no c in this case, so we just do a and b. Here’s what I’m recommending that we do next month. This is where I would love your insights on whether this is good.

Here’s the recommendation. Here’s how we’ll know if this is working and or whether we should kill it. So if it’s a really big experiment, for example, if it’s, like, a really big swing, they might need, like, what’s the kill switch? How do we know when it’s time to end this if it’s super risky?

Otherwise, good, better, best.

If it’s not good, it might be something worth killing is the other takeaway here. So we’re seeking good, better, best all the time. And again, same thing for whichever other recommendations you make. Point is recommendation goes to the left, and then you help them understand how you will know what to do with the recommendation once it’s out in the wild.

And then you finish with next steps. Make sure there are deadlines. And then if you have anything to add outside of what’s already shown, such as if you end up with, like, seventeen how are we doing slides because you’ve been doing this for them for so long, you’ll actually wanna throw a lot of those in the appendix. So keep that in mind.

You’ll circulate the slide deck. They can do whatever they need to do with it. You don’t have to walk them through anything in the appendix. Okay.

That’s a lot of stuff. There are a whole bunch of templates in here that you would use and then share with your VA.

What’s this? I think someone added that.

Weird. Okay. That’s all. I’m gonna stop sharing. That was fifty minutes of training on getting started with a retainer. How are we feeling? Overwhelmed?

Underwhelmed?

Welt?

I am just hiring someone full time, my first copywriter full time, so I’m feeling grateful. That’s how I feel right now. Yeah. I’m like, woo hoo. This is gonna be so helpful, so thank you. Yeah.

Cool. That’s wicked. It’s very exciting. Some awesome. And it’s full time.

Yeah. I mean, we’re gonna do, like, up to thirty hours a week. You actually met her. She’s the one who you were like, oh, you look just like Dawn or whatever. So yeah.

Oh, her. Okay. Cool. That’s awesome. Nice.

Yeah.

Excellent.

Congratulations. It’s hard to have people who are all, like, on retainers and then, like, not available. So I think it’s gonna be really nice to have someone available during working hours all the time.

Yeah. Nice. Cool.

How’s everyone else doing? You feeling good about moving into starting to offer this sort of thing, specialized, standardized offer with retainer?

I know there were some big shifts happening for a couple businesses last week.

Good?

Not good.

Quietness.

Alright.

Well then. Yes, Andrew.

Hi.

Can you hear me?

Yep.

Okay. I’m not moving anymore. I’m now home and in my apartment as you can tell. Okay. Good.

Yeah. That was that was really helpful. I guess one thing that I’m wondering about so, I’m looking at doing basically landing page and Google Ads optimization, together as a as a package.

One of the things I’m wondering about is when I saw your timeline about, like, implementation, that’s something that can greatly vary. Like, I have some clients who are able to get stuff, designed and developed within a week or two, and then I have clients where you’re like, yeah. It’s a lot longer than that. So I’m wondering about that as an example of, like, something that could disrupt the the neat little timeline that we have mapped out.

Yeah. There’s a note in there for implementation what to do.

It really does come down to the smaller you keep the changes each month, the better. And that doesn’t mean micro. It just means, like, contained.

So don’t work on optimizing Google Ads and the page at the exact same time if that’s going to make things really weird. There are obvious cases when you’ll want to optimize both of them together, But that’s you gotta this is that’s the work part of it, right, is getting it down to a place where it’s contained.

And that means getting buy in from the client that they’ll get this if if if you determine that the client is tricky about meeting deadlines for implementation, they’ve got a weird dev team or it’s their, like, ads person who’s really super busy and has who knows? Right? Things happen.

What else can you move around in the calendar? And I would say then you’d wanna prioritize getting their work written right out of the gate week one. So you get as much done as you can for the more difficult client at the start of week one, and you insist on quicker turnarounds from them on the review. So where you would have given them a week, instead, you’re gonna give three days. So the copy goes out to them Tuesday. It It comes back to you with notes by end of day Friday, which cuts you a little more time so you can start you can turn the copy around, start implementing, and really give yourself more of, like, a seven or eight day window for implementation.

But if they don’t do the work, they’re not gonna think that’s on you, Andrew. They’re gonna think all sorts of things that will actually lead to a bad life for you. So it’s important for you to, have really honest conversations with them and say this really only works if y’all are on board. So if you’re not on board with making the changes, if you don’t think it’s important enough to your business to dedicate people to getting this stuff done on time, we probably this this isn’t a good fit for you. And that’s really it. And then, again, if they like that you told them no, which most of them do, then now they’re on board in two ways. They’re extra sold into it, and they’ve just said they promise they will give you what you need.

Yeah. I know it’s not ideal, but the more you can contain the work and be ready to say no to people who refuse to be managed, the better. Yeah.

Cool. Awesome. Thanks, Andrew.

Jessica.

I apologize if this is obvious to everybody else.

So I think I have, like, a murky middle in my head. So when I’m thinking about an audit specifically, so it could be for my seasonal sales thing, but it could be also just emails would be the same thing or, I guess, ads. But when you’re so you’ve done an audit for your standardized project, and then then you’re getting into, okay. Let’s create an automation to address, those folks that didn’t convert, you know, into full paying customers, whatever.

But let’s say in that audit, because of the holistic approach I kind of feel like I need to take and wanna take, I’m gonna notice other things like abandon cart, win back, you know, things like that. And that’s where I guess for me is the murky middle of well, I am a broadly retention is a focus. Right? So is that I guess I’m trying to figure out where the audit for sure ends and the retainer as compared to a new project could get there should could be some overlap, and I’m trying to figure out the clarity on that, I guess, which is which.

Depends on what you’re doing in the retainer. So what do you do in the retainer?

What do you have about Well, see, that was where so when you and I spoke last, we are really gonna focus in on creating an automation specifically for turning a new customer that came in as a discount per off with a discount offer into a full full paying customer. Right? So that would be so then I was sitting there going, okay. So if I do the audit, would I do the automation with the audit? So it’s audit automation together in the standardized project, or is it not together?

But then that feels like another project.

Yeah. That’s another project. That’s the thing. Unless the audit is, like so the audit has to exist for wait.

Okay. Wait. The audit is of their holiday stuff? It’s not of an existing automation. Or, sorry, it is.

Well, I would imagine if I’m were if I’m focused on my ideal customer, they would have something in place already. So it would be the tail end of their seasonal sale and then whatever they already have in place.

Okay. So they’ve got something in place. So you’re doing an audit of a thing that’s already in place, and then you’ll do optimization of the thing that was already in place. Okay. That sounds good. So that Okay.

Can I can I just but but aren’t there times where it almost feels like when you audit something, you’re like, yeah? I might as well just this whole thing isn’t for whatever reason. There’s a difference between, yes, we can optimize versus let’s start from scratch again.

If your audit ends with you saying something like let’s start from scratch, then you’ll need to build in another standardized project.

Okay. That’ll be the tricky thing, and that would be standing up the automation and then optimizing it as the retainer, which is fine. It’s just one more thing in. Right? So Yeah.

So what yeah.

Okay. Alright. That makes more sense to me then. It was the one where I just felt like creating from scratch because it was getting such okay. That makes more sense. Appreciate it.

Thank you. Just be careful where you started saying things about abandoned card emails and stuff. Like, don’t start taking on all of that work even if there’s an opportunity there. Right? So you have the standardized project one, which is the audit, and sometimes leads to standardized project too, which is setting up a better automation based on the audit that you can then go and optimize.

That’s different from saying, plus I’m gonna do abandoned cart emails, plus I’m gonna do win back stuff, plus, plus, plus.

Right. Okay. Yep. Yep. Absolutely.

Yep.

Yes.

That makes sense. Okay. Good. Because I don’t know why an abandoned cart flow would be in an automation. Not related to that.

I I think just the idea that I notice it in my audit, I’d inevitably come because what happens for me right now is, oh, here. Here. We’ll add you into Klaviyo. And I start looking, and I can’t help myself.

I’m gonna go look. So then I just start taking notes of, oh, okay. That that could be something. But you’re right.

It would not technically fall under the true audit of what I Yeah. From what I’m looking for. So, yeah, that’s true.

Keep in mind with the stuff that does surface during these audits and the stuff that you’re working on, you’ll get to know their team better. And chances are good. Along the way, they’ll either hire someone who gets excited about what you’re doing, or there’ll be someone internally who gets excited about what you’re doing. And goes like, Jessica, can I do some of that with you?

And it’ll be great for you to say, actually, you know what you should work on is the abandoned cart email flow. And then give them those things so they leave your stuff alone, but they still get busy with stuff that’s interesting to them. Smart. Cool?

Yeah. Mhmm. Okay. Awesome. Dig it. Cool. Good question. Anybody else in the remaining two minutes?

We good?

Because next week, we get into some pretty cool stuff.

We’re gonna do we’re gonna be establishing your sales driven funnel.

So if you don’t yet have all of this stuff sorted out so, again, the standardized offer and the retainer offer are really conceptual at this point. We’re gonna start digging into them a little bit more. The retainer should be less conceptual because you have all of the stuff that we just shared today.

But it’s gonna start really coming together where if you are still wondering, have I landed on the right thing?

You’re going to be unhappy going forward. I wanna keep you up to date with where we’re going. So nail that down. If you haven’t nailed it down, don’t be embarrassed or afraid or anything of bringing that up in our Thursday. I believe it’s Thursday this week call.

And, otherwise, if you have a coach that you wanna just, like, knock ideas around with, also do that too. Right? So I know if you’re in the intensive freelancing, not Coffee School Pro, then you have a coach. Reach out to that coach.

Alright. And other than that, yeah, next week is gonna be super duper fun.

And I’m so I think it’s all been fun, but it’s been really thinky. And now we’re gonna get into more, like, hands on dewy stuff too. So, cool. Thanks, everybody, and we’ll see you on Thursday.

Alright? Peace. Bye y’all. Bye.

Week 2: Your Standardized Offer

Week 2: Your Standardized Offer

Transcript

So we’re building on specializing from last week. Does anybody have anything they wanna bring up as we get into this week talking about your standardized offer.

It’s based on what you’re specializing in and can build authority around.

You don’t have to. I just wanna open up in case somebody wants to mention something.

Cool?

Can I ask you what be easier?

Oh, sorry, Adnan. Go ahead.

Oh, go ahead. Jessica, you were. Go ahead.

All I was gonna say is should this be easier, and am I over complicating it? Because I feel like I’m just like No.

I don’t know. This is hard.

To kinda because I am struggling. I’m on the struggle bus as well.

Yeah. Okay.

That makes me feel better, Caroline. Thank you. Yeah. No.

The I didn’t jump in right away because I’m like, how do I make this concise?

And now was that your question or comment?

So I I feel the same as well. But, my question was in terms of the ICP. Mhmm. Now for for a company to be able to afford, the service and pay ten thousand dollars, right, whatever that service is, how many employees are we sort of aiming for, and what sort of annual revenue should be, like, our minimum?

It depends.

So if you’re using you’re using the TAM calculator Yeah.

Total addressable market? K. Cool.

It will depend. Right? So and what I want you to be factoring in is not just the ten thousand dollar project, but also five thousand dollars a month for x period of time. So you’re likely looking at they need to have fifty thousand dollars available to spend on this.

Otherwise, they’re not your market. If they don’t have the money, they also will not see it as an expense, but they don’t see marketing as an expense unless it’s done wrong, and then it’s very expensive.

So number of employees, it really like, the total addressable market calculator is good if you are trying to, eliminate ideas. It can be really useful. Sorry, Caroline.

Oh, are you trying to eliminate? Is that what you’re saying?

No.

I was actually trying to raise my hand to be the next Oh, okay.

Sorry. Okay. Cool.

I won’t look. I’ll, like, stare ahead.

Okay. So if you’re trying to eliminate options or validate that you’ve chosen a good one, then that that calculator is very, very useful. It’s not necessarily going to help you find the right audience, but if you have an idea, you can say, hey. What are the chances they have money to spend on this?

So you can go through and say, okay. I want b two b in fintech, which could just include tech tech. So I’m gonna check off both those boxes. They have to be able to afford fifty thousand dollars and then just leave everything else unchecked.

And then it’ll give you, like, a really big list versus if you try to narrow it down a lot, and it’ll just give you, like, there are four companies. You’re like, oh, I’m gonna need more than four, or I have to charge a lot, which they just said they can for it. So there’s that. So, I don’t the reason that I don’t know is because HubSpot has a huge team, but might not have money for this.

Whereas Facebook has a huge team and might have money for this. So it’s really hard to say based on team size.

Okay.

It’s just hard to say.

It doesn’t mean it’s impossible to get there, but it’s really hard to say. Yeah.

So then it will depend on so even the revenue figures will be very arbitrary in that in that case.

Revenue is a better number to go with, than number of employees.

So you could say they need to be making at least fifty million dollars a year, or they’re just gonna be too nickel and dime y with stuff.

Right.

They need to be series b, not planning on doing a series c so that they’re not panicked about a down round or something. Right? So you’re basically trying to gauge who has money to spend on this, who values it, and isn’t going to, spend all of their time going, well, what did you do for us this week? Well, what did you do for us this week?

That’s what you wanna avoid. And that’s avoidable. And that’s why it’s hard, Jessica, when you’re like, why is this hard? And, Caroline, you too.

Because most of the work that we do isn’t in optimization.

Most of the work all of us get hired for is a one and done thing. But then you’re always selling projects. That’s very hard. It’s also hard to systematize, because you get one client in, you wanna keep them, but they don’t keep hiring you for the same thing unless it’s performance of that thing.

They’re like, do our website. Now do our email. Hey. We’ve got these ads. Do you do ads?

Hey. Our sales team needs help, and now you’re like, I don’t have any systems for this. It’s always gotta be me. What should I do?

And someone says, I’ll pay you two hundred thousand dollars to come in house, and you’re like, sold. And then you left, and now you’re two years later, you’re upset that you gave in that easily. So we don’t have naturally retainable work, but we do have skills that build on each other and we go, oh, I guessed at that. I can make that better.

I guessed at that. I can do this instead. Or, hey. That’s working. Why is that working?

Can we do more of that somewhere else?

That’s that copywriters can do all day long. So we just have to find the performance to measure again and again and again. So it’s hard, but it’s not impossible.

But that’s why email is so good and ads are so good and anything that’s evergreen and new people are coming through it all the time is good, which sounds like a website, but that’s hard. It’s easy, but it’s also hard. And you then are in competition with conversion rate consultancies, like CRO consultancies who are all about that stuff.

So much to think about, but that’s what we’re here for.

Doing the work. Caroline?

Okay.

So I think well, where I’ve landed with my specialization is, basically writing websites writing websites and web design and strategic planning.

My my offer will be a website in a week for ten k.

And currently, I serve the professional services market, you know, like lawyers, people in the medical profession, consultants.

I can conceive like, I can imagine somebody wanting to pay ten k for a website fast.

Yeah. Where I where I struggle is, so I was going through your, like, checklist of how to, like, vet whether or not someone would make a good whether it’s like, my audience is a good audience, and I’m not sure that my audience would be willing to pay five k a month to optimize. Yeah.

You know, they might pay me you know, they might hire me to do one off things. Mhmm. But, I can’t see them wanting to hire me on a month to month basis. Does that mean I should switch audiences?

Yes.

Okay.

I know it’s like, oh, I was hoping you wouldn’t say that. Nah. Yeah.

Well, I mean Accountants.

Look. Not that they’re not fine to work with and individually good people.

Yeah. Revenue. They have not mark they’re not in biz they’re like their professional services are very hard to sell as business owners.

They’re not they didn’t go into it to be a business owner. There are rare cases, but sorry. Go ahead, Caroline.

So the challenge is, then I have you know, I would love to be in the, you know, b to b SaaS space. Yeah. I just don’t know that I have the skills or the, experience to break into or, you know, to do that work. So What do you think you’re lacking?

I’m not sure because I haven’t done enough to know that I can So you’re lacking knowledge of what’s expected in the first place?

No. That I don’t I think, confidence in my ability to do a good job.

Yeah.

Which, I mean, I don’t even know why I wrote it down.

It’s like the answer everybody has.

Why that I just have a sticker. It’s confidence, isn’t it? Hold up a sign. Confidence. Right? Confidence.

Yeah. No. It’s, have you ever worked in SaaS?

Well, I mean, you mean, have I had a client or have I Have you ever been in an organization that is a SaaS organization?

No. Yeah. Yeah. That’s why you don’t have the confidence. I do not mean to throw SaaS marketers and their teams under the bus, but they’re not all gems, Caroline.

They’re not all at the top of their game. So, I wouldn’t worry too much about I haven’t done this enough, and I have names going through my head right now that, like, if you knew the names, you don’t know these people. They’re just, like, people who are hired by SaaS. But that’s it.

They just work in house, and they come from any number of different backgrounds. So they were just oftentimes a warm body.

Like, we need someone to do this. Who do you know? Bring them in, and that was it. So I’m saying that to you not to say SaaS teams are bad because there are a lot of smart people, but to say don’t they’re not necessarily all here, and you’re gonna be, like, looking up like, oh my gosh. How did you get so smart?

They’re just people. They’re just people. Some of them are trying to do a good job. Some of them aren’t.

We go across people like that all the time. So if it’s confidence, you that’s hard because it’s internal and there’s some extrinsic stuff that affects it, but it’s a it’s a work in progress, right, to get there.

I can’t say that much to help you get there outside of it’s really it’s not like the most baller playground out there. There’s a lot of, like oh, so imagine a world where there actually is all sorts of opportunity for somebody who cares enough to do a really great job and is worried that they’re not doing a great enough job.

Every every CMO is like, oh, who is this person? Can I hire them? They really wanna try hard. That’s and if that’s you, now we start to, like, get into the right mindset and then acquiring the skills. But as I’ve said in CSP before, mindsets everything. You already have a bunch of skills. You just are spending them on lawyers.

Not that there’s not good things in that. And he built a whole business on that, and that’s incredible. Not a lot of not many people can do that. So that is incredible, and we honor it a hundred percent entirely.

Now as we’re moving into the next stage of your business, now thank you, lawyers and accountants. I’m ready to move on to a next cool challenge. And that cool challenge is tech companies and software companies, and I get to learn all about that. And I’m gonna respect software companies the way I respected lawyers and accountants and everybody else.

And then I’ll get better and better and better, and they’ll see that.

And what’s fortunate is that this new audience that you’re targeting recognizes high value skills in ways that potentially the our audience are leaving behind didn’t recognize them. So there’s a lot to be optimistic on moving forward with when it comes to SaaS, and I would just, like, chill the voices that say you’re not ready yet or someone knows more than you do.

You might not be ready yet. Someone might know more than you do. That’s literally stopping almost nobody on the planet. Okay. Like, anybody who’s growing, bad voice isn’t stopping them. So coach yourself along the way not to let it stop you.

Yeah. It’s a little scary, but it does make it easier. I mean, you’ve helped eliminate, a market.

You’ve helped me narrow down my choices. So Great.

That’s helpful. We’ll get there. Okay. Cool. Thank you.

Thank you. What did Anders say? If you know more than they do oh, got it. You look good.

If you know more than you if they know more than you do, you learn a lot. That’s true. That’s so true. Yeah.

It depends how you approach it and, yeah, how open you are to learning. Cool. Naomi.

So we spoke last week about doing one landing page, which I still can’t wrap my my mind around for ten thousand. But the only thing so I was thinking, okay. Well, what’s less than one landing page? The only thing I can there there are only two things I can think of. The first one would be, like, one or more AB tests optimizing either the landing page I created or other landing pages that they already have Because if they’ve already series c, series d, then chances are they have twenty to thirty landing pages. Sure.

The other option would be to create a set of ads. The logic being, if you optimize the bottom of the funnel, then you can start to funnel more traffic to those landing pages, not necessarily from Google, but from LinkedIn, and potentially other platforms that they have.

But the it it seems to make it it seems like it would make more sense to stick with landing pages if that’s already the shtick. But if I am creating the landing page to begin with, then chances are I’ve already come with all of my best practices.

So a lot of landing page tests failed just by virtue of them being tests, and sometimes that’s not necessarily to do with the copywriting. Sometimes it’s the campaign strategy isn’t solid or they’re targeting the wrong persona or they create a new feature and actually no one’s searching for that feature because they just created it. And so it’s not really meant to be on Google and, like, there are so many other factors that for that cause tests to fail. And so I would feel uncomfortable charging five thousand a month for something that will work probably forty to fifty percent of the time being realistic if we’re dealing with Google based on what I’ve done before, which I think is is probably a good, a a good percent.

But, when it comes to ads, I just I I have a hard time charging five thousand for, like, four to six ads. Although, maybe that’s also not maybe I should also not be uncomfortable about that price either.

You’re not charging five thousand dollars for four to six ads.

You’re charging for the outcome. And I know that might seem so obvious that you’re like, yeah, you know, Joe. No. But I I’m not paying for code.

I’m paying for the outcome of using this skilled bit of software, and the same is true here. So it really will take some chipping away for you. For me, when I heard you, you were like, okay. Ten there was this weird disconnect of people don’t want to me, it just keeps coming back to you think one landing page is not worth ten thousand dollars.

And you think that you also indicated that you need to keep winning. You need to keep you can always beat your own good copy. I beat my own copy several times. I haven’t I’ve lost against my own copy, but then come back and beat it afterward.

It’s optimization is forever. That’s why CRO agencies have ongoing retainers. They don’t win every month at all, like, ever. And any client who thinks that no. I think this is, like, a a scarcity of money mindset that’s going on here. The sense that there’s not enough money in the world that someone could pay me ten thousand dollars to write a landing page and five thousand dollars a month to optimize the landing page.

But but people do it every single day, lots of times over. So just because you haven’t seen that doesn’t mean it’s not true. So imagine if it is true. Let’s just imagine.

Like, what what’s the point in me beating the strum when so many people have the same reaction? Like, that’s impossible. If it’s actually impossible, I would change the message because I’d be like, nobody believes that lie. What lie will they believe instead?

But it’s not. It’s the reality. You can as a starting I won’t even start looking at a landing page at ten thousand dollars. Like, if I think that’s the budget, I’m not even gonna come in the vicinity of having a conversation with the lead because they can’t afford me.

Some people can’t afford you. The people that you might have in your head who wouldn’t spend ten thousand dollars aren’t actually your audience. You’re selling to the wrong people.

If you have the skills to convert people on a landing page, they’re driving ads in there, ads cost money, they’re driving money in there, and your page is converting them, that’s not a small skill.

If you were fifty nine years old and employed by IBM in their sales department, you would make six hundred thousand dollars a year making that happen. This isn’t this isn’t just copywriting. It’s not just a landing page. It’s like, no. You’re bringing in real new leads for them that they can then close. That’s what that’s what you exist to do. If that’s not worth ten thousand dollars, you are talking to the wrong audience.

Full stop.

So what kind of if we do go with the CRO kind of concept as a retainer, what amount of tests would make set or what kind of package would make sense as a monthly basis?

Yeah. So we’ll get into that. It’s a very good question. We will get into it.

It’s not again, it’s not gonna be about quantity. That’s why today in CSP, we were talking about, KPIs and actual, like, metrics because we’re always just driving for those KPIs. Are we getting more leads in? Are we sure of that because we’re measuring?

Right? That sort of thing, month over month. And so next week, we’re gonna walk through the actual report that’s, like, the spreadsheet that you’ll be documenting in and then the report you present to your client that says, here’s how we grew this month or here’s how we didn’t grow, but this was the hypothesis and this is what we learned. And that’s what you’re being paid for on a monthly basis.

And you will start to see that the reality is five thousand dollars a month to be retained by someone for this work, you will be raising your rates soon because you’ll see I’m getting results for them. I’m reporting it. They weren’t getting these results without me. They’re always happy on my calls where I’m walking them through this stuff.

I should be charging more for it, and that’s where we’ll start to go. Again, I’ve I said this last week too. You know, the old high becomes the new low. You will look back, Naomi, and be like, why was I ever hesitating to charge ten thousand dollars for this when you’re at twenty or fifty thousand dollars for a landing page, which is also a real thing, a real amount of money that clients really do spend on this stuff if you are writing the right kind of landing page.

If it’s an about page, I got nothing. I got no. You gotta switch that. It’s not right.

No. I’m not gonna work on about pages as, like, your thing. Nobody values it enough even if it’s it’s one of the most visited pages on the site. Nobody gives a shit.

But they care about other pages that are measured, so we have to choose the right one and then optimize.

No. No. I’m just talking about Google.

When I say what landing page I mean specifically, Google, campaigns.

Google landing pages and potentially Perfect.

Exactly. Right? Okay. Nice. Thanks, Naomi. Ben, you have a question? Your hand went down.

Yes.

Yes.

I was gonna say so okay. I can go actually, I was gonna say, Naomi, real quick. You know, my my friend who’s an accountant, he kinda changed my mindset last summer because he said, like, I tried fifteen k for a client last summer. He’s like, I thought fifteen k was a lot. He said fifteen k is a rounding error, which kinda, like, like, made me, like, oh, I guess this is a lot to me, but but he’s like, other companies is not. So, but, anyway, you know, so I was thinking, like, the optimization retainer thing, and I’m like, one question I get is how long is the project or, like, how long is, like is it, like, one month or three months? And I’ve kinda wrestled with, like, should I do, like, more than three months or six months, or should there be, like, a fourteen day opt out clause?

You know, so those are kind of things because it’s like I I I mean, in the past, it’s been like, we’re doing this for three months. And then, like, after a month, they’re like, oh, we changed our mind. We’re gonna do the fourteen day opt out clause. And then, like Oh. If they you know?

Were you doing the month to month on oh, shoot. We just lost somebody. Were you what were you doing month to month for?

It was a retainer, or it was a project broken down into It was a retainer for specific deliverables.

And then, For deliverables. Yeah.

So Yeah. Not for like, some companies or agencies will do, like like, one one year.

I mean, that’s really long, but I just wasn’t sure, like, what a good practice is.

Yeah.

It’s good to go into it with them saying, there’s there’s no end date. They should have their both feet in for a year. So you do you stand the project up. You stand that up in a month, ideally.

So you show them, hey. I can work fast. I can get cool stuff done. You all liked what I created for you, and now we’re ready to optimize it.

And at least a year. Right? You will you will never get to a if you do, that’s weird. But you’ll in ninety nine percent of cases, never get to a hundred percent conversion rate, which means there’s always room to improve.

It won’t mean you’ll just keep rewriting the headline.

It might mean that we’ve tried this for four months now, and it really feels like we’re ignoring this one segment here. Let’s dig into a strategy on what to do about that segment that’s coming to this page. Like, let’s and that’s yours to drive. You can do that.

It doesn’t mean you will. But as you aim to increase conversion rates or whatever their success metric is, as you aim to do that, there are different things that come up. And you’ll see those things come up, and you’ll guide them through that. But it’s not I think the reason a lot of people cancel, retainers that are like, here are the deliverables we’re going to give you over time is because they’re not interested in deliverables.

Deliverables make work.

I used to hand me over a set of emails, and now I have to go implement the emails, QA the emails, measure them month after month. Like, no. And it there are a lot of busy, busy marketers who just don’t have time for that versus you coming in and saying, k. I am handing off these emails. You are implementing them. I’m here for QA because I wanna make sure that it’s it’s it’s, like, set up properly. And then I am going to measure it every single month and optimize it every single month based on how it’s performing.

And you will see at the end of each month when I present the results to you what we’ve done and what the outcome was. And then you’ll also be able to chat with us about what we should try next month, but we’ll come to the table with for what’s next, and we’ll guide that conversation. However, you’re not removed from it, but most of them, by the time they see you getting results, they’re like, cool. This is great.

What’s next? And that’s really where you want to be, and that’s where you absolutely can be.

But Okay.

This is retainer based. Like, it’s performance measure each time, not did I do the thing or didn’t I do a thing.

Got it. Okay. Okay. That makes sense. And kind of, like, laid the in the beginning of, like, this is a year long like, the goal is to get you in a year where we wanna, yeah, work together. Okay.

Yeah. So stick with me month after month. There’s gonna be some months that conversion tanks, but we’ll have good ideas as to why conversion tanked, and we’re here to then implement fixes for that if that happens. Some months are are harder than others, but other months are gonna be, like, gangbusters. It’s gonna be just badass.

And once you’re talking them through that and they’re seeing that that’s how marketing works and that a specialist has control of this.

That’s more desirable.

Yeah. Okay. Okay. Wanna work with good people. It’s like Yeah. Ultimately all of it. Right?

Just keep doing good work for me then.

Cool. Alright. Awesome. Andrew.

Hey.

So I guess where where I am now so, b two b SaaS web copy has been my bread and butter for several years now. And, actually, after our last call, I upped the rates a little bit, got a verbal yes, and it was like another one of those. Okay. Yep. New new normal.

But where I am now is I have to decide if that’s where I want to stay and just kind of keep doubling down on web copy, or do I want to pivot into something related but a little different?

I actually put in the chat, and a lot of people were responding and had some good conversations, but in Slack, about some of the challenges with web copy, Caroline, I know that you you had a lot to say as well about about that.

So, yeah, just a lot of different sort of challenges that, like, web copy is just there there seems to be this pressure to they always wanna sprawl. They never my clients always wanna sprawl. They don’t wanna keep working on the same pages over and over. Mhmm. I do have some experience working with companies where we’re doing, basically just Google search ads and landing pages.

And I like that because it’s always measured very carefully, and it seems like it would lend itself much better to this kind of thing that we’re talking about with the retainer than what I have been doing, which is just, you know, as you said, it’s like every project is just They’re not always the same amount of work.

Like, it’s just some trading.

Right? Every time it’s like, okay. I gotta figure out this whole part of their product, and it’s just takes so much to learn all of the inside learn the product inside out, the audience, all of that. So I guess my first question to you is, you know, how much do I you know, should I sort of make the leap to kind of web copy is the old way for me and landing pages and ads are the new way, or is that do I have to choose between those things or or what?

Yeah. That’s a good question.

I having also had a background in writing websites, I wouldn’t I wouldn’t make them a focus right now if you want retainers. If you wanna just build an agency out of big projects, then sure. Then you could you could do that. You could sell full websites for a lot of money.

The more you charge, the more people are typically involved, etcetera. You already know that could be a total complete nightmare. Right? So, yeah.

Yeah. So I wouldn’t I wouldn’t recommend that you do unless you are looking to build a CRO agency.

But even then, if you’re doing that, they don’t just want you on the website. They’ve got they want you everywhere. And you wanna be everywhere because they’re losing money everywhere, and you’re measured on that. So, yeah, landing pages and ads, if you’re connecting those two together, like, then you’re looking at a funnel. So as long as they’re always together, then you can all you can systematize it in such a way that it’s always the same to a point for you and whoever you hire. So I would say, yeah.

Ads anywhere that there’s, like, this real moment of conversion is a really good place to, to focus.

Yeah. And And the pain and the pain from the high cost per lead as well.

So Yes.

Exactly. Yeah. Yeah. Nope.

In my experience and it’s always changing. Right? The world is always changing. But in my experience, people who have, budget for ads are just looking for ways to get more. So if you can come in and say, I’ll do this every month and make you look better every month.

Yes, please.

Can I essentially offer a middle ground suggestion?

Yes, sir.

So when I was at Monday, monday dot com Mhmm. I was on all of the acquisition pages, and my friend was on the website. So she was always doing copywriting for the website, but they mostly focused on testing, like, the high traffic areas. So they tested the pricing page over and over and over again, and they tested the home page over and over and over again, and they tested, like, a couple of, like, the main product pages over and over and over. But if you have a company that has as much traffic as monday dot com, then testing those, like, high real estate pages can be really, really effective. And they’d be like, yeah. We got three percent improvement in conversion rate.

Right.

That’s amazing. But, like, it was amazing. Right? Yes. Because that’s, like, that’s, like, a big deal.

Yep. So there could be, like, a middle ground as opposed to, like, just doing Google landing pages, which is great, but it’s, like, a very different kind of thing. Yeah.

Then there might actually be demand because, like, right, she was in house, and that was all she did. And I’m sure she was making, like, seventy, eighty, ninety thousand dollars a year.

So you might be able to find, like, a middle ground there because those are, like, conversion focus pages.

Sure. Sure. Yep. Cool. I appreciate that. Thanks.

Yeah. Love it. Thanks, Naomi. Awesome. Andrew, that’s exciting.

Bit of a change.

Change can be fun.

Caroline.

So based on this conversation, I’m starting to think that maybe landing pages is something that I should be thinking about as well.

My question for you is, based on your experience, is there space or any demand for someone with copywriting and web design skills for landing pages?

Yes.

Yeah. I think that you’ll have to choose, which is, like, your lead strength.

It depends on your audience as well. So are you working with we’ve talked a bit about your audience and how that might be shifting for you.

Yes. So assuming that I shift into b to b sets.

Yeah. Then they probably do have a designer already, but they’ll appreciate, that you, have a design eye and a design background. But I wouldn’t necessarily Yeah.

I wouldn’t make that the focus unless that’s your focus for for some like, if you wanted to to do that as your focus.

Yeah.

I’m trying not to make it my focus, but it just keeps coming back.

Like, I was ready to almost walk away from it, but, you know, I came to the realization that maybe there’s still value.

Well, this is also when I was thinking about, keeping my staying within my professional services, with those clients. Yeah.

And so I thought maybe I should instead of trying to ditch my primary or core skill, Maybe, you know, keeping it around a little bit longer.

But if I’m moving into this other space Mhmm.

I don’t yeah. I am not I’m finding it difficult to imagine a world where I would be using both.

Yeah.

I know it’s hard to let go of skills that you have.

Oh, okay. I don’t mind. Well Then let it go. Honestly, I would I mean, I I’m not your therapist, but I would cut cut it loose.

Okay. Thanks very much. Design skills, you’ve been amazing. I found something cooler that I wanna do that I’m more excited about.

Come back around and visit me in five years, design skills.

Okay. Coffee with you, but I’m not gonna focus anymore.

Okay. Just personify it and just send it out.

Send it out to see. Someone else will find it and have a wonderful life as a designer with it.

But Okay.

So the risk for me is allowing it to be a crutch because it is something that I can easily fall back on.

And whatever you fall back on makes it impossible to specialize. You will always be pulling back. Right? And you gotta go in.

You gotta go all in on it. And anybody out there who says, no. You can kinda dip your toes in two different things. Like, you won’t find anybody saying that.

If they say it, they won’t say it for long because you really can’t gotta go all in on the thing. Yeah.

Yeah. This is really helpful too because I was having trouble bridging the gap between what I wanna do today, you know, my ten ten k offer and, optimization package and where I want to be in the future, like, with my, you know, area of special specialization or, like, the thing that I wanna be known for, I’m like, I can’t I I don’t think I can I I can’t be known for websites in a week? Oh, I don’t know. Like, that doesn’t seem like something that I it didn’t didn’t seem realistic.

Good.

But it feels commoditized. Yeah.

Yeah. It just didn’t feel right. And so Yeah. Yeah. I’m like, that’s not what I wanna be known for.

I can do this today, but that’s not what I wanna be known for. So I was really struggling to bridge that gap between today and where I wanna be. So this is helpful. The shedding is helpful.

So now I feel like I’m back to square one a little bit.

But You know, reinvention is fun.

Because it’s not square one because you have so much experience and so much growth that you have now even if you’re shifting some things.

But I like it. Yeah. You’re right.

How much you still have. Yeah. Exactly.

Cool. I’m excited for you, and we’ll just temper it. Right? If it feels weird or panicky at any moment, just, like, breathe through it. We can shift. We wanna focus.

But it’s okay. We can come back and revisit things, and we’ll get to the right answer.

Cool. Alright.

This week’s training. Are we ready to dive in? We need to because, not just because of much time we do and do not have, but you should be seeing my screen right now. Week two, your standardized offer.

What we’ve been talking about, this is being recorded, just as a heads up in case you’re wondering. Okay. So we’re building on last week’s work. We make this a little bit bigger depending on what size thing you’re on.

I’m just in Canva here. It’s easier than presenting in PDF, which is always really weird.

So, yeah, we’re building on your standardized offer, whatever you identified last, week. So if you didn’t do the work, go finish the work because you’re gonna get left behind otherwise.

It sounds like everybody mostly did. Cool. What will you charge for it? You identified that last week. In most cases, it’ll be ten k.

One of the things that we didn’t get to so some of you are not, let me just make sure you’re seeing the right thing now. Yeah. Some of you are in copy school crow and never saw our thousand dollar a day workshop, or some of you joined the intensive freelancing and also never saw a thousand day workshop. In fact, everybody in here did not see our thousand dollar a day workshop unless you’ve seen it since because we just launched it last Tuesday.

But in that workshop, I talk about the point of doing this authoritative offer that breaks down into your offer, the standardized offer, and retainer, both which are directly tied to what you’re building your authority on. So it’s part of an ownable thing. You worked on that last week too. Every week, we’ll be chipping away at it more until after eight weeks, we get to a place where you’re like, okay.

I feel really, really good about this. So remember, it’s the start of week two. If you’re feeling like there’s a lot that’s up in the air or you like taking your business down to the studs and it makes you uncomfortable, don’t worry. We’re just we’re just starting.

We’ll get to a good place. You’ll feel great about it.

So authoritative offer ideas. We talked a bit about this last week.

But things like it’s just whatever you can optimize in your retainer later. So on welcome automation, life cycle emails, cold emails, and evergreen sales page, a SaaS pricing page, things that can be optimized but that are contained. Okay?

You want to this is a really quick overview of what we went through in that workshop.

If you haven’t seen the workshop just on Instagram, anything, I think you can just, like, comment workshop and you’ll get it right away.

But point is, this will help you better understand the why behind what we’re talking about today and going forward next week as well with the retainer. So we’re not gonna get too much into what to do or how sell by chat is going to help you. We’re gonna talk more about that later. What we really wanna talk about are these two offers.

Right? You have the standardized project and then this optimization retainer. One is outright cash. The other is monthly recurring revenue.

One is a thing that’s produced. The other is optimizing the thing that was produced. There are exceptions, and that’s what we’re here to talk about. So, Jess, with seasonal campaigns, it might not be as simple as what we’re looking at, but we’ll we’ll get there and get through it.

And if you don’t know where to start, start with email because email is really, really easy and in high demand.

SMS is also good. Sell by chat is an a forever optimizable thing. If you’re like, I have no idea what to do, be a ManyChat expert. Be a Drift expert. There’s lots of things you can do. Point is you have to stand something up, and then you have to optimize it. Now if you were to sell two of these standardized projects a month, which if you’re not selling one, can sound like a lot, but suspend disbelief is entirely possible.

And then one of those clients every month, not both, you might not win over everybody. Maybe you will. But if at least one says yes to the upsell, that’s where you can make really good money. So this is what we walk them through with ten thousand dollars, for two projects.

The one in the blue says yes to, the next month, and now we’re looking at, again, you sell two more the next month and have the monthly recurring revenue. This is where we start to get into, good money. Right? So again and again, it keeps going and going, and you can lose retainer gigs.

You cannot close projects. You can do all sorts of things and still end up with really good money. That’s why we’re here. That’s why we’re specializing.

That’s what we’re doing. When it comes time to deliver on all of these retainers, you need to be able to outsource that to somebody who knows, who can be trained on it. So you have to have systems in place. You have to have templates, processes, ways of doing things.

I’ve talked in Coffee School Pro about the E Myth revisited where his take and it doesn’t mean it has to be a hundred percent true for you, but it’s a good idea.

His take is that McDonald’s, one of the earliest billionaire, billion dollar companies ever, back when a billion was a lot, got there with teenagers working for them largely. Teenagers run most McDonald’s.

They can do it so well because of all the systems that are in place, and there are no questions about everything. There’s a fixed menu. You don’t come up with new things. Someone doesn’t come up and say, hey.

What can you throw on a piece of chicken for me? It’s like, that’s not a thing. Look at the menu. It’s right above my head.

What would you like from the menu? That’s what we’re trying to do. Right? So that we can hand our work off to somebody that we can train so that we have the leverage we need to free ourselves from the minutiae of our business where even if it feels exciting to you now, in three years, it’ll feel taxing.

You won’t love it anymore. You’ll You’ll say, how do I get out? How do I work on growing this instead? That’s where we wanna get.

Okay? So this is the objective. This is why we’re spending time getting you to a place where you say this is my standardized offer. This is what I do.

It’s my Big Mac on my menu, and it’s the only thing I sell, and then, obviously, you can’t optimize a Big Mac. I don’t know. I don’t eat at McDonald’s, but I get you get the analogy. I know that McDonald’s exists and that they have a Big Mac.

Point is there’s a standard offer there, and in your case, there’s something to keep selling every month.

And that’s what we’re working on. Okay? Oh, wait. This is back to that.

Okay. Cool.

So we’re gonna build on last week’s work where we can make sure this is really important. Your clients need to see value on delivery of that standardized offer. They need to see the value of continued optimization.

It’s not always gonna be right in front of you how to do this. We’re gonna do the work to get there, though. You can standardize it up to a little more than sixty percent. It can be completed in five to six business days.

That means you can block off two weeks a month to work on your standardized offer on delivering it. It doesn’t mean you will always be the one doing that. That was keep that in mind. And an average person can be trained to do this work well with little oversight.

It’s hard to know.

You can look at that and go like, I don’t know what Johnson brought up the other day.

I’ve never trained people. I’ve never had employees. I don’t know.

And the question then is, okay. Well, could someone you know could you train someone you know on doing this? That’s what we wanna get to. Alright?

So by the end of this week, not the end of today’s class, which is in fourteen minutes, but the end of this week, we want this filled in, and you might already be well on the way there. So we wanna know what the steps are, the parts of your standardized offer, and that’s gonna be the process that you follow, three steps or four steps, not seven steps. It’s too many steps. We need three or four steps max, and then we need to know what happens importantly in each step.

Not each step can be measured. If we look at the conversion copywriting process, which is basically three parts, in the first step, it’s all research and discovery. There’s not much we can do there to optimize for leads or money. It’s just not part of it, so we wouldn’t worry about that.

But there are times when you can measure the output of what you’ve done. Step two and three, you can measure how is it working, etcetera. And then there is no step four in the case of a conversion copywriting process unless you break up research and discovery into two things with strategy. Doesn’t matter.

Anyway, point is we’re gonna go through and get you to a place where you understand what your process looks like. Anybody who’s in Coffee School Pro has already given really good thought to their diagnostic, and that’s going to help you a lot.

Here, if you’re not in Copy School Pro, you’re in the intensive freelancing, and you finish this off and want to know more about the diagnostic and things you already know, the CopySchool Pro is an opportunity at the end of this. Okay. End of week, you’re going to say what SOPs you’re going to create, what things you’re going to create to help you take this standardized offer and standardize it. So it’s not just an offer like, oh, imagine if we standardized it. Nope. We’re gonna do that work. And when you’re gonna give yourself a deadline, I believe strongly that every copywriter in the room right now loves deadlines, not the sound they make as they go whooshing by, the real deadline.

And is there anybody that you might hire and train to do this work?

And when would that happen? So that requires that you imagine a world where you are selling the ten thousand dollar landing page project and the five thousand dollar project.

How long could you go on doing that and delivering really good work for a client for clients without bringing somebody on board to take off a lot of the work. Next week will help you fill this in a little more. So if you’re like, I don’t know, don’t worry too much. Next week, we’ll really, really dig into, the retainer stuff where I’ll show you SOPs and timelines and everything like that. But for now, this is where you wanna end the week having this sorted out.

Sorry. There’s always cat fur. There’s always cat fur floating through my house. Like, what’s that cat fur?

There’s a cat down here, so that’s probably why. Alright. So what we wanna do is map out that three or four step process. So if you’ve already printed this out this week, I decided not to just keep holding, pieces of paper up for you, but to share this instead.

You’ll want to have this printed out or have a piece of paper and just draw out your process. If you already know it, that’s cool. Document it.

And you can be doing that while I’m talking or you can do it after the fact.

We don’t have a ton of time right now to sit here, and I’m not worried about time, but I am respectful of everybody else’s time. Here’s an example of a process, the conversion copywriting process. So if I was to draw this out, and it’s meant to look like I drew it out.

If I were to draw it out, I would, like, mark down okay. Well, there’s research and discovery, then we move into writing and editing. Wireframing is there. Does wireframing need to be on its own?

No. Because it’s part of it. Does editing come first? You’d be documenting all this stuff.

Where does analysis go? And then I have it fits under research and discovery, validation, and experimentation.

Should I break this up further? What’s the point of breaking it up further? How will that help? If it will help, do it, but try not to get it to anything larger than four steps in a process.

Anything bigger is just it’s just it’s just a lot. Once you have to go and start systematizing, by the time you’re done, state one, you’re like, oh, what was I thinking with seven parts of this? So just keep it as controlled as you can. Now here’s another example.

If it was a funnel audit and reports, so fine. I’ll map the full funnel. Once I’ve, like, documented all the things that I do, I end up realizing that I start by mapping the full funnel, and then it looks like I do all of this stuff at the next stage that includes analyzing everything. So this is probably the analysis stage.

Then there’s gonna be a gap analysis. Is that part of that? I don’t know. You’re allowed to work through and think through your parts here.

Right? You don’t have to just, like, say this is exactly how and I know it to be true, and then next week go, oh, shit. I forgot to think about that. So let yourself think about it right now, and then you can always come up with your process at the end.

But the point is we wanna get to a place where you have your process mapped out. In a lot of cases, you’re already good on this. Right? You already know what your basic process is.

You might just have to change it, when it comes to this more specific thing that you’re doing. So although most of us are following the conversion copywriting process, when you’re looking at the specific standardized offer that you have, if it’s, again, landing pages, how does that process get modified to work specifically on landing pages, on building up the landing page and optimizing it? And you might get to a place where you’re like, it’s not about starting with research and discovery. This happens first, and then this happens, and then this happens.

And research and discovery is like a small part of this stage, and, like, we have to just, like, figure out how it fits in. That’s okay. That’s totally fine. Just try to make it as specific as you can for a process for your standardized offer knowing that the objective is to systematize.

So you’ll fill this in with each step. So step one, how it get how it gets measured. We talked about this in today’s Copy School Pro session.

Not to not to give too much fomo for anybody who didn’t attend that, but we’ll talk about it some more anyway. But in this case, just just how do they measure step one? Is it measured at all? Is it leads, or is it revenue custom or number of customers, etcetera?

So go through, take what you mapped out here, fill it in here, and then this is the part where the real work comes in. And I would like you to get this done in time for our Thursday or Friday. I can’t remember which one it is this week. Meeting.

So I want you to show up to every meeting, but I would prefer you to show up prepared to have a really good discussion. So block out time, an hour or two, tomorrow night, tonight, right now, whatever it is, to really document every single thing that happens in each of these steps. This isn’t busy hands work. This is the beginning of you creating systems, templates, tools, processes to be able to give yourself leverage so you have more freedom in life. So it’s time really well spent.

So you’ll go through and fill this in. There’s an example below.

If I were to and the again, the example here for is for conversion copywriting because everybody in the room knows what it is. It doesn’t mean it’s your process.

Again, yours is specific to your standardized offer, which is, of course, also true for your retainer and then this and then this. Oh, I forgot to go back and add this, etcetera. But we’re really going through and spending some time. This has continued.

We’re still going on that step. Really spending time to think through what I do. You don’t have to type it out if you don’t want to. If you’re like, AI can do this.

I don’t give a crap. As long as you end up at a place where you have a really solid list that, isn’t guessed at, and that’s where AI just, like, be careful.

But I don’t know. Whatever you do whatever you do to get there, do what you gotta do to get there. But then you’re gonna go through and delete everything that isn’t critical. So if it’s not critical, we get rid of it. Do I need to have interviews with key team members?

Maybe I don’t. Maybe to standardize this thing, I could give that up. I do wanna have a heuristic analysis. I do wanna interview, founders. I do need research questions.

I think I need do I need a one question survey for new leads and customers? You can start asking yourself that, and the more you leave on here, the harder it is to systematize.

But don’t also madly chop away at it either because you can’t end the day with, like, I whittled my process down to two things.

Probably need more than two things if you’re gonna be an expert in the thing. But go through and try to just eliminate, just, like, cut everything that isn’t critical, and then you’re gonna repeat that for every step that you have. And I’ve got examples for each of those steps as well so you can see what you might do there, and that will bring you to the optional step four as well. You’ll wanna also say what’s needed for that step to work.

So you go back over the list that you have, that you put together, and say, okay. For me to, be able to interview founders, I need a meeting template. So it’s the agenda for the founder interview. I need an email template that I or a Slack or both, okay, that I always send out to founders to say, hey.

Can we book a time? I need a Calendly link so that they can easily book a time, or I need and then you, like, go through it and really figure it out. Again, time well spent in order to get to a place where you can have good systems in place to get your butt out of working in the business and instead the goal of working on the business, which wraps up at the very end with what you’re going to need then to deliver your standardized offer. You can see that there’s gonna be a lot of thinking on the page.

I once had to fill in seventy two questions. Like, I had to answer seventy two long answer questions.

You don’t have to do that.

So, hey, look at the bright side. You don’t have to answer seventy two questions. You just have to work through how you work, document it, strike out everything that doesn’t have to be part of your project, or in turn then your retainer, but just worry about the standardized offer. We’ll adjust things next week for the retainer, and you wanna document people.

Include yourself on here. I am needed. Got it. Hopefully, not needed.

If you have a VA or you have an assistant or you have somebody you’re working with, if you need more lines, just, like, start writing in more people if you have them or if you need them. What processes? What documentation do you need in place for this to work? What templates?

What scripts do you need in place? And what software or hardware tools do you need in place? So it might be I need a new webcam for some reason. I don’t know.

I don’t know what your process is. So maybe you throw that in there and you say, I need it. And then you know, and you can look at the needed list and make sense of what to do next, and start prioritizing. We’re not going to prioritize or do anything more than document what you need to deliver your standardized offer.

That’s how you’re going to end the work. Sorry. I’m scrolling up fast. I know that can be nauseating to watch.

And then this is what you’ll have filled in because you did all the other work. You’ll have this filled in for our conversation later this week about exactly this thing.

Questions?

Are you ready? Are you so excited to document all that you do?

Yeah.

Writing stuff down.

That’s where the next that if you’re working with an in house designer, that person is not listed under people I need.

That’s just, like, a given because they weren’t there.

If it’s somebody on your payroll or that you’re paying, then it’s a person you need. If it’s their internal people, that’s not you don’t have to document that.

Cool. Awesome.

Alright. Yeah. That’s a good clarification. Totally.

Okay. Anything else?

No?

Alright.

Good. Then I will let you go with one minute remaining.

The replay will be posted in the private Slack group.

Uh-oh. Caroline, did you just chat something in the last minute?

Yeah. It will be challenging slash interesting for you, but bring it up, and we’ll talk about it. Cool? Make an educated guess.

I think you’ll get there. Definitely. Alright. Cool, y’all. I’m stoked about this. Remember, next week is retainer stuff, so you need to have this in good shape or else next week is going to be confusing.

Cool?

Alright. See you later this week. Bye y’all. Bye. Thanks.

Resources

Resources

Transcript

So we’re building on specializing from last week. Does anybody have anything they wanna bring up as we get into this week talking about your standardized offer.

It’s based on what you’re specializing in and can build authority around.

You don’t have to. I just wanna open up in case somebody wants to mention something.

Cool?

Can I ask you what be easier?

Oh, sorry, Adnan. Go ahead.

Oh, go ahead. Jessica, you were. Go ahead.

All I was gonna say is should this be easier, and am I over complicating it? Because I feel like I’m just like No.

I don’t know. This is hard.

To kinda because I am struggling. I’m on the struggle bus as well.

Yeah. Okay.

That makes me feel better, Caroline. Thank you. Yeah. No.

The I didn’t jump in right away because I’m like, how do I make this concise?

And now was that your question or comment?

So I I feel the same as well. But, my question was in terms of the ICP. Mhmm. Now for for a company to be able to afford, the service and pay ten thousand dollars, right, whatever that service is, how many employees are we sort of aiming for, and what sort of annual revenue should be, like, our minimum?

It depends.

So if you’re using you’re using the TAM calculator Yeah.

Total addressable market? K. Cool.

It will depend. Right? So and what I want you to be factoring in is not just the ten thousand dollar project, but also five thousand dollars a month for x period of time. So you’re likely looking at they need to have fifty thousand dollars available to spend on this.

Otherwise, they’re not your market. If they don’t have the money, they also will not see it as an expense, but they don’t see marketing as an expense unless it’s done wrong, and then it’s very expensive.

So number of employees, it really like, the total addressable market calculator is good if you are trying to, eliminate ideas. It can be really useful. Sorry, Caroline.

Oh, are you trying to eliminate? Is that what you’re saying?

No.

I was actually trying to raise my hand to be the next Oh, okay.

Sorry. Okay. Cool.

I won’t look. I’ll, like, stare ahead.

Okay. So if you’re trying to eliminate options or validate that you’ve chosen a good one, then that that calculator is very, very useful. It’s not necessarily going to help you find the right audience, but if you have an idea, you can say, hey. What are the chances they have money to spend on this?

So you can go through and say, okay. I want b two b in fintech, which could just include tech tech. So I’m gonna check off both those boxes. They have to be able to afford fifty thousand dollars and then just leave everything else unchecked.

And then it’ll give you, like, a really big list versus if you try to narrow it down a lot, and it’ll just give you, like, there are four companies. You’re like, oh, I’m gonna need more than four, or I have to charge a lot, which they just said they can for it. So there’s that. So, I don’t the reason that I don’t know is because HubSpot has a huge team, but might not have money for this.

Whereas Facebook has a huge team and might have money for this. So it’s really hard to say based on team size.

Okay.

It’s just hard to say.

It doesn’t mean it’s impossible to get there, but it’s really hard to say. Yeah.

So then it will depend on so even the revenue figures will be very arbitrary in that in that case.

Revenue is a better number to go with, than number of employees.

So you could say they need to be making at least fifty million dollars a year, or they’re just gonna be too nickel and dime y with stuff.

Right.

They need to be series b, not planning on doing a series c so that they’re not panicked about a down round or something. Right? So you’re basically trying to gauge who has money to spend on this, who values it, and isn’t going to, spend all of their time going, well, what did you do for us this week? Well, what did you do for us this week?

That’s what you wanna avoid. And that’s avoidable. And that’s why it’s hard, Jessica, when you’re like, why is this hard? And, Caroline, you too.

Because most of the work that we do isn’t in optimization.

Most of the work all of us get hired for is a one and done thing. But then you’re always selling projects. That’s very hard. It’s also hard to systematize, because you get one client in, you wanna keep them, but they don’t keep hiring you for the same thing unless it’s performance of that thing.

They’re like, do our website. Now do our email. Hey. We’ve got these ads. Do you do ads?

Hey. Our sales team needs help, and now you’re like, I don’t have any systems for this. It’s always gotta be me. What should I do?

And someone says, I’ll pay you two hundred thousand dollars to come in house, and you’re like, sold. And then you left, and now you’re two years later, you’re upset that you gave in that easily. So we don’t have naturally retainable work, but we do have skills that build on each other and we go, oh, I guessed at that. I can make that better.

I guessed at that. I can do this instead. Or, hey. That’s working. Why is that working?

Can we do more of that somewhere else?

That’s that copywriters can do all day long. So we just have to find the performance to measure again and again and again. So it’s hard, but it’s not impossible.

But that’s why email is so good and ads are so good and anything that’s evergreen and new people are coming through it all the time is good, which sounds like a website, but that’s hard. It’s easy, but it’s also hard. And you then are in competition with conversion rate consultancies, like CRO consultancies who are all about that stuff.

So much to think about, but that’s what we’re here for.

Doing the work. Caroline?

Okay.

So I think well, where I’ve landed with my specialization is, basically writing websites writing websites and web design and strategic planning.

My my offer will be a website in a week for ten k.

And currently, I serve the professional services market, you know, like lawyers, people in the medical profession, consultants.

I can conceive like, I can imagine somebody wanting to pay ten k for a website fast.

Yeah. Where I where I struggle is, so I was going through your, like, checklist of how to, like, vet whether or not someone would make a good whether it’s like, my audience is a good audience, and I’m not sure that my audience would be willing to pay five k a month to optimize. Yeah.

You know, they might pay me you know, they might hire me to do one off things. Mhmm. But, I can’t see them wanting to hire me on a month to month basis. Does that mean I should switch audiences?

Yes.

Okay.

I know it’s like, oh, I was hoping you wouldn’t say that. Nah. Yeah.

Well, I mean Accountants.

Look. Not that they’re not fine to work with and individually good people.

Yeah. Revenue. They have not mark they’re not in biz they’re like their professional services are very hard to sell as business owners.

They’re not they didn’t go into it to be a business owner. There are rare cases, but sorry. Go ahead, Caroline.

So the challenge is, then I have you know, I would love to be in the, you know, b to b SaaS space. Yeah. I just don’t know that I have the skills or the, experience to break into or, you know, to do that work. So What do you think you’re lacking?

I’m not sure because I haven’t done enough to know that I can So you’re lacking knowledge of what’s expected in the first place?

No. That I don’t I think, confidence in my ability to do a good job.

Yeah.

Which, I mean, I don’t even know why I wrote it down.

It’s like the answer everybody has.

Why that I just have a sticker. It’s confidence, isn’t it? Hold up a sign. Confidence. Right? Confidence.

Yeah. No. It’s, have you ever worked in SaaS?

Well, I mean, you mean, have I had a client or have I Have you ever been in an organization that is a SaaS organization?

No. Yeah. Yeah. That’s why you don’t have the confidence. I do not mean to throw SaaS marketers and their teams under the bus, but they’re not all gems, Caroline.

They’re not all at the top of their game. So, I wouldn’t worry too much about I haven’t done this enough, and I have names going through my head right now that, like, if you knew the names, you don’t know these people. They’re just, like, people who are hired by SaaS. But that’s it.

They just work in house, and they come from any number of different backgrounds. So they were just oftentimes a warm body.

Like, we need someone to do this. Who do you know? Bring them in, and that was it. So I’m saying that to you not to say SaaS teams are bad because there are a lot of smart people, but to say don’t they’re not necessarily all here, and you’re gonna be, like, looking up like, oh my gosh. How did you get so smart?

They’re just people. They’re just people. Some of them are trying to do a good job. Some of them aren’t.

We go across people like that all the time. So if it’s confidence, you that’s hard because it’s internal and there’s some extrinsic stuff that affects it, but it’s a it’s a work in progress, right, to get there.

I can’t say that much to help you get there outside of it’s really it’s not like the most baller playground out there. There’s a lot of, like oh, so imagine a world where there actually is all sorts of opportunity for somebody who cares enough to do a really great job and is worried that they’re not doing a great enough job.

Every every CMO is like, oh, who is this person? Can I hire them? They really wanna try hard. That’s and if that’s you, now we start to, like, get into the right mindset and then acquiring the skills. But as I’ve said in CSP before, mindsets everything. You already have a bunch of skills. You just are spending them on lawyers.

Not that there’s not good things in that. And he built a whole business on that, and that’s incredible. Not a lot of not many people can do that. So that is incredible, and we honor it a hundred percent entirely.

Now as we’re moving into the next stage of your business, now thank you, lawyers and accountants. I’m ready to move on to a next cool challenge. And that cool challenge is tech companies and software companies, and I get to learn all about that. And I’m gonna respect software companies the way I respected lawyers and accountants and everybody else.

And then I’ll get better and better and better, and they’ll see that.

And what’s fortunate is that this new audience that you’re targeting recognizes high value skills in ways that potentially the our audience are leaving behind didn’t recognize them. So there’s a lot to be optimistic on moving forward with when it comes to SaaS, and I would just, like, chill the voices that say you’re not ready yet or someone knows more than you do.

You might not be ready yet. Someone might know more than you do. That’s literally stopping almost nobody on the planet. Okay. Like, anybody who’s growing, bad voice isn’t stopping them. So coach yourself along the way not to let it stop you.

Yeah. It’s a little scary, but it does make it easier. I mean, you’ve helped eliminate, a market.

You’ve helped me narrow down my choices. So Great.

That’s helpful. We’ll get there. Okay. Cool. Thank you.

Thank you. What did Anders say? If you know more than they do oh, got it. You look good.

If you know more than you if they know more than you do, you learn a lot. That’s true. That’s so true. Yeah.

It depends how you approach it and, yeah, how open you are to learning. Cool. Naomi.

So we spoke last week about doing one landing page, which I still can’t wrap my my mind around for ten thousand. But the only thing so I was thinking, okay. Well, what’s less than one landing page? The only thing I can there there are only two things I can think of. The first one would be, like, one or more AB tests optimizing either the landing page I created or other landing pages that they already have Because if they’ve already series c, series d, then chances are they have twenty to thirty landing pages. Sure.

The other option would be to create a set of ads. The logic being, if you optimize the bottom of the funnel, then you can start to funnel more traffic to those landing pages, not necessarily from Google, but from LinkedIn, and potentially other platforms that they have.

But the it it seems to make it it seems like it would make more sense to stick with landing pages if that’s already the shtick. But if I am creating the landing page to begin with, then chances are I’ve already come with all of my best practices.

So a lot of landing page tests failed just by virtue of them being tests, and sometimes that’s not necessarily to do with the copywriting. Sometimes it’s the campaign strategy isn’t solid or they’re targeting the wrong persona or they create a new feature and actually no one’s searching for that feature because they just created it. And so it’s not really meant to be on Google and, like, there are so many other factors that for that cause tests to fail. And so I would feel uncomfortable charging five thousand a month for something that will work probably forty to fifty percent of the time being realistic if we’re dealing with Google based on what I’ve done before, which I think is is probably a good, a a good percent.

But, when it comes to ads, I just I I have a hard time charging five thousand for, like, four to six ads. Although, maybe that’s also not maybe I should also not be uncomfortable about that price either.

You’re not charging five thousand dollars for four to six ads.

You’re charging for the outcome. And I know that might seem so obvious that you’re like, yeah, you know, Joe. No. But I I’m not paying for code.

I’m paying for the outcome of using this skilled bit of software, and the same is true here. So it really will take some chipping away for you. For me, when I heard you, you were like, okay. Ten there was this weird disconnect of people don’t want to me, it just keeps coming back to you think one landing page is not worth ten thousand dollars.

And you think that you also indicated that you need to keep winning. You need to keep you can always beat your own good copy. I beat my own copy several times. I haven’t I’ve lost against my own copy, but then come back and beat it afterward.

It’s optimization is forever. That’s why CRO agencies have ongoing retainers. They don’t win every month at all, like, ever. And any client who thinks that no. I think this is, like, a a scarcity of money mindset that’s going on here. The sense that there’s not enough money in the world that someone could pay me ten thousand dollars to write a landing page and five thousand dollars a month to optimize the landing page.

But but people do it every single day, lots of times over. So just because you haven’t seen that doesn’t mean it’s not true. So imagine if it is true. Let’s just imagine.

Like, what what’s the point in me beating the strum when so many people have the same reaction? Like, that’s impossible. If it’s actually impossible, I would change the message because I’d be like, nobody believes that lie. What lie will they believe instead?

But it’s not. It’s the reality. You can as a starting I won’t even start looking at a landing page at ten thousand dollars. Like, if I think that’s the budget, I’m not even gonna come in the vicinity of having a conversation with the lead because they can’t afford me.

Some people can’t afford you. The people that you might have in your head who wouldn’t spend ten thousand dollars aren’t actually your audience. You’re selling to the wrong people.

If you have the skills to convert people on a landing page, they’re driving ads in there, ads cost money, they’re driving money in there, and your page is converting them, that’s not a small skill.

If you were fifty nine years old and employed by IBM in their sales department, you would make six hundred thousand dollars a year making that happen. This isn’t this isn’t just copywriting. It’s not just a landing page. It’s like, no. You’re bringing in real new leads for them that they can then close. That’s what that’s what you exist to do. If that’s not worth ten thousand dollars, you are talking to the wrong audience.

Full stop.

So what kind of if we do go with the CRO kind of concept as a retainer, what amount of tests would make set or what kind of package would make sense as a monthly basis?

Yeah. So we’ll get into that. It’s a very good question. We will get into it.

It’s not again, it’s not gonna be about quantity. That’s why today in CSP, we were talking about, KPIs and actual, like, metrics because we’re always just driving for those KPIs. Are we getting more leads in? Are we sure of that because we’re measuring?

Right? That sort of thing, month over month. And so next week, we’re gonna walk through the actual report that’s, like, the spreadsheet that you’ll be documenting in and then the report you present to your client that says, here’s how we grew this month or here’s how we didn’t grow, but this was the hypothesis and this is what we learned. And that’s what you’re being paid for on a monthly basis.

And you will start to see that the reality is five thousand dollars a month to be retained by someone for this work, you will be raising your rates soon because you’ll see I’m getting results for them. I’m reporting it. They weren’t getting these results without me. They’re always happy on my calls where I’m walking them through this stuff.

I should be charging more for it, and that’s where we’ll start to go. Again, I’ve I said this last week too. You know, the old high becomes the new low. You will look back, Naomi, and be like, why was I ever hesitating to charge ten thousand dollars for this when you’re at twenty or fifty thousand dollars for a landing page, which is also a real thing, a real amount of money that clients really do spend on this stuff if you are writing the right kind of landing page.

If it’s an about page, I got nothing. I got no. You gotta switch that. It’s not right.

No. I’m not gonna work on about pages as, like, your thing. Nobody values it enough even if it’s it’s one of the most visited pages on the site. Nobody gives a shit.

But they care about other pages that are measured, so we have to choose the right one and then optimize.

No. No. I’m just talking about Google.

When I say what landing page I mean specifically, Google, campaigns.

Google landing pages and potentially Perfect.

Exactly. Right? Okay. Nice. Thanks, Naomi. Ben, you have a question? Your hand went down.

Yes.

Yes.

I was gonna say so okay. I can go actually, I was gonna say, Naomi, real quick. You know, my my friend who’s an accountant, he kinda changed my mindset last summer because he said, like, I tried fifteen k for a client last summer. He’s like, I thought fifteen k was a lot. He said fifteen k is a rounding error, which kinda, like, like, made me, like, oh, I guess this is a lot to me, but but he’s like, other companies is not. So, but, anyway, you know, so I was thinking, like, the optimization retainer thing, and I’m like, one question I get is how long is the project or, like, how long is, like is it, like, one month or three months? And I’ve kinda wrestled with, like, should I do, like, more than three months or six months, or should there be, like, a fourteen day opt out clause?

You know, so those are kind of things because it’s like I I I mean, in the past, it’s been like, we’re doing this for three months. And then, like, after a month, they’re like, oh, we changed our mind. We’re gonna do the fourteen day opt out clause. And then, like Oh. If they you know?

Were you doing the month to month on oh, shoot. We just lost somebody. Were you what were you doing month to month for?

It was a retainer, or it was a project broken down into It was a retainer for specific deliverables.

And then, For deliverables. Yeah.

So Yeah. Not for like, some companies or agencies will do, like like, one one year.

I mean, that’s really long, but I just wasn’t sure, like, what a good practice is.

Yeah.

It’s good to go into it with them saying, there’s there’s no end date. They should have their both feet in for a year. So you do you stand the project up. You stand that up in a month, ideally.

So you show them, hey. I can work fast. I can get cool stuff done. You all liked what I created for you, and now we’re ready to optimize it.

And at least a year. Right? You will you will never get to a if you do, that’s weird. But you’ll in ninety nine percent of cases, never get to a hundred percent conversion rate, which means there’s always room to improve.

It won’t mean you’ll just keep rewriting the headline.

It might mean that we’ve tried this for four months now, and it really feels like we’re ignoring this one segment here. Let’s dig into a strategy on what to do about that segment that’s coming to this page. Like, let’s and that’s yours to drive. You can do that.

It doesn’t mean you will. But as you aim to increase conversion rates or whatever their success metric is, as you aim to do that, there are different things that come up. And you’ll see those things come up, and you’ll guide them through that. But it’s not I think the reason a lot of people cancel, retainers that are like, here are the deliverables we’re going to give you over time is because they’re not interested in deliverables.

Deliverables make work.

I used to hand me over a set of emails, and now I have to go implement the emails, QA the emails, measure them month after month. Like, no. And it there are a lot of busy, busy marketers who just don’t have time for that versus you coming in and saying, k. I am handing off these emails. You are implementing them. I’m here for QA because I wanna make sure that it’s it’s it’s, like, set up properly. And then I am going to measure it every single month and optimize it every single month based on how it’s performing.

And you will see at the end of each month when I present the results to you what we’ve done and what the outcome was. And then you’ll also be able to chat with us about what we should try next month, but we’ll come to the table with for what’s next, and we’ll guide that conversation. However, you’re not removed from it, but most of them, by the time they see you getting results, they’re like, cool. This is great.

What’s next? And that’s really where you want to be, and that’s where you absolutely can be.

But Okay.

This is retainer based. Like, it’s performance measure each time, not did I do the thing or didn’t I do a thing.

Got it. Okay. Okay. That makes sense. And kind of, like, laid the in the beginning of, like, this is a year long like, the goal is to get you in a year where we wanna, yeah, work together. Okay.

Yeah. So stick with me month after month. There’s gonna be some months that conversion tanks, but we’ll have good ideas as to why conversion tanked, and we’re here to then implement fixes for that if that happens. Some months are are harder than others, but other months are gonna be, like, gangbusters. It’s gonna be just badass.

And once you’re talking them through that and they’re seeing that that’s how marketing works and that a specialist has control of this.

That’s more desirable.

Yeah. Okay. Okay. Wanna work with good people. It’s like Yeah. Ultimately all of it. Right?

Just keep doing good work for me then.

Cool. Alright. Awesome. Andrew.

Hey.

So I guess where where I am now so, b two b SaaS web copy has been my bread and butter for several years now. And, actually, after our last call, I upped the rates a little bit, got a verbal yes, and it was like another one of those. Okay. Yep. New new normal.

But where I am now is I have to decide if that’s where I want to stay and just kind of keep doubling down on web copy, or do I want to pivot into something related but a little different?

I actually put in the chat, and a lot of people were responding and had some good conversations, but in Slack, about some of the challenges with web copy, Caroline, I know that you you had a lot to say as well about about that.

So, yeah, just a lot of different sort of challenges that, like, web copy is just there there seems to be this pressure to they always wanna sprawl. They never my clients always wanna sprawl. They don’t wanna keep working on the same pages over and over. Mhmm. I do have some experience working with companies where we’re doing, basically just Google search ads and landing pages.

And I like that because it’s always measured very carefully, and it seems like it would lend itself much better to this kind of thing that we’re talking about with the retainer than what I have been doing, which is just, you know, as you said, it’s like every project is just They’re not always the same amount of work.

Like, it’s just some trading.

Right? Every time it’s like, okay. I gotta figure out this whole part of their product, and it’s just takes so much to learn all of the inside learn the product inside out, the audience, all of that. So I guess my first question to you is, you know, how much do I you know, should I sort of make the leap to kind of web copy is the old way for me and landing pages and ads are the new way, or is that do I have to choose between those things or or what?

Yeah. That’s a good question.

I having also had a background in writing websites, I wouldn’t I wouldn’t make them a focus right now if you want retainers. If you wanna just build an agency out of big projects, then sure. Then you could you could do that. You could sell full websites for a lot of money.

The more you charge, the more people are typically involved, etcetera. You already know that could be a total complete nightmare. Right? So, yeah.

Yeah. So I wouldn’t I wouldn’t recommend that you do unless you are looking to build a CRO agency.

But even then, if you’re doing that, they don’t just want you on the website. They’ve got they want you everywhere. And you wanna be everywhere because they’re losing money everywhere, and you’re measured on that. So, yeah, landing pages and ads, if you’re connecting those two together, like, then you’re looking at a funnel. So as long as they’re always together, then you can all you can systematize it in such a way that it’s always the same to a point for you and whoever you hire. So I would say, yeah.

Ads anywhere that there’s, like, this real moment of conversion is a really good place to, to focus.

Yeah. And And the pain and the pain from the high cost per lead as well.

So Yes.

Exactly. Yeah. Yeah. Nope.

In my experience and it’s always changing. Right? The world is always changing. But in my experience, people who have, budget for ads are just looking for ways to get more. So if you can come in and say, I’ll do this every month and make you look better every month.

Yes, please.

Can I essentially offer a middle ground suggestion?

Yes, sir.

So when I was at Monday, monday dot com Mhmm. I was on all of the acquisition pages, and my friend was on the website. So she was always doing copywriting for the website, but they mostly focused on testing, like, the high traffic areas. So they tested the pricing page over and over and over again, and they tested the home page over and over and over again, and they tested, like, a couple of, like, the main product pages over and over and over. But if you have a company that has as much traffic as monday dot com, then testing those, like, high real estate pages can be really, really effective. And they’d be like, yeah. We got three percent improvement in conversion rate.

Right.

That’s amazing. But, like, it was amazing. Right? Yes. Because that’s, like, that’s, like, a big deal.

Yep. So there could be, like, a middle ground as opposed to, like, just doing Google landing pages, which is great, but it’s, like, a very different kind of thing. Yeah.

Then there might actually be demand because, like, right, she was in house, and that was all she did. And I’m sure she was making, like, seventy, eighty, ninety thousand dollars a year.

So you might be able to find, like, a middle ground there because those are, like, conversion focus pages.

Sure. Sure. Yep. Cool. I appreciate that. Thanks.

Yeah. Love it. Thanks, Naomi. Awesome. Andrew, that’s exciting.

Bit of a change.

Change can be fun.

Caroline.

So based on this conversation, I’m starting to think that maybe landing pages is something that I should be thinking about as well.

My question for you is, based on your experience, is there space or any demand for someone with copywriting and web design skills for landing pages?

Yes.

Yeah. I think that you’ll have to choose, which is, like, your lead strength.

It depends on your audience as well. So are you working with we’ve talked a bit about your audience and how that might be shifting for you.

Yes. So assuming that I shift into b to b sets.

Yeah. Then they probably do have a designer already, but they’ll appreciate, that you, have a design eye and a design background. But I wouldn’t necessarily Yeah.

I wouldn’t make that the focus unless that’s your focus for for some like, if you wanted to to do that as your focus.

Yeah.

I’m trying not to make it my focus, but it just keeps coming back.

Like, I was ready to almost walk away from it, but, you know, I came to the realization that maybe there’s still value.

Well, this is also when I was thinking about, keeping my staying within my professional services, with those clients. Yeah.

And so I thought maybe I should instead of trying to ditch my primary or core skill, Maybe, you know, keeping it around a little bit longer.

But if I’m moving into this other space Mhmm.

I don’t yeah. I am not I’m finding it difficult to imagine a world where I would be using both.

Yeah.

I know it’s hard to let go of skills that you have.

Oh, okay. I don’t mind. Well Then let it go. Honestly, I would I mean, I I’m not your therapist, but I would cut cut it loose.

Okay. Thanks very much. Design skills, you’ve been amazing. I found something cooler that I wanna do that I’m more excited about.

Come back around and visit me in five years, design skills.

Okay. Coffee with you, but I’m not gonna focus anymore.

Okay. Just personify it and just send it out.

Send it out to see. Someone else will find it and have a wonderful life as a designer with it.

But Okay.

So the risk for me is allowing it to be a crutch because it is something that I can easily fall back on.

And whatever you fall back on makes it impossible to specialize. You will always be pulling back. Right? And you gotta go in.

You gotta go all in on it. And anybody out there who says, no. You can kinda dip your toes in two different things. Like, you won’t find anybody saying that.

If they say it, they won’t say it for long because you really can’t gotta go all in on the thing. Yeah.

Yeah. This is really helpful too because I was having trouble bridging the gap between what I wanna do today, you know, my ten ten k offer and, optimization package and where I want to be in the future, like, with my, you know, area of special specialization or, like, the thing that I wanna be known for, I’m like, I can’t I I don’t think I can I I can’t be known for websites in a week? Oh, I don’t know. Like, that doesn’t seem like something that I it didn’t didn’t seem realistic.

Good.

But it feels commoditized. Yeah.

Yeah. It just didn’t feel right. And so Yeah. Yeah. I’m like, that’s not what I wanna be known for.

I can do this today, but that’s not what I wanna be known for. So I was really struggling to bridge that gap between today and where I wanna be. So this is helpful. The shedding is helpful.

So now I feel like I’m back to square one a little bit.

But You know, reinvention is fun.

Because it’s not square one because you have so much experience and so much growth that you have now even if you’re shifting some things.

But I like it. Yeah. You’re right.

How much you still have. Yeah. Exactly.

Cool. I’m excited for you, and we’ll just temper it. Right? If it feels weird or panicky at any moment, just, like, breathe through it. We can shift. We wanna focus.

But it’s okay. We can come back and revisit things, and we’ll get to the right answer.

Cool. Alright.

This week’s training. Are we ready to dive in? We need to because, not just because of much time we do and do not have, but you should be seeing my screen right now. Week two, your standardized offer.

What we’ve been talking about, this is being recorded, just as a heads up in case you’re wondering. Okay. So we’re building on last week’s work. We make this a little bit bigger depending on what size thing you’re on.

I’m just in Canva here. It’s easier than presenting in PDF, which is always really weird.

So, yeah, we’re building on your standardized offer, whatever you identified last, week. So if you didn’t do the work, go finish the work because you’re gonna get left behind otherwise.

It sounds like everybody mostly did. Cool. What will you charge for it? You identified that last week. In most cases, it’ll be ten k.

One of the things that we didn’t get to so some of you are not, let me just make sure you’re seeing the right thing now. Yeah. Some of you are in copy school crow and never saw our thousand dollar a day workshop, or some of you joined the intensive freelancing and also never saw a thousand day workshop. In fact, everybody in here did not see our thousand dollar a day workshop unless you’ve seen it since because we just launched it last Tuesday.

But in that workshop, I talk about the point of doing this authoritative offer that breaks down into your offer, the standardized offer, and retainer, both which are directly tied to what you’re building your authority on. So it’s part of an ownable thing. You worked on that last week too. Every week, we’ll be chipping away at it more until after eight weeks, we get to a place where you’re like, okay.

I feel really, really good about this. So remember, it’s the start of week two. If you’re feeling like there’s a lot that’s up in the air or you like taking your business down to the studs and it makes you uncomfortable, don’t worry. We’re just we’re just starting.

We’ll get to a good place. You’ll feel great about it.

So authoritative offer ideas. We talked a bit about this last week.

But things like it’s just whatever you can optimize in your retainer later. So on welcome automation, life cycle emails, cold emails, and evergreen sales page, a SaaS pricing page, things that can be optimized but that are contained. Okay?

You want to this is a really quick overview of what we went through in that workshop.

If you haven’t seen the workshop just on Instagram, anything, I think you can just, like, comment workshop and you’ll get it right away.

But point is, this will help you better understand the why behind what we’re talking about today and going forward next week as well with the retainer. So we’re not gonna get too much into what to do or how sell by chat is going to help you. We’re gonna talk more about that later. What we really wanna talk about are these two offers.

Right? You have the standardized project and then this optimization retainer. One is outright cash. The other is monthly recurring revenue.

One is a thing that’s produced. The other is optimizing the thing that was produced. There are exceptions, and that’s what we’re here to talk about. So, Jess, with seasonal campaigns, it might not be as simple as what we’re looking at, but we’ll we’ll get there and get through it.

And if you don’t know where to start, start with email because email is really, really easy and in high demand.

SMS is also good. Sell by chat is an a forever optimizable thing. If you’re like, I have no idea what to do, be a ManyChat expert. Be a Drift expert. There’s lots of things you can do. Point is you have to stand something up, and then you have to optimize it. Now if you were to sell two of these standardized projects a month, which if you’re not selling one, can sound like a lot, but suspend disbelief is entirely possible.

And then one of those clients every month, not both, you might not win over everybody. Maybe you will. But if at least one says yes to the upsell, that’s where you can make really good money. So this is what we walk them through with ten thousand dollars, for two projects.

The one in the blue says yes to, the next month, and now we’re looking at, again, you sell two more the next month and have the monthly recurring revenue. This is where we start to get into, good money. Right? So again and again, it keeps going and going, and you can lose retainer gigs.

You cannot close projects. You can do all sorts of things and still end up with really good money. That’s why we’re here. That’s why we’re specializing.

That’s what we’re doing. When it comes time to deliver on all of these retainers, you need to be able to outsource that to somebody who knows, who can be trained on it. So you have to have systems in place. You have to have templates, processes, ways of doing things.

I’ve talked in Coffee School Pro about the E Myth revisited where his take and it doesn’t mean it has to be a hundred percent true for you, but it’s a good idea.

His take is that McDonald’s, one of the earliest billionaire, billion dollar companies ever, back when a billion was a lot, got there with teenagers working for them largely. Teenagers run most McDonald’s.

They can do it so well because of all the systems that are in place, and there are no questions about everything. There’s a fixed menu. You don’t come up with new things. Someone doesn’t come up and say, hey.

What can you throw on a piece of chicken for me? It’s like, that’s not a thing. Look at the menu. It’s right above my head.

What would you like from the menu? That’s what we’re trying to do. Right? So that we can hand our work off to somebody that we can train so that we have the leverage we need to free ourselves from the minutiae of our business where even if it feels exciting to you now, in three years, it’ll feel taxing.

You won’t love it anymore. You’ll You’ll say, how do I get out? How do I work on growing this instead? That’s where we wanna get.

Okay? So this is the objective. This is why we’re spending time getting you to a place where you say this is my standardized offer. This is what I do.

It’s my Big Mac on my menu, and it’s the only thing I sell, and then, obviously, you can’t optimize a Big Mac. I don’t know. I don’t eat at McDonald’s, but I get you get the analogy. I know that McDonald’s exists and that they have a Big Mac.

Point is there’s a standard offer there, and in your case, there’s something to keep selling every month.

And that’s what we’re working on. Okay? Oh, wait. This is back to that.

Okay. Cool.

So we’re gonna build on last week’s work where we can make sure this is really important. Your clients need to see value on delivery of that standardized offer. They need to see the value of continued optimization.

It’s not always gonna be right in front of you how to do this. We’re gonna do the work to get there, though. You can standardize it up to a little more than sixty percent. It can be completed in five to six business days.

That means you can block off two weeks a month to work on your standardized offer on delivering it. It doesn’t mean you will always be the one doing that. That was keep that in mind. And an average person can be trained to do this work well with little oversight.

It’s hard to know.

You can look at that and go like, I don’t know what Johnson brought up the other day.

I’ve never trained people. I’ve never had employees. I don’t know.

And the question then is, okay. Well, could someone you know could you train someone you know on doing this? That’s what we wanna get to. Alright?

So by the end of this week, not the end of today’s class, which is in fourteen minutes, but the end of this week, we want this filled in, and you might already be well on the way there. So we wanna know what the steps are, the parts of your standardized offer, and that’s gonna be the process that you follow, three steps or four steps, not seven steps. It’s too many steps. We need three or four steps max, and then we need to know what happens importantly in each step.

Not each step can be measured. If we look at the conversion copywriting process, which is basically three parts, in the first step, it’s all research and discovery. There’s not much we can do there to optimize for leads or money. It’s just not part of it, so we wouldn’t worry about that.

But there are times when you can measure the output of what you’ve done. Step two and three, you can measure how is it working, etcetera. And then there is no step four in the case of a conversion copywriting process unless you break up research and discovery into two things with strategy. Doesn’t matter.

Anyway, point is we’re gonna go through and get you to a place where you understand what your process looks like. Anybody who’s in Coffee School Pro has already given really good thought to their diagnostic, and that’s going to help you a lot.

Here, if you’re not in Copy School Pro, you’re in the intensive freelancing, and you finish this off and want to know more about the diagnostic and things you already know, the CopySchool Pro is an opportunity at the end of this. Okay. End of week, you’re going to say what SOPs you’re going to create, what things you’re going to create to help you take this standardized offer and standardize it. So it’s not just an offer like, oh, imagine if we standardized it. Nope. We’re gonna do that work. And when you’re gonna give yourself a deadline, I believe strongly that every copywriter in the room right now loves deadlines, not the sound they make as they go whooshing by, the real deadline.

And is there anybody that you might hire and train to do this work?

And when would that happen? So that requires that you imagine a world where you are selling the ten thousand dollar landing page project and the five thousand dollar project.

How long could you go on doing that and delivering really good work for a client for clients without bringing somebody on board to take off a lot of the work. Next week will help you fill this in a little more. So if you’re like, I don’t know, don’t worry too much. Next week, we’ll really, really dig into, the retainer stuff where I’ll show you SOPs and timelines and everything like that. But for now, this is where you wanna end the week having this sorted out.

Sorry. There’s always cat fur. There’s always cat fur floating through my house. Like, what’s that cat fur?

There’s a cat down here, so that’s probably why. Alright. So what we wanna do is map out that three or four step process. So if you’ve already printed this out this week, I decided not to just keep holding, pieces of paper up for you, but to share this instead.

You’ll want to have this printed out or have a piece of paper and just draw out your process. If you already know it, that’s cool. Document it.

And you can be doing that while I’m talking or you can do it after the fact.

We don’t have a ton of time right now to sit here, and I’m not worried about time, but I am respectful of everybody else’s time. Here’s an example of a process, the conversion copywriting process. So if I was to draw this out, and it’s meant to look like I drew it out.

If I were to draw it out, I would, like, mark down okay. Well, there’s research and discovery, then we move into writing and editing. Wireframing is there. Does wireframing need to be on its own?

No. Because it’s part of it. Does editing come first? You’d be documenting all this stuff.

Where does analysis go? And then I have it fits under research and discovery, validation, and experimentation.

Should I break this up further? What’s the point of breaking it up further? How will that help? If it will help, do it, but try not to get it to anything larger than four steps in a process.

Anything bigger is just it’s just it’s just a lot. Once you have to go and start systematizing, by the time you’re done, state one, you’re like, oh, what was I thinking with seven parts of this? So just keep it as controlled as you can. Now here’s another example.

If it was a funnel audit and reports, so fine. I’ll map the full funnel. Once I’ve, like, documented all the things that I do, I end up realizing that I start by mapping the full funnel, and then it looks like I do all of this stuff at the next stage that includes analyzing everything. So this is probably the analysis stage.

Then there’s gonna be a gap analysis. Is that part of that? I don’t know. You’re allowed to work through and think through your parts here.

Right? You don’t have to just, like, say this is exactly how and I know it to be true, and then next week go, oh, shit. I forgot to think about that. So let yourself think about it right now, and then you can always come up with your process at the end.

But the point is we wanna get to a place where you have your process mapped out. In a lot of cases, you’re already good on this. Right? You already know what your basic process is.

You might just have to change it, when it comes to this more specific thing that you’re doing. So although most of us are following the conversion copywriting process, when you’re looking at the specific standardized offer that you have, if it’s, again, landing pages, how does that process get modified to work specifically on landing pages, on building up the landing page and optimizing it? And you might get to a place where you’re like, it’s not about starting with research and discovery. This happens first, and then this happens, and then this happens.

And research and discovery is like a small part of this stage, and, like, we have to just, like, figure out how it fits in. That’s okay. That’s totally fine. Just try to make it as specific as you can for a process for your standardized offer knowing that the objective is to systematize.

So you’ll fill this in with each step. So step one, how it get how it gets measured. We talked about this in today’s Copy School Pro session.

Not to not to give too much fomo for anybody who didn’t attend that, but we’ll talk about it some more anyway. But in this case, just just how do they measure step one? Is it measured at all? Is it leads, or is it revenue custom or number of customers, etcetera?

So go through, take what you mapped out here, fill it in here, and then this is the part where the real work comes in. And I would like you to get this done in time for our Thursday or Friday. I can’t remember which one it is this week. Meeting.

So I want you to show up to every meeting, but I would prefer you to show up prepared to have a really good discussion. So block out time, an hour or two, tomorrow night, tonight, right now, whatever it is, to really document every single thing that happens in each of these steps. This isn’t busy hands work. This is the beginning of you creating systems, templates, tools, processes to be able to give yourself leverage so you have more freedom in life. So it’s time really well spent.

So you’ll go through and fill this in. There’s an example below.

If I were to and the again, the example here for is for conversion copywriting because everybody in the room knows what it is. It doesn’t mean it’s your process.

Again, yours is specific to your standardized offer, which is, of course, also true for your retainer and then this and then this. Oh, I forgot to go back and add this, etcetera. But we’re really going through and spending some time. This has continued.

We’re still going on that step. Really spending time to think through what I do. You don’t have to type it out if you don’t want to. If you’re like, AI can do this.

I don’t give a crap. As long as you end up at a place where you have a really solid list that, isn’t guessed at, and that’s where AI just, like, be careful.

But I don’t know. Whatever you do whatever you do to get there, do what you gotta do to get there. But then you’re gonna go through and delete everything that isn’t critical. So if it’s not critical, we get rid of it. Do I need to have interviews with key team members?

Maybe I don’t. Maybe to standardize this thing, I could give that up. I do wanna have a heuristic analysis. I do wanna interview, founders. I do need research questions.

I think I need do I need a one question survey for new leads and customers? You can start asking yourself that, and the more you leave on here, the harder it is to systematize.

But don’t also madly chop away at it either because you can’t end the day with, like, I whittled my process down to two things.

Probably need more than two things if you’re gonna be an expert in the thing. But go through and try to just eliminate, just, like, cut everything that isn’t critical, and then you’re gonna repeat that for every step that you have. And I’ve got examples for each of those steps as well so you can see what you might do there, and that will bring you to the optional step four as well. You’ll wanna also say what’s needed for that step to work.

So you go back over the list that you have, that you put together, and say, okay. For me to, be able to interview founders, I need a meeting template. So it’s the agenda for the founder interview. I need an email template that I or a Slack or both, okay, that I always send out to founders to say, hey.

Can we book a time? I need a Calendly link so that they can easily book a time, or I need and then you, like, go through it and really figure it out. Again, time well spent in order to get to a place where you can have good systems in place to get your butt out of working in the business and instead the goal of working on the business, which wraps up at the very end with what you’re going to need then to deliver your standardized offer. You can see that there’s gonna be a lot of thinking on the page.

I once had to fill in seventy two questions. Like, I had to answer seventy two long answer questions.

You don’t have to do that.

So, hey, look at the bright side. You don’t have to answer seventy two questions. You just have to work through how you work, document it, strike out everything that doesn’t have to be part of your project, or in turn then your retainer, but just worry about the standardized offer. We’ll adjust things next week for the retainer, and you wanna document people.

Include yourself on here. I am needed. Got it. Hopefully, not needed.

If you have a VA or you have an assistant or you have somebody you’re working with, if you need more lines, just, like, start writing in more people if you have them or if you need them. What processes? What documentation do you need in place for this to work? What templates?

What scripts do you need in place? And what software or hardware tools do you need in place? So it might be I need a new webcam for some reason. I don’t know.

I don’t know what your process is. So maybe you throw that in there and you say, I need it. And then you know, and you can look at the needed list and make sense of what to do next, and start prioritizing. We’re not going to prioritize or do anything more than document what you need to deliver your standardized offer.

That’s how you’re going to end the work. Sorry. I’m scrolling up fast. I know that can be nauseating to watch.

And then this is what you’ll have filled in because you did all the other work. You’ll have this filled in for our conversation later this week about exactly this thing.

Questions?

Are you ready? Are you so excited to document all that you do?

Yeah.

Writing stuff down.

That’s where the next that if you’re working with an in house designer, that person is not listed under people I need.

That’s just, like, a given because they weren’t there.

If it’s somebody on your payroll or that you’re paying, then it’s a person you need. If it’s their internal people, that’s not you don’t have to document that.

Cool. Awesome.

Alright. Yeah. That’s a good clarification. Totally.

Okay. Anything else?

No?

Alright.

Good. Then I will let you go with one minute remaining.

The replay will be posted in the private Slack group.

Uh-oh. Caroline, did you just chat something in the last minute?

Yeah. It will be challenging slash interesting for you, but bring it up, and we’ll talk about it. Cool? Make an educated guess.

I think you’ll get there. Definitely. Alright. Cool, y’all. I’m stoked about this. Remember, next week is retainer stuff, so you need to have this in good shape or else next week is going to be confusing.

Cool?

Alright. See you later this week. Bye y’all. Bye. Thanks.

Week 1: Specializing

Week 1: Specializing

Transcript

Hello, everybody. Hello. If you can come on camera, please do so we can see your smiling force a smile face.

And, you’re not forcing. Everyone’s gloriously happy. Copywriters are known for our sunny dispositions. Right? So we do.

Hi, everybody. So welcome to the Intensive Freelancing week one, where you should have this printed off in possibly grayscale so you don’t waste all of your ink. We are going to basically be setting up how the next eight weeks are going to work, and what you can expect out of it. And then we’re gonna do some actual work.

Okay? So if that does not match your expectations, please chat over what expectations you maybe had in mind, and we can make sure that we don’t fail to hit them or that we reset for you. Okay. So have your printout handy.

We are recording this. The replay will be available.

We have a combination here of people who are brand new to everything that we’re doing here with group coaching, with the intensive. We have people from Coffee School Pro who have not taken the intensive.

In here now, we have coaches from Freelancing School and Coffee School Pro in here as well. So we’ve got a mix of people, but the ones that I’m really gonna be focusing on are those who are not in Coffee School Pro, and are not at Cope. So if you are in the position where you are new to the intensive, which is everybody, but also new to CopySchool Pro or Freelancing School, then I’m really targeting this, at you. And welcome to everybody, of course. And you will be able to modify, modify the training pretty lightly so that it works for you.

Also, if you are running through this, whether you’re in Copy School Pro already or you’re in the intensive freelancing, know that you get to run through this with a coach. For those who are in the intensive freelancing, you’ve already been connected with your coach privately, the one on one situation.

You’ll be able to work directly with them, and then, you can go through the intensive a second time if by the end of this, you’re like, oh, I tanked midway through. Like, I got really distracted, really busy. I didn’t do my work, and I want to do it. So I’m gonna go back through it.

So you can go through it a second time. Don’t worry about it. If you’re in CopySchool Pro and you have team members that you want to put through this, you can. They just won’t get assigned coach, but they can go through all of our kickoff call, our training, the replays that we’ll have with any questions that might come up.

So your team can be involved in this. Just make sure you reach out to Sarah, to get that team member hooked up, because you shouldn’t have to go and retrain your team on stuff afterward.

The goal is just to let them learn right from the source and then go do the stuff you wanna do. This week, we are talking about the thing no copywriter ever wants to talk about, specializing and the importance of specializing so that everything else gets easier. And I mean everything else with a heavy focus on making money. It gets easier when you narrow things down. Get and I will make a strong case for that over the next eight weeks, but I need you to suspend disbelief if you are not in a camp of happy to specialize folks.

We’re going to recommend again and again that you specialize. When hard times come up, it’s usually because they didn’t specialize enough. And specializing and initiating work well together, so we’ll just keep that in mind.

Most people all people actually here looking around have not been through our workshop that typically brings you into this session because we just launched that workshop today. So no one’s been through it because it’s live right now.

So, we would have gone through a whole sunshine growth model session before you got here. That’s why I shared out in the intensive freelancing, Slack channel. I shared out that link to the walk through of doing of me walking you through the sunshine growth model. So, hopefully, you do have gone through that and identified where your biggest opportunities are. Okay? And that could be under skills, those advanced skills you actually sell, the advanced skills you use, proof of those skills, authority, all things under authority, money, and then leverage. So those are the core groups that we’re talking about in the intensive freelancing and and throughout copy school professional, and then as we go forward also in freelancing school as we start moving people from the intensive to either freelancing school or copy school prep.

Okay. Any questions before we actually dive into today’s lesson?

No. Okay. Nothing. Good. Caroline loves the energy from six minutes ago. So cool. We’ll try to we’ll try to keep that energy going.

It’s amazing.

Awesome.

And Honey Bear would like to say hello to you, and so she has. Consider consider yourself welcomed.

Let’s open up our document. I’m not gonna share my screen until I have to share my screen. What I want you to do is go to this blurry, horrible page if you don’t know what I’m holding up right now.

Sarah, if you can share out that PDF, that would be amazing.

It is the sunshine growth model looking really, really cloudy because in a lot of cases, freelancers who are making good money but who are still under that, like, great easy living kind of money, have the same sorts of problems, and those are not around the skills that you sell, but rather everything else. And so we’re kind of, like, we’re all grayed out on those, and we’re going to spend the next eight weeks, like, lifting the clouds, basically, so that you have what you need to grow.

And that’s gonna break down across that sunshine growth model. So that is on page two. Just know that we’ll be referencing that again and again. And by the time these eight weeks are up, you should feel very, very good about where you’re at with the Sunshine Growth model. You won’t be a hundred percent good to go, but you’ll be in good shape to be able to see how things are going to come together and already are coming together. So, again, that’s my promise to you by the end of this intensive. Okay?

This week, you’re going to finish the week, and I’m gonna walk you through this, like, line by line today because I really wanna make sure that everybody’s doing this part right because it’s so foundational. What we’re going to do is these are the end of week decisions that you will be making.

That’s on, like, page three of this week’s training after the title page. That’s including the title page. We will, identify by end of week what you specialize in and who it’s for. You have to believe that you can become a thought leader in this area of specialization.

If you’re in Coffee School Pro, you’re already here. If you’re a coach and freelancing school or Coffee School Pro, you’re likely already here, but who knows? It can always be useful to refine it. Your ideal, client persona, your ICP, we’re going to get that nailed down.

This is a huge problem for a lot of freelancers.

You want to help one group, but they can’t afford you or they don’t care about the thing that you’re offering. And so we have to make sure that we are volunteering to help those that can’t afford us, that we really wanna serve, but making enough money with the other clients we have, that we have the time to give ourselves to these communities we care so much about. So we’re gonna work through who that ICP is for you, make sure they value your specialization, that they’re reasonably reachable. That’s obviously a big challenge for a lot of people. You might want to work with film producers, but if you don’t live in Hollywood, it’s gonna be really hard to reach them. That’s an exaggerated example, but that’s the idea.

They have budgets to hire and retain you, and they seem to align with your values. We will never know. We’ll never know until we’re in there, and we’re like, oh, what’s that mega hat you’re wearing?

And then oh, Shane’s coming back in. Then we’re gonna get into two things that will shape the next couple of weeks, and that is standardized offer and a retainer offer, both under the topic of what you’re going to build your authority on.

Okay.

Any questions on that overview? We’re gonna get started right away. If we’re good to go, good to go. Roy, what’s on the front of your mic of your mug?

It’s just this, like, marble effect, I guess.

I don’t know.

So close to my mug.

Here, you get a three sixty.

Yeah.

Yeah. Cheers. But you got, like, some nice some nice hues on yours, though.

Nice hues on yours.

Thank you.

It’s very good.

Mug love. I feel like I feel like we all feel left out. I’ve Oh, more mugs. Let’s do mug shots.

Mug shots.

Mug shots.

Is that a bison on here, Sarah? Yeah. You’re, like, rocking some bison?

I am.

A bison. Yeah. She’s Albert.

Well, it’s actually someone it’s from Wyoming.

Oh, of course. Alright. Awesome. Dig it. Alright. Nice.

Sharing mine, but my camera’s not working.

So Oh, that’s right.

Paul’s here. He’s just he forgot to open his laptop.

Alright. Okay.

Let’s start on specialization. This is an exercise. If you’re already really confident in your specialization, this is just a good, like, reminder or reinforcement that you’ve done well. What we’re going to do is start on this page. Okay? So take this out or go into the saved version on your desktop. Don’t if you’re just going digital with this, don’t use your PDFs in your browser.

Stuff doesn’t save. Do it off your desktop. Make sure you’re saving it on your desktop. Okay?

Otherwise, you’re gonna close it down, and it’s all gonna be empty. And you’ll be like, well, that was annoying, and then you won’t go redo it because it’s annoying to redo work. Okay. We’re gonna start on the specialization page where at the top, it says what, and it’s got a giant list, two sides, of things you can specialize in as a copywriter.

Now this is going to seem silly, and we’ve talked about this in CopySchool Pro before that you can simply go through a checklist, like, choose things, but you really, really can. So we’re gonna focus first on what your specialization is. And then on the next page, we’ll get into the how and the why. Okay?

So, what I want you to do is read through these for the next, like, two minutes and just circle ones that are interesting to you on the what page. So it has to have this circle around specialization and the word what next to it. Okay? Go through that and choose just just because you can.

You can do anything you want to. It’s your business.

So just choose the ones that are interesting. So if you’re like, okay. Interviewing. I like that.

Circle it. Doesn’t mean you have to do anything with it. The stuff that really lights you up. Just go through for the next two minutes and do that.

I’m gonna do it too.

Sorry. There are a couple of double ups under optimization that somehow I missed.

K.

Let me know if anybody still needs a little time.

K? So I’ll share mine.

So some of the ones that I thought would be cool to specialize in are surveying, research or data analysis, strategic planning, persuasion sales, warm sales, writing sales pages, writing SaaS pages, writing pricing pages, writing lead gen and landing pages, all the sequences and emails, and then optimization stuff.

Yeah.

Anybody land on anything that seems, like, kind of interesting that they wanna share? It’s cool. If not, because this is very introductory. So, like, don’t worry about it. It’s just circling something. Like, it’s like doing a crossword.

Okay. And then we wanna get into the next page, which is the how and the why. And this is how you separate. So you can say, I specialize in emails that.

Emails that what? Or what kind of emails that? So I specialize in sales emails that are creative creative sales sales emails in order to increase average order value. So now we wanna start going through really digging into that specialization.

And I want to back up for a second. For anybody who’s, confused about why this is so important, because I know there’s friction here, it’s so important to do this work because this is how you figure out what to build your authority on and how to build that authority. This is how you figure out, what ads you’re gonna buy, what social content you’re going to make, if your audience is right, how to increase your revenue overall. It all comes back to how specialized you are or are not.

If you’re struggling to make money easily, I definitely recommend that you look at your specialization, and that’s why we’re here and starting here. Okay?

So let’s take a couple minutes to go through how, which is this column on the left so I quickly do something, and really focus on things that matter to you because this isn’t the work you’re going to do. So for me, I look at this and I go, okay. So quickly is important to me. I find it important to do work fast.

When people move slowly, I struggle hard with that. So if I like quickly and I do work quickly, then I’ll likely be good at providing things quickly. That doesn’t mean you’ll ever state that, but you might actually state that. You could really zoom in on being the one minute email person.

I don’t know how that would work. But if that was really important to you and you then you could build up to be that person.

Deliberately matters to me. Low fidelity, I don’t care. High fidelity, I don’t care. Designed or undesigned, I don’t have any feelings about those.

Tested, I do have feelings about. Side circle, tested. Research based, I do. Data driven, customer driven, yes.

Creative, I’m just meh about. Like, it finds its way in. Artistic, I don’t care. Scientific, I do.

Engineered. Right? So just go through and think about the things that really matter to you, and that will help you identify your specialization that is, something you’re gonna enjoy doing and be able to go deep on because that’s definitely what specialization is compared to, obviously, generalized, skills. And then over to the why, choose the whys that are important, and that could get down to to increase testimonials and case studies.

Like, you could be a copywriter who focuses on acquisition of useful testimonials. There’s room for that. There’s a lot. You could write a book on that.

There’s a lot you can do. You go on stage and talk about that. You can build your authority on that To increase visibility, to decrease churn, to decrease ghosting or no shows. If you decide you want to work with sales teams particularly, they have to get people showing up for demos and calls.

If you’re the person who makes sure people show up for calls, then that is a huge specialization to be able to work on. Okay?

Circle quickly. You’ve got, like, a couple minutes to just do that work.

Okay. Everybody’s good. I’m just gonna pause, because my dogs are barking.

Because I wanna see if anybody’s struggling at this point or if you want to share your specialization or what you’re working on as a specialization right now. Anybody feeling good about just chatting that out or coming off mute and sharing?

Y’all, I know you do. I will call on you. Why are you gonna make me call on you?

Who’s that?

Katie, how about you?

Even if you already had it before you came in here.

Well, I feel like you’re gonna feel like this sounds familiar, but I’m wondering how many we’re allowed to pick. Oh, okay. Great.

Because I have so I have writing websites, emails, and long form sales pages Mhmm.

Which I do for the same person, but I’m not specialized in one of those deliverables.

Okay. Yeah. It’s ideal to like, it’s good to start brainstorming things here. But I yeah.

We wanna get it down to something where you could own it. And that’s when we’ll have, like, end of week final decisions where we’ll put that on the top of the sheet, like and you need to select it it to can reasonably own it, and it’d be really hard to own all those things. So when you have all those things, did you have a how or a why that you chose that help narrow them down? Well, I have four of each.

Okay.

So kind of the same question.

Good.

I have how research based, customer driven, UX optimized, sales optimized.

Mhmm.

And then why, like, to increase quality leads, to increase applications, to increase lifetime customer value.

Okay. Cool. And do any of those surfaces things that you are most interested in that you just plain like?

Well, I feel like the lifetime customer value one is the one that speaks most to, like, what I usually end up doing over the life time of my clients, like, through through the work. And I guess that’s where I’m like, you know, often they come for the website, but then we end up doing the sales page and we end up doing the emails. So I find it hard to let go of the authority around those other pieces because I like to do all of them.

Yeah. Okay. So as we move forward, I think this will become clearer what I’m about to share with you. I think you already, like, know, but it’s good to talk through.

The bigger it is, the harder it is to standardize. Right? So if we’re trying to get to a place where we can have leverage in the form of documentation and processes and ways of measuring things that we can hand off to people, then, it’s very, very hard to do all of those things that you just mentioned. But it could but there are ways that it could be done.

Sure. Just I would keep in mind, yeah, that it’s gonna be really hard to not hard to, but it’s gonna be really time consuming to put together documentation that, will help this work to be easily delivered as we move forward into having a standardized project that you can measure that then turns into retainer work, which is the objective that the intensive is all about, and not what Copy School Pro has been about, but the intensive is, which we’re gonna talk about right away. But, yeah, that’d be my only thinking on that is even if it’s something that happens naturally, what can you do there to restructure things a little bit, so that you can systematize more in it.

Yeah. Is that what you were thinking anyway?

Or what do you think?

Well, I mean, we’ve been talking about the agency thing. So I do have templates for all of those pieces.

Like, I do have, like, I have, you know, existing workshops that I could use to train people.

So I feel like I have assets related to all these pieces, but I do understand, like, choosing.

Yeah. Just so it’s like you can absolutely own it and then absolutely specialize in including your agency, right, where you can train people out on that thing. So the what I would say is if you’re looking through and you like them all, the struggle is that people come in for one thing and then do the ongoing work after that. So I get that. That’s something to consider as you think about, like, audience and how people find you. Like, why are they coming to you for that first, only to move into email eventually.

But, the part that is measurable is going to be the biggest, easiest opportunity. So if a website is is tough to measure, which it is, on an ongoing basis, like, you can measure it, but it’s not as simple as ads or emails or even social media or leads, like getting leads on a landing page or opening on a phone over conversations and stuff like that. Like, that’s really measurable versus a home page, which is, like, as we know, kind of a pain in the butt. Like, you measure it, but it doesn’t really have a single goal and all that kind of stuff.

You know? Yeah. Okay. Cool. Cool. Anybody else? Thanks, Katie. Anybody else wanna share any, yeah, Jessica?

Jessica, are you on camera?

Did you just pocket hand raise?

Okay.

Jess.

Johnson.

Johnson, you go while Jessica figures out her tech stuff.

What does that I don’t know. I’m just put it out there.

I kind of had a similar question because, I mean, I’ve talked to you about my idea. It’s which is sort of broad. It could encompass any aspect of copywriting.

And so what I’ve been trying to figure out is where do I want to specialize. Obviously, I’ve mostly been doing websites, but I’ve done sales pages. I mean, I’ve done everything like, I’m sure everyone here.

But my question is more, based on now, wanting to do things that are, quick, research based, persuasively architected, and increase attributable revenue revenue and quality gains.

I’m drawn towards email because I feel like it fits a lot of those, and I feel like it could fit with the the narrative selling idea in general. But do you have any I don’t know. Do you have any thoughts?

Or Yeah.

I’d say hold on to that.

Keep all of that in mind because it’s good.

I think I mean, when we go through and look at things that where our objective is to get to a place where we have easy monthly recurring revenue. That’s really what we’re aiming for ultimately because that’s where money comes in without you doing anything. Right? So it’s a very good place to be.

Email is really good for that, and there are not enough email marketers or copywriters or strategists on the planet. Not even close. Not not even in the no. There’s so much room for it. So I would say hold on to email as a thing, and then the qualities that you had assigned to it on the why and how page. Hold on to those two as we move into, like, the second half of today’s training, which I think will help you further refine that to where it’s gonna be good. Yeah.

Okay. Thank you.

Cool. Cool. Cool. I know that you do websites, though, so that’s tricky. But we’ll talk more about it.

Everything’s not set As you were talking about the difficulty in attributing and I mean and it’s such long such long act sometimes.

Yeah. So yeah.

Yeah. Design’s getting there’s a lot. I get it. That was my I was with it. I totally get it.

Jessica, are you there yet if you want? Sorry. Can you hear me? Yes. We can. Sorry.

I was recording earlier and messed up my microphone. Sorry. Oh, okay. So my question is just the seasonal sale thing.

Is it too much given that we’re talking about, you know, emails, product, or sales pages, and potentially ads, SMS, whatever? Is that too big of a bite then for specialization?

Or is that I don’t think so, Jessica, because I think when it comes to something like seasonal sales, it’s not, it’s a good thing to specialize in because it’s ownable.

Like, when we look at the checklist things to specialize in, which we’re going to dig into right away here, when we look at that, it yeah. You can own it. Not I don’t know anybody else who does. Agencies do the thing, but they don’t they’re not proud of it.

And even if they do, there’s I don’t we can’t name them. Right? So you can own that.

It’s the retainer, the ongoing recurring work that in your case is like, well, well, it’s not about performing the thing that’s running on a nevergreen basis, but rather it’s continuing to do things and, like, learning from the last campaign we did and applying that to the next campaign that we do.

So I would say just hold on to it and don’t be swayed yet, but be ready to refine maybe a little bit because this could get you to a place of simplifying and being able to make more money because of it.

Okay. Great. Thanks.

Okay. Cool. Thanks, Jess. Alright. So we’re not going to make any final decisions yet. I just want you to be thinking about this work as we move on to your audience.

And I know we’ve only got twenty nine minutes left, but I feel good about this because the next two weeks are going to be all about your offers and getting them to such a beautifully architected state. I’m like I’ve told my team so many times how excited I am about the three weeks that follow this, how bananas it’s going to be with, like, ready to go SOPs is gonna be dope.

So watch for that, which means that some of this worksheet might be a little bit empty by the end of today’s session, but you should be working on it over the course of this week. And especially if you have a coach that you’re meeting with this week, do do work through your homework with them and what we’re doing here on this worksheet. Okay? So I wanna talk about your audience or niche largely because, obviously, it matters. Like, it’s a no brainer that it matters.

But it’s what I see too often is people just plain choosing an audience that is, difficult to access, difficult to get referrals from, or that can’t afford you, as I mentioned out of the gate here. So, I want to work through an ICP statement. You don’t have to fill this in today, but I want you on your own right now as I’m talking to be thinking about who your ideal, target market is, like, what that group is. And we’re not gonna fill in the ICP yet. We’re going to very quickly jump to this table over here. What I want you to do is put is, like, kind of just jot down mentally or on a piece of paper here on this the basic categories of people that you’re trying to target.

So it might be in our case, it might be, freelance copywriters, in house copywriters, and in house marketers, which includes VPs and CMOs. Okay. So those are three categories, like, basic buckets of people that I could target, and they’re quite different from each other because they have different things that are true for them, but some overlap as well. So think about who you already know that you’re serving, who you like serving most, who has the most money to spend most freely.

It’s this is business. You can make more money. So really think about, like, who are the clients I’ve had that have been brilliant, that I’ve loved having because they paid my invoice, and they didn’t question me. And they did great work when I I was allowed to do great work with them.

I’d love more of them. And then you tell yourself, well, there aren’t many more of them or whatever other crap gets in your way. Think about them.

What I want you to do is make sure as you’re thinking of them that you’re going through this checklist under your audience niche to really zero in on ensuring that you’re choosing the right people to focus on. So, when you think about who you’re trying to target, are they bought into the value of copywriting, or do you have to sell them on it? Do they come to you, or do you even reach out to them and they get copywriting? If they don’t, they are not your target audience. They might be your target audience twenty years from now when your agency is enormous and it’s ready to scale to a new audience, it’s not gonna be your target audience when there’s one or two of you. They’ve brought they’ve previously invested in copywriting and still do. So do you have reason to believe that they have an in house copywriter or have had that they work with freelancers?

So go through that list. Now we’re not gonna go too deeply through it right now, because what I really wanna focus you on is this table, and I want to work through this table right now.

This was something that our team actually did some training on in order to get to a sense of better understanding who is right for our programs, for copy school pro and for freelancing school and for the intensive.

So if you’re on the page with the table, you’ll see category, category, category. That’s where I want you to write in under each category, one of those buckets that I mentioned. So, again, for us, it’d be in house copywriters, freelance copywriters, and in house marketers or VPs. Okay?

So you fill that in. Go ahead and do that right now, please, and then we’re gonna come up with examples under there to better identify who you can get excited about working with. K? So I’ll give you, like, a minute to do that.

Okay. So for me, I have written in my crazy penmanship, in house copywriter, freelance copywriter, and in house VP marketing. Okay. So whatever you’ve got, cool. Now what we wanna do is think of an example of somebody that you have worked with in that bucket, in that category.

And I want you to put their name, brand, or person depending, I don’t know, whoever it is, under struggling, profitable, or top tier. Are they somebody in that category who is struggling, who is doing okay, or who is nailing it?

So write them in under there. So for example, let’s say for an in house SVP of marketing, if I were to think of somebody there, I might think of, the CMO of Bitly. Okay. So that is not it’s definitely not struggling.

It’s profitable. No. It’s top tier. I would go top tier, and I would put c m o bit.

Ly there.

That’s great. But if I was to think of, a company that I wouldn’t work with, and I’m not going to share their name, but I’m going to put it in here under struggling.

And then I now know, by writing it under there, that that there is that brand of person, of business, that I might maybe they are right to work with. Sometimes it’s okay to work with struggling businesses.

Sometimes you’ll only wanna work with top tier businesses. What I want you to do is try to slot in the names that are in your head because, typically, we do have names in our heads of come of clients that we wanna work with or have worked with. Just kinda fill this table in so that you can start to get a sense of what might be right or wrong with the businesses you’ve been targeting or the businesses that you are currently working with. A lot of freelancers are working with struggling businesses that don’t even really register as a business, and that’s a choice you get to make. You can choose not to work with them. It’s as easy to target struggling businesses as it is to to target non struggling, profitable, and top tier businesses.

It all takes work. It’s all hard. You just have to choose one and then do the work. So, does that make sense? Do you know how to fill this table in, or is it confusing? Pretty good? K.

Joe, what is your biggest, like, profitable versus top tier Yeah.

If someone feels, I like, I think they’re profitable, but I for differentiating between those two, any tips?

Yeah. Absolutely. So profitable is, like, you have a good sense. This is all largely guess work. Right? Like, unless they’re a client you’ve actually worked with, in which case it’s really valuable to use those people too.

But top tier would be someone that’s like your dream client where they’re making tons of money. They throw it at freelancers and agencies.

They want the kind of work that you do. So they’re making a lot they’re a big brand, usually. They’re like a household name. If you worked with, ecommerce brands, it would be whatever that thing is.

You would know. Right? It might be like, J. Crew is profitable, but they’re not top tier.

They’re not leading the market. They’re not making money hand over fist. They’re not being talked about all the time, that sort of thing. Does that make I don’t know if J.

Crew even registers.

And then would you do just because I peeked at the other checklist about, like, the value when they’re bought into copy, would you factor that in here as well?

Or I would.

But if it gets in the way, don’t worry about it, but I would. Yeah.

Cool. Awesome.

Is everyone else making sense of the table okay?

Yeah?

Okay.

Now the objective keep working as I’m talking. It’s okay.

The objective here is to get to a place where by the end of you like, once you’ve completed this table and you can see certain brands on it, you can start to have a better sense for which brands, you do wanna work with and what what, like, level they’re at. Because although top tier might sound perfect, it doesn’t mean it is. You might be really good at working with struggling business and taking them from zero dollars to thirty thousand a month. That might be a good place to live because your skill set’s there.

It would just help you see that you shouldn’t bother with the top tier brands. You shouldn’t bother worrying about what they’re thinking or what they want. Yeah. So it’s not saying only work with top tier. Although, if you’re not sure who to work with, work with top tier over struggling. They can afford you better typically.

K.

Alright. Looks like heads are down.

Work is being done. Okay.

Alright.

Good. Alright.

Now if you can go back to the page before, before that big table, there is is anybody feeling like they already going into this know who their ICP absolutely is and you’re confident about it?

Could you complete the statement at the top of week one?

Type of company or industry in whatever part of the world with however number of employees generating how much money they do, who, and then what it is, that can help you better understand who they are and target them. Andrew, I know you’ve worked with SaaS companies a lot. Do you feel like you could fill this in?

Okay.

That might my taskbar is hiding my unmute button, so I had to guess of the keyboard shortcut. Yeah.

I mostly can fill this out. I’ve noticed that the biggest area where there’s a lot of, where there’s a wide range is in terms of revenue. So sometimes I’m working with companies that are, like, series b, not making a crazy amount of money yet. They’ve had money invested, but not necessarily making a ton of money. And then some of my clients are, you know, over a hundred million a year.

And the employee size is kind of like that too. Like, sometimes they’re on the smaller side, like, at, like, fifty employees and then sometimes go up to closer to, like, five hundred. So, yeah, noticing kind of a wide well, it feels a little bit wide there, but, that’s that’s who I’ve been working with.

Can you narrow it? Who are the best people among all of those? Who do you most like working with? Who like working with you?

Yeah.

I it’s tricky because where I get where I get torn the most is between I like the the bigger companies are more likely to have a lot of traffic, which makes that stuff you were talking about early because I’m all doing I’m mostly doing web stuff. So, the measurement is easier on that side. They have more people in place for that kind of thing. But I also kinda like when I’m working with a smaller company and it’s, like, just me and the CMO just get he deals with all the other stakeholders. It’s just us. Nice and easy.

So, yeah, it’s given me a little something to think about here.

You’re smiling about the second one. Working directly with the CMO, you seem to like.

Yeah. And it it also feels like it’s easier.

The money comes a little bit easier.

Yeah. Those bigger companies, their budget gets a little bit more fractured. And so they might have a big copy budget, but they also might have more copywriters. So, yeah, I do kinda like that series b, series c kinda area, a little bit. But, yeah, I have I have right now, I’m working on projects with both clients, and so I’m trying to decide which of the trade offs I’d rather have.

So, yeah, I don’t have a I don’t have an answer yet.

I I think probably the right answer is somewhere hundred million plus. They might be a little bit big and corporate and a lot of stakeholders and so on.

Okay. So if that feels big, what would stop you from focusing entirely on the smaller group, the series b that lets you work with the CMO directly?

What would it stop you?

I I think I’m realizing that that maybe I’m going I’m doing a little bit of taking what comes my way rather than being a little bit more proactive and intentional about it. So, yeah, if a company with, you know, that’s a hundred million a year comes by and they say, hey. We have these optimization projects we wanna work on. We wanna work on these pages. I get tempted, and I don’t say no to the money. Yeah.

That’s that’s common. Okay. Okay. Well, food for thought.

Yeah. A lot to chew on here. I thought I had it more dialed in than I did, so thank you.

Awesome. Thanks. Johnson.

Yes. So I’m moving I I feel like I’m gonna be moving more towards, well, tech company is, is kinda what I have in mind. And I mostly worked with, service based businesses.

Some SaaS, but, some physical as well. And, I don’t really know a shot about my, market. So I I can’t really fill in almost any, stress. Do you have any, thoughts?

Yeah. So that will be homework for you, and that’s gonna be true for a few people in the room. If you’re here and you don’t know who to target or you’re like, I think my target audience is maybe wrong, then that’s something for you to be thinking about over the course of the week and get to a place. And so for you, Johnson, because you’re in CSP, you can, of course, like, engage in Slack and start sharing that, and also in the intensive freelancing channel in there, as well.

But, yeah, that’s something to kind of knock around with the rest of us over in Coffee School Pro. Oh. Yeah. Yeah. Yeah. Cool.

Included in here on this page is a line about the total addressable market. That’s something else I want you to be thinking about for those who have a coach as well that you’re meeting with this week in particular.

Do chat through whether the total addressable market or the like, basically, the idea behind a total addressable market is, are there enough people here that can actually afford me?

That’s basically what it comes down to, and, that’s what I want you to work through as homework to go out and figure out how to determine a total addressable market.

There are tools.

We were going to include it directly in here, but decided not to, because we were going to include it directly in here, but decided not to because good homework is going and, like, learning this stuff and getting really kind of entrenched in the idea that you are a business. Businesses think about their target market, how much they can afford, and they adjust accordingly. And that’s why most businesses that start out with free trials end up going into enterprise, and they serve enterprise eventually going upmarket all the time, a lot of freelancers do the same thing. So can you shortcut it by going straight to the inevitable, which is either you build a big team that serves a lot of small businesses for smaller projects and things like that?

That doesn’t mean that they only choose small projects. Don’t get me wrong. Or do you say, like, well, the people who can really afford me are going to have teams of this size, etcetera, etcetera. So I want you to do that work this week.

Who are those people? Make sure you know who they are. So I think I will chat out one of the tools that actually uses industry data to tell you the actual size of your market that you’re talking about so you can really see if the addressable market is is worth your time, basically. It’s what it comes down to.

Okay?

Okay. So we have ten minutes left. I’m happy to go over, but I don’t expect you to. If you want to and you wanna ask questions, that’s cool. What you need to do by end of week is complete this worksheet. So I wanna move on because we’re just doing an overview to get you ready to go on this, and then you go do the work.

I want to move on. Of course, before I do, does anybody wanna share any insights that might have come out of this table when you were doing it? Any brands that or anything that you might have seen or thought through differently? Like, I should be working with this kind of brand or that kind of company.

That’s cool. If not, if you wanna share. I like the exercise. Alright.

Cool. Then let’s oh, yeah. Benjamin.

No. I was just I was just gonna say one realization, I think, when I was filling this out is, so I work with, like and you realize a lot of my clients are struggling or they’re getting not that they can’t afford it, but then I think they are also at the same time struggling.

Like, so when they do pay whatever the price, I feel like it, like, kinda hurts a little bit.

And I and I I tend to think of, like, the top tier clients that I either want or I’ve worked with.

I sometimes think they’re out of my wheelhouse. Like, they would they would just hire someone else or, like, they have an they have an in house copywriter or, like, they just like, there’s just no need for me. I tend to think that.

Yeah.

Okay. That’s, I think, what a lot of people think until you go and work in those organizations and go, woah.

Woah. They have so many needs.

What?

Yeah. And we can get into that over the next little while, but I would say throw out those assumptions. Anything that feels like it’s holding you back, back, now is the time to start challenging it. You’ve got eight weeks to really get in there and dig into your business, figure out a bunch of stuff while in the company of people who are figuring out a bunch of stuff and being supported by coach. So, I I know Andrew and Summer both, I think, for both when I said that we’re like, oh, yeah.

In in organizations, there is, yeah, there’s a lot.

It doesn’t work like we think it does. And that’s, I think, something for everybody to know because no business works as brilliantly as it sounds like it does.

So, yeah, we’ll get into it. I don’t want I’m like, oh, gossip session. But it’s not going to be that, but just know that there’s a lot a lot to say about the need for businesses to big businesses, businesses of all sizes to, hire smart people to come in and do good work and make them look good.

Cool. Summer says our own businesses are private examples of that too. Yeah. Every business is, just trying to keep it together.

Like, in someone who in a lot of ways, nailed it. And then in other ways, you’re like, just try and keep it together. And I think of people who come and reach out to us and just, like, when they share their stories, you just feel bad, and it’s hard to move things internal in small in large teams. It’s much easier in big teams.

But throw that idea out then. We’ll help you throw it out. Okay? Cool. Okay.

Andrew said, what do you mean by the offer? Is that about this, Andrew?

Is that about the worksheet?

No. Sorry. I was just saying, like, mark whole marketing teams where they don’t know what an offer is.

Oh, hey.

I mentioned that to Katie a couple weeks ago that, like, businesses so rarely know what an offer is, and you’re just like, what?

But Katie is lucky to work with people who do know what that means.

Naomi?

Oh, you’re still on mute.

No worries.

I was gonna say that, I thought that I really liked when when I was working in house, I loved working with campaign managers that really, really knew what they were talking about. Mhmm. But I actually now that I’m looking at this chart, I really like working with people that don’t know what they’re doing because it’s way easier for me to swoop in and look like the hero. So people who are not necessarily in charge of their campaigns, maybe they’re outsourcing their campaign management, or they switched from a different industry, or they are I mean, startups hire lots of people with no experience or no relevant experience.

So working with those people, if they’re somewhat flexible, can actually be a good experience.

Dig it. So does that mean you liked the struggling tier? Is that where they landed? Or it sounds like that.

You mean, like like, they maybe they run the company or they’re running running the marketing team, but they don’t necessarily know a whole lot about marketing itself because they’re involved in, like maybe they’re more involved in brand or they’re more involved in actually running the business or something to that effect.

Cool. A good insight then. That’s awesome.

Excellent. Okay. Cool. So, let’s wrap up here. And, again, I can stay on a little bit afterwards to take any more questions, especially if you’re like, thanks for the intro to today’s to this week’s work. Now I have more specific questions in here, which is totally cool.

We wanna work on getting to a place where you have a standardized offer with the retainer. So the objective here is you should be able to sell a project upfront that’s standardized, where it’s always the same, always doing customizable slightly, but largely always the same. Your target audience wants it. It’s it’s related to your specialization so that you can own it and be so good at it. But you need the standardized offer that you then can measure and optimize going forward.

So email is a very good fit for the this ads are a very good fit for this. Funnels are as well. Short funnels, I mean, not like this whole customer journey that’s too big to standardize.

But this is the objective, is to get to a place. And, again, over the next two weeks, we’re gonna be really digging into this, where you’ll identify what your standardized offer is.

The goal is to start charging ten thousand dollars a month for that standardized offer. If you were to do ten thousand a month for the standardized offer, if you know you’re already above that tier, if you’re like, I would not do anything for ten thousand, fine. Twenty, thirty, whatever your number is. It’s that number that goes in there. The objective is to sell two of those a month and then to turn at least one of those two people, two clients, into monthly recurring revenue by optimizing the work you just did for them.

That is how you can get to a very quick twenty five, thirty, thirty five, forty thousand dollars a month just by only doing the same work and then making it better. And as you do that, you get to see how to always make these things better because you’re serving similar audiences all the time, doing similar work all the time, and then just working on making it better and better. So the standardized offer is ten thousand dollars or whatever that number is for you. Whatever that number is for you, you divide in half for the retainer, which is an ongoing retainer that is based on taking the work that was implemented and optimizing it month after month, which in week three, we’re digging into this at spreadsheet level.

It’s gonna be really, really exciting, for anybody who likes a good spreadsheet. It’s gonna be very exciting, with lots of SOPs and lots of things to hand off to people to do it yourself and then to hand off people as you go. So, if if you do ten thousand dollars times two projects sold a month and you convert one of those into retainer every month at five thousand. You can just do the easy math in a spreadsheet and, see how that starts to add up into really, really nice money.

So it’s also very simple if you’re focused on just doing the one thing instead of doing everything or saying yes to whatever comes in, which is how freelancers burn out. Yes. I’m looking at you, Andrew, but I’m also looking at everybody, so don’t worry about it.

What I want you to do is to think about as you’re putting this together and just as a side note, we have a meeting on Friday this week. It’s Friday this week, because we started this week a little later too. We have a meeting on Friday to dig into the work that you’re doing on this sheet.

So what I want you to do is to start thinking through when it comes to my specialization and the audience that can afford me. What do I already do, or what do I think I could do consistently, that could become a standardized offer for me? So it should be a measurable thing, though, so that you can easily sell a retainer on top of it. This is tough for websites.

It is tough if a website is your focus, if if writing websites are your focus because of what we’ve talked about this whole time. What you can do instead is shorten it down to parts of websites. So I’ll work on pricing page plus people who sign up on the pricing page. So if the pricing page is there and then you get new trial users or new paid users in and there’s a flow that follows after that, those two parts together could be a good project to do, and that might be a twenty thousand dollar project because there’s a lot to it.

Technically, there’s a lot to it. You standardize it, so there’s not a lot to it. Right? But that’s what the client sees as, wow, a whole pricing page and the emails that follow it, and then you optimize those as part of your retainer, which is not about deliverables.

It’s not about how much time you spent. It is about how am I increasing conversions for my clients and then reporting those every month and keeping them going. This is how Boxcar got big fast. This is how agencies get big fast.

This is a model that few copywriters follow.

And most copywriters end up just, like, for a retainer, they’re like, here’s twenty hours this month for you to spend, which is a nightmare. You don’t wanna do that. So this will be the better way forward.

Give it some thought. Your standardized offer, what can you standardize that you already do and sell for ten thousand dollars?

Yes. Totally, Shane. And then can you turn that into something you optimize every month? So you will say on underneath this that this specialized offer the standardized offer, sorry, is directly aligned with your specialization.

It has to be because that’s how you can build your authority. And if you’re like, well, the one I have in mind isn’t, then you might wanna change your specialization to better match this new offer. It’s okay. Now is the time to do that.

Will your clients see value on delivery? Again, this is where email, SMS, ads, even just for you seasonal stuff.

That will go a long way too. Will they see the value of continued optimization? If they won’t, don’t do it. Find a way. Find a way to adjust, and you can bring your ideas to our next call. Find a way to adjust your standardized offers so that you can continually optimize it.

Can you standardize it to greater than sixty percent? That means if it’s like, well, no. I have to come up with something from scratch every single time. It’s not gonna be a good standardized offer, ever.

You will you will burn out fast. Can you complete the work in five to six business days? So if you were to block off a week of time to deliver this project for your client, not that you do it you know, they don’t get it on Friday. They get it three weeks later.

But could you do it in five days?

Six days is just, like, as a little, like, bonus for you, but try to do it in five days. And can somebody be trained to do that thing well? So if we think about a landing page, if you’re like, I’m gonna optimize lead gen pages. That’s my jam.

That’s all I’m gonna do. Yes. I can that. I could come up with seven different types of templates.

I can put a if then worksheet together to help myself and somebody I eventually train to figure out how to, like, choose the right lead gen template out of the gate and then what to do about optimizing it, that’s something I can standardize to at least sixty percent, probably eighty percent if we’re being honest.

So that’s something good if it’s, hey. I just want to write full websites for lawyers, then no.

Then you don’t wanna continue in the intensive because you won’t like your life, and I want you to like your life. That’s the objective. Okay? So, that is wrap up for today’s intro to the intensive as well as beginning on this worksheet, which we’ll talk more about in our next call. Know that this was intro loosely put like, loosely kind of tying things together.

Once we get into week two, three, and four, things are going to tighten up dramatically to the point where it’s like no fat left, no guesswork left. It’s all really going to be, like, less what do I think, what do I want, and more here’s what I’m going to do, here’s how I’m going to do it. Okay?

So enjoy your bit of freedom as we dig into the intensive because it’s about to get a little more fat free. Alright?

Good. Do you feel like you can go forward and finish filling this in? If not, stick around. If so, see you on Friday.

Anybody have questions?

Otherwise, you can go. Don’t worry. I won’t judge you for going.

People are still here.

Either you can’t find the leave button or you have questions, so feel free to ask them if you would like to or if you’re like, just show me more detail.

I guess, I was just trying to think of I was sure I would have question.

But this you know, an average person can be trained to do this work well with little oversight. Yeah. Having zero experience training people.

I have no, basis really, I think, to kind of make that estimate. And if Yeah. I don’t know. Can you, like, can I just kinda think, well, if I learn to do it, then someone else reasonably could also learn to do this thing?

Yeah. Because if you’re like, wow. This whole project is based on my exceptional talent.

That’s I mean hard to recruit for exceptionally talented copywriter or whatever. Right? Like, you that’s not a job posting.

Think about the work that you do, and you don’t have to figure this out in the next few minutes. Right? Like, you get all weak.

But think about that and, the work that you do.

How much of it could you hand off to your sister? I don’t know. Your family setup, Johnson.

To somebody you know well. How much could you hand off if you’re like, oof, it would take everybody a lifetime to learn how to do this? Then no bueno. Then you need to, like, think of a different.

What can you templatize? Can you put a template together for this? Can you put a checklist together for this? Is there a standard order of operations that you could reasonably figure out knowing that there’ll be some parts in there that are, like, at this point, check-in with Johnson to get feedback on how things are going.

Right? So that kinda covers those, like, blurry areas.

But what about the rest of it? Is there a checklist at minimum? If you can do a checklist, you can train somebody on it.

What are we thinking? Are you are we talking administrative tasks, or are we talking delivery? Because delivery seems like I mean, that’s training.

That’s just I mean, delivery.

Yeah. Your offer. Can you and there will be administrative. It’s like, can you get somebody to set up the coffee presentation?

Like, yes. You can. You don’t have to do that yourself. Right? That’s really easy. It’s like a four step SOB that you could fire off in a second.

So there’s that part, but then there’s the other stuff, like, when it comes time to look at the retainer in particular. So let’s say you always do the upfront project because you like to you’re you wanna be in control there. You’re not ready to hand that off. However, once you start selling retainers, once you start getting people in coming in again and again, they need their end of month presentation. So someone else should put together that end of month presentation, based on a template that we have for you and the quest the answers to questions that, again, will also largely have for you, but you have to be able to make sure that a person is trained on how to put those things altogether.

You might also, in the retainer, go, if my retainer is all about someone’s paying me to optimize their subject lines.

Okay?

Can you hand off subject line generation to somebody else? Sure you can. Can you hand off telling good from bad subject lines to someone else? Maybe not. Maybe that’s something that comes over time and you learn how to teach your team that, but that still has to be you.

Right? So, like, there’s the art, and then there’s the science y, math y part. If it’s science y, math y, you can usually teach someone else. If it’s art, it’s a little bit trickier. Doesn’t mean it’s not it’s impossible, but it’s just trickier.

Sure. No. That makes sense. But I guess so just to, like, feed that back to you, kind of think, granularity about the the the process and find the parts that are more science than parts, I guess.

And what was the first part? I somehow didn’t hear it.

Just to think about the the process of delivering more granularly granularly, in greater in finer detail, and and find the bits that, could be out because, yeah, I wasn’t I was kind of thinking in bigger blocks, but, yeah. Okay. Cool.

Yeah. And and, again, you don’t have to dig too deeply into this, and it’s fair if you’re like, well, I haven’t ever had anybody do work for me. I haven’t had to teach anybody or manage anybody before. That’s totally fair.

I’d say take your best shot at it and then bring your ideas to our next call so we can say like, oh, no. No. No. That’s too too big. You’re leaving too much room for error there versus not.

Yeah. Oh, okay. Great. Okay.

Cool. Thank you.

That I was gonna say that was also one of my questions. I think it was, maybe I’ll address this, like, when we meet again, but it’s, like, I was just wondering if, like, you can always get get deeper into the market. Like like, if I said, I’m gonna specialize or in the niche niche, like, health care or med tech, then you you like, the question would be, okay. You’re gonna do a b to b or you’re gonna do b to c.

And so I I’m just, like, wondering how deep I should go. Like, oh, okay. Can you do surgery? Are you gonna focus on, you know, eye care or whatever?

So I’m just wondering what’s a good level of depth.

I’d go way more narrow up front and then zoom out from there, not with brand level stuff. So don’t be the eyeglass copywriter or the optometrist’s copywriter, but but something I wouldn’t go too deep there, but I would go, like, narrow. And this is just generally, like, business advice. When you are going to market, narrower is scarier for you, but better overall, because you can target.

And there is one of you right now. Right? And there will likely be more added, but there’s one of you. You can then come up with social content that’s for that group and nobody else, and start to and then down the road, you can add in more groups.

But I would say narrow. Like, narrow, like, uncomfortably narrow. And then if you bring that to us on Friday and you’re like, and we’re like, oh, too narrow. You really went narrow on that.

Then we can always address then. But how else are you gonna build your thought leadership? Like, there’s so much you have to do as a one person shop.

So best to target the people who need what you want, and who are reasonably reachable and can afford you.

And that’s usually a much more narrow group than we think.

Yeah.

Naomi?

So I already I already have a pretty clear idea of what I would like to do, but I’m still running into the same problem, which is twofold.

Number one, that people are spending less on Google Ads and, social campaigns. And number two, the companies that have the money to spend on these kind of campaigns prefer to have somebody in house.

But I’m really good at it. I’ve done it a thousand times.

It’s highly, highly measurable, and it would be easy to make it a retainer because you need regular ads and, AB testing on landing pages.

And I can take it sort of from end to end.

Yeah.

But I I really struggle to get into this market, like Fiverr, for example. Fiverr is an Israeli company. I have a couple of friends there. I’ve been working for ages to try to get in there. Unfortunately, they’re not doing so well, but, they, like, don’t really wanna bring a freelancer in, and they I I’m assuming there are, like, a lot of stakeholders involved in workflows, and they’re worried that having an outside contractor would make it really hard to keep everyone aligned. That’s my guess.

But so I’m wondering if if this makes sense because it would be way easier to do, like, three landing pages and maybe a set of six ads for, like, first project, because you could do, like, the main keyword, the competitor, like, one competitor landing page, and, like, one alternative keyword as, like, three landing pages, and it wouldn’t be that much more work.

And then one or two sets of ads, And then, like, that seems like a lot, but I feel like for three landing pages, that’s it’s worth ten thousand dollars. But, again, I I’m I’m struggling to see how it would play out in reality.

Yeah. I’d start I think I’d start by just kind of challenging the assumption that quantity is important here, that you need three landing pages to make ten thousand dollars.

You don’t. You you don’t. You do if you’re working with a business that doesn’t have money, then you do.

But even then even then, it depends on, like, how you’re selling it, what the stakes are, what the gap and the gain, like, what’s going on there, when it comes to, like, what they want versus what’s going on for them.

So that is a lot of, like, nurturing and selling kind of stuff. Right?

For me, I would say, if it was just you and me one on one, I would ask you to zoom in a lot more on, like, where’s the value? Where do you add the most value there? Forget that some people say no to hiring for those ads. Forget all of the nos. Think about the yeses out there, the people who say yes to hiring you. What and where where where you add the most value there?

It’s the landing page. One hundred percent.

It’s the landing page. Cool. Now it depends on the brand. Right? And I know you wanna work with Israeli companies or companies that are based in Israel.

Totally great. That’s good. It is it’s narrow. So if Ben was still here, this would be a good thing for him to be, chatting about, or at least listening to.

So there are lots of companies in Israel. So many. Right? And if you can identify the landing pages that are of greatest value to them, then that can be a good thing to specialize around and and then ultimately standardize on. So if it’s that will take this is the thinking work, right, that you it’s also just, like, looking at it. Right? So who gets most excited when you hand in what kind of page?

That’s really, like, very, like, two blanks to fill in. Who are the people who get most excited with what kind of landing page? And if you can do that, then you can say, well, can they afford ten thousand dollars? What kind of landing page would they need to see to value it at ten thousand dollars to start and then five thousand dollars every month for me to keep optimizing it?

They probably have to be getting a pretty high return on investment, whether that is better quality leads for a large enterprise organization that’s looking to, like, sell into enterprises and every lead is worth, you know, potentially six thousand dollars to them or whatever those numbers are. But that’s part of the total addressable market as well. So that’s also part of your homework is to go out and, like, learn about this this market that you wanna serve that’s in Israel, and that is is and is. Right?

Like, it just keeps getting more and more narrow. That’s where you can adjust a bit. But I like that you focus on a landing page. Now it’s like find the one that your target audience in an addressable market will fall in love with and pay good money for.

You would do one landing page for ten thousand dollars?

Mhmm. Oh, yes.

Yeah.

I just can’t see anyone I know.

Like, I I can’t imagine myself spending that kind of money.

You don’t have you’re not that’s not your business.

Right? No.

Like, if I were having the skills to do it, so you can do it yourself.

You’re not feeling the pain of it, and you don’t have the like, I think of companies that come to us who have, there’s one in particular who has, like, half a million leads a month.

Half a million people want their service every month, and they’re, like, one of many businesses like that. And this is this is mindset. Right? Like, this is the scarcity mindset.

Do you believe that there’s money out there? Lit literally, and I don’t mean to overuse literally, but trillions of dollars change hands every day. Consultants don’t move for less than for even in the vicinity of ten thousand dollars. Like, that’s not even a thing.

You will see that, and then ten thousand will become your new low. It will happen. It just hasn’t happened yet, so it’s hard to imagine it.

Yeah. Landing pages for ten k all day. But but but it’s not like you can just walk out the door and say, I’m gonna do your landing page for ten thousand dollars. You have to have the qualities, all of the stuff around that says I am the person who you would be lucky to get me for ten thousand dollars to work on your landing page.

So you need to know what kind of landing page that business really needs done well. And if you know that, then you’re in there working on that exact landing page. Don’t build your authority on anything else. Own that landing page, and you will easily close ten thousand dollar projects for that.

Easily. But not if you’re doing everything for everyone and talking about everything. You know?

Because, I mean, I’ve done it, like, a hundred a hundred times over and over and over again.

Yeah.

So I am not worried about, like, building the authority.

Good. You’re just like raising the rates.

Yeah. Like, I I just I wow. I can’t imagine charging for just one landing page, and you wouldn’t even add ads to that at all. It would just be landing pages.

Yeah.

Yeah. If it’s a valuable page, if it’s not a if it’s just a piece of crap page, then why are you even working on it in the first place, like, just because they don’t have the time to? Uh-uh. So we’re not working with clients who could do it themselves.

You’re working with people who see growth, who see money when they look around, and they’re like, give me more of that. And those people are abundant, but they’re probably being targeted by people who are more aggressive than you are. So they’re already hiring other people who are charging more money, and their level set at ten thousand. You come in at five thousand. They’re like, how good could it be for that? So people are always raising the rates out there, people all around you, People all around me. Everybody.

Some of them aren’t worth it. Don’t get me wrong.

But if you know you have the authority, then you’re actually doing a disservice, which I’m sure you’ve heard before, not only to yourself for charging less than you should, but to clients for giving off signals that you’re not the expert that you are.

And you’ll get there. We’ll get there. You’re very new to CSP still, so we will get you there. And when you do see it, and I know it’s like crystal ball, but, like, been there, done that ages ago.

Wouldn’t think about doing anything for less than it’s gotta add up to a hundred thousand dollars in value for me or, like, what’s like, there’s other businesses out there. So just know that that is coming even though it might not feel real yet. Try tell try working through it. And Christy is a really good person to reach out to Naomi about, like, mindset, issues you may have around scarcity of funds available, to people, to copywriters, because it’s something I think that it is. It’s not just I will not be able to just say it and you believe it.

There’s gonna be a lot of of work to do. But it’ll start with you just, like, quoting ten thousand months and actually having people say yes. I was like, oh, all this time all this time, the money was there.

I feel like it would have to be, yeah, it would have to be a much different company.

A much more established company, more, like, series CD and not enterprise. I feel like enterprise actually would be worse because they are it’s much harder to measure because they take so long, and they require so many POCs and so much time to actually close the deal that getting that return on value or getting any kind of, metrics on them is just very critical.

Unless you can find your way into the departments that are more autonomous, which exist in large organizations. So there are you go to work at Spotify or with Spotify, and you will work in a small growth department that doesn’t ask everybody under the sun for their input. That’s just like, here’s the task we’re running. Let’s get it out the door.

Let’s measure it, and they’re empowered to do that. So I would say don’t give up on enterprises, but, like, yeah, it is up to you to think. I need to work with people who where there’s one person who signs off or two people who sign off on my work, And I only my point of contact is one of those people. And there are, like, internal, like, teams like like, centers of excellence in organizations, not just general marketing.

Doesn’t mean every organization has a center of excellence, but a lot of them do, and and they are the ones who will be raging hot leads when the time comes and they find you.

They’ve got money to spend. They wanna do it. It’s general marketers that are the hard ones to work with. But we can talk a lot more about that.

I would say work on your ICP though, Naomi. Like, to me, it sounds like you’re good on good ish, at least, on the standardized offer and where you can go with that. It’s measurable if it’s that landing page. Now you need to work on identifying the right audience that can afford you, that loves what you do, that is reachable.

And I don’t know what that I’m sure it’s possible while also focusing on brands that are in Israel.

I mean, I’m not I’m not necessarily stuck on companies in Israel. I just don’t wanna be working with a seven, eight hour, ten hour time difference. Okay.

Like, I I think it’s easier for me.

I’m glad I asked.

I it’s it’s easy for me to work with Israeli companies because all of my friends work in Israeli tech companies. So one text message gives me access to the entire marketing department, which makes networking just a breeze.

But, yeah, I’m not I’m not opposed to going elsewhere.

I just don’t wanna be out of it at ten, eleven PM at night, working Totally hear that.

Yes. Okay. Good. Well, I’m glad that there’s openness there. But that’s gonna be a big work for you, Naomi, this week. So if you can get that sorted out, and then we can talk about it more on Friday.

If you’re coming to the Friday call, I know it’s a late time for you. End of day Friday.

Yeah. Yeah. Yeah. Fridays are, not, not possible.

Then fire it into the the channel, the intensive freelancing channel and copy school pro.

Okay.

Awesome.

Good.

Cool. Anybody else? Anybody wanna share any money wins for Naomi so she knows that there’s a lot of projects out there?

Looks like there’s some in chat.

I had my mind blown in chat. So yeah.

Nice. Yeah. Go through the chat, Naomi.

Definitely very, very possible.

Okay. We’ve still got some people on, but it sounds like we’re wrapping up. So, take the homework, run with it, come back on Friday, and let’s talk in greater detail so that next week, we can get going on really streamlining that standardized offer and selling it for ten k at least. Okay. Thanks, everyone. Have a good one. Bye.